Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/user/1537/]]> to download full audiobooks of your choice for free. Are you looking for a treasure trove of knowledge with over 500,000+ audiobooks? We are proud to introduce diverse categories such as Business & Career Development, Communication Skills, and Health & Fitness. Especially, you will receive 3 free audiobooks to experience. You can listen to books anytime, anywhere on devices like iPhone, iPad, Android, and more. Don't miss the opportunity to enhance your knowledge and entertainment with us! Note: The authors receive royalties paid by the audiobook service provider for this free offer. If you do not want your audiobook to be in the podcast please send us an email to info@thebookvoice.com. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/user/1537/ en-US All rights reserved Sun, 05 Jan 2025 02:11:41 GMT Sun, 05 Jan 2025 02:11:41 GMT Notepad++ https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/user/1537/ https://thebookvoice.com/audiobook/itunes/1537/logo.jpg https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/user/1537/ thebookvoice.com no Gage Waters bdssaigon.net2@gmail.com Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/user/1537/]]> to download full audiobooks of your choice for free. Are you looking for a treasure trove of knowledge with over 500,000+ audiobooks? We are proud to introduce diverse categories such as Business & Career Development, Communication Skills, and Health & Fitness. Especially, you will receive 3 free audiobooks to experience. You can listen to books anytime, anywhere on devices like iPhone, iPad, Android, and more. Don't miss the opportunity to enhance your knowledge and entertainment with us! Note: The authors receive royalties paid by the audiobook service provider for this free offer. If you do not want your audiobook to be in the podcast please send us an email to info@thebookvoice.com. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/501585 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/501585]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Boom and Bust: A Global History of Financial Bubbles Author: John D. Turner, William Quinn Narrator: Roger Clark Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 39 minutes Release date: June 29, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Why do stock and housing markets sometimes experience amazing booms followed by massive busts and why is this happening more and more frequently? In order to answer these questions, William Quinn and John D. Turner take us on a riveting ride through the history of financial bubbles, visiting, among other places, Paris and London in 1720, Latin America in the 1820s, Melbourne in the 1880s, New York in the 1920s, Tokyo in the 1980s, Silicon Valley in the 1990s, and Shanghai in the 2000s. As they do so, they help us understand why bubbles happen, and why some have catastrophic economic, social, and political consequences while others have actually benefited society. They reveal that bubbles start when investors and speculators react to new technology or political initiatives, showing that our ability to predict future bubbles will ultimately come down to being able to predict these sparks. John D. Turner, William Quinn Tue, 29 Jun 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/501585 thebookvoice.com 9:39:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/501585]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Boom and Bust: A Global History of Financial Bubbles Author: John D. Turner, William Quinn Narrator: Roger Clark Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 39 minutes Release date: June 29, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Why do stock and housing markets sometimes experience amazing booms followed by massive busts and why is this happening more and more frequently? In order to answer these questions, William Quinn and John D. Turner take us on a riveting ride through the history of financial bubbles, visiting, among other places, Paris and London in 1720, Latin America in the 1820s, Melbourne in the 1880s, New York in the 1920s, Tokyo in the 1980s, Silicon Valley in the 1990s, and Shanghai in the 2000s. As they do so, they help us understand why bubbles happen, and why some have catastrophic economic, social, and political consequences while others have actually benefited society. They reveal that bubbles start when investors and speculators react to new technology or political initiatives, showing that our ability to predict future bubbles will ultimately come down to being able to predict these sparks. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/501585]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Boom and Bust: A Global History of Financial Bubbles Author: John D. Turner, William Quinn Narrator: Roger Clark Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 39 minutes Release date: June 29, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Why do stock and housing markets sometimes experience amazing booms followed by massive busts and why is this happening more and more frequently? In order to answer these questions, William Quinn and John D. Turner take us on a riveting ride through the history of financial bubbles, visiting, among other places, Paris and London in 1720, Latin America in the 1820s, Melbourne in the 1880s, New York in the 1920s, Tokyo in the 1980s, Silicon Valley in the 1990s, and Shanghai in the 2000s. As they do so, they help us understand why bubbles happen, and why some have catastrophic economic, social, and political consequences while others have actually benefited society. They reveal that bubbles start when investors and speculators react to new technology or political initiatives, showing that our ability to predict future bubbles will ultimately come down to being able to predict these sparks. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499702 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499702]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Premonition: A Pandemic Story Author: Michael Lewis Narrator: Adenrele Ojo Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 26 minutes Release date: May 4, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.78 of Total 9 Ratings of Narrator: 3.2 of Total 5 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. 'It's a foreboding,' she said. 'A knowing that something is looming around the corner. Like how when the seasons change you can smell fall in the air right before the leaves change and the wind turns cold.' In January 2020, as people started dying from a new virus in Wuhan, China, few really understood the magnitude of what was happening. Except, that is, a small group of scientific misfits who in their different ways had been obsessed all their lives with how viruses spread and replicated - and with why the governments and the institutions that were supposed to look after us, kept making the same mistakes time and again. This group saw what nobody else did. A pandemic was coming. We weren't prepared. The Premonition is the extraordinary story of a group who anticipated, traced and hunted the coronavirus; who understood the need to think differently, to learn from history, to question everything; and to do all of this fast, in order to act, to save lives, communities, society itself. It's a story about the workings of the human mind; about the failures and triumphs of human judgment and imagination. It's the story of how we got to now. © Michael Lewis 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Michael Lewis Tue, 04 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499702 thebookvoice.com 11:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499702]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Premonition: A Pandemic Story Author: Michael Lewis Narrator: Adenrele Ojo Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 26 minutes Release date: May 4, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.78 of Total 9 Ratings of Narrator: 3.2 of Total 5 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. 'It's a foreboding,' she said. 'A knowing that something is looming around the corner. Like how when the seasons change you can smell fall in the air right before the leaves change and the wind turns cold.' In January 2020, as people started dying from a new virus in Wuhan, China, few really understood the magnitude of what was happening. Except, that is, a small group of scientific misfits who in their different ways had been obsessed all their lives with how viruses spread and replicated - and with why the governments and the institutions that were supposed to look after us, kept making the same mistakes time and again. This group saw what nobody else did. A pandemic was coming. We weren't prepared. The Premonition is the extraordinary story of a group who anticipated, traced and hunted the coronavirus; who understood the need to think differently, to learn from history, to question everything; and to do all of this fast, in order to act, to save lives, communities, society itself. It's a story about the workings of the human mind; about the failures and triumphs of human judgment and imagination. It's the story of how we got to now. © Michael Lewis 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499702]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Premonition: A Pandemic Story Author: Michael Lewis Narrator: Adenrele Ojo Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 26 minutes Release date: May 4, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.78 of Total 9 Ratings of Narrator: 3.2 of Total 5 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. 'It's a foreboding,' she said. 'A knowing that something is looming around the corner. Like how when the seasons change you can smell fall in the air right before the leaves change and the wind turns cold.' In January 2020, as people started dying from a new virus in Wuhan, China, few really understood the magnitude of what was happening. Except, that is, a small group of scientific misfits who in their different ways had been obsessed all their lives with how viruses spread and replicated - and with why the governments and the institutions that were supposed to look after us, kept making the same mistakes time and again. This group saw what nobody else did. A pandemic was coming. We weren't prepared. The Premonition is the extraordinary story of a group who anticipated, traced and hunted the coronavirus; who understood the need to think differently, to learn from history, to question everything; and to do all of this fast, in order to act, to save lives, communities, society itself. It's a story about the workings of the human mind; about the failures and triumphs of human judgment and imagination. It's the story of how we got to now. © Michael Lewis 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499383 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499383]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Social Licence for Financial Markets: Reaching for the End and Why It Counts Author: David Rouch Narrator: Bruce Mann Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 10 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book is about what Mark Carney has called 'the social licence for financial markets' and how it can point us towards a more sustainable future. Author David Rouch argues that what it reveals contrasts sharply with the usual portrayals of markets as places of unrestrained financial self-interest. Drawing attention to a more complex reality and the presence of justice-focused aspirations in finance can positively impact individual, institutional, and systemic behaviour: change, not imposed by regulators, but emerging from the very substance of market relationships. The finance sector should have a key role in addressing humanity's increasingly pressing sustainability challenges. Yet the relationship between finance and society has not recovered from the 2008 crisis and the scandals and austerity that followed. The Covid-19 pandemic and its economic fallout is sharpening some of the issues and creating new ones. Recognising that financial markets operate subject to a social licence has the potential to galvanise market participants in tackling these challenges, strengthening social solidarity on which markets also depend, and to provide coordinates for navigating a way through the post-pandemic social, political, and economic landscape. David Rouch Tue, 20 Apr 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499383 thebookvoice.com 14:10:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499383]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Social Licence for Financial Markets: Reaching for the End and Why It Counts Author: David Rouch Narrator: Bruce Mann Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 10 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book is about what Mark Carney has called 'the social licence for financial markets' and how it can point us towards a more sustainable future. Author David Rouch argues that what it reveals contrasts sharply with the usual portrayals of markets as places of unrestrained financial self-interest. Drawing attention to a more complex reality and the presence of justice-focused aspirations in finance can positively impact individual, institutional, and systemic behaviour: change, not imposed by regulators, but emerging from the very substance of market relationships. The finance sector should have a key role in addressing humanity's increasingly pressing sustainability challenges. Yet the relationship between finance and society has not recovered from the 2008 crisis and the scandals and austerity that followed. The Covid-19 pandemic and its economic fallout is sharpening some of the issues and creating new ones. Recognising that financial markets operate subject to a social licence has the potential to galvanise market participants in tackling these challenges, strengthening social solidarity on which markets also depend, and to provide coordinates for navigating a way through the post-pandemic social, political, and economic landscape. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/499383]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Social Licence for Financial Markets: Reaching for the End and Why It Counts Author: David Rouch Narrator: Bruce Mann Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 10 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book is about what Mark Carney has called 'the social licence for financial markets' and how it can point us towards a more sustainable future. Author David Rouch argues that what it reveals contrasts sharply with the usual portrayals of markets as places of unrestrained financial self-interest. Drawing attention to a more complex reality and the presence of justice-focused aspirations in finance can positively impact individual, institutional, and systemic behaviour: change, not imposed by regulators, but emerging from the very substance of market relationships. The finance sector should have a key role in addressing humanity's increasingly pressing sustainability challenges. Yet the relationship between finance and society has not recovered from the 2008 crisis and the scandals and austerity that followed. The Covid-19 pandemic and its economic fallout is sharpening some of the issues and creating new ones. Recognising that financial markets operate subject to a social licence has the potential to galvanise market participants in tackling these challenges, strengthening social solidarity on which markets also depend, and to provide coordinates for navigating a way through the post-pandemic social, political, and economic landscape. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498931 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498931]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How will capitalism end?: Essays on a Failing System Author: Wolfgang Streeck Narrator: David Skulski Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 37 minutes Release date: January 1, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: AftAfter years of ill health, capitalism is now in a critical condition. Growth has given way to stagnation; inequality is leading to instability; and confidence in the money economy has all but evaporated. In How Will Capitalism End?, the acclaimed analyst of contemporary politics and economics Wolfgang Streeck argues that the world is about to change. The marriage between democracy and capitalism, ill-suited partners brought together in the shadow of World War Two, is coming to an end. The regulatory institutions that once restrained the financial sector's excesses have collapsed and, after the final victory of capitalism at the end of the Cold War, there is no political agency capable of rolling back the liberalization of the markets. Ours has become a world defined by declining growth, oligarchic rule, a shrinking public sphere, institutional corruption and international anarchy, and no cure to these ills is at hand. er years of ill health, capitalism is now in a critical condition. Growth has given way to stagnation; inequality is leading to instability; and confidence in the money economy has all but evaporated. In How Will Capitalism End?, the acclaimed analyst of contemporary politics and economics Wolfgang Streeck argues that the world is about to change. The marriage between democracy and capitalism, ill-suited partners brought together in the shadow of World War Two, is coming to an end. The regulatory institutions that once restrained the financial sector's excesses have collapsed and, after the final victory of capitalism at the end of the Cold War, there is no political agency capable of rolling back the liberalization of the markets. Ours has become a world defined by declining growth, oligarchic rule, a shrinking public sphere, institutional corruption and international anarchy, and no cure to these ills is at hand. Wolfgang Streeck Fri, 01 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498931 thebookvoice.com 11:37:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498931]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How will capitalism end?: Essays on a Failing System Author: Wolfgang Streeck Narrator: David Skulski Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 37 minutes Release date: January 1, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: AftAfter years of ill health, capitalism is now in a critical condition. Growth has given way to stagnation; inequality is leading to instability; and confidence in the money economy has all but evaporated. In How Will Capitalism End?, the acclaimed analyst of contemporary politics and economics Wolfgang Streeck argues that the world is about to change. The marriage between democracy and capitalism, ill-suited partners brought together in the shadow of World War Two, is coming to an end. The regulatory institutions that once restrained the financial sector's excesses have collapsed and, after the final victory of capitalism at the end of the Cold War, there is no political agency capable of rolling back the liberalization of the markets. Ours has become a world defined by declining growth, oligarchic rule, a shrinking public sphere, institutional corruption and international anarchy, and no cure to these ills is at hand. er years of ill health, capitalism is now in a critical condition. Growth has given way to stagnation; inequality is leading to instability; and confidence in the money economy has all but evaporated. In How Will Capitalism End?, the acclaimed analyst of contemporary politics and economics Wolfgang Streeck argues that the world is about to change. The marriage between democracy and capitalism, ill-suited partners brought together in the shadow of World War Two, is coming to an end. The regulatory institutions that once restrained the financial sector's excesses have collapsed and, after the final victory of capitalism at the end of the Cold War, there is no political agency capable of rolling back the liberalization of the markets. Ours has become a world defined by declining growth, oligarchic rule, a shrinking public sphere, institutional corruption and international anarchy, and no cure to these ills is at hand. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498931]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How will capitalism end?: Essays on a Failing System Author: Wolfgang Streeck Narrator: David Skulski Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 37 minutes Release date: January 1, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: AftAfter years of ill health, capitalism is now in a critical condition. Growth has given way to stagnation; inequality is leading to instability; and confidence in the money economy has all but evaporated. In How Will Capitalism End?, the acclaimed analyst of contemporary politics and economics Wolfgang Streeck argues that the world is about to change. The marriage between democracy and capitalism, ill-suited partners brought together in the shadow of World War Two, is coming to an end. The regulatory institutions that once restrained the financial sector's excesses have collapsed and, after the final victory of capitalism at the end of the Cold War, there is no political agency capable of rolling back the liberalization of the markets. Ours has become a world defined by declining growth, oligarchic rule, a shrinking public sphere, institutional corruption and international anarchy, and no cure to these ills is at hand. er years of ill health, capitalism is now in a critical condition. Growth has given way to stagnation; inequality is leading to instability; and confidence in the money economy has all but evaporated. In How Will Capitalism End?, the acclaimed analyst of contemporary politics and economics Wolfgang Streeck argues that the world is about to change. The marriage between democracy and capitalism, ill-suited partners brought together in the shadow of World War Two, is coming to an end. The regulatory institutions that once restrained the financial sector's excesses have collapsed and, after the final victory of capitalism at the end of the Cold War, there is no political agency capable of rolling back the liberalization of the markets. Ours has become a world defined by declining growth, oligarchic rule, a shrinking public sphere, institutional corruption and international anarchy, and no cure to these ills is at hand. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498928 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498928]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Giants: The Global Power Elite Author: Peter Phillips Narrator: Kristoffer Tabori Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 7 minutes Release date: January 1, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A look at the top 300 most powerful players in world capitalism, who are at the controls of our economic future. Who holds the purse strings to the majority of the world's wealth? There is a new global elite at the controls of our economic future, and here former Project Censored director and media monitoring sociologist Peter Phillips unveils for the general reader just who these players are. The book includes such power players as Mark Zuckerberg, Bill Gates, Jeff Bezos, Jamie Dimon, and Warren Buffett. As the number of men with as much wealth as half the world fell from sixty-two to just eight between January 2016 and January 2017, according to Oxfam International, fewer than 200 super-connected asset managers at only 17 asset management firms-each with well over a trillion dollars in assets under management-now represent the financial core of the world's transnational capitalist class. Members of the global power elite are the management-the facilitators-of world capitalism, the firewall protecting the capital investment, growth, and debt collection that keeps the status quo from changing. Each chapter in Giants identifies by name the members of this international club of multi-millionaires, their 17 global financial companies-and including NGOs such as the Group of Thirty and the Trilateral Commission-and their transnational military protectors, so the reader, for the first time anywhere, can identify who constitutes this network of influence, where the wealth is concentrated, how it suppresses social movements, and how it can be redistributed for maximum systemic change. Peter Phillips Fri, 01 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498928 thebookvoice.com 6:7:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498928]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Giants: The Global Power Elite Author: Peter Phillips Narrator: Kristoffer Tabori Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 7 minutes Release date: January 1, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A look at the top 300 most powerful players in world capitalism, who are at the controls of our economic future. Who holds the purse strings to the majority of the world's wealth? There is a new global elite at the controls of our economic future, and here former Project Censored director and media monitoring sociologist Peter Phillips unveils for the general reader just who these players are. The book includes such power players as Mark Zuckerberg, Bill Gates, Jeff Bezos, Jamie Dimon, and Warren Buffett. As the number of men with as much wealth as half the world fell from sixty-two to just eight between January 2016 and January 2017, according to Oxfam International, fewer than 200 super-connected asset managers at only 17 asset management firms-each with well over a trillion dollars in assets under management-now represent the financial core of the world's transnational capitalist class. Members of the global power elite are the management-the facilitators-of world capitalism, the firewall protecting the capital investment, growth, and debt collection that keeps the status quo from changing. Each chapter in Giants identifies by name the members of this international club of multi-millionaires, their 17 global financial companies-and including NGOs such as the Group of Thirty and the Trilateral Commission-and their transnational military protectors, so the reader, for the first time anywhere, can identify who constitutes this network of influence, where the wealth is concentrated, how it suppresses social movements, and how it can be redistributed for maximum systemic change. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498928]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Giants: The Global Power Elite Author: Peter Phillips Narrator: Kristoffer Tabori Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 7 minutes Release date: January 1, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A look at the top 300 most powerful players in world capitalism, who are at the controls of our economic future. Who holds the purse strings to the majority of the world's wealth? There is a new global elite at the controls of our economic future, and here former Project Censored director and media monitoring sociologist Peter Phillips unveils for the general reader just who these players are. The book includes such power players as Mark Zuckerberg, Bill Gates, Jeff Bezos, Jamie Dimon, and Warren Buffett. As the number of men with as much wealth as half the world fell from sixty-two to just eight between January 2016 and January 2017, according to Oxfam International, fewer than 200 super-connected asset managers at only 17 asset management firms-each with well over a trillion dollars in assets under management-now represent the financial core of the world's transnational capitalist class. Members of the global power elite are the management-the facilitators-of world capitalism, the firewall protecting the capital investment, growth, and debt collection that keeps the status quo from changing. Each chapter in Giants identifies by name the members of this international club of multi-millionaires, their 17 global financial companies-and including NGOs such as the Group of Thirty and the Trilateral Commission-and their transnational military protectors, so the reader, for the first time anywhere, can identify who constitutes this network of influence, where the wealth is concentrated, how it suppresses social movements, and how it can be redistributed for maximum systemic change. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498009 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498009]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Corporatizing American Health Care: How We Lost Our Health Care System Author: Robert W. Derlet Narrator: Mike Lenz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 38 minutes Release date: March 23, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Over the past three decades, the once-efficient American health care system has evolved into a complex maze of monopolies and a racket of bureaucratic checks, approvals, denials, roadblocks, and detours. This shift has created a massive and at times redundant workforce that frustrates patients, as well as physicians, nurses, and administrative staff. Health care costs the United States over $3 trillion each year and consumes over 18% of the country's gross domestic product. That's more than $11,000 for each person in the country each year—more than double what it costs in most Western European countries to deliver equal or even better care. In Corporatizing American Health Care, Robert W. Derlet, MD, traces the progression of health care policy in the United States. How, he asks, has US health care transformed from bedside medicine—a model of small practices and patient-focused care—into corporate medicine, which prioritizes profit and deals with both patient care and outcomes as billing codes? Arguing that the US Congress is the root of the problem, he describes how Congress has failed to enact legislation to prevent corporate monopolies in the health care industry. Instead, corrupted by large campaign donations and corporate lobbyists, Congress has crafted loopholes benefiting corporations and harming people. Robert W. Derlet Tue, 23 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498009 thebookvoice.com 6:38:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498009]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Corporatizing American Health Care: How We Lost Our Health Care System Author: Robert W. Derlet Narrator: Mike Lenz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 38 minutes Release date: March 23, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Over the past three decades, the once-efficient American health care system has evolved into a complex maze of monopolies and a racket of bureaucratic checks, approvals, denials, roadblocks, and detours. This shift has created a massive and at times redundant workforce that frustrates patients, as well as physicians, nurses, and administrative staff. Health care costs the United States over $3 trillion each year and consumes over 18% of the country's gross domestic product. That's more than $11,000 for each person in the country each year—more than double what it costs in most Western European countries to deliver equal or even better care. In Corporatizing American Health Care, Robert W. Derlet, MD, traces the progression of health care policy in the United States. How, he asks, has US health care transformed from bedside medicine—a model of small practices and patient-focused care—into corporate medicine, which prioritizes profit and deals with both patient care and outcomes as billing codes? Arguing that the US Congress is the root of the problem, he describes how Congress has failed to enact legislation to prevent corporate monopolies in the health care industry. Instead, corrupted by large campaign donations and corporate lobbyists, Congress has crafted loopholes benefiting corporations and harming people. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/498009]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Corporatizing American Health Care: How We Lost Our Health Care System Author: Robert W. Derlet Narrator: Mike Lenz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 38 minutes Release date: March 23, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Over the past three decades, the once-efficient American health care system has evolved into a complex maze of monopolies and a racket of bureaucratic checks, approvals, denials, roadblocks, and detours. This shift has created a massive and at times redundant workforce that frustrates patients, as well as physicians, nurses, and administrative staff. Health care costs the United States over $3 trillion each year and consumes over 18% of the country's gross domestic product. That's more than $11,000 for each person in the country each year—more than double what it costs in most Western European countries to deliver equal or even better care. In Corporatizing American Health Care, Robert W. Derlet, MD, traces the progression of health care policy in the United States. How, he asks, has US health care transformed from bedside medicine—a model of small practices and patient-focused care—into corporate medicine, which prioritizes profit and deals with both patient care and outcomes as billing codes? Arguing that the US Congress is the root of the problem, he describes how Congress has failed to enact legislation to prevent corporate monopolies in the health care industry. Instead, corrupted by large campaign donations and corporate lobbyists, Congress has crafted loopholes benefiting corporations and harming people. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497925 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497925]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Global Recession: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Jonathan Yen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 0 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The second global downturn in a dozen years is upon us—but do lessons learned during the Great Recession still apply? What must you and your business do, now, to ensure you come out the other side intact? Global Recession: Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review will help you understand the smartest ways to cut costs intelligently, find opportunities amid upheaval, and reshape your business to seize advantage in the upswing. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues—blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more—each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. You can't afford to ignore how these issues will transform the landscape of business and society. The Insights You Need series will help you grasp these critical ideas—and prepare you and your company for the future. Harvard Business Review Tue, 30 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497925 thebookvoice.com 3:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497925]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Global Recession: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Jonathan Yen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 0 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The second global downturn in a dozen years is upon us—but do lessons learned during the Great Recession still apply? What must you and your business do, now, to ensure you come out the other side intact? Global Recession: Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review will help you understand the smartest ways to cut costs intelligently, find opportunities amid upheaval, and reshape your business to seize advantage in the upswing. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues—blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more—each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. You can't afford to ignore how these issues will transform the landscape of business and society. The Insights You Need series will help you grasp these critical ideas—and prepare you and your company for the future. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497925]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Global Recession: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Jonathan Yen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 0 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The second global downturn in a dozen years is upon us—but do lessons learned during the Great Recession still apply? What must you and your business do, now, to ensure you come out the other side intact? Global Recession: Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review will help you understand the smartest ways to cut costs intelligently, find opportunities amid upheaval, and reshape your business to seize advantage in the upswing. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues—blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more—each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. You can't afford to ignore how these issues will transform the landscape of business and society. The Insights You Need series will help you grasp these critical ideas—and prepare you and your company for the future. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497920 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497920]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Stakeholder Capitalism: A Global Economy that Works for Progress, People and Planet Author: Klaus Schwab Narrator: Stephen R. Thorne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 54 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 1 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Our global economic system is broken. But we can replace the current picture of global upheaval, unsustainability, and uncertainty with one of an economy that works for all people, and the planet. First, we must eliminate rising income inequality within societies where productivity and wage growth has slowed. Second, we must reduce the dampening effect of monopoly market power wielded by large corporations on innovation and productivity gains. And finally, the short-sighted exploitation of natural resources that is corroding the environment and affecting the lives of many for the worse must end. The debate over the causes of the broken economy—laissez-faire government, poorly managed globalization, the rise of technology in favor of the few, or yet another reason—is wide open. Stakeholder Capitalism argues convincingly that if we don't start with recognizing the true shape of our problems, our current system will continue to fail us. To help us see our challenges more clearly, Klaus Schwab looks for the real causes of our system's shortcomings, and for solutions in best practices from around the world in places as diverse as China, Denmark, Ethiopia, Germany, Indonesia, New Zealand, and Singapore. And in doing so, Schwab finds emerging examples of new ways of doing things that provide grounds for hope. Klaus Schwab Tue, 30 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497920 thebookvoice.com 10:54:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497920]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Stakeholder Capitalism: A Global Economy that Works for Progress, People and Planet Author: Klaus Schwab Narrator: Stephen R. Thorne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 54 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 1 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Our global economic system is broken. But we can replace the current picture of global upheaval, unsustainability, and uncertainty with one of an economy that works for all people, and the planet. First, we must eliminate rising income inequality within societies where productivity and wage growth has slowed. Second, we must reduce the dampening effect of monopoly market power wielded by large corporations on innovation and productivity gains. And finally, the short-sighted exploitation of natural resources that is corroding the environment and affecting the lives of many for the worse must end. The debate over the causes of the broken economy—laissez-faire government, poorly managed globalization, the rise of technology in favor of the few, or yet another reason—is wide open. Stakeholder Capitalism argues convincingly that if we don't start with recognizing the true shape of our problems, our current system will continue to fail us. To help us see our challenges more clearly, Klaus Schwab looks for the real causes of our system's shortcomings, and for solutions in best practices from around the world in places as diverse as China, Denmark, Ethiopia, Germany, Indonesia, New Zealand, and Singapore. And in doing so, Schwab finds emerging examples of new ways of doing things that provide grounds for hope. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497920]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Stakeholder Capitalism: A Global Economy that Works for Progress, People and Planet Author: Klaus Schwab Narrator: Stephen R. Thorne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 54 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 1 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Our global economic system is broken. But we can replace the current picture of global upheaval, unsustainability, and uncertainty with one of an economy that works for all people, and the planet. First, we must eliminate rising income inequality within societies where productivity and wage growth has slowed. Second, we must reduce the dampening effect of monopoly market power wielded by large corporations on innovation and productivity gains. And finally, the short-sighted exploitation of natural resources that is corroding the environment and affecting the lives of many for the worse must end. The debate over the causes of the broken economy—laissez-faire government, poorly managed globalization, the rise of technology in favor of the few, or yet another reason—is wide open. Stakeholder Capitalism argues convincingly that if we don't start with recognizing the true shape of our problems, our current system will continue to fail us. To help us see our challenges more clearly, Klaus Schwab looks for the real causes of our system's shortcomings, and for solutions in best practices from around the world in places as diverse as China, Denmark, Ethiopia, Germany, Indonesia, New Zealand, and Singapore. And in doing so, Schwab finds emerging examples of new ways of doing things that provide grounds for hope. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497919 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497919]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Nothing is Too Big to Fail: How the Last Financial Crisis Informs Today Author: Kerry Killinger, Linda Killinger Narrator: Gary Bennett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 17 hours 50 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2008, the American economy collapsed, taking with it millions of Americans' jobs, homes, and life savings. The impending financial crisis was devastating, and many are still feeling its effects today. Though the crisis was debilitating, the US government has yet to implement policies that would prevent a repeat of the Great Recession. The middle class continues to shrink, escalations in racial injustices prevail, and distrust of the government grows by the day. And with the country's current fiscal policies, our economy is in a fragile place, barely strong enough to survive a shock caused by an international conflict, a cyberattack, or a global pandemic, like COVID-19. Nothing Is Too Big to Fail holds a microscope to the very policies and corruption that led to this major economic recession. Authors Kerry and Linda Killinger warn that, without significant institutional change, the country has created asset and debt bubbles that could burst at any time. No institution, government, or country is 'too big to fail.' But by learning from our past mistakes and taking action, we can return our country's economic system—and in turn, our democracy—to one that is secure. Kerry Killinger, Linda Killinger Tue, 30 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497919 thebookvoice.com 17:50:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497919]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Nothing is Too Big to Fail: How the Last Financial Crisis Informs Today Author: Kerry Killinger, Linda Killinger Narrator: Gary Bennett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 17 hours 50 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2008, the American economy collapsed, taking with it millions of Americans' jobs, homes, and life savings. The impending financial crisis was devastating, and many are still feeling its effects today. Though the crisis was debilitating, the US government has yet to implement policies that would prevent a repeat of the Great Recession. The middle class continues to shrink, escalations in racial injustices prevail, and distrust of the government grows by the day. And with the country's current fiscal policies, our economy is in a fragile place, barely strong enough to survive a shock caused by an international conflict, a cyberattack, or a global pandemic, like COVID-19. Nothing Is Too Big to Fail holds a microscope to the very policies and corruption that led to this major economic recession. Authors Kerry and Linda Killinger warn that, without significant institutional change, the country has created asset and debt bubbles that could burst at any time. No institution, government, or country is 'too big to fail.' But by learning from our past mistakes and taking action, we can return our country's economic system—and in turn, our democracy—to one that is secure. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497919]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Nothing is Too Big to Fail: How the Last Financial Crisis Informs Today Author: Kerry Killinger, Linda Killinger Narrator: Gary Bennett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 17 hours 50 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2008, the American economy collapsed, taking with it millions of Americans' jobs, homes, and life savings. The impending financial crisis was devastating, and many are still feeling its effects today. Though the crisis was debilitating, the US government has yet to implement policies that would prevent a repeat of the Great Recession. The middle class continues to shrink, escalations in racial injustices prevail, and distrust of the government grows by the day. And with the country's current fiscal policies, our economy is in a fragile place, barely strong enough to survive a shock caused by an international conflict, a cyberattack, or a global pandemic, like COVID-19. Nothing Is Too Big to Fail holds a microscope to the very policies and corruption that led to this major economic recession. Authors Kerry and Linda Killinger warn that, without significant institutional change, the country has created asset and debt bubbles that could burst at any time. No institution, government, or country is 'too big to fail.' But by learning from our past mistakes and taking action, we can return our country's economic system—and in turn, our democracy—to one that is secure. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497917 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497917]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: From Main Street to Wall Street: How the Economy Influences Stock Markets and What Investors Should Know Author: Jesper Rangvid Narrator: Christopher Grove Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 30 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In the long run, economies grow. Over the shorter-term business cycle, economic activity contracts and expands. From Main Street to Wall Street examines both the long-run relation between economic growth and stock returns and the shorter-term business-cycle relation. It examines the complex relationship between the economy and the stock market, and guides listeners through the fascinating interaction between economic activity and financial markets. From Main Street to Wall Street draws heavily on data, supporting academic theories with empirical facts, and backing up arguments in intuitive ways. It discusses how investors can use knowledge of economic activity and financial markets to formulate expectations to future stock returns, and helps scholars and practitioners navigate financial markets by understanding the economy. Jesper Rangvid Tue, 30 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497917 thebookvoice.com 12:30:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497917]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: From Main Street to Wall Street: How the Economy Influences Stock Markets and What Investors Should Know Author: Jesper Rangvid Narrator: Christopher Grove Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 30 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In the long run, economies grow. Over the shorter-term business cycle, economic activity contracts and expands. From Main Street to Wall Street examines both the long-run relation between economic growth and stock returns and the shorter-term business-cycle relation. It examines the complex relationship between the economy and the stock market, and guides listeners through the fascinating interaction between economic activity and financial markets. From Main Street to Wall Street draws heavily on data, supporting academic theories with empirical facts, and backing up arguments in intuitive ways. It discusses how investors can use knowledge of economic activity and financial markets to formulate expectations to future stock returns, and helps scholars and practitioners navigate financial markets by understanding the economy. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/497917]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: From Main Street to Wall Street: How the Economy Influences Stock Markets and What Investors Should Know Author: Jesper Rangvid Narrator: Christopher Grove Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 30 minutes Release date: March 30, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In the long run, economies grow. Over the shorter-term business cycle, economic activity contracts and expands. From Main Street to Wall Street examines both the long-run relation between economic growth and stock returns and the shorter-term business-cycle relation. It examines the complex relationship between the economy and the stock market, and guides listeners through the fascinating interaction between economic activity and financial markets. From Main Street to Wall Street draws heavily on data, supporting academic theories with empirical facts, and backing up arguments in intuitive ways. It discusses how investors can use knowledge of economic activity and financial markets to formulate expectations to future stock returns, and helps scholars and practitioners navigate financial markets by understanding the economy. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494744 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494744]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El Minotauro global. EE.UU, Europa y el futuro de la economía mundial Author: Janis Varoufiakis Narrator: Juanjo Moreno Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 57 minutes Release date: February 21, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: En este extraordinario y provocador libro, Varoufakis destruye el mito de que la financiarización, la regulación ineficaz de los bancos y la globalización fueron las causas de la crisis económica global. Más bien, son síntomas de un malestar que puede rastrearse hasta los años setenta; la época en que nació el 'Minotauro global'. Igual que los atenienses mantenían un flujo constante de tributos a la bestia, así el 'resto del mundo' envía sumas increíbles de capital a EE.UU. y a Wall Street. De este modo, el Minotauro global se convirtió en el motor que impulsó la economía mundial desde principios de los años ochenta hasta 2008. Grabado en español ibérico (España). Janis Varoufiakis Thu, 21 Feb 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494744 thebookvoice.com 11:57:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494744]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El Minotauro global. EE.UU, Europa y el futuro de la economía mundial Author: Janis Varoufiakis Narrator: Juanjo Moreno Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 57 minutes Release date: February 21, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: En este extraordinario y provocador libro, Varoufakis destruye el mito de que la financiarización, la regulación ineficaz de los bancos y la globalización fueron las causas de la crisis económica global. Más bien, son síntomas de un malestar que puede rastrearse hasta los años setenta; la época en que nació el 'Minotauro global'. Igual que los atenienses mantenían un flujo constante de tributos a la bestia, así el 'resto del mundo' envía sumas increíbles de capital a EE.UU. y a Wall Street. De este modo, el Minotauro global se convirtió en el motor que impulsó la economía mundial desde principios de los años ochenta hasta 2008. Grabado en español ibérico (España). Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494744]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El Minotauro global. EE.UU, Europa y el futuro de la economía mundial Author: Janis Varoufiakis Narrator: Juanjo Moreno Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 57 minutes Release date: February 21, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: En este extraordinario y provocador libro, Varoufakis destruye el mito de que la financiarización, la regulación ineficaz de los bancos y la globalización fueron las causas de la crisis económica global. Más bien, son síntomas de un malestar que puede rastrearse hasta los años setenta; la época en que nació el 'Minotauro global'. Igual que los atenienses mantenían un flujo constante de tributos a la bestia, así el 'resto del mundo' envía sumas increíbles de capital a EE.UU. y a Wall Street. De este modo, el Minotauro global se convirtió en el motor que impulsó la economía mundial desde principios de los años ochenta hasta 2008. Grabado en español ibérico (España). https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494653 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494653]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - 50 líderes que hicieron historia Author: Luís Huete, Javier García Arevalillo Narrator: Vicente Quintana Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 9 minutes Release date: September 1, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 50 líderes que hicieron historia describe de forma magistral cómo ciertos acontecimientos y pasajes de la vida de estos referentes, hombres y mujeres de diversas épocas, circunstancias e intereses, como Sócrates, Napoleón, Lincoln, Marie Curie, Gandhi, Einstein, Hitler, Steve Jobs o Amancio Ortega, entre otros, han moldeado su personalidad y han condicionado su forma de influir positiva o negativamente en el devenir de la sociedad. Los autores también destacan el papel de la conciencia o ausencia de ella en su toma de decisiones para entender las implicaciones en sus actuaciones y en la calidad de sus fines, así como el fenómeno de la sociopatía y su impacto tan desintegrador para la sociedad. A través de estos ejemplos, Luis Huete y Javier García ponen de relieve las enseñanzas sobre liderazgo que hay detrás de cada personaje y nos ayudan a mejorar como profesionales y como personas, con la idea de crear más líderes que dejen una huella positiva en la sociedad. Grabado en español ibérico (España). Luís Huete, Javier García Arevalillo Sun, 01 Sep 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494653 thebookvoice.com 9:9:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494653]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - 50 líderes que hicieron historia Author: Luís Huete, Javier García Arevalillo Narrator: Vicente Quintana Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 9 minutes Release date: September 1, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 50 líderes que hicieron historia describe de forma magistral cómo ciertos acontecimientos y pasajes de la vida de estos referentes, hombres y mujeres de diversas épocas, circunstancias e intereses, como Sócrates, Napoleón, Lincoln, Marie Curie, Gandhi, Einstein, Hitler, Steve Jobs o Amancio Ortega, entre otros, han moldeado su personalidad y han condicionado su forma de influir positiva o negativamente en el devenir de la sociedad. Los autores también destacan el papel de la conciencia o ausencia de ella en su toma de decisiones para entender las implicaciones en sus actuaciones y en la calidad de sus fines, así como el fenómeno de la sociopatía y su impacto tan desintegrador para la sociedad. A través de estos ejemplos, Luis Huete y Javier García ponen de relieve las enseñanzas sobre liderazgo que hay detrás de cada personaje y nos ayudan a mejorar como profesionales y como personas, con la idea de crear más líderes que dejen una huella positiva en la sociedad. Grabado en español ibérico (España). Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/494653]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - 50 líderes que hicieron historia Author: Luís Huete, Javier García Arevalillo Narrator: Vicente Quintana Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 9 minutes Release date: September 1, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 50 líderes que hicieron historia describe de forma magistral cómo ciertos acontecimientos y pasajes de la vida de estos referentes, hombres y mujeres de diversas épocas, circunstancias e intereses, como Sócrates, Napoleón, Lincoln, Marie Curie, Gandhi, Einstein, Hitler, Steve Jobs o Amancio Ortega, entre otros, han moldeado su personalidad y han condicionado su forma de influir positiva o negativamente en el devenir de la sociedad. Los autores también destacan el papel de la conciencia o ausencia de ella en su toma de decisiones para entender las implicaciones en sus actuaciones y en la calidad de sus fines, así como el fenómeno de la sociopatía y su impacto tan desintegrador para la sociedad. A través de estos ejemplos, Luis Huete y Javier García ponen de relieve las enseñanzas sobre liderazgo que hay detrás de cada personaje y nos ayudan a mejorar como profesionales y como personas, con la idea de crear más líderes que dejen una huella positiva en la sociedad. Grabado en español ibérico (España). https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493931 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493931]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Day the Bubble Burst: A Social History of the Wall Street Crash of 1929 Author: Max Morgan-Witts, Gordon Thomas Narrator: David Colacci Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 34 minutes Release date: March 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The New York Times bestseller that tells the story of an overheated stock market and the financial disaster that led to the Great Depression of the 1930s. A riveting living history about Black Tuesday, October 29, 1929. Captures the era, the intoxicating expectancy, the hope that ruled men's heart and minds before the bubble burst and the black despair of the decade that followed. Max Morgan-Witts, Gordon Thomas Tue, 02 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493931 thebookvoice.com 21:34:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493931]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Day the Bubble Burst: A Social History of the Wall Street Crash of 1929 Author: Max Morgan-Witts, Gordon Thomas Narrator: David Colacci Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 34 minutes Release date: March 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The New York Times bestseller that tells the story of an overheated stock market and the financial disaster that led to the Great Depression of the 1930s. A riveting living history about Black Tuesday, October 29, 1929. Captures the era, the intoxicating expectancy, the hope that ruled men's heart and minds before the bubble burst and the black despair of the decade that followed. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493931]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Day the Bubble Burst: A Social History of the Wall Street Crash of 1929 Author: Max Morgan-Witts, Gordon Thomas Narrator: David Colacci Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 34 minutes Release date: March 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The New York Times bestseller that tells the story of an overheated stock market and the financial disaster that led to the Great Depression of the 1930s. A riveting living history about Black Tuesday, October 29, 1929. Captures the era, the intoxicating expectancy, the hope that ruled men's heart and minds before the bubble burst and the black despair of the decade that followed. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493841 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493841]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Rebellion, Rascals, and Revenue: Tax Follies and Wisdom through the Ages Author: Joel Slemrod, Michael Keen Narrator: Walter Dixon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 28 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Governments have always struggled to tax in ways that are effective and tolerably fair. Sometimes they fail grotesquely, as when, in 1898, the British ignited a rebellion in Sierra Leone by imposing a tax on huts—and, in repressing it, ended up burning the very huts they intended to tax. Sometimes they succeed astonishingly, as when, in eighteenth-century Britain, a cut in the tax on tea massively increased revenue. In this entertaining book, two leading authorities on taxation, Michael Keen and Joel Slemrod, provide a fascinating and informative tour through these and many other episodes in tax history, both preposterous and dramatic—from the plundering described by Herodotus and an Incan tax payable in lice to the (misremembered) Boston Tea Party and the scandals of the Panama Papers. Along the way, readers meet a colorful cast of tax rascals, and even a few tax heroes. While it is hard to fathom the inspiration behind such taxes as one on ships that tended to make them sink, Keen and Slemrod show that yesterday’s tax systems have more in common with ours than we may think. Georgian England's window tax now seems quaint, but was an ingenious way of judging wealth unobtrusively. And Tsar Peter the Great's tax on beards aimed to induce the nobility to shave, much like today’s carbon taxes aim to slow global warming. Joel Slemrod, Michael Keen Tue, 11 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493841 thebookvoice.com 14:28:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493841]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Rebellion, Rascals, and Revenue: Tax Follies and Wisdom through the Ages Author: Joel Slemrod, Michael Keen Narrator: Walter Dixon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 28 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Governments have always struggled to tax in ways that are effective and tolerably fair. Sometimes they fail grotesquely, as when, in 1898, the British ignited a rebellion in Sierra Leone by imposing a tax on huts—and, in repressing it, ended up burning the very huts they intended to tax. Sometimes they succeed astonishingly, as when, in eighteenth-century Britain, a cut in the tax on tea massively increased revenue. In this entertaining book, two leading authorities on taxation, Michael Keen and Joel Slemrod, provide a fascinating and informative tour through these and many other episodes in tax history, both preposterous and dramatic—from the plundering described by Herodotus and an Incan tax payable in lice to the (misremembered) Boston Tea Party and the scandals of the Panama Papers. Along the way, readers meet a colorful cast of tax rascals, and even a few tax heroes. While it is hard to fathom the inspiration behind such taxes as one on ships that tended to make them sink, Keen and Slemrod show that yesterday’s tax systems have more in common with ours than we may think. Georgian England's window tax now seems quaint, but was an ingenious way of judging wealth unobtrusively. And Tsar Peter the Great's tax on beards aimed to induce the nobility to shave, much like today’s carbon taxes aim to slow global warming. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493841]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Rebellion, Rascals, and Revenue: Tax Follies and Wisdom through the Ages Author: Joel Slemrod, Michael Keen Narrator: Walter Dixon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 28 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Governments have always struggled to tax in ways that are effective and tolerably fair. Sometimes they fail grotesquely, as when, in 1898, the British ignited a rebellion in Sierra Leone by imposing a tax on huts—and, in repressing it, ended up burning the very huts they intended to tax. Sometimes they succeed astonishingly, as when, in eighteenth-century Britain, a cut in the tax on tea massively increased revenue. In this entertaining book, two leading authorities on taxation, Michael Keen and Joel Slemrod, provide a fascinating and informative tour through these and many other episodes in tax history, both preposterous and dramatic—from the plundering described by Herodotus and an Incan tax payable in lice to the (misremembered) Boston Tea Party and the scandals of the Panama Papers. Along the way, readers meet a colorful cast of tax rascals, and even a few tax heroes. While it is hard to fathom the inspiration behind such taxes as one on ships that tended to make them sink, Keen and Slemrod show that yesterday’s tax systems have more in common with ours than we may think. Georgian England's window tax now seems quaint, but was an ingenious way of judging wealth unobtrusively. And Tsar Peter the Great's tax on beards aimed to induce the nobility to shave, much like today’s carbon taxes aim to slow global warming. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493358 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493358]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Language of Coaching: The Ultimate Guide To Effective Coaching, Learn The Steps on How You Can Start Your Own Coaching Business Online Author: Tim Mcrichard Narrator: Stella June Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 11 minutes Release date: November 16, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The Language of Coaching: The Ultimate Guide To Effective Coaching, Learn The Steps on How You Can Start Your Own Coaching Business Online In recent years, we have seen a boom in the fields of life coaching and mentoring. They have become popular career options and it doesn't look like it would be stopping anytime soon. There are different reasons why people decide to hire coaches for themselves. They need someone who can objectively examine what they're doing, point out mistakes and offer suggestions on what they can do to rectify the mistakes. Coaches can offer a brand new perspective that we may not have thought of. If you have a lot of valuable knowledge about a certain topic that you can impart, becoming a coach might be perfect for you. And the best thing is you can do this online. This audiobook will teach you important information and useful tools you would need so you can start your own coaching business online. You will learn expert advice on how to set it up so that you can be sure to achieve success. This audiobook will discuss the following topics: - Coaching Can Be An Added Benefit For Your Customers - Individual One-on-One Coaching - Group Coaching - Facebook Coaching Groups - Coaching via Email - Video-Based Coaching - Coaching Clients to a Higher Income - How Much Money Can You Earn Coaching? - Life Coaching on the Internet - How to Promote Your Online Coaching Business - Becoming the Best Coach You Can Be It is seldom that we see the results right away whenever we help someone. But being a life coach is sure to be one of the most rewarding careers anyone can have. And having the ability to earn money while helping others is a great perk. If you want to know more about coaching and all the important information you would need in order to start your own online coaching business, scroll up and click 'add to cart' now. Tim Mcrichard Mon, 16 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493358 thebookvoice.com 1:11:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493358]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Language of Coaching: The Ultimate Guide To Effective Coaching, Learn The Steps on How You Can Start Your Own Coaching Business Online Author: Tim Mcrichard Narrator: Stella June Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 11 minutes Release date: November 16, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The Language of Coaching: The Ultimate Guide To Effective Coaching, Learn The Steps on How You Can Start Your Own Coaching Business Online In recent years, we have seen a boom in the fields of life coaching and mentoring. They have become popular career options and it doesn't look like it would be stopping anytime soon. There are different reasons why people decide to hire coaches for themselves. They need someone who can objectively examine what they're doing, point out mistakes and offer suggestions on what they can do to rectify the mistakes. Coaches can offer a brand new perspective that we may not have thought of. If you have a lot of valuable knowledge about a certain topic that you can impart, becoming a coach might be perfect for you. And the best thing is you can do this online. This audiobook will teach you important information and useful tools you would need so you can start your own coaching business online. You will learn expert advice on how to set it up so that you can be sure to achieve success. This audiobook will discuss the following topics: - Coaching Can Be An Added Benefit For Your Customers - Individual One-on-One Coaching - Group Coaching - Facebook Coaching Groups - Coaching via Email - Video-Based Coaching - Coaching Clients to a Higher Income - How Much Money Can You Earn Coaching? - Life Coaching on the Internet - How to Promote Your Online Coaching Business - Becoming the Best Coach You Can Be It is seldom that we see the results right away whenever we help someone. But being a life coach is sure to be one of the most rewarding careers anyone can have. And having the ability to earn money while helping others is a great perk. If you want to know more about coaching and all the important information you would need in order to start your own online coaching business, scroll up and click 'add to cart' now. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/493358]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Language of Coaching: The Ultimate Guide To Effective Coaching, Learn The Steps on How You Can Start Your Own Coaching Business Online Author: Tim Mcrichard Narrator: Stella June Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 11 minutes Release date: November 16, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The Language of Coaching: The Ultimate Guide To Effective Coaching, Learn The Steps on How You Can Start Your Own Coaching Business Online In recent years, we have seen a boom in the fields of life coaching and mentoring. They have become popular career options and it doesn't look like it would be stopping anytime soon. There are different reasons why people decide to hire coaches for themselves. They need someone who can objectively examine what they're doing, point out mistakes and offer suggestions on what they can do to rectify the mistakes. Coaches can offer a brand new perspective that we may not have thought of. If you have a lot of valuable knowledge about a certain topic that you can impart, becoming a coach might be perfect for you. And the best thing is you can do this online. This audiobook will teach you important information and useful tools you would need so you can start your own coaching business online. You will learn expert advice on how to set it up so that you can be sure to achieve success. This audiobook will discuss the following topics: - Coaching Can Be An Added Benefit For Your Customers - Individual One-on-One Coaching - Group Coaching - Facebook Coaching Groups - Coaching via Email - Video-Based Coaching - Coaching Clients to a Higher Income - How Much Money Can You Earn Coaching? - Life Coaching on the Internet - How to Promote Your Online Coaching Business - Becoming the Best Coach You Can Be It is seldom that we see the results right away whenever we help someone. But being a life coach is sure to be one of the most rewarding careers anyone can have. And having the ability to earn money while helping others is a great perk. If you want to know more about coaching and all the important information you would need in order to start your own online coaching business, scroll up and click 'add to cart' now. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492781 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492781]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Shutdown: How Covid Shook the World's Economy Author: Adam Tooze Narrator: Adam Tooze, Simon Vance Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 37 minutes Release date: September 7, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. When the news first began to trickle out of China about a new virus in December 2019, risk-averse financial markets were alert to its potential for disruption. Yet they could never have predicted the total economic collapse that would follow in Covid-19's wake, as stock markets fell faster and harder than at any time since 1929, currencies across the world plunged, investors panicked and even gold was sold off. In a matter of weeks, the world's economy was brought to an abrupt halt by governments trying to contain a spiralling public health catastrophe. Flights were grounded; supply chains broken; industries from tourism to oil to hospitality collapsed overnight, leaving hundreds of millions of people unemployed. Central banks responded with unprecedented interventions, just to keep their economies on life-support. For the first time since the Second World War, the entire global economic system contracted. This book tells the story of that shutdown. We do not yet know how this story ends, or what new world we will find on the other side. In this fast-paced, compelling and at times shocking analysis, Adam Tooze surveys the wreckage, and looks at where we might be headed next. © Adam Tooze 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Adam Tooze Tue, 07 Sep 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492781 thebookvoice.com 12:37:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492781]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Shutdown: How Covid Shook the World's Economy Author: Adam Tooze Narrator: Adam Tooze, Simon Vance Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 37 minutes Release date: September 7, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. When the news first began to trickle out of China about a new virus in December 2019, risk-averse financial markets were alert to its potential for disruption. Yet they could never have predicted the total economic collapse that would follow in Covid-19's wake, as stock markets fell faster and harder than at any time since 1929, currencies across the world plunged, investors panicked and even gold was sold off. In a matter of weeks, the world's economy was brought to an abrupt halt by governments trying to contain a spiralling public health catastrophe. Flights were grounded; supply chains broken; industries from tourism to oil to hospitality collapsed overnight, leaving hundreds of millions of people unemployed. Central banks responded with unprecedented interventions, just to keep their economies on life-support. For the first time since the Second World War, the entire global economic system contracted. This book tells the story of that shutdown. We do not yet know how this story ends, or what new world we will find on the other side. In this fast-paced, compelling and at times shocking analysis, Adam Tooze surveys the wreckage, and looks at where we might be headed next. © Adam Tooze 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492781]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Shutdown: How Covid Shook the World's Economy Author: Adam Tooze Narrator: Adam Tooze, Simon Vance Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 37 minutes Release date: September 7, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. When the news first began to trickle out of China about a new virus in December 2019, risk-averse financial markets were alert to its potential for disruption. Yet they could never have predicted the total economic collapse that would follow in Covid-19's wake, as stock markets fell faster and harder than at any time since 1929, currencies across the world plunged, investors panicked and even gold was sold off. In a matter of weeks, the world's economy was brought to an abrupt halt by governments trying to contain a spiralling public health catastrophe. Flights were grounded; supply chains broken; industries from tourism to oil to hospitality collapsed overnight, leaving hundreds of millions of people unemployed. Central banks responded with unprecedented interventions, just to keep their economies on life-support. For the first time since the Second World War, the entire global economic system contracted. This book tells the story of that shutdown. We do not yet know how this story ends, or what new world we will find on the other side. In this fast-paced, compelling and at times shocking analysis, Adam Tooze surveys the wreckage, and looks at where we might be headed next. © Adam Tooze 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492102 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492102]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The China Crisis: How China's Economic Collapse Will Lead to a Global Depression Author: James R. Gorrie Narrator: Noah Michael Levine Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 41 minutes Release date: November 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Given all of the looming insolvency of America and the very possible collapse of the U.S. dollar, China seems to be poised to step in and take Americas place of prestige and superpower status upon the world stage. This viewpoint would certainly appear to have an aura of inevitability, except for one crucial fact: China itself is on the verge of repeating what has been the hallmark of its communist rule for the past sixty years--a recurrent cycle of total economic and societal collapse. The undeniable fact is that in a short decade or so, capitalism accomplished what communism, Mao Zedong, a couple of Great Leaps Forward, and Cultural Revolutions could not: the industrialization of China. But the truth is, Chinas ruling communist party has a history of making huge, costly and very bloody mistakes on an enormous scale. The author will address Chinas cannibal capitalism--abuse of its environment, people, and arable lands. This book will look at the mistakes that will eventually cause the economic collapse of China, and what may lead to global depression. James R. Gorrie Wed, 25 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492102 thebookvoice.com 10:41:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492102]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The China Crisis: How China's Economic Collapse Will Lead to a Global Depression Author: James R. Gorrie Narrator: Noah Michael Levine Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 41 minutes Release date: November 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Given all of the looming insolvency of America and the very possible collapse of the U.S. dollar, China seems to be poised to step in and take Americas place of prestige and superpower status upon the world stage. This viewpoint would certainly appear to have an aura of inevitability, except for one crucial fact: China itself is on the verge of repeating what has been the hallmark of its communist rule for the past sixty years--a recurrent cycle of total economic and societal collapse. The undeniable fact is that in a short decade or so, capitalism accomplished what communism, Mao Zedong, a couple of Great Leaps Forward, and Cultural Revolutions could not: the industrialization of China. But the truth is, Chinas ruling communist party has a history of making huge, costly and very bloody mistakes on an enormous scale. The author will address Chinas cannibal capitalism--abuse of its environment, people, and arable lands. This book will look at the mistakes that will eventually cause the economic collapse of China, and what may lead to global depression. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/492102]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The China Crisis: How China's Economic Collapse Will Lead to a Global Depression Author: James R. Gorrie Narrator: Noah Michael Levine Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 41 minutes Release date: November 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Given all of the looming insolvency of America and the very possible collapse of the U.S. dollar, China seems to be poised to step in and take Americas place of prestige and superpower status upon the world stage. This viewpoint would certainly appear to have an aura of inevitability, except for one crucial fact: China itself is on the verge of repeating what has been the hallmark of its communist rule for the past sixty years--a recurrent cycle of total economic and societal collapse. The undeniable fact is that in a short decade or so, capitalism accomplished what communism, Mao Zedong, a couple of Great Leaps Forward, and Cultural Revolutions could not: the industrialization of China. But the truth is, Chinas ruling communist party has a history of making huge, costly and very bloody mistakes on an enormous scale. The author will address Chinas cannibal capitalism--abuse of its environment, people, and arable lands. This book will look at the mistakes that will eventually cause the economic collapse of China, and what may lead to global depression. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491274 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491274]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Never Pay the First Bill: And Other Ways to Fight the Health Care System and Win Author: Marshall Allen Narrator: Marshall Allen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 17 minutes Release date: June 22, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From award-winning ProPublica reporter Marshall Allen, a primer for anyone who wants to fight the predatory health care system--and win. Every year, millions of Americans are overcharged and underserved while the health care industry makes record profits. We know something is wrong, but the layers of bureaucracy designed to discourage complaints make pushing back seem impossible. At least, this is what the health care power players want you to think. Never Pay the First Bill is the guerilla guide to health care the American people and employers need. Drawing on 15 years of investigating the health care industry, reporter Marshall Allen shows how companies and individuals have managed to force medical providers to play fair, and shows how you can, too. He reveals the industry's pressure points and how companies and individuals have fought overbilling, price gouging, insurance denials, and more to get the care they deserve. Laying out a practical plan for protecting yourself against the system's predatory practices, Allen offers the inspiration you need and tried-and-true strategies such as: Analyze and contest your medical bills, so you don't pay more than you should Obtain the billing codes for a procedure in advance Write in an appropriate treatment clause before signing financial documents Get your way by suing in small claims court Few politicians and CEOs have been willing to stand up to the medical industry. It is up to the American people to equip ourselves to fight back for the sake of our families--and everyone else. * This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF which contains sample letters, advice, and more resources from the printed book. Marshall Allen Tue, 22 Jun 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491274 thebookvoice.com 7:17:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491274]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Never Pay the First Bill: And Other Ways to Fight the Health Care System and Win Author: Marshall Allen Narrator: Marshall Allen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 17 minutes Release date: June 22, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From award-winning ProPublica reporter Marshall Allen, a primer for anyone who wants to fight the predatory health care system--and win. Every year, millions of Americans are overcharged and underserved while the health care industry makes record profits. We know something is wrong, but the layers of bureaucracy designed to discourage complaints make pushing back seem impossible. At least, this is what the health care power players want you to think. Never Pay the First Bill is the guerilla guide to health care the American people and employers need. Drawing on 15 years of investigating the health care industry, reporter Marshall Allen shows how companies and individuals have managed to force medical providers to play fair, and shows how you can, too. He reveals the industry's pressure points and how companies and individuals have fought overbilling, price gouging, insurance denials, and more to get the care they deserve. Laying out a practical plan for protecting yourself against the system's predatory practices, Allen offers the inspiration you need and tried-and-true strategies such as: Analyze and contest your medical bills, so you don't pay more than you should Obtain the billing codes for a procedure in advance Write in an appropriate treatment clause before signing financial documents Get your way by suing in small claims court Few politicians and CEOs have been willing to stand up to the medical industry. It is up to the American people to equip ourselves to fight back for the sake of our families--and everyone else. * This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF which contains sample letters, advice, and more resources from the printed book. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491274]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Never Pay the First Bill: And Other Ways to Fight the Health Care System and Win Author: Marshall Allen Narrator: Marshall Allen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 17 minutes Release date: June 22, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From award-winning ProPublica reporter Marshall Allen, a primer for anyone who wants to fight the predatory health care system--and win. Every year, millions of Americans are overcharged and underserved while the health care industry makes record profits. We know something is wrong, but the layers of bureaucracy designed to discourage complaints make pushing back seem impossible. At least, this is what the health care power players want you to think. Never Pay the First Bill is the guerilla guide to health care the American people and employers need. Drawing on 15 years of investigating the health care industry, reporter Marshall Allen shows how companies and individuals have managed to force medical providers to play fair, and shows how you can, too. He reveals the industry's pressure points and how companies and individuals have fought overbilling, price gouging, insurance denials, and more to get the care they deserve. Laying out a practical plan for protecting yourself against the system's predatory practices, Allen offers the inspiration you need and tried-and-true strategies such as: Analyze and contest your medical bills, so you don't pay more than you should Obtain the billing codes for a procedure in advance Write in an appropriate treatment clause before signing financial documents Get your way by suing in small claims court Few politicians and CEOs have been willing to stand up to the medical industry. It is up to the American people to equip ourselves to fight back for the sake of our families--and everyone else. * This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF which contains sample letters, advice, and more resources from the printed book. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491038 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491038]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Blood and Money: War, Slavery, Finance, and Empire Author: David McNally Narrator: Tim Getman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 59 minutes Release date: September 1, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Blood and Money tells the story of money as a history of violence and human bondage. In most accounts of the origins of money we are offered pleasant tales in which it arises to the mutual benefit of all parties as a result of barter. In this groundbreaking study David McNally reveals the true story of money’s origins and development as one of violence and human bondage. Money’s emergence and its transformation are shown to be intimately connected to the buying and selling of slaves and the waging of war. Blood and Money demonstrates the ways that money has “internalized” its violent origins, making clear that it has become a concentrated force of social power and domination. Where Adam Smith observed that monetary wealth represents “command over labor,” this paradigm shifting book amends his view to define money as comprising the command over persons and their bodies. David McNally Tue, 01 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491038 thebookvoice.com 11:59:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491038]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Blood and Money: War, Slavery, Finance, and Empire Author: David McNally Narrator: Tim Getman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 59 minutes Release date: September 1, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Blood and Money tells the story of money as a history of violence and human bondage. In most accounts of the origins of money we are offered pleasant tales in which it arises to the mutual benefit of all parties as a result of barter. In this groundbreaking study David McNally reveals the true story of money’s origins and development as one of violence and human bondage. Money’s emergence and its transformation are shown to be intimately connected to the buying and selling of slaves and the waging of war. Blood and Money demonstrates the ways that money has “internalized” its violent origins, making clear that it has become a concentrated force of social power and domination. Where Adam Smith observed that monetary wealth represents “command over labor,” this paradigm shifting book amends his view to define money as comprising the command over persons and their bodies. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/491038]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Blood and Money: War, Slavery, Finance, and Empire Author: David McNally Narrator: Tim Getman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 59 minutes Release date: September 1, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Blood and Money tells the story of money as a history of violence and human bondage. In most accounts of the origins of money we are offered pleasant tales in which it arises to the mutual benefit of all parties as a result of barter. In this groundbreaking study David McNally reveals the true story of money’s origins and development as one of violence and human bondage. Money’s emergence and its transformation are shown to be intimately connected to the buying and selling of slaves and the waging of war. Blood and Money demonstrates the ways that money has “internalized” its violent origins, making clear that it has become a concentrated force of social power and domination. Where Adam Smith observed that monetary wealth represents “command over labor,” this paradigm shifting book amends his view to define money as comprising the command over persons and their bodies. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489407 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489407]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Die Ökonomie von Gut und Böse Author: Tomáš Sedláček Narrator: Frank Arnold Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 24 minutes Release date: September 6, 2012 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Der tschechische Top-Banker Tomas Sedlacek erklärt anhand von 4000 Jahren Menschheitsgeschichte, wie tief die Ökonomie in unserer Kultur verwurzelt ist. Wie schon Joseph einst dem Pharao riet, in den sieben fetten Jahren Vorräte für schlechte Zeiten anzulegen, so mahnt Sedlacek zum Abbau von Schulden in guten Konjunkturphasen. Mäßigung benennt er als erstrebenswertes Ziel. Ein aufschlußreiches Hörbuch zu einem hochaktuellen Thema, gelesen von Frank Arnold. Tomáš Sedláček Thu, 06 Sep 2012 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489407 thebookvoice.com 7:24:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489407]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Die Ökonomie von Gut und Böse Author: Tomáš Sedláček Narrator: Frank Arnold Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 24 minutes Release date: September 6, 2012 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Der tschechische Top-Banker Tomas Sedlacek erklärt anhand von 4000 Jahren Menschheitsgeschichte, wie tief die Ökonomie in unserer Kultur verwurzelt ist. Wie schon Joseph einst dem Pharao riet, in den sieben fetten Jahren Vorräte für schlechte Zeiten anzulegen, so mahnt Sedlacek zum Abbau von Schulden in guten Konjunkturphasen. Mäßigung benennt er als erstrebenswertes Ziel. Ein aufschlußreiches Hörbuch zu einem hochaktuellen Thema, gelesen von Frank Arnold. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489407]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Die Ökonomie von Gut und Böse Author: Tomáš Sedláček Narrator: Frank Arnold Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 24 minutes Release date: September 6, 2012 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Der tschechische Top-Banker Tomas Sedlacek erklärt anhand von 4000 Jahren Menschheitsgeschichte, wie tief die Ökonomie in unserer Kultur verwurzelt ist. Wie schon Joseph einst dem Pharao riet, in den sieben fetten Jahren Vorräte für schlechte Zeiten anzulegen, so mahnt Sedlacek zum Abbau von Schulden in guten Konjunkturphasen. Mäßigung benennt er als erstrebenswertes Ziel. Ein aufschlußreiches Hörbuch zu einem hochaktuellen Thema, gelesen von Frank Arnold. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489386 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489386]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Kapitalfehler - Wie unser Wohlstand vernichtet wird und warum wir ein neues Wirtschaftsdenken brauchen (Ungekürzt) Author: Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Narrator: Robert Frank Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 8 minutes Release date: May 19, 2017 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Kriminelle Spekulanten und ahnungslose Politiker haben ein nachhaltiges Wirtschaften verdrängt. Der Mensch ist in den Hintergrund geraten und wir mussten erkennen: Finanzkapitalismus ist schlicht und einfach schlechter Kapitalismus. In ihrem neuen Buch erklären die Bestsellerautoren allgemein verständlich, wie ein vernünftiger Kapitalismus wirklich funktionieren kann und sie scheuen sich nicht Fehlentwicklungen, die verbrecherischen Banken sowie die wahren Abzocker klar zu benennen. Denn nur wenn sich jetzt etwas ändert, können wir unser Geld retten. Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Fri, 19 May 2017 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489386 thebookvoice.com 11:8:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489386]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Kapitalfehler - Wie unser Wohlstand vernichtet wird und warum wir ein neues Wirtschaftsdenken brauchen (Ungekürzt) Author: Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Narrator: Robert Frank Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 8 minutes Release date: May 19, 2017 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Kriminelle Spekulanten und ahnungslose Politiker haben ein nachhaltiges Wirtschaften verdrängt. Der Mensch ist in den Hintergrund geraten und wir mussten erkennen: Finanzkapitalismus ist schlicht und einfach schlechter Kapitalismus. In ihrem neuen Buch erklären die Bestsellerautoren allgemein verständlich, wie ein vernünftiger Kapitalismus wirklich funktionieren kann und sie scheuen sich nicht Fehlentwicklungen, die verbrecherischen Banken sowie die wahren Abzocker klar zu benennen. Denn nur wenn sich jetzt etwas ändert, können wir unser Geld retten. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/489386]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Kapitalfehler - Wie unser Wohlstand vernichtet wird und warum wir ein neues Wirtschaftsdenken brauchen (Ungekürzt) Author: Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Narrator: Robert Frank Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 8 minutes Release date: May 19, 2017 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Kriminelle Spekulanten und ahnungslose Politiker haben ein nachhaltiges Wirtschaften verdrängt. Der Mensch ist in den Hintergrund geraten und wir mussten erkennen: Finanzkapitalismus ist schlicht und einfach schlechter Kapitalismus. In ihrem neuen Buch erklären die Bestsellerautoren allgemein verständlich, wie ein vernünftiger Kapitalismus wirklich funktionieren kann und sie scheuen sich nicht Fehlentwicklungen, die verbrecherischen Banken sowie die wahren Abzocker klar zu benennen. Denn nur wenn sich jetzt etwas ändert, können wir unser Geld retten. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/488566 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/488566]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Values: Building a Better World for All Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 32 minutes Release date: March 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NATIONAL BESTSELLER   A bold and urgent argument by economist and former bank governor Mark Carney on the radical, foundational change that is required if we are to build an economy and society based not on market values but on human values. Our world is full of fault lines--growing inequality in income and opportunity; systemic racism; health and economic crises from a global pandemic; mistrust of experts; the existential threat of climate change; deep threats to employment in a digital economy with robotics on the rise. These fundamental problems and others like them, argues Mark Carney, stem from a common crisis in values. Drawing on the turmoil of the past decade, Mark Carney shows how 'market economies' have evolved into 'market societies' where price determines the value of everything.      When we think about what we, as individuals, value most highly, we might list fairness, health, the protection of our rights, economic security from poverty, the preservation of natural diversity, resources, and beauty. The tragedy is, these things that we hold dearest are too often the casualties of our twenty-first century world, where they ought to be our bedrock.      In this profoundly important new book, Mark Carney offers a vision of a more humane society and a practical manifesto for getting there. How we reform our infrastructure to make things better and fairer is at the heart of every chapter, with outlines of wholly new ideas that can restructure society and enshrine our human values at the core of all that we build for our children and grandchildren. Mark Carney Tue, 16 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/488566 thebookvoice.com 20:32:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/488566]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Values: Building a Better World for All Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 32 minutes Release date: March 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NATIONAL BESTSELLER   A bold and urgent argument by economist and former bank governor Mark Carney on the radical, foundational change that is required if we are to build an economy and society based not on market values but on human values. Our world is full of fault lines--growing inequality in income and opportunity; systemic racism; health and economic crises from a global pandemic; mistrust of experts; the existential threat of climate change; deep threats to employment in a digital economy with robotics on the rise. These fundamental problems and others like them, argues Mark Carney, stem from a common crisis in values. Drawing on the turmoil of the past decade, Mark Carney shows how 'market economies' have evolved into 'market societies' where price determines the value of everything.      When we think about what we, as individuals, value most highly, we might list fairness, health, the protection of our rights, economic security from poverty, the preservation of natural diversity, resources, and beauty. The tragedy is, these things that we hold dearest are too often the casualties of our twenty-first century world, where they ought to be our bedrock.      In this profoundly important new book, Mark Carney offers a vision of a more humane society and a practical manifesto for getting there. How we reform our infrastructure to make things better and fairer is at the heart of every chapter, with outlines of wholly new ideas that can restructure society and enshrine our human values at the core of all that we build for our children and grandchildren. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/488566]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Values: Building a Better World for All Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 32 minutes Release date: March 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NATIONAL BESTSELLER   A bold and urgent argument by economist and former bank governor Mark Carney on the radical, foundational change that is required if we are to build an economy and society based not on market values but on human values. Our world is full of fault lines--growing inequality in income and opportunity; systemic racism; health and economic crises from a global pandemic; mistrust of experts; the existential threat of climate change; deep threats to employment in a digital economy with robotics on the rise. These fundamental problems and others like them, argues Mark Carney, stem from a common crisis in values. Drawing on the turmoil of the past decade, Mark Carney shows how 'market economies' have evolved into 'market societies' where price determines the value of everything.      When we think about what we, as individuals, value most highly, we might list fairness, health, the protection of our rights, economic security from poverty, the preservation of natural diversity, resources, and beauty. The tragedy is, these things that we hold dearest are too often the casualties of our twenty-first century world, where they ought to be our bedrock.      In this profoundly important new book, Mark Carney offers a vision of a more humane society and a practical manifesto for getting there. How we reform our infrastructure to make things better and fairer is at the heart of every chapter, with outlines of wholly new ideas that can restructure society and enshrine our human values at the core of all that we build for our children and grandchildren. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487852 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487852]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - Crisis: Sortéala y aprovecha sus oportunidades en tu pyme Author: Patricia Armendáriz Narrator: Patricia Armendáriz, Gwendolyne Flores Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 18 minutes Release date: November 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Conoce el impacto y duración de la crisis en cada sector de la economía y aplica una sólida estrategia para sobrevivir y crecer. Patricia Armendáriz vierte toda su experiencia a lo largo de varias décadas en el sector financiero, como economista, empresaria social,inversionista de capital y juez de Shark Tank México para arrojar luz a la incertidumbre económica que presenta el 2020 para las pymes mexicanas. Tras un atinado análisis de la situación actual de la pandemia y su proyección en los próximos meses, Patricia responde las preguntas que tanta ansiedad nos causan: cuánto va a durar, cómo impactará la crisis en cada sector, cuáles serán los retos del nuevo mundo poscoronavirus y qué debemos hacer para sobrevivir tanto la caída como la salida del túnel. Siguiendo sus estrategias y consejos, podrás blindar tu pyme de los golpes a tu sector, enfrentarlos con resiliencia y, sobre todo, aprovechar las oportunidades que se presenten para crecer tus ingresos al porcentaje que tú decidas. Sí, leíste bien, crecer es una posibilidad y casi una necesidad; está en tus manos hacerla realidad. Un libro inmediato que busca no solo tu beneficio particular y el de tus empleados, sino, mediante la suma de todos los esfuerzos, sostener la economía mexicana a través del pilar más importante del empleo en México: las pymes. Patricia Armendáriz Thu, 19 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487852 thebookvoice.com 2:18:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487852]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - Crisis: Sortéala y aprovecha sus oportunidades en tu pyme Author: Patricia Armendáriz Narrator: Patricia Armendáriz, Gwendolyne Flores Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 18 minutes Release date: November 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Conoce el impacto y duración de la crisis en cada sector de la economía y aplica una sólida estrategia para sobrevivir y crecer. Patricia Armendáriz vierte toda su experiencia a lo largo de varias décadas en el sector financiero, como economista, empresaria social,inversionista de capital y juez de Shark Tank México para arrojar luz a la incertidumbre económica que presenta el 2020 para las pymes mexicanas. Tras un atinado análisis de la situación actual de la pandemia y su proyección en los próximos meses, Patricia responde las preguntas que tanta ansiedad nos causan: cuánto va a durar, cómo impactará la crisis en cada sector, cuáles serán los retos del nuevo mundo poscoronavirus y qué debemos hacer para sobrevivir tanto la caída como la salida del túnel. Siguiendo sus estrategias y consejos, podrás blindar tu pyme de los golpes a tu sector, enfrentarlos con resiliencia y, sobre todo, aprovechar las oportunidades que se presenten para crecer tus ingresos al porcentaje que tú decidas. Sí, leíste bien, crecer es una posibilidad y casi una necesidad; está en tus manos hacerla realidad. Un libro inmediato que busca no solo tu beneficio particular y el de tus empleados, sino, mediante la suma de todos los esfuerzos, sostener la economía mexicana a través del pilar más importante del empleo en México: las pymes. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487852]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - Crisis: Sortéala y aprovecha sus oportunidades en tu pyme Author: Patricia Armendáriz Narrator: Patricia Armendáriz, Gwendolyne Flores Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 18 minutes Release date: November 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Conoce el impacto y duración de la crisis en cada sector de la economía y aplica una sólida estrategia para sobrevivir y crecer. Patricia Armendáriz vierte toda su experiencia a lo largo de varias décadas en el sector financiero, como economista, empresaria social,inversionista de capital y juez de Shark Tank México para arrojar luz a la incertidumbre económica que presenta el 2020 para las pymes mexicanas. Tras un atinado análisis de la situación actual de la pandemia y su proyección en los próximos meses, Patricia responde las preguntas que tanta ansiedad nos causan: cuánto va a durar, cómo impactará la crisis en cada sector, cuáles serán los retos del nuevo mundo poscoronavirus y qué debemos hacer para sobrevivir tanto la caída como la salida del túnel. Siguiendo sus estrategias y consejos, podrás blindar tu pyme de los golpes a tu sector, enfrentarlos con resiliencia y, sobre todo, aprovechar las oportunidades que se presenten para crecer tus ingresos al porcentaje que tú decidas. Sí, leíste bien, crecer es una posibilidad y casi una necesidad; está en tus manos hacerla realidad. Un libro inmediato que busca no solo tu beneficio particular y el de tus empleados, sino, mediante la suma de todos los esfuerzos, sostener la economía mexicana a través del pilar más importante del empleo en México: las pymes. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487828 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487828]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: China: The Bubble that Never Pops Author: Thomas Orlik Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 46 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The Chinese economy appears destined for failure, the financial bubble forever in peril of popping, the real estate sector doomed to collapse, the factories fated for bankruptcy. Banks drowning in bad loans. An urban landscape littered with ghost towns of empty property. Industrial zones stalked by zombie firms. Trade tariffs blocking the path to global markets. And yet, against the odds and against expectations, growth continues, wealth rises, international influence expands. The coming collapse of China is always coming, never arriving. Thomas Orlik, a veteran of more than a decade in Beijing, turns the spotlight on China's fragile fundamentals, and resources for resilience. Drawing on discussions with Communist cadres, shadow bankers, and migrant workers, Orlik pieces together a unique perspective on China's past, present, and possible futures. Mapping possible scenarios, Orlik games out what will happen if the bubble that never pops finally does. The magnitude of the shock to China and the world would be tremendous. For those in the West nervously watching China's rise as a geopolitical challenger, the alternative could be even less palatable. Thomas Orlik Tue, 16 Feb 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487828 thebookvoice.com 7:46:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487828]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: China: The Bubble that Never Pops Author: Thomas Orlik Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 46 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The Chinese economy appears destined for failure, the financial bubble forever in peril of popping, the real estate sector doomed to collapse, the factories fated for bankruptcy. Banks drowning in bad loans. An urban landscape littered with ghost towns of empty property. Industrial zones stalked by zombie firms. Trade tariffs blocking the path to global markets. And yet, against the odds and against expectations, growth continues, wealth rises, international influence expands. The coming collapse of China is always coming, never arriving. Thomas Orlik, a veteran of more than a decade in Beijing, turns the spotlight on China's fragile fundamentals, and resources for resilience. Drawing on discussions with Communist cadres, shadow bankers, and migrant workers, Orlik pieces together a unique perspective on China's past, present, and possible futures. Mapping possible scenarios, Orlik games out what will happen if the bubble that never pops finally does. The magnitude of the shock to China and the world would be tremendous. For those in the West nervously watching China's rise as a geopolitical challenger, the alternative could be even less palatable. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/487828]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: China: The Bubble that Never Pops Author: Thomas Orlik Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 46 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The Chinese economy appears destined for failure, the financial bubble forever in peril of popping, the real estate sector doomed to collapse, the factories fated for bankruptcy. Banks drowning in bad loans. An urban landscape littered with ghost towns of empty property. Industrial zones stalked by zombie firms. Trade tariffs blocking the path to global markets. And yet, against the odds and against expectations, growth continues, wealth rises, international influence expands. The coming collapse of China is always coming, never arriving. Thomas Orlik, a veteran of more than a decade in Beijing, turns the spotlight on China's fragile fundamentals, and resources for resilience. Drawing on discussions with Communist cadres, shadow bankers, and migrant workers, Orlik pieces together a unique perspective on China's past, present, and possible futures. Mapping possible scenarios, Orlik games out what will happen if the bubble that never pops finally does. The magnitude of the shock to China and the world would be tremendous. For those in the West nervously watching China's rise as a geopolitical challenger, the alternative could be even less palatable. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485786 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485786]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Stephen Roach on the Next Asia: Opportunities and Challenges for a New Globalization Author: Stephen S. Roach Narrator: Scott Woodside Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 55 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In the end, we are all products of the roads we travel. In the case of Stephen Roach, its been the global road. He has criss-crossed the world as Morgan Stanleys first global economist, and most recently his journeys have increasingly led to Asia, at first because of events, but ultimately as a reflection of the allure and intrigue of this incredibly dynamic region for global investors. The global macro callboth for economies and financial markets became increasingly dependent on Asia. And getting Asia right has become Roachs personal obsession. This book represents more than 50 of Roachs key research papers, not just on Asia, but also how the region fits into the broad global context of the globalization of investing and financial markets around the world. Stephen S. Roach Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485786 thebookvoice.com 15:55:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485786]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Stephen Roach on the Next Asia: Opportunities and Challenges for a New Globalization Author: Stephen S. Roach Narrator: Scott Woodside Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 55 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In the end, we are all products of the roads we travel. In the case of Stephen Roach, its been the global road. He has criss-crossed the world as Morgan Stanleys first global economist, and most recently his journeys have increasingly led to Asia, at first because of events, but ultimately as a reflection of the allure and intrigue of this incredibly dynamic region for global investors. The global macro callboth for economies and financial markets became increasingly dependent on Asia. And getting Asia right has become Roachs personal obsession. This book represents more than 50 of Roachs key research papers, not just on Asia, but also how the region fits into the broad global context of the globalization of investing and financial markets around the world. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485786]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Stephen Roach on the Next Asia: Opportunities and Challenges for a New Globalization Author: Stephen S. Roach Narrator: Scott Woodside Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 55 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In the end, we are all products of the roads we travel. In the case of Stephen Roach, its been the global road. He has criss-crossed the world as Morgan Stanleys first global economist, and most recently his journeys have increasingly led to Asia, at first because of events, but ultimately as a reflection of the allure and intrigue of this incredibly dynamic region for global investors. The global macro callboth for economies and financial markets became increasingly dependent on Asia. And getting Asia right has become Roachs personal obsession. This book represents more than 50 of Roachs key research papers, not just on Asia, but also how the region fits into the broad global context of the globalization of investing and financial markets around the world. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485689 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485689]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Too Big to Save? How to Fix the U.S. Financial System Author: Robert J. Shiller, Robert Pozen Narrator: Richard M. Davidson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 17 hours 14 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Many people have suffered from the current financial crisis losing homes and jobs, while seeing their retirement accounts drop steeply.  They are asking four main questions:  U.S. mortgage problems turn into a global financial crisis and can we fix these mortgage problems? Have we found effective ways to limit the adverse impact of the financial crisis on the stock and bond markets? How has the Bailout Act worked so far and what more needs to be done to resolve the current financial crisis? What steps should we take, in the U.S. and abroad, to prevent another financial crisis in the future? This book answers these questions, providing readers a decisive look into the future. Part I explains how the U.S. housing market became globalized through the securitization of mortgages, where the public and private players in the securitization process went wrong, and what needs to be done to fix the securitization process.  Part II explains how the deleveraging of financial institutions led to sharp price declines in the securities markets, the success of some measures to unfreeze the bond markets, and the perverse effects of other measures intended to calm investors. Part III reflects on the three main strategies contained in the Bailout Act buying troubled assets, recapitalizing banks and limiting executive compensation. Part IV discusses the implications of the financial crisis for the future structure of regulation and accounting in the U.S. and internationally. Robert J. Shiller, Robert Pozen Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485689 thebookvoice.com 17:14:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485689]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Too Big to Save? How to Fix the U.S. Financial System Author: Robert J. Shiller, Robert Pozen Narrator: Richard M. Davidson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 17 hours 14 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Many people have suffered from the current financial crisis losing homes and jobs, while seeing their retirement accounts drop steeply.  They are asking four main questions:  U.S. mortgage problems turn into a global financial crisis and can we fix these mortgage problems? Have we found effective ways to limit the adverse impact of the financial crisis on the stock and bond markets? How has the Bailout Act worked so far and what more needs to be done to resolve the current financial crisis? What steps should we take, in the U.S. and abroad, to prevent another financial crisis in the future? This book answers these questions, providing readers a decisive look into the future. Part I explains how the U.S. housing market became globalized through the securitization of mortgages, where the public and private players in the securitization process went wrong, and what needs to be done to fix the securitization process.  Part II explains how the deleveraging of financial institutions led to sharp price declines in the securities markets, the success of some measures to unfreeze the bond markets, and the perverse effects of other measures intended to calm investors. Part III reflects on the three main strategies contained in the Bailout Act buying troubled assets, recapitalizing banks and limiting executive compensation. Part IV discusses the implications of the financial crisis for the future structure of regulation and accounting in the U.S. and internationally. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485689]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Too Big to Save? How to Fix the U.S. Financial System Author: Robert J. Shiller, Robert Pozen Narrator: Richard M. Davidson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 17 hours 14 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Many people have suffered from the current financial crisis losing homes and jobs, while seeing their retirement accounts drop steeply.  They are asking four main questions:  U.S. mortgage problems turn into a global financial crisis and can we fix these mortgage problems? Have we found effective ways to limit the adverse impact of the financial crisis on the stock and bond markets? How has the Bailout Act worked so far and what more needs to be done to resolve the current financial crisis? What steps should we take, in the U.S. and abroad, to prevent another financial crisis in the future? This book answers these questions, providing readers a decisive look into the future. Part I explains how the U.S. housing market became globalized through the securitization of mortgages, where the public and private players in the securitization process went wrong, and what needs to be done to fix the securitization process.  Part II explains how the deleveraging of financial institutions led to sharp price declines in the securities markets, the success of some measures to unfreeze the bond markets, and the perverse effects of other measures intended to calm investors. Part III reflects on the three main strategies contained in the Bailout Act buying troubled assets, recapitalizing banks and limiting executive compensation. Part IV discusses the implications of the financial crisis for the future structure of regulation and accounting in the U.S. and internationally. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485672 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485672]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Paper Money Collapse: The Folly of Elastic Money and the Coming Monetary Breakdown Author: Detlev S. Schlichter Narrator: John Lee Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 51 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In an engaging style based on extensive research, Paper Money Collapse shows conclusively why paper money systems - monetary systems that are based on an elastic and constantly expanding supply of money (such as our system today) as opposed to a system of commodity money of essentially fixed supply - are inherently unstable and why they must lead to economic disintegration. All paper money systems in history ended in failure. The book shows why this must be the case and why it will also be the fate of the present system. The conclusions are controversial as they go against the present consensus, which holds that elastic state money is superior to inflexible commodity money (such as a gold standard), and that expanding money is harmless or even beneficial for as long as inflation stays low. The book shows that the present crisis is the unavoidable result of continuously expanding fiat money, that the current policy of accelerated money production to stimulate the economy is counterproductive and that, if pursued further, it will lead to a complete collapse of the monetary system. Paper money systems are confidence games. When the public realizes that the printing press is increasingly used to keep states and banks solvent, this confidence will evaporate quickly. The endgame will then be sovereign default, hyperinflation and economic chaos. Detlev S. Schlichter Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485672 thebookvoice.com 9:51:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485672]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Paper Money Collapse: The Folly of Elastic Money and the Coming Monetary Breakdown Author: Detlev S. Schlichter Narrator: John Lee Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 51 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In an engaging style based on extensive research, Paper Money Collapse shows conclusively why paper money systems - monetary systems that are based on an elastic and constantly expanding supply of money (such as our system today) as opposed to a system of commodity money of essentially fixed supply - are inherently unstable and why they must lead to economic disintegration. All paper money systems in history ended in failure. The book shows why this must be the case and why it will also be the fate of the present system. The conclusions are controversial as they go against the present consensus, which holds that elastic state money is superior to inflexible commodity money (such as a gold standard), and that expanding money is harmless or even beneficial for as long as inflation stays low. The book shows that the present crisis is the unavoidable result of continuously expanding fiat money, that the current policy of accelerated money production to stimulate the economy is counterproductive and that, if pursued further, it will lead to a complete collapse of the monetary system. Paper money systems are confidence games. When the public realizes that the printing press is increasingly used to keep states and banks solvent, this confidence will evaporate quickly. The endgame will then be sovereign default, hyperinflation and economic chaos. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485672]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Paper Money Collapse: The Folly of Elastic Money and the Coming Monetary Breakdown Author: Detlev S. Schlichter Narrator: John Lee Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 51 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In an engaging style based on extensive research, Paper Money Collapse shows conclusively why paper money systems - monetary systems that are based on an elastic and constantly expanding supply of money (such as our system today) as opposed to a system of commodity money of essentially fixed supply - are inherently unstable and why they must lead to economic disintegration. All paper money systems in history ended in failure. The book shows why this must be the case and why it will also be the fate of the present system. The conclusions are controversial as they go against the present consensus, which holds that elastic state money is superior to inflexible commodity money (such as a gold standard), and that expanding money is harmless or even beneficial for as long as inflation stays low. The book shows that the present crisis is the unavoidable result of continuously expanding fiat money, that the current policy of accelerated money production to stimulate the economy is counterproductive and that, if pursued further, it will lead to a complete collapse of the monetary system. Paper money systems are confidence games. When the public realizes that the printing press is increasingly used to keep states and banks solvent, this confidence will evaporate quickly. The endgame will then be sovereign default, hyperinflation and economic chaos. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485652 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485652]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Debacle: Obama's War on Jobs and Growth and What We Can Do Now to Regain Our Future Author: Grover Glenn Norquist, John R. Lott Narrator: Brian Holsopple Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 35 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: During the 2008 presidential campaign, Obama promised time after time 'a net spending cut' to make government smaller in order to cut the deficit. But the huge increase in government spending and debt, and the resulting higher future taxes will make America a poorer country. The Congressional Budget Office estimates that the deficits that President Obama proposes for the years from 2011 through 2020 come to a staggering $126,000 per family of four. That is on top of the $35,000 per family already chalked up under the first two years of Obama's administration. But has all the new government been worth it? Are Americans happier because the government has determined where this money should be spent? The answer is clearly no. Obama's economic policies have raised unemployment, slowed economic growth, dramatically raised the national debt, squandered taxpayer money through poor investments, and further damaged the housing market. The economy will eventually grow, though slowly. The No Tax Pledge will explain why Obama's policies on spending, taxes, regulation have all worked to harm the recovery, increased unemployment, and depressed housing prices. This debate is part of a broader debate over Keynesian economics most notably involving Paul Krugman in the New York Times. The authors plan on dissecting these arguments and explaining why Keynesianism represents more a way of transferring wealth to desired political constituencies than it provides a legitimate economic theory for how the economy operates. Grover Glenn Norquist, John R. Lott Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485652 thebookvoice.com 5:35:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485652]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Debacle: Obama's War on Jobs and Growth and What We Can Do Now to Regain Our Future Author: Grover Glenn Norquist, John R. Lott Narrator: Brian Holsopple Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 35 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: During the 2008 presidential campaign, Obama promised time after time 'a net spending cut' to make government smaller in order to cut the deficit. But the huge increase in government spending and debt, and the resulting higher future taxes will make America a poorer country. The Congressional Budget Office estimates that the deficits that President Obama proposes for the years from 2011 through 2020 come to a staggering $126,000 per family of four. That is on top of the $35,000 per family already chalked up under the first two years of Obama's administration. But has all the new government been worth it? Are Americans happier because the government has determined where this money should be spent? The answer is clearly no. Obama's economic policies have raised unemployment, slowed economic growth, dramatically raised the national debt, squandered taxpayer money through poor investments, and further damaged the housing market. The economy will eventually grow, though slowly. The No Tax Pledge will explain why Obama's policies on spending, taxes, regulation have all worked to harm the recovery, increased unemployment, and depressed housing prices. This debate is part of a broader debate over Keynesian economics most notably involving Paul Krugman in the New York Times. The authors plan on dissecting these arguments and explaining why Keynesianism represents more a way of transferring wealth to desired political constituencies than it provides a legitimate economic theory for how the economy operates. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485652]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Debacle: Obama's War on Jobs and Growth and What We Can Do Now to Regain Our Future Author: Grover Glenn Norquist, John R. Lott Narrator: Brian Holsopple Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 35 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: During the 2008 presidential campaign, Obama promised time after time 'a net spending cut' to make government smaller in order to cut the deficit. But the huge increase in government spending and debt, and the resulting higher future taxes will make America a poorer country. The Congressional Budget Office estimates that the deficits that President Obama proposes for the years from 2011 through 2020 come to a staggering $126,000 per family of four. That is on top of the $35,000 per family already chalked up under the first two years of Obama's administration. But has all the new government been worth it? Are Americans happier because the government has determined where this money should be spent? The answer is clearly no. Obama's economic policies have raised unemployment, slowed economic growth, dramatically raised the national debt, squandered taxpayer money through poor investments, and further damaged the housing market. The economy will eventually grow, though slowly. The No Tax Pledge will explain why Obama's policies on spending, taxes, regulation have all worked to harm the recovery, increased unemployment, and depressed housing prices. This debate is part of a broader debate over Keynesian economics most notably involving Paul Krugman in the New York Times. The authors plan on dissecting these arguments and explaining why Keynesianism represents more a way of transferring wealth to desired political constituencies than it provides a legitimate economic theory for how the economy operates. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485232 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485232]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: From the Ground Up: How Frontline Staff Can Save America's Healthcare Author: Peter Lazes, Marie Rudden Narrator: Wayne Shepherd Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 34 minutes Release date: November 10, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Everyone in a hospital leadership role should read this book as it offers a wealth of practical advice for organizations intent on improving their clinical care delivery.' -Amy C. Edmondson, professor, Harvard Business School, and author of The Fearless Organization Healthcare continues to be our fastest-growing sector-three times more than the rest of the economy. Yet it costs almost twice as much in the United States as it does in other countries, and its delivery systems are widely acknowledged to be fragmented, uneven in quality, and difficult to negotiate for the patients they aim to serve. Systemic changes are needed to create structures and processes that address these intrinsic flaws. Practical and inspiring, this book draws on theories and practices that promote organizational change and outlines processes for establishing labor-management partnerships that utilize the knowledge and experience of administrators and staff at all levels. Through details of past and current practices of frontline participation, readers will discover proven methods for improving healthcare in the United States by listening to and implementing the ideas of frontline staff and patients. Peter Lazes, Marie Rudden Tue, 10 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485232 thebookvoice.com 5:34:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485232]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: From the Ground Up: How Frontline Staff Can Save America's Healthcare Author: Peter Lazes, Marie Rudden Narrator: Wayne Shepherd Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 34 minutes Release date: November 10, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Everyone in a hospital leadership role should read this book as it offers a wealth of practical advice for organizations intent on improving their clinical care delivery.' -Amy C. Edmondson, professor, Harvard Business School, and author of The Fearless Organization Healthcare continues to be our fastest-growing sector-three times more than the rest of the economy. Yet it costs almost twice as much in the United States as it does in other countries, and its delivery systems are widely acknowledged to be fragmented, uneven in quality, and difficult to negotiate for the patients they aim to serve. Systemic changes are needed to create structures and processes that address these intrinsic flaws. Practical and inspiring, this book draws on theories and practices that promote organizational change and outlines processes for establishing labor-management partnerships that utilize the knowledge and experience of administrators and staff at all levels. Through details of past and current practices of frontline participation, readers will discover proven methods for improving healthcare in the United States by listening to and implementing the ideas of frontline staff and patients. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/485232]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: From the Ground Up: How Frontline Staff Can Save America's Healthcare Author: Peter Lazes, Marie Rudden Narrator: Wayne Shepherd Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 34 minutes Release date: November 10, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Everyone in a hospital leadership role should read this book as it offers a wealth of practical advice for organizations intent on improving their clinical care delivery.' -Amy C. Edmondson, professor, Harvard Business School, and author of The Fearless Organization Healthcare continues to be our fastest-growing sector-three times more than the rest of the economy. Yet it costs almost twice as much in the United States as it does in other countries, and its delivery systems are widely acknowledged to be fragmented, uneven in quality, and difficult to negotiate for the patients they aim to serve. Systemic changes are needed to create structures and processes that address these intrinsic flaws. Practical and inspiring, this book draws on theories and practices that promote organizational change and outlines processes for establishing labor-management partnerships that utilize the knowledge and experience of administrators and staff at all levels. Through details of past and current practices of frontline participation, readers will discover proven methods for improving healthcare in the United States by listening to and implementing the ideas of frontline staff and patients. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484717 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484717]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Waste-Free World: How the Circular Economy Will Take Less, Make More, and Save the Planet Author: Ron Gonen Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 33 minutes Release date: April 6, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The next revolution in business will provide for a sustainable future, from founder, CEO and circular economy expert Ron Gonen Our take-make-waste economy has cost consumers and taxpayers billions while cheating us out of a habitable planet. But it doesn’t have to be this way. The Waste-Free World makes a persuasive, forward-looking case for a circular economic model, a “closed-loop” system that wastes no natural resources. Entrepreneur, CEO and sustainability expert Ron Gonen argues that circularity is not only crucial for the planet but holds immense business opportunity. As the founder of an investment firm focused on the circular economy, Gonen reveals brilliant innovations emerging worldwide— “smart” packaging, robotics that optimize recycling, nutrient rich fabrics, technologies that convert food waste into energy for your home, and many more. Drawing on his experience in technology, business, and city government and interviews with leading entrepreneurs and top companies, he introduces a vital and growing movement.  The Waste-Free World invites us all to take part in a sustainable and prosperous future where companies foster innovation, investors recognize long term value creation, and consumers can align their values with the products they buy. Ron Gonen Tue, 06 Apr 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484717 thebookvoice.com 8:33:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484717]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Waste-Free World: How the Circular Economy Will Take Less, Make More, and Save the Planet Author: Ron Gonen Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 33 minutes Release date: April 6, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The next revolution in business will provide for a sustainable future, from founder, CEO and circular economy expert Ron Gonen Our take-make-waste economy has cost consumers and taxpayers billions while cheating us out of a habitable planet. But it doesn’t have to be this way. The Waste-Free World makes a persuasive, forward-looking case for a circular economic model, a “closed-loop” system that wastes no natural resources. Entrepreneur, CEO and sustainability expert Ron Gonen argues that circularity is not only crucial for the planet but holds immense business opportunity. As the founder of an investment firm focused on the circular economy, Gonen reveals brilliant innovations emerging worldwide— “smart” packaging, robotics that optimize recycling, nutrient rich fabrics, technologies that convert food waste into energy for your home, and many more. Drawing on his experience in technology, business, and city government and interviews with leading entrepreneurs and top companies, he introduces a vital and growing movement.  The Waste-Free World invites us all to take part in a sustainable and prosperous future where companies foster innovation, investors recognize long term value creation, and consumers can align their values with the products they buy. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484717]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Waste-Free World: How the Circular Economy Will Take Less, Make More, and Save the Planet Author: Ron Gonen Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 33 minutes Release date: April 6, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The next revolution in business will provide for a sustainable future, from founder, CEO and circular economy expert Ron Gonen Our take-make-waste economy has cost consumers and taxpayers billions while cheating us out of a habitable planet. But it doesn’t have to be this way. The Waste-Free World makes a persuasive, forward-looking case for a circular economic model, a “closed-loop” system that wastes no natural resources. Entrepreneur, CEO and sustainability expert Ron Gonen argues that circularity is not only crucial for the planet but holds immense business opportunity. As the founder of an investment firm focused on the circular economy, Gonen reveals brilliant innovations emerging worldwide— “smart” packaging, robotics that optimize recycling, nutrient rich fabrics, technologies that convert food waste into energy for your home, and many more. Drawing on his experience in technology, business, and city government and interviews with leading entrepreneurs and top companies, he introduces a vital and growing movement.  The Waste-Free World invites us all to take part in a sustainable and prosperous future where companies foster innovation, investors recognize long term value creation, and consumers can align their values with the products they buy. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484318 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484318]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Shockproof: How to Hardwire Your Business for Lasting Success Author: Debra Jacobs, Garrett Sheridan, Juan Pablo Gonzlez Narrator: Emily Durante Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 35 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: As the economy moves through its cycles of growth and contraction, many companies get stuck in periods of poor performance and turn to quick fixes such as EVA, Kaizen, or Six Sigma that either deliver only short-term positive impact or cause more pain than the preexisting condition. However, to gain competitive advantage and achieve profitable growth throughout downturns in the economic cycle, companies must assess market trends and opportunities then dynamically align their business and talent strategies as well as organization design to seize opportunities and deliver results. Based on years of research conducted by Axiom Consulting Partners, Shockproof can assist managers in making and maintaining that necessary connection between strategies and organization to achieve sustainability. A Shockproof concept has the following important attributes: Agile and can rapidly reinvent itself as business conditions change Leadership knows how to mobilize people to execute and deliver results A workforce that  is adaptive, inherently innovative, and energized by the rewards of success due to its connection to the business As priorities change and challenges arise throughout downturns in the economic cycle, learn how to reinvent your company to deliver profitable growth. Debra Jacobs, Garrett Sheridan, Juan Pablo Gonzlez Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484318 thebookvoice.com 7:35:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484318]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Shockproof: How to Hardwire Your Business for Lasting Success Author: Debra Jacobs, Garrett Sheridan, Juan Pablo Gonzlez Narrator: Emily Durante Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 35 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: As the economy moves through its cycles of growth and contraction, many companies get stuck in periods of poor performance and turn to quick fixes such as EVA, Kaizen, or Six Sigma that either deliver only short-term positive impact or cause more pain than the preexisting condition. However, to gain competitive advantage and achieve profitable growth throughout downturns in the economic cycle, companies must assess market trends and opportunities then dynamically align their business and talent strategies as well as organization design to seize opportunities and deliver results. Based on years of research conducted by Axiom Consulting Partners, Shockproof can assist managers in making and maintaining that necessary connection between strategies and organization to achieve sustainability. A Shockproof concept has the following important attributes: Agile and can rapidly reinvent itself as business conditions change Leadership knows how to mobilize people to execute and deliver results A workforce that  is adaptive, inherently innovative, and energized by the rewards of success due to its connection to the business As priorities change and challenges arise throughout downturns in the economic cycle, learn how to reinvent your company to deliver profitable growth. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/484318]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Shockproof: How to Hardwire Your Business for Lasting Success Author: Debra Jacobs, Garrett Sheridan, Juan Pablo Gonzlez Narrator: Emily Durante Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 35 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: As the economy moves through its cycles of growth and contraction, many companies get stuck in periods of poor performance and turn to quick fixes such as EVA, Kaizen, or Six Sigma that either deliver only short-term positive impact or cause more pain than the preexisting condition. However, to gain competitive advantage and achieve profitable growth throughout downturns in the economic cycle, companies must assess market trends and opportunities then dynamically align their business and talent strategies as well as organization design to seize opportunities and deliver results. Based on years of research conducted by Axiom Consulting Partners, Shockproof can assist managers in making and maintaining that necessary connection between strategies and organization to achieve sustainability. A Shockproof concept has the following important attributes: Agile and can rapidly reinvent itself as business conditions change Leadership knows how to mobilize people to execute and deliver results A workforce that  is adaptive, inherently innovative, and energized by the rewards of success due to its connection to the business As priorities change and challenges arise throughout downturns in the economic cycle, learn how to reinvent your company to deliver profitable growth. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/482546 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/482546]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Effective Entrepreneurs Bundle: 2 in 1 Bundle, Entrepreneurial Mindset and The Entrepreneurial State Author: J.T. Powell, Min Hanly Narrator: B. Marie And Stella June Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 45 minutes Release date: October 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Effective Entrepreneurs Bundle: 2 in 1 Bundle, Entrepreneurial Mindset and The Entrepreneurial State Are you looking to start your own business? Are you tired of working your nine-to-five job? Most people dream of owning their own business and not being tied down to the same 9 am - 5 pm job. They dream of a business where they could be their own boss. Studies show that in the US, there are more than 600,000 new businesses that open every year. While it is admirable that a lot of people are taking the plunge, the sad reality is that only half of them will remain open after a few years. One of the important strategies to ensure the success of your business is to develop the mindset successful entrepreneurs have. Being an entrepreneur may be riskier than working your normal job. But the reward is greater especially if you're already reaping the benefits of being your own boss. This bundle’s ultimate goal is to help you build a mindset that will ensure your business venture will be successful. It will provide a step-by-step guide on how you can be a successful entrepreneur. This 2 in 1 bundle series includes the following audiobooks: 1. The Entrepreneurial State: The Ultimate Guide to Unstoppable Entrepreneurial Drive, Learn How You Can Develop the Grit and Determination to Make All Your Entrepreneurial Goals a Success 2. Entrepreneurial Mindset: The Ultimate Guide to Entrepreneurial Ideas, Learn Different Entrepreneurial Ideas and Opportunities That Can Inspire You To Start Your Own Successful Business Get your copy of Effective Entrepreneurs 2 in 1 Bundle today! J.T. Powell, Min Hanly Mon, 19 Oct 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/482546 thebookvoice.com 1:45:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/482546]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Effective Entrepreneurs Bundle: 2 in 1 Bundle, Entrepreneurial Mindset and The Entrepreneurial State Author: J.T. Powell, Min Hanly Narrator: B. Marie And Stella June Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 45 minutes Release date: October 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Effective Entrepreneurs Bundle: 2 in 1 Bundle, Entrepreneurial Mindset and The Entrepreneurial State Are you looking to start your own business? Are you tired of working your nine-to-five job? Most people dream of owning their own business and not being tied down to the same 9 am - 5 pm job. They dream of a business where they could be their own boss. Studies show that in the US, there are more than 600,000 new businesses that open every year. While it is admirable that a lot of people are taking the plunge, the sad reality is that only half of them will remain open after a few years. One of the important strategies to ensure the success of your business is to develop the mindset successful entrepreneurs have. Being an entrepreneur may be riskier than working your normal job. But the reward is greater especially if you're already reaping the benefits of being your own boss. This bundle’s ultimate goal is to help you build a mindset that will ensure your business venture will be successful. It will provide a step-by-step guide on how you can be a successful entrepreneur. This 2 in 1 bundle series includes the following audiobooks: 1. The Entrepreneurial State: The Ultimate Guide to Unstoppable Entrepreneurial Drive, Learn How You Can Develop the Grit and Determination to Make All Your Entrepreneurial Goals a Success 2. Entrepreneurial Mindset: The Ultimate Guide to Entrepreneurial Ideas, Learn Different Entrepreneurial Ideas and Opportunities That Can Inspire You To Start Your Own Successful Business Get your copy of Effective Entrepreneurs 2 in 1 Bundle today! Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/482546]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Effective Entrepreneurs Bundle: 2 in 1 Bundle, Entrepreneurial Mindset and The Entrepreneurial State Author: J.T. Powell, Min Hanly Narrator: B. Marie And Stella June Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 45 minutes Release date: October 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Effective Entrepreneurs Bundle: 2 in 1 Bundle, Entrepreneurial Mindset and The Entrepreneurial State Are you looking to start your own business? Are you tired of working your nine-to-five job? Most people dream of owning their own business and not being tied down to the same 9 am - 5 pm job. They dream of a business where they could be their own boss. Studies show that in the US, there are more than 600,000 new businesses that open every year. While it is admirable that a lot of people are taking the plunge, the sad reality is that only half of them will remain open after a few years. One of the important strategies to ensure the success of your business is to develop the mindset successful entrepreneurs have. Being an entrepreneur may be riskier than working your normal job. But the reward is greater especially if you're already reaping the benefits of being your own boss. This bundle’s ultimate goal is to help you build a mindset that will ensure your business venture will be successful. It will provide a step-by-step guide on how you can be a successful entrepreneur. This 2 in 1 bundle series includes the following audiobooks: 1. The Entrepreneurial State: The Ultimate Guide to Unstoppable Entrepreneurial Drive, Learn How You Can Develop the Grit and Determination to Make All Your Entrepreneurial Goals a Success 2. Entrepreneurial Mindset: The Ultimate Guide to Entrepreneurial Ideas, Learn Different Entrepreneurial Ideas and Opportunities That Can Inspire You To Start Your Own Successful Business Get your copy of Effective Entrepreneurs 2 in 1 Bundle today! https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481992 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481992]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Barbarians of Wealth: Protecting Yourself from Today's Financial Attilas Series: #20 of Agora Series Author: Sara Nunnally, Sandy Franks Narrator: Jo Anna Perrin Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 26 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Barbarians of Wealth examines the forces or specifically the select groups of people who directly impact the economy of the U.S and ultimately the prosperity of the American people. It shows how the decisions these people make severely cripple the prosperity of the masses. Author Sandy Franks draws direct comparison of these groups to the Barbarians of The Dark Ages.  After the fall of the Roman Empire, Europe was invaded many times over by various barbaric tribes. These barbaric tribes plundered villages through out Europe, destroying homes, farms, personal property, and ways of life. They destroyed the prosperity of the masses for their own personal gain. So who are the barbarians of modern times? Franks looks at the financial barbarians of today such as the Federal Reserve, major Wall Street institutions such as Goldman Sachs and AIG, and the banking system. Under barbaric leadership fraught with megalomania, credit bubbles were built and prosperity destroyed. This book blends the history of the federal reserve, banking system and modern day Wall Street institutions and congress as well as draw comparisons to barbarians of the dark ages. Sara Nunnally, Sandy Franks Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481992 thebookvoice.com 13:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481992]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Barbarians of Wealth: Protecting Yourself from Today's Financial Attilas Series: #20 of Agora Series Author: Sara Nunnally, Sandy Franks Narrator: Jo Anna Perrin Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 26 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Barbarians of Wealth examines the forces or specifically the select groups of people who directly impact the economy of the U.S and ultimately the prosperity of the American people. It shows how the decisions these people make severely cripple the prosperity of the masses. Author Sandy Franks draws direct comparison of these groups to the Barbarians of The Dark Ages.  After the fall of the Roman Empire, Europe was invaded many times over by various barbaric tribes. These barbaric tribes plundered villages through out Europe, destroying homes, farms, personal property, and ways of life. They destroyed the prosperity of the masses for their own personal gain. So who are the barbarians of modern times? Franks looks at the financial barbarians of today such as the Federal Reserve, major Wall Street institutions such as Goldman Sachs and AIG, and the banking system. Under barbaric leadership fraught with megalomania, credit bubbles were built and prosperity destroyed. This book blends the history of the federal reserve, banking system and modern day Wall Street institutions and congress as well as draw comparisons to barbarians of the dark ages. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481992]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Barbarians of Wealth: Protecting Yourself from Today's Financial Attilas Series: #20 of Agora Series Author: Sara Nunnally, Sandy Franks Narrator: Jo Anna Perrin Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 26 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Barbarians of Wealth examines the forces or specifically the select groups of people who directly impact the economy of the U.S and ultimately the prosperity of the American people. It shows how the decisions these people make severely cripple the prosperity of the masses. Author Sandy Franks draws direct comparison of these groups to the Barbarians of The Dark Ages.  After the fall of the Roman Empire, Europe was invaded many times over by various barbaric tribes. These barbaric tribes plundered villages through out Europe, destroying homes, farms, personal property, and ways of life. They destroyed the prosperity of the masses for their own personal gain. So who are the barbarians of modern times? Franks looks at the financial barbarians of today such as the Federal Reserve, major Wall Street institutions such as Goldman Sachs and AIG, and the banking system. Under barbaric leadership fraught with megalomania, credit bubbles were built and prosperity destroyed. This book blends the history of the federal reserve, banking system and modern day Wall Street institutions and congress as well as draw comparisons to barbarians of the dark ages. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481983 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481983]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Where Am I Eating? An Adventure Through the Global Food Economy Series: Part of Where Am I? Author: Kelsey Timmerman Narrator: David Ledoux Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 0 minutes Release date: August 1, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2010 imports accounted for 86% of America's seafood, 50% of its fresh fruit, and 18% of its fresh vegetables. Americans are now importing twice as much food as we were a decade ago. But what does this increased reliance on imported food mean for the people around the globe that produce our food the people that feed us? In the vein of the author's first book Where am I Wearing?, Where Am I Eating? will bridge the gap between global farmers and fisherman and American consumers. Not only will Timmerman set out on a global quest to meet the workers that nurture, harvest, and hunt our food, he will work alongside them: diving for lobster in Nicaragua, harvesting bananas in Costa Rica, lugging sacks of cocoa beans in Cote d'Ivoire, picking coffee beans in Colombia and tomatoes in Indiana. Through their lives he will explore the global food economy and the issues surrounding it such as globalization, workers and human rights, the global food crisis, fair trade, and immigration. Most books on the food industry, from Fast Food Nation to Omnivore's Dilemma, have focused on the environmental, political, and health aspects of what we eat. Where Am I Eating? shows the producers who anchor the opposite end of the global food economy. How does what we eat affect them? It will neither argue for or against the globalization of food, but simply personalize it by observing the hope and opportunity, and the lack of both, which the global food economy gives to the worlds poorest producers. Kelsey Timmerman Sat, 01 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481983 thebookvoice.com 11:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481983]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Where Am I Eating? An Adventure Through the Global Food Economy Series: Part of Where Am I? Author: Kelsey Timmerman Narrator: David Ledoux Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 0 minutes Release date: August 1, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2010 imports accounted for 86% of America's seafood, 50% of its fresh fruit, and 18% of its fresh vegetables. Americans are now importing twice as much food as we were a decade ago. But what does this increased reliance on imported food mean for the people around the globe that produce our food the people that feed us? In the vein of the author's first book Where am I Wearing?, Where Am I Eating? will bridge the gap between global farmers and fisherman and American consumers. Not only will Timmerman set out on a global quest to meet the workers that nurture, harvest, and hunt our food, he will work alongside them: diving for lobster in Nicaragua, harvesting bananas in Costa Rica, lugging sacks of cocoa beans in Cote d'Ivoire, picking coffee beans in Colombia and tomatoes in Indiana. Through their lives he will explore the global food economy and the issues surrounding it such as globalization, workers and human rights, the global food crisis, fair trade, and immigration. Most books on the food industry, from Fast Food Nation to Omnivore's Dilemma, have focused on the environmental, political, and health aspects of what we eat. Where Am I Eating? shows the producers who anchor the opposite end of the global food economy. How does what we eat affect them? It will neither argue for or against the globalization of food, but simply personalize it by observing the hope and opportunity, and the lack of both, which the global food economy gives to the worlds poorest producers. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481983]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Where Am I Eating? An Adventure Through the Global Food Economy Series: Part of Where Am I? Author: Kelsey Timmerman Narrator: David Ledoux Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 0 minutes Release date: August 1, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2010 imports accounted for 86% of America's seafood, 50% of its fresh fruit, and 18% of its fresh vegetables. Americans are now importing twice as much food as we were a decade ago. But what does this increased reliance on imported food mean for the people around the globe that produce our food the people that feed us? In the vein of the author's first book Where am I Wearing?, Where Am I Eating? will bridge the gap between global farmers and fisherman and American consumers. Not only will Timmerman set out on a global quest to meet the workers that nurture, harvest, and hunt our food, he will work alongside them: diving for lobster in Nicaragua, harvesting bananas in Costa Rica, lugging sacks of cocoa beans in Cote d'Ivoire, picking coffee beans in Colombia and tomatoes in Indiana. Through their lives he will explore the global food economy and the issues surrounding it such as globalization, workers and human rights, the global food crisis, fair trade, and immigration. Most books on the food industry, from Fast Food Nation to Omnivore's Dilemma, have focused on the environmental, political, and health aspects of what we eat. Where Am I Eating? shows the producers who anchor the opposite end of the global food economy. How does what we eat affect them? It will neither argue for or against the globalization of food, but simply personalize it by observing the hope and opportunity, and the lack of both, which the global food economy gives to the worlds poorest producers. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481924 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481924]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The End of Cheap China: Economic and Cultural Trends that Will Disrupt the World Author: Shaun Rein Narrator: Bill Roberts Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 21 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: China's days as a low cost production center are numbered. As China is gaining recognition for more than its low cost manufacturing, the glut of cheap Chinese labor is drying up. What does this mean for global business? America's economic growth for the past three decades has been largely attributed to the willingness of Chinese laborers to slave away in factories. As China begins to take on a more significant role in international affairs and as commodity prices rise, Americans face a deepening threat to their accustomed way of life and consumption. The book exposes 8 mega-trends that are catalyzing change in China, explains how those trends impact the rest of the world, and gives expedient tips as to how businesses can turn profit in the changing global marketplace. The book will show How rising labor and real estate costs are forcing manufacturers of cheap Chinese products to close, relocate, or move up the value stream How a restructuring economy moving away from export to domestic consumption will create opportunities for foreign brands to enter China's sales market as incomes rise How Chinese consumption will build pressure on the global commodities markets, causing inflation and friction with other nations This revised and updated paperback includes updated statitics, new information on the Chinese economy, and additional case studies to illuminate how China has developed. Shaun Rein Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481924 thebookvoice.com 7:21:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481924]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The End of Cheap China: Economic and Cultural Trends that Will Disrupt the World Author: Shaun Rein Narrator: Bill Roberts Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 21 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: China's days as a low cost production center are numbered. As China is gaining recognition for more than its low cost manufacturing, the glut of cheap Chinese labor is drying up. What does this mean for global business? America's economic growth for the past three decades has been largely attributed to the willingness of Chinese laborers to slave away in factories. As China begins to take on a more significant role in international affairs and as commodity prices rise, Americans face a deepening threat to their accustomed way of life and consumption. The book exposes 8 mega-trends that are catalyzing change in China, explains how those trends impact the rest of the world, and gives expedient tips as to how businesses can turn profit in the changing global marketplace. The book will show How rising labor and real estate costs are forcing manufacturers of cheap Chinese products to close, relocate, or move up the value stream How a restructuring economy moving away from export to domestic consumption will create opportunities for foreign brands to enter China's sales market as incomes rise How Chinese consumption will build pressure on the global commodities markets, causing inflation and friction with other nations This revised and updated paperback includes updated statitics, new information on the Chinese economy, and additional case studies to illuminate how China has developed. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/481924]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The End of Cheap China: Economic and Cultural Trends that Will Disrupt the World Author: Shaun Rein Narrator: Bill Roberts Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 21 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: China's days as a low cost production center are numbered. As China is gaining recognition for more than its low cost manufacturing, the glut of cheap Chinese labor is drying up. What does this mean for global business? America's economic growth for the past three decades has been largely attributed to the willingness of Chinese laborers to slave away in factories. As China begins to take on a more significant role in international affairs and as commodity prices rise, Americans face a deepening threat to their accustomed way of life and consumption. The book exposes 8 mega-trends that are catalyzing change in China, explains how those trends impact the rest of the world, and gives expedient tips as to how businesses can turn profit in the changing global marketplace. The book will show How rising labor and real estate costs are forcing manufacturers of cheap Chinese products to close, relocate, or move up the value stream How a restructuring economy moving away from export to domestic consumption will create opportunities for foreign brands to enter China's sales market as incomes rise How Chinese consumption will build pressure on the global commodities markets, causing inflation and friction with other nations This revised and updated paperback includes updated statitics, new information on the Chinese economy, and additional case studies to illuminate how China has developed. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/480442 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/480442]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Brexit Without the Bullshit: The Facts on Food, Jobs, Travel, and the NHS Author: Gavin Esler Narrator: Gavin Esler Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 25 minutes Release date: June 27, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Punchy, pithy and short.' – POLLY TOYNBEE, GUARDIAN COLUMNIST 'In an ideal world every citizen would read this essential book, and think hard.' – PROFESSOR AC GRAYLING, ACADEMIC The broadcaster and journalist Gavin Esler reveals the long-lasting impact of the most momentous change in Britain for decades. In seven succinct chapters, he charts the profound changes brought about by leaving the European Union on key areas of life in the United Kingdom: Food and diet Health and the NHS Jobs and industry Education Travel to Europe From the food markets of Kent to NHS operating theatres to the boardrooms of big employers, Brexit is packed with surprises. And Brexit Without the Bullshit is not about the Brexit you were told you were getting: it's about the one we're actually getting. From the author of How Britain Ends: English Nationalism and the Rebirth of Four Nations, A Scandalous Man, and Lessons From The Top, this is the ideal accompaniment to books on Brexit such as the Fintan O'Toole's Brexit Chronicles and Michel Barner's Secret Brexit Diaries. Instead of concentrating on the Brexit referendum campaign, it uncovers the fundamental changes caused by Brexit - and what they mean for ordinary life. REVIEWS 'If you want a pithy, sober, clear-headed summary of what Brexit is actually likely to look like, @gavinesler's new book is spot on. Such a welcome antidote to all the whipped up sentiment - calm, factual, rigorous.' – DR RACHEL CLARKE, NHS DOCTOR AND CAMPAIGNER 'Esler provides the evidence of what Brexit has already done to Britain and the harm that it s causing and will cause, in particular to the poorest in our society. A guide for all who want to understand what Brexit really means.' – JESSICA SIMOR QC 'A brilliant demolition of the lies and liars that created the Brexit mess. Should be required reading at his old stamping ground, the BBC.' – ALASTAIR CAMPBELL, WRITER AND BROADCASTER WHY I WROTE THIS BOOK - BY GAVIN ESLER In 2016 I did something I had never done before. I voted in the Brexit referendum without knowing what I was voting for or against. No one explained to me - or you - what Brexit would mean for our lives. Whether you voted Leave or Remain, we did not know the facts about Brexit, how it would affect our jobs, food, schools, universities, the NHS, our families, pets, travel arrangements, and even the supposed unity of the United Kingdom. In the years since the Brexit vote, the British government has continued to fail to explain the facts about Brexit, and so I decided to find out for myself. The result is my latest book, 'Brexit Without The Bullshit.' At first I thought that if Brexit were stripped of the bullshit — lies and deceit, scare stories and fantasies — there would be nothing left. But the facts about Brexit are so stark, there's plenty to discuss and think about. The key fact is this: Brexit is not an event. It is a process. Whether it happens or not, whatever version of leaving the EU we end up with, we will be forced to discuss Brexit for years to come. If we are to survive and perhaps thrive, we need to start with the facts. Gavin Esler CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1. Brexit & Our Food Chapter 2. Brexit, Our Health & the NHS Chapter 3. Brexit, Our Money & Our Jobs Chapter 4. Brexit & Our Children's Education Chapter 5. Brexit & Travel Chapter 6. Brexit & Our Country Chapter 7. A No Deal Brexit The Boring Bits: Glossary and Endnotes Gavin Esler Thu, 27 Jun 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/480442 thebookvoice.com 4:25:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/480442]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Brexit Without the Bullshit: The Facts on Food, Jobs, Travel, and the NHS Author: Gavin Esler Narrator: Gavin Esler Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 25 minutes Release date: June 27, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Punchy, pithy and short.' – POLLY TOYNBEE, GUARDIAN COLUMNIST 'In an ideal world every citizen would read this essential book, and think hard.' – PROFESSOR AC GRAYLING, ACADEMIC The broadcaster and journalist Gavin Esler reveals the long-lasting impact of the most momentous change in Britain for decades. In seven succinct chapters, he charts the profound changes brought about by leaving the European Union on key areas of life in the United Kingdom: Food and diet Health and the NHS Jobs and industry Education Travel to Europe From the food markets of Kent to NHS operating theatres to the boardrooms of big employers, Brexit is packed with surprises. And Brexit Without the Bullshit is not about the Brexit you were told you were getting: it's about the one we're actually getting. From the author of How Britain Ends: English Nationalism and the Rebirth of Four Nations, A Scandalous Man, and Lessons From The Top, this is the ideal accompaniment to books on Brexit such as the Fintan O'Toole's Brexit Chronicles and Michel Barner's Secret Brexit Diaries. Instead of concentrating on the Brexit referendum campaign, it uncovers the fundamental changes caused by Brexit - and what they mean for ordinary life. REVIEWS 'If you want a pithy, sober, clear-headed summary of what Brexit is actually likely to look like, @gavinesler's new book is spot on. Such a welcome antidote to all the whipped up sentiment - calm, factual, rigorous.' – DR RACHEL CLARKE, NHS DOCTOR AND CAMPAIGNER 'Esler provides the evidence of what Brexit has already done to Britain and the harm that it s causing and will cause, in particular to the poorest in our society. A guide for all who want to understand what Brexit really means.' – JESSICA SIMOR QC 'A brilliant demolition of the lies and liars that created the Brexit mess. Should be required reading at his old stamping ground, the BBC.' – ALASTAIR CAMPBELL, WRITER AND BROADCASTER WHY I WROTE THIS BOOK - BY GAVIN ESLER In 2016 I did something I had never done before. I voted in the Brexit referendum without knowing what I was voting for or against. No one explained to me - or you - what Brexit would mean for our lives. Whether you voted Leave or Remain, we did not know the facts about Brexit, how it would affect our jobs, food, schools, universities, the NHS, our families, pets, travel arrangements, and even the supposed unity of the United Kingdom. In the years since the Brexit vote, the British government has continued to fail to explain the facts about Brexit, and so I decided to find out for myself. The result is my latest book, 'Brexit Without The Bullshit.' At first I thought that if Brexit were stripped of the bullshit — lies and deceit, scare stories and fantasies — there would be nothing left. But the facts about Brexit are so stark, there's plenty to discuss and think about. The key fact is this: Brexit is not an event. It is a process. Whether it happens or not, whatever version of leaving the EU we end up with, we will be forced to discuss Brexit for years to come. If we are to survive and perhaps thrive, we need to start with the facts. Gavin Esler CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1. Brexit & Our Food Chapter 2. Brexit, Our Health & the NHS Chapter 3. Brexit, Our Money & Our Jobs Chapter 4. Brexit & Our Children's Education Chapter 5. Brexit & Travel Chapter 6. Brexit & Our Country Chapter 7. A No Deal Brexit The Boring Bits: Glossary and Endnotes Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/480442]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Brexit Without the Bullshit: The Facts on Food, Jobs, Travel, and the NHS Author: Gavin Esler Narrator: Gavin Esler Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 25 minutes Release date: June 27, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Punchy, pithy and short.' – POLLY TOYNBEE, GUARDIAN COLUMNIST 'In an ideal world every citizen would read this essential book, and think hard.' – PROFESSOR AC GRAYLING, ACADEMIC The broadcaster and journalist Gavin Esler reveals the long-lasting impact of the most momentous change in Britain for decades. In seven succinct chapters, he charts the profound changes brought about by leaving the European Union on key areas of life in the United Kingdom: Food and diet Health and the NHS Jobs and industry Education Travel to Europe From the food markets of Kent to NHS operating theatres to the boardrooms of big employers, Brexit is packed with surprises. And Brexit Without the Bullshit is not about the Brexit you were told you were getting: it's about the one we're actually getting. From the author of How Britain Ends: English Nationalism and the Rebirth of Four Nations, A Scandalous Man, and Lessons From The Top, this is the ideal accompaniment to books on Brexit such as the Fintan O'Toole's Brexit Chronicles and Michel Barner's Secret Brexit Diaries. Instead of concentrating on the Brexit referendum campaign, it uncovers the fundamental changes caused by Brexit - and what they mean for ordinary life. REVIEWS 'If you want a pithy, sober, clear-headed summary of what Brexit is actually likely to look like, @gavinesler's new book is spot on. Such a welcome antidote to all the whipped up sentiment - calm, factual, rigorous.' – DR RACHEL CLARKE, NHS DOCTOR AND CAMPAIGNER 'Esler provides the evidence of what Brexit has already done to Britain and the harm that it s causing and will cause, in particular to the poorest in our society. A guide for all who want to understand what Brexit really means.' – JESSICA SIMOR QC 'A brilliant demolition of the lies and liars that created the Brexit mess. Should be required reading at his old stamping ground, the BBC.' – ALASTAIR CAMPBELL, WRITER AND BROADCASTER WHY I WROTE THIS BOOK - BY GAVIN ESLER In 2016 I did something I had never done before. I voted in the Brexit referendum without knowing what I was voting for or against. No one explained to me - or you - what Brexit would mean for our lives. Whether you voted Leave or Remain, we did not know the facts about Brexit, how it would affect our jobs, food, schools, universities, the NHS, our families, pets, travel arrangements, and even the supposed unity of the United Kingdom. In the years since the Brexit vote, the British government has continued to fail to explain the facts about Brexit, and so I decided to find out for myself. The result is my latest book, 'Brexit Without The Bullshit.' At first I thought that if Brexit were stripped of the bullshit — lies and deceit, scare stories and fantasies — there would be nothing left. But the facts about Brexit are so stark, there's plenty to discuss and think about. The key fact is this: Brexit is not an event. It is a process. Whether it happens or not, whatever version of leaving the EU we end up with, we will be forced to discuss Brexit for years to come. If we are to survive and perhaps thrive, we need to start with the facts. Gavin Esler CONTENTS Introduction Chapter 1. Brexit & Our Food Chapter 2. Brexit, Our Health & the NHS Chapter 3. Brexit, Our Money & Our Jobs Chapter 4. Brexit & Our Children's Education Chapter 5. Brexit & Travel Chapter 6. Brexit & Our Country Chapter 7. A No Deal Brexit The Boring Bits: Glossary and Endnotes https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/479186 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/479186]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Nicht um jeden Preis: Mehr Gewinn, mehr Wert, mehr Freude im Business Author: Roman Kmenta Narrator: Roman Kmenta Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 37 minutes Release date: June 14, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Dieses Hörbuch ist extrem wertvoll für Marketing und Vertrieb, für Handel und Gewerbe, für Dienstleister und Selbstständige, für die Gründung und die Führung von Unternehmen. Es macht sich im barsten Sinne des Wortes 'bezahlt'. Warum? Es geht in diesem Hörbuch zwar darum, viel zu verkaufen, aber eben nicht um jeden Preis! Dabei geht es zwar um Pricing, aber nicht um Preisverhandlung. Vielmehr stehen Marketingstrategien im Mittelpunkt, mit denen Sie keine Preisverhandlungen mehr führen müssen. Nie mehr. Sie werden mit Staunen erfahren, dass aus Sicht der Verkaufspsychologie bzw. Preispsychologie der Preis nicht annähernd so wichtig ist, wie viele Unternehmen und Unternehmer glauben. Gleichzeitig wird Ihnen die enorme Bedeutung der richtigen Preisgestaltung, einer punktgenauen Positionierung und eines knackigen USP, mit dem Sie sich von der Konkurrenz differenzieren, für Ihren Erfolg dramatisch vor Augen geführt. In diesem Hörbuch erfahren Sie wie Sie die typischen Fallen, die zwar Ihren Umsatz steigern - nicht aber Deckungsbeiträge, Margen, Honorare und Gewinn - vermeiden. Wie das geht? Indem Sie in Marketing, Verkauf und Management kreativ sind und sich mittels innovativen Differenzierungsstrategien und kundenorientierter Marktpositionierung, Alleinstellungsmerkmale und Kundennutzen schaffen und Ihr Unternehmen zur Marke und damit einzigartig machen. Statt wie so viele Mitbewerber einfach nur Preise zu senken und so Erträge zu gefährden, erfahren Sie, wie Sie den Wert Ihres Angebotes steigern. Und ein höherer Wert zieht höhere Preise und Erträge nach sich. Dieses Hörbuch ist perfekt für Gründer und Start Ups und gleichzeitig für all jene Unternehmer und Unternehmen, die in schwierigen Märkten mit ihrem Geschäftsmodell gegen preisaggressive Konkurrenten kämpfen. Es zeigt profitable Wege aus der Preisschlacht auf. Profitieren Sie von den Ideen, Impulsen, Beispielen und Strategien eines praxiserprobten Experten aus dem Verkauf und Marketing. Selbständige, Unternehmer und Führungskräfte aller Branchen und Bereiche des Business erfahren, wie sie nicht nur Umsatz machen, sondern vor allem richtig Geld verdienen! Roman Kmenta Fri, 14 Jun 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/479186 thebookvoice.com 5:37:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/479186]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Nicht um jeden Preis: Mehr Gewinn, mehr Wert, mehr Freude im Business Author: Roman Kmenta Narrator: Roman Kmenta Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 37 minutes Release date: June 14, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Dieses Hörbuch ist extrem wertvoll für Marketing und Vertrieb, für Handel und Gewerbe, für Dienstleister und Selbstständige, für die Gründung und die Führung von Unternehmen. Es macht sich im barsten Sinne des Wortes 'bezahlt'. Warum? Es geht in diesem Hörbuch zwar darum, viel zu verkaufen, aber eben nicht um jeden Preis! Dabei geht es zwar um Pricing, aber nicht um Preisverhandlung. Vielmehr stehen Marketingstrategien im Mittelpunkt, mit denen Sie keine Preisverhandlungen mehr führen müssen. Nie mehr. Sie werden mit Staunen erfahren, dass aus Sicht der Verkaufspsychologie bzw. Preispsychologie der Preis nicht annähernd so wichtig ist, wie viele Unternehmen und Unternehmer glauben. Gleichzeitig wird Ihnen die enorme Bedeutung der richtigen Preisgestaltung, einer punktgenauen Positionierung und eines knackigen USP, mit dem Sie sich von der Konkurrenz differenzieren, für Ihren Erfolg dramatisch vor Augen geführt. In diesem Hörbuch erfahren Sie wie Sie die typischen Fallen, die zwar Ihren Umsatz steigern - nicht aber Deckungsbeiträge, Margen, Honorare und Gewinn - vermeiden. Wie das geht? Indem Sie in Marketing, Verkauf und Management kreativ sind und sich mittels innovativen Differenzierungsstrategien und kundenorientierter Marktpositionierung, Alleinstellungsmerkmale und Kundennutzen schaffen und Ihr Unternehmen zur Marke und damit einzigartig machen. Statt wie so viele Mitbewerber einfach nur Preise zu senken und so Erträge zu gefährden, erfahren Sie, wie Sie den Wert Ihres Angebotes steigern. Und ein höherer Wert zieht höhere Preise und Erträge nach sich. Dieses Hörbuch ist perfekt für Gründer und Start Ups und gleichzeitig für all jene Unternehmer und Unternehmen, die in schwierigen Märkten mit ihrem Geschäftsmodell gegen preisaggressive Konkurrenten kämpfen. Es zeigt profitable Wege aus der Preisschlacht auf. Profitieren Sie von den Ideen, Impulsen, Beispielen und Strategien eines praxiserprobten Experten aus dem Verkauf und Marketing. Selbständige, Unternehmer und Führungskräfte aller Branchen und Bereiche des Business erfahren, wie sie nicht nur Umsatz machen, sondern vor allem richtig Geld verdienen! Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/479186]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Nicht um jeden Preis: Mehr Gewinn, mehr Wert, mehr Freude im Business Author: Roman Kmenta Narrator: Roman Kmenta Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 37 minutes Release date: June 14, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Dieses Hörbuch ist extrem wertvoll für Marketing und Vertrieb, für Handel und Gewerbe, für Dienstleister und Selbstständige, für die Gründung und die Führung von Unternehmen. Es macht sich im barsten Sinne des Wortes 'bezahlt'. Warum? Es geht in diesem Hörbuch zwar darum, viel zu verkaufen, aber eben nicht um jeden Preis! Dabei geht es zwar um Pricing, aber nicht um Preisverhandlung. Vielmehr stehen Marketingstrategien im Mittelpunkt, mit denen Sie keine Preisverhandlungen mehr führen müssen. Nie mehr. Sie werden mit Staunen erfahren, dass aus Sicht der Verkaufspsychologie bzw. Preispsychologie der Preis nicht annähernd so wichtig ist, wie viele Unternehmen und Unternehmer glauben. Gleichzeitig wird Ihnen die enorme Bedeutung der richtigen Preisgestaltung, einer punktgenauen Positionierung und eines knackigen USP, mit dem Sie sich von der Konkurrenz differenzieren, für Ihren Erfolg dramatisch vor Augen geführt. In diesem Hörbuch erfahren Sie wie Sie die typischen Fallen, die zwar Ihren Umsatz steigern - nicht aber Deckungsbeiträge, Margen, Honorare und Gewinn - vermeiden. Wie das geht? Indem Sie in Marketing, Verkauf und Management kreativ sind und sich mittels innovativen Differenzierungsstrategien und kundenorientierter Marktpositionierung, Alleinstellungsmerkmale und Kundennutzen schaffen und Ihr Unternehmen zur Marke und damit einzigartig machen. Statt wie so viele Mitbewerber einfach nur Preise zu senken und so Erträge zu gefährden, erfahren Sie, wie Sie den Wert Ihres Angebotes steigern. Und ein höherer Wert zieht höhere Preise und Erträge nach sich. Dieses Hörbuch ist perfekt für Gründer und Start Ups und gleichzeitig für all jene Unternehmer und Unternehmen, die in schwierigen Märkten mit ihrem Geschäftsmodell gegen preisaggressive Konkurrenten kämpfen. Es zeigt profitable Wege aus der Preisschlacht auf. Profitieren Sie von den Ideen, Impulsen, Beispielen und Strategien eines praxiserprobten Experten aus dem Verkauf und Marketing. Selbständige, Unternehmer und Führungskräfte aller Branchen und Bereiche des Business erfahren, wie sie nicht nur Umsatz machen, sondern vor allem richtig Geld verdienen! https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/478261 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/478261]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - DSGVO Hörbuch: Datenschutzgrundverordnung Author: Andreas Schwarzlmüller Narrator: Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger, Andreas Schwarzlmüller Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 51 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: DSGVO für Kreative Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger erklärt alles zur neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung Es bleibt leider keinem aus. Wenn wir Mahnungen und Strafen entgehen wollen, dann müssen wir uns mit dieser neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung beschäftigen, ob wir wollen oder nicht. Doch damit diese Weiterbildung extrem spannend und kurzweilig wird, sind alle Beispiele praxisorientiert und werden anhand von kreativen Jobs dargestellt. Dieses Hörbuch ist für alle Selbstständigen, Unternehmer und Freelancer. Für all jene Personen, die eine Dienstleistung, ein Produkt oder einen Service anbieten, die Kundendaten haben, die eine Webseite betreiben - eigentlich für alle Personen. Denn die Datenschutzgrundverordnung trat mit 25. Mai 2018 in Kraft und nun muss jeder diese Verordnung umgesetzt haben. Ansonsten drohen hohe Strafen. In diesem Hörbuch bekommst du vom Rechtsanwalt Mag. Lanzinger alle Infos zur neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung. Was du ändern musst, welche Strategien du nicht mehr verwenden darfst und wie du dich vor extrem hohen Strafen schützen kannst. Andreas wird das direkt von der Juristen-Sprache, denn seien wir uns ehrlich die Sprache verstehen nur wenige, für dich ins Deutsche übersetzen. Andreas Schwarzlmüller Tue, 19 Nov 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/478261 thebookvoice.com 4:51:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/478261]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - DSGVO Hörbuch: Datenschutzgrundverordnung Author: Andreas Schwarzlmüller Narrator: Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger, Andreas Schwarzlmüller Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 51 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: DSGVO für Kreative Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger erklärt alles zur neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung Es bleibt leider keinem aus. Wenn wir Mahnungen und Strafen entgehen wollen, dann müssen wir uns mit dieser neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung beschäftigen, ob wir wollen oder nicht. Doch damit diese Weiterbildung extrem spannend und kurzweilig wird, sind alle Beispiele praxisorientiert und werden anhand von kreativen Jobs dargestellt. Dieses Hörbuch ist für alle Selbstständigen, Unternehmer und Freelancer. Für all jene Personen, die eine Dienstleistung, ein Produkt oder einen Service anbieten, die Kundendaten haben, die eine Webseite betreiben - eigentlich für alle Personen. Denn die Datenschutzgrundverordnung trat mit 25. Mai 2018 in Kraft und nun muss jeder diese Verordnung umgesetzt haben. Ansonsten drohen hohe Strafen. In diesem Hörbuch bekommst du vom Rechtsanwalt Mag. Lanzinger alle Infos zur neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung. Was du ändern musst, welche Strategien du nicht mehr verwenden darfst und wie du dich vor extrem hohen Strafen schützen kannst. Andreas wird das direkt von der Juristen-Sprache, denn seien wir uns ehrlich die Sprache verstehen nur wenige, für dich ins Deutsche übersetzen. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/478261]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - DSGVO Hörbuch: Datenschutzgrundverordnung Author: Andreas Schwarzlmüller Narrator: Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger, Andreas Schwarzlmüller Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 51 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: DSGVO für Kreative Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger erklärt alles zur neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung Es bleibt leider keinem aus. Wenn wir Mahnungen und Strafen entgehen wollen, dann müssen wir uns mit dieser neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung beschäftigen, ob wir wollen oder nicht. Doch damit diese Weiterbildung extrem spannend und kurzweilig wird, sind alle Beispiele praxisorientiert und werden anhand von kreativen Jobs dargestellt. Dieses Hörbuch ist für alle Selbstständigen, Unternehmer und Freelancer. Für all jene Personen, die eine Dienstleistung, ein Produkt oder einen Service anbieten, die Kundendaten haben, die eine Webseite betreiben - eigentlich für alle Personen. Denn die Datenschutzgrundverordnung trat mit 25. Mai 2018 in Kraft und nun muss jeder diese Verordnung umgesetzt haben. Ansonsten drohen hohe Strafen. In diesem Hörbuch bekommst du vom Rechtsanwalt Mag. Lanzinger alle Infos zur neuen Datenschutzgrundverordnung. Was du ändern musst, welche Strategien du nicht mehr verwenden darfst und wie du dich vor extrem hohen Strafen schützen kannst. Andreas wird das direkt von der Juristen-Sprache, denn seien wir uns ehrlich die Sprache verstehen nur wenige, für dich ins Deutsche übersetzen. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/477358 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/477358]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Mut zur Digitalisierung. Das Menschliche bleibt auch bei der Digitalisierung das Wichtigste Author: Edith Karl Narrator: Edith Karl Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 6 minutes Release date: October 26, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Warum du dieses Hörbuch hören solltest Du wirst erleichtert sein, weil die Digitalisierung deines Unternehmens danach nicht mehr ein Buch mit sieben Siegeln für dich ist. Du wirst erstaunt feststellen, dass der Mensch gerade wegen der Digitalisierung wichtiger ist als je zuvor. Du lernst einfache Wege kennen, um deine Sozialkompetenz und die deiner MitarbeiterInnen massiv zu erhöhen. Buzzwords wie Agilität, crossmodales Arbeiten und New Work verlieren ihren Schrecken. Purpose wird dir in Fleisch und Blut übergehen. Du erhältst einen Überblick über Digitalisiertes Marketing. So begeisterst auch du deine MitarbeiterInnen und Kunden mit kluger Digitalisierung, Internetmarketing und erhöhter Sozialkompetenz. Edith Karl Mon, 26 Oct 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/477358 thebookvoice.com 4:6:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/477358]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Mut zur Digitalisierung. Das Menschliche bleibt auch bei der Digitalisierung das Wichtigste Author: Edith Karl Narrator: Edith Karl Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 6 minutes Release date: October 26, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Warum du dieses Hörbuch hören solltest Du wirst erleichtert sein, weil die Digitalisierung deines Unternehmens danach nicht mehr ein Buch mit sieben Siegeln für dich ist. Du wirst erstaunt feststellen, dass der Mensch gerade wegen der Digitalisierung wichtiger ist als je zuvor. Du lernst einfache Wege kennen, um deine Sozialkompetenz und die deiner MitarbeiterInnen massiv zu erhöhen. Buzzwords wie Agilität, crossmodales Arbeiten und New Work verlieren ihren Schrecken. Purpose wird dir in Fleisch und Blut übergehen. Du erhältst einen Überblick über Digitalisiertes Marketing. So begeisterst auch du deine MitarbeiterInnen und Kunden mit kluger Digitalisierung, Internetmarketing und erhöhter Sozialkompetenz. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/477358]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Mut zur Digitalisierung. Das Menschliche bleibt auch bei der Digitalisierung das Wichtigste Author: Edith Karl Narrator: Edith Karl Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 6 minutes Release date: October 26, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Warum du dieses Hörbuch hören solltest Du wirst erleichtert sein, weil die Digitalisierung deines Unternehmens danach nicht mehr ein Buch mit sieben Siegeln für dich ist. Du wirst erstaunt feststellen, dass der Mensch gerade wegen der Digitalisierung wichtiger ist als je zuvor. Du lernst einfache Wege kennen, um deine Sozialkompetenz und die deiner MitarbeiterInnen massiv zu erhöhen. Buzzwords wie Agilität, crossmodales Arbeiten und New Work verlieren ihren Schrecken. Purpose wird dir in Fleisch und Blut übergehen. Du erhältst einen Überblick über Digitalisiertes Marketing. So begeisterst auch du deine MitarbeiterInnen und Kunden mit kluger Digitalisierung, Internetmarketing und erhöhter Sozialkompetenz. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476905 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476905]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Deine beste Investition Author: Patrick Greiner Narrator: Patrick Greiner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 45 minutes Release date: October 31, 2018 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: DEINE BESTE INVESTITION! Wie du das gesamte Provisionsmodell der Finanzbranche zu deinem eigenen, deutlich finanziellen Vorteil nahezu komplett ausschalten kannst. 98% der Deutschen wissen nicht, dass ihre Investments & Anlagen - wie Lebensversicherungen, Altersvorsorge & Depots etc. - nach Abzug von Provisions- und Produktkosten, sowie unter Berücksichtigung der Inflation, kaum Gewinne erzielen können. Patrick Greiner ändert das jetzt! Was Du in diesem Buch lernen wirst: - Die 3 wichtigsten Schritte für das neue Geld-Bewusstsein - Wie Du dein finanzielles Mindset neu programmierst - Stelle deinen persönlichen Finanzplan auf und optimiere ihn - Erkenne was finanzielle Freiheit wirklich für dich bedeutet - Warum Du mit provisionsgesteuerten Finanzprodukten nie vermögend wirst - Wie du deine Investitionen vor Provisionen schützt - Wie du das Gebührenmodell der Finanzbranche zu deinem finanziellen Vorteil ausschaltest - Warum Kursschwankungen positiv für dich sind - Was das Wirtschaftsdreieck für deinen finanziellen Erfolg bedeutet - Wie du dir Kick-backs (versteckte Provisionen) auf dein eigenes Konto zurückerstatten lässt - Wie Du den für dich richtigen Finanzberater findest - Wie du die 20 Spielregeln für mehr Geld anwendest - Wie dir der 5-Euro-Effekt im Jahr mindestens 1000€ einbringt - Lerne den Unterschied zwischen Verbindlichkeiten und Investitionen kennen - Die 10 unerlässlichen Schritte für noch mehr finanziellen & persönlichen Erfolg in deinem Leben Patrick Greiner Wed, 31 Oct 2018 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476905 thebookvoice.com 3:45:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476905]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Deine beste Investition Author: Patrick Greiner Narrator: Patrick Greiner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 45 minutes Release date: October 31, 2018 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: DEINE BESTE INVESTITION! Wie du das gesamte Provisionsmodell der Finanzbranche zu deinem eigenen, deutlich finanziellen Vorteil nahezu komplett ausschalten kannst. 98% der Deutschen wissen nicht, dass ihre Investments & Anlagen - wie Lebensversicherungen, Altersvorsorge & Depots etc. - nach Abzug von Provisions- und Produktkosten, sowie unter Berücksichtigung der Inflation, kaum Gewinne erzielen können. Patrick Greiner ändert das jetzt! Was Du in diesem Buch lernen wirst: - Die 3 wichtigsten Schritte für das neue Geld-Bewusstsein - Wie Du dein finanzielles Mindset neu programmierst - Stelle deinen persönlichen Finanzplan auf und optimiere ihn - Erkenne was finanzielle Freiheit wirklich für dich bedeutet - Warum Du mit provisionsgesteuerten Finanzprodukten nie vermögend wirst - Wie du deine Investitionen vor Provisionen schützt - Wie du das Gebührenmodell der Finanzbranche zu deinem finanziellen Vorteil ausschaltest - Warum Kursschwankungen positiv für dich sind - Was das Wirtschaftsdreieck für deinen finanziellen Erfolg bedeutet - Wie du dir Kick-backs (versteckte Provisionen) auf dein eigenes Konto zurückerstatten lässt - Wie Du den für dich richtigen Finanzberater findest - Wie du die 20 Spielregeln für mehr Geld anwendest - Wie dir der 5-Euro-Effekt im Jahr mindestens 1000€ einbringt - Lerne den Unterschied zwischen Verbindlichkeiten und Investitionen kennen - Die 10 unerlässlichen Schritte für noch mehr finanziellen & persönlichen Erfolg in deinem Leben Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476905]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Deine beste Investition Author: Patrick Greiner Narrator: Patrick Greiner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 45 minutes Release date: October 31, 2018 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: DEINE BESTE INVESTITION! Wie du das gesamte Provisionsmodell der Finanzbranche zu deinem eigenen, deutlich finanziellen Vorteil nahezu komplett ausschalten kannst. 98% der Deutschen wissen nicht, dass ihre Investments & Anlagen - wie Lebensversicherungen, Altersvorsorge & Depots etc. - nach Abzug von Provisions- und Produktkosten, sowie unter Berücksichtigung der Inflation, kaum Gewinne erzielen können. Patrick Greiner ändert das jetzt! Was Du in diesem Buch lernen wirst: - Die 3 wichtigsten Schritte für das neue Geld-Bewusstsein - Wie Du dein finanzielles Mindset neu programmierst - Stelle deinen persönlichen Finanzplan auf und optimiere ihn - Erkenne was finanzielle Freiheit wirklich für dich bedeutet - Warum Du mit provisionsgesteuerten Finanzprodukten nie vermögend wirst - Wie du deine Investitionen vor Provisionen schützt - Wie du das Gebührenmodell der Finanzbranche zu deinem finanziellen Vorteil ausschaltest - Warum Kursschwankungen positiv für dich sind - Was das Wirtschaftsdreieck für deinen finanziellen Erfolg bedeutet - Wie du dir Kick-backs (versteckte Provisionen) auf dein eigenes Konto zurückerstatten lässt - Wie Du den für dich richtigen Finanzberater findest - Wie du die 20 Spielregeln für mehr Geld anwendest - Wie dir der 5-Euro-Effekt im Jahr mindestens 1000€ einbringt - Lerne den Unterschied zwischen Verbindlichkeiten und Investitionen kennen - Die 10 unerlässlichen Schritte für noch mehr finanziellen & persönlichen Erfolg in deinem Leben https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476034 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476034]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Urheberrecht: Hörbuch für Kreative Author: Andreas Schwarzlmüller Narrator: Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger, Andreas Schwarzlmüller Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 59 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Urheberrecht für Kreative Wie du im Dschungel des Urheberrechts überleben kannst Rechtsanwalt Mag. Michael Lanzinger erklärt hier alle wichtigen Aspekte zum Thema Urheberrecht speziell für Kreative. Es bleibt leider keinem aus. Wenn wir Mahnungen und Strafen entgehen wollen, dann müssen wir uns mit dem Urheberrecht beschäftigen, ob wir wollen oder nicht. Wusstest du, dass du zwar den Eiffelturm in Paris bei Tag, aber nicht bei Nacht fotografieren darfst? Warum ist das so? Rechtsanwalt Mag. Lanzinger klärt auf. Damit diese Weiterbildung extrem spannend und kurzweilig bleibt, sind alle Beispiele praxisorientiert und werden anhand von kreativen Jobs dargestellt - hauptsächlich Fotografen. Des Weiteren brauchst du keine Angst vor der Juristen-Sprache zu haben. Andreas, Hochzeitsvideograf und Unternehmer übersetzt dir alles auf verständliche Weise, denn wenn Andreas es versteht, dann hat es jeder verstanden. Versprochen. Andreas Schwarzlmüller Tue, 19 Nov 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476034 thebookvoice.com 2:59:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476034]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Urheberrecht: Hörbuch für Kreative Author: Andreas Schwarzlmüller Narrator: Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger, Andreas Schwarzlmüller Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 59 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Urheberrecht für Kreative Wie du im Dschungel des Urheberrechts überleben kannst Rechtsanwalt Mag. Michael Lanzinger erklärt hier alle wichtigen Aspekte zum Thema Urheberrecht speziell für Kreative. Es bleibt leider keinem aus. Wenn wir Mahnungen und Strafen entgehen wollen, dann müssen wir uns mit dem Urheberrecht beschäftigen, ob wir wollen oder nicht. Wusstest du, dass du zwar den Eiffelturm in Paris bei Tag, aber nicht bei Nacht fotografieren darfst? Warum ist das so? Rechtsanwalt Mag. Lanzinger klärt auf. Damit diese Weiterbildung extrem spannend und kurzweilig bleibt, sind alle Beispiele praxisorientiert und werden anhand von kreativen Jobs dargestellt - hauptsächlich Fotografen. Des Weiteren brauchst du keine Angst vor der Juristen-Sprache zu haben. Andreas, Hochzeitsvideograf und Unternehmer übersetzt dir alles auf verständliche Weise, denn wenn Andreas es versteht, dann hat es jeder verstanden. Versprochen. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/476034]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Urheberrecht: Hörbuch für Kreative Author: Andreas Schwarzlmüller Narrator: Rechtsanwalt Lanzinger, Andreas Schwarzlmüller Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 59 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Urheberrecht für Kreative Wie du im Dschungel des Urheberrechts überleben kannst Rechtsanwalt Mag. Michael Lanzinger erklärt hier alle wichtigen Aspekte zum Thema Urheberrecht speziell für Kreative. Es bleibt leider keinem aus. Wenn wir Mahnungen und Strafen entgehen wollen, dann müssen wir uns mit dem Urheberrecht beschäftigen, ob wir wollen oder nicht. Wusstest du, dass du zwar den Eiffelturm in Paris bei Tag, aber nicht bei Nacht fotografieren darfst? Warum ist das so? Rechtsanwalt Mag. Lanzinger klärt auf. Damit diese Weiterbildung extrem spannend und kurzweilig bleibt, sind alle Beispiele praxisorientiert und werden anhand von kreativen Jobs dargestellt - hauptsächlich Fotografen. Des Weiteren brauchst du keine Angst vor der Juristen-Sprache zu haben. Andreas, Hochzeitsvideograf und Unternehmer übersetzt dir alles auf verständliche Weise, denn wenn Andreas es versteht, dann hat es jeder verstanden. Versprochen. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/475142 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/475142]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Die Quandts: Ihr leiser Aufstieg zur mächtigsten Wirtschaftsdynastie Deutschlands Author: Rüdiger Jungbluth Narrator: Olaf Bison, Stefanie Mau, Olaf Pessler, Susanne Grawe Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 38 minutes Release date: September 13, 2004 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In seinem Erfolgsbuch, das Spitzenplatzierungen auf den Bestsellerlisten von Focus, Welt, Manager Magazin und Wirtschaftswoche erreichte, porträtiert Rüdiger Jungbluth die mächtigste Industriellendynastie Deutschlands. Der Erfolg der Quandts ist ein Lehrstück für das Zusammenspiel von Familientradition, Wirtschaft und Macht in Deutschland. Trotzdem haben es die Quandts bislang verstanden, für die Öffentlichkeit weitgehend unsichtbar zu bleiben. Rüdiger Jungbluth Mon, 13 Sep 2004 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/475142 thebookvoice.com 2:38:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/475142]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Die Quandts: Ihr leiser Aufstieg zur mächtigsten Wirtschaftsdynastie Deutschlands Author: Rüdiger Jungbluth Narrator: Olaf Bison, Stefanie Mau, Olaf Pessler, Susanne Grawe Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 38 minutes Release date: September 13, 2004 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In seinem Erfolgsbuch, das Spitzenplatzierungen auf den Bestsellerlisten von Focus, Welt, Manager Magazin und Wirtschaftswoche erreichte, porträtiert Rüdiger Jungbluth die mächtigste Industriellendynastie Deutschlands. Der Erfolg der Quandts ist ein Lehrstück für das Zusammenspiel von Familientradition, Wirtschaft und Macht in Deutschland. Trotzdem haben es die Quandts bislang verstanden, für die Öffentlichkeit weitgehend unsichtbar zu bleiben. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/475142]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Die Quandts: Ihr leiser Aufstieg zur mächtigsten Wirtschaftsdynastie Deutschlands Author: Rüdiger Jungbluth Narrator: Olaf Bison, Stefanie Mau, Olaf Pessler, Susanne Grawe Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 38 minutes Release date: September 13, 2004 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In seinem Erfolgsbuch, das Spitzenplatzierungen auf den Bestsellerlisten von Focus, Welt, Manager Magazin und Wirtschaftswoche erreichte, porträtiert Rüdiger Jungbluth die mächtigste Industriellendynastie Deutschlands. Der Erfolg der Quandts ist ein Lehrstück für das Zusammenspiel von Familientradition, Wirtschaft und Macht in Deutschland. Trotzdem haben es die Quandts bislang verstanden, für die Öffentlichkeit weitgehend unsichtbar zu bleiben. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/473354 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/473354]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Warum die Reichen immer reicher werden Author: Robert T. Kiyosaki, Tom Wheelwright Narrator: Stefan Lehnen Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 11 minutes Release date: June 26, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Zur Schule gehen, hart arbeiten, sparen, ein Haus kaufen, Schulden begleichen und langfristig investieren - das ist für viele der schlechteste Weg, um reich zu werden! Robert T. Kiyosaki weiß, wovon er spricht: In seiner eigenen Vergangenheit erlebte er, dass es sein hart arbeitender 'Poor Dad' nie zu etwas brachte, während sein Mentor 'Rich Dad' Geld für sich arbeiten ließ und zu großem Wohlstand kam. Doch warum schaffen so viele Menschen den Schritt hin zur finanziellen Freiheit nicht? Weil die Reichen über DIE Art finanzielle Bildung verfügen, die es ihnen ermöglicht, erfolgreich zu sein. Und die Armen? Sie lernen in der Schule vieles - nur nicht, wie man mit Geld umgeht. Die traditionelle Schul- und Universitätsbildung ist dafür verantwortlich, dass selbst hochgebildete Menschen ein Leben weit unter ihren Möglichkeiten leben. Was Bildung in Sachen Finanzen wirklich ist, wie Sie diese erlangen und für sich nutzen können, zeigt Kiyosaki in seinem neuen Bestseller. Robert T. Kiyosaki, Tom Wheelwright Wed, 26 Jun 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/473354 thebookvoice.com 7:11:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/473354]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Warum die Reichen immer reicher werden Author: Robert T. Kiyosaki, Tom Wheelwright Narrator: Stefan Lehnen Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 11 minutes Release date: June 26, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Zur Schule gehen, hart arbeiten, sparen, ein Haus kaufen, Schulden begleichen und langfristig investieren - das ist für viele der schlechteste Weg, um reich zu werden! Robert T. Kiyosaki weiß, wovon er spricht: In seiner eigenen Vergangenheit erlebte er, dass es sein hart arbeitender 'Poor Dad' nie zu etwas brachte, während sein Mentor 'Rich Dad' Geld für sich arbeiten ließ und zu großem Wohlstand kam. Doch warum schaffen so viele Menschen den Schritt hin zur finanziellen Freiheit nicht? Weil die Reichen über DIE Art finanzielle Bildung verfügen, die es ihnen ermöglicht, erfolgreich zu sein. Und die Armen? Sie lernen in der Schule vieles - nur nicht, wie man mit Geld umgeht. Die traditionelle Schul- und Universitätsbildung ist dafür verantwortlich, dass selbst hochgebildete Menschen ein Leben weit unter ihren Möglichkeiten leben. Was Bildung in Sachen Finanzen wirklich ist, wie Sie diese erlangen und für sich nutzen können, zeigt Kiyosaki in seinem neuen Bestseller. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/473354]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Warum die Reichen immer reicher werden Author: Robert T. Kiyosaki, Tom Wheelwright Narrator: Stefan Lehnen Format: Abridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 11 minutes Release date: June 26, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Zur Schule gehen, hart arbeiten, sparen, ein Haus kaufen, Schulden begleichen und langfristig investieren - das ist für viele der schlechteste Weg, um reich zu werden! Robert T. Kiyosaki weiß, wovon er spricht: In seiner eigenen Vergangenheit erlebte er, dass es sein hart arbeitender 'Poor Dad' nie zu etwas brachte, während sein Mentor 'Rich Dad' Geld für sich arbeiten ließ und zu großem Wohlstand kam. Doch warum schaffen so viele Menschen den Schritt hin zur finanziellen Freiheit nicht? Weil die Reichen über DIE Art finanzielle Bildung verfügen, die es ihnen ermöglicht, erfolgreich zu sein. Und die Armen? Sie lernen in der Schule vieles - nur nicht, wie man mit Geld umgeht. Die traditionelle Schul- und Universitätsbildung ist dafür verantwortlich, dass selbst hochgebildete Menschen ein Leben weit unter ihren Möglichkeiten leben. Was Bildung in Sachen Finanzen wirklich ist, wie Sie diese erlangen und für sich nutzen können, zeigt Kiyosaki in seinem neuen Bestseller. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/469419 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/469419]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Einstieg ins Customer Relationship Management Author: Kristoffer Ditz Narrator: Kristoffer Ditz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 1 minute Release date: August 20, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lernen Sie die Grundlagen aus dem CRM kennen ALLGEMEIN Kundenmanagement ist heute in Unternehmen nicht mehr wegzudenken. War es früher noch der Verkäufer/Vertriebsleiter, der diese Aufgabe übernahm, sind es heute eigenständige Positionen. Vor gut 70 Jahren konzentrierten die Unternehmen sich primär auf das Produkt sind es heute die Bedürfnisse des Kunden, die in den Fokus gerückt sind. Von daher ist ein professionelles Customer Relationship Management unerlässlich. In diesem Kurs lernen Sie die Grundlagen des CRM. INHALT - Was ist CRM - Kundenorientierung - Kundenzufriedenheit - Reklamationen - Qualitätsmanagement Kristoffer Ditz Tue, 20 Aug 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/469419 thebookvoice.com 1:1:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/469419]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Einstieg ins Customer Relationship Management Author: Kristoffer Ditz Narrator: Kristoffer Ditz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 1 minute Release date: August 20, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lernen Sie die Grundlagen aus dem CRM kennen ALLGEMEIN Kundenmanagement ist heute in Unternehmen nicht mehr wegzudenken. War es früher noch der Verkäufer/Vertriebsleiter, der diese Aufgabe übernahm, sind es heute eigenständige Positionen. Vor gut 70 Jahren konzentrierten die Unternehmen sich primär auf das Produkt sind es heute die Bedürfnisse des Kunden, die in den Fokus gerückt sind. Von daher ist ein professionelles Customer Relationship Management unerlässlich. In diesem Kurs lernen Sie die Grundlagen des CRM. INHALT - Was ist CRM - Kundenorientierung - Kundenzufriedenheit - Reklamationen - Qualitätsmanagement Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/469419]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Einstieg ins Customer Relationship Management Author: Kristoffer Ditz Narrator: Kristoffer Ditz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 1 hour 1 minute Release date: August 20, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lernen Sie die Grundlagen aus dem CRM kennen ALLGEMEIN Kundenmanagement ist heute in Unternehmen nicht mehr wegzudenken. War es früher noch der Verkäufer/Vertriebsleiter, der diese Aufgabe übernahm, sind es heute eigenständige Positionen. Vor gut 70 Jahren konzentrierten die Unternehmen sich primär auf das Produkt sind es heute die Bedürfnisse des Kunden, die in den Fokus gerückt sind. Von daher ist ein professionelles Customer Relationship Management unerlässlich. In diesem Kurs lernen Sie die Grundlagen des CRM. INHALT - Was ist CRM - Kundenorientierung - Kundenzufriedenheit - Reklamationen - Qualitätsmanagement https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/466887 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/466887]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Day the World Stops Shopping: How ending consumerism gives us a better life and a greener world Author: J. B. Mackinnon Narrator: Kaleo Griffith Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 53 minutes Release date: June 3, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. We are using up the planet at almost double the rate it can regenerate. To support our economies, we're told we must shop now like we've never shopped before. And whilst we can do it more responsibly, the scale of our consumption remains the biggest factor in the ruination of the planet. Yet our reliance on stuff continues to grow. But what would our world look like if we stopped? Would civilisation collapse? Would the planet's ecology be reborn? What would happen to the way we think, make products, use time, express our individuality? Would life be better - or worse? Visiting places where economies have experienced temporary shut-downs, artisan producers, zero-consumption societies and bringing together a host of expert views, this is both a deeply reported thought-experiment, a history of our relationship with consumption, and a story about the future. Our private choices are putting the world in peril. The Day the World Stops Shopping is an essential exploration of who we are and what we use, and a vision of a more sustainable world. © J. B. MacKinnon 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 J. B. Mackinnon Thu, 03 Jun 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/466887 thebookvoice.com 11:53:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/466887]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Day the World Stops Shopping: How ending consumerism gives us a better life and a greener world Author: J. B. Mackinnon Narrator: Kaleo Griffith Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 53 minutes Release date: June 3, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. We are using up the planet at almost double the rate it can regenerate. To support our economies, we're told we must shop now like we've never shopped before. And whilst we can do it more responsibly, the scale of our consumption remains the biggest factor in the ruination of the planet. Yet our reliance on stuff continues to grow. But what would our world look like if we stopped? Would civilisation collapse? Would the planet's ecology be reborn? What would happen to the way we think, make products, use time, express our individuality? Would life be better - or worse? Visiting places where economies have experienced temporary shut-downs, artisan producers, zero-consumption societies and bringing together a host of expert views, this is both a deeply reported thought-experiment, a history of our relationship with consumption, and a story about the future. Our private choices are putting the world in peril. The Day the World Stops Shopping is an essential exploration of who we are and what we use, and a vision of a more sustainable world. © J. B. MacKinnon 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/466887]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Day the World Stops Shopping: How ending consumerism gives us a better life and a greener world Author: J. B. Mackinnon Narrator: Kaleo Griffith Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 53 minutes Release date: June 3, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. We are using up the planet at almost double the rate it can regenerate. To support our economies, we're told we must shop now like we've never shopped before. And whilst we can do it more responsibly, the scale of our consumption remains the biggest factor in the ruination of the planet. Yet our reliance on stuff continues to grow. But what would our world look like if we stopped? Would civilisation collapse? Would the planet's ecology be reborn? What would happen to the way we think, make products, use time, express our individuality? Would life be better - or worse? Visiting places where economies have experienced temporary shut-downs, artisan producers, zero-consumption societies and bringing together a host of expert views, this is both a deeply reported thought-experiment, a history of our relationship with consumption, and a story about the future. Our private choices are putting the world in peril. The Day the World Stops Shopping is an essential exploration of who we are and what we use, and a vision of a more sustainable world. © J. B. MacKinnon 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465916 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465916]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Re-Made in the USA: How We Can Restore Jobs, Retool Manufacturing, and Compete With the World Author: Todd Lipscomb Narrator: Maurice England Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 25 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: There is a nagging feeling that the U.S. is slipping as a nation and the people are powerless about doing anything to fix it.  Issues on jobs, quality, product safety, wages, the economy, and status as the world's leading superpower are all tied together with the massive trade deficit. Re-Made in the USA addresses these issues from the author's firsthand observations and analysis as an American business person with extensive international expertise.  The book then motivates the reader to take positive action to get the nation back on track.  People will pick up the book because they are worried, but finish empowered. America's future is on the decline, but it does not have to be this way.  Americans have a choice between doing nothing, and doing what they do best rolling up their sleeves and working hard to fix it. Todd Lipscomb Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465916 thebookvoice.com 8:25:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465916]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Re-Made in the USA: How We Can Restore Jobs, Retool Manufacturing, and Compete With the World Author: Todd Lipscomb Narrator: Maurice England Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 25 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: There is a nagging feeling that the U.S. is slipping as a nation and the people are powerless about doing anything to fix it.  Issues on jobs, quality, product safety, wages, the economy, and status as the world's leading superpower are all tied together with the massive trade deficit. Re-Made in the USA addresses these issues from the author's firsthand observations and analysis as an American business person with extensive international expertise.  The book then motivates the reader to take positive action to get the nation back on track.  People will pick up the book because they are worried, but finish empowered. America's future is on the decline, but it does not have to be this way.  Americans have a choice between doing nothing, and doing what they do best rolling up their sleeves and working hard to fix it. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465916]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Re-Made in the USA: How We Can Restore Jobs, Retool Manufacturing, and Compete With the World Author: Todd Lipscomb Narrator: Maurice England Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 25 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: There is a nagging feeling that the U.S. is slipping as a nation and the people are powerless about doing anything to fix it.  Issues on jobs, quality, product safety, wages, the economy, and status as the world's leading superpower are all tied together with the massive trade deficit. Re-Made in the USA addresses these issues from the author's firsthand observations and analysis as an American business person with extensive international expertise.  The book then motivates the reader to take positive action to get the nation back on track.  People will pick up the book because they are worried, but finish empowered. America's future is on the decline, but it does not have to be this way.  Americans have a choice between doing nothing, and doing what they do best rolling up their sleeves and working hard to fix it. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465879 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465879]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Spend Shift: How the Post-Crisis Values Revolution Is Changing the Way We Buy, Sell, and Live Author: Michael D'antonio, John Gerzema, Philip Kotler Narrator: Ray Chase Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 59 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: How we, consumers, responded to the 2008 recession and continue to respond to its aftermath is the crux of much speculation. Will we remain 'frugal' or will we go back to our spending ways? What about this economic crisis has changed the way we live and how will it affect America's future? After decades of unfettered indulgence, Americans are spent. We over-consumed--financed with debt--which has overleveraged our country and erased 13 trillion of consumer wealth and nearly 45% in America's equities and housing values. In the process, we have decimated trust in our financial system, government, and business. In SPEND SHIFT, John Gerzema, Chief Insights Officer at Young how we are moving from mindless to mindful consumption; and how we are opting for better goods and services, rather than just 'more.' As a consequence, companies are presented with an extraordinary opportunity to revolutionize their models to reconnect with the new, unwound consumer. Businesses that adapt to these new consumer behaviors will drive business that scale reputation, not debt, and that will expand profit margins by delivering both 'value' and 'values.' Through insight, social data, and in depth observation, SPEND SHIFT analyzes the changing American consumer psyche, documents the five shifting values and consumer behaviors that are remaking America, and explains what it means to businesses and leaders. This will be a must-read for anyone interested in how consumerism is changing and how to understand and connect with consumer during and after the recession. Michael D'antonio, John Gerzema, Philip Kotler Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465879 thebookvoice.com 8:59:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465879]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Spend Shift: How the Post-Crisis Values Revolution Is Changing the Way We Buy, Sell, and Live Author: Michael D'antonio, John Gerzema, Philip Kotler Narrator: Ray Chase Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 59 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: How we, consumers, responded to the 2008 recession and continue to respond to its aftermath is the crux of much speculation. Will we remain 'frugal' or will we go back to our spending ways? What about this economic crisis has changed the way we live and how will it affect America's future? After decades of unfettered indulgence, Americans are spent. We over-consumed--financed with debt--which has overleveraged our country and erased 13 trillion of consumer wealth and nearly 45% in America's equities and housing values. In the process, we have decimated trust in our financial system, government, and business. In SPEND SHIFT, John Gerzema, Chief Insights Officer at Young how we are moving from mindless to mindful consumption; and how we are opting for better goods and services, rather than just 'more.' As a consequence, companies are presented with an extraordinary opportunity to revolutionize their models to reconnect with the new, unwound consumer. Businesses that adapt to these new consumer behaviors will drive business that scale reputation, not debt, and that will expand profit margins by delivering both 'value' and 'values.' Through insight, social data, and in depth observation, SPEND SHIFT analyzes the changing American consumer psyche, documents the five shifting values and consumer behaviors that are remaking America, and explains what it means to businesses and leaders. This will be a must-read for anyone interested in how consumerism is changing and how to understand and connect with consumer during and after the recession. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465879]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Spend Shift: How the Post-Crisis Values Revolution Is Changing the Way We Buy, Sell, and Live Author: Michael D'antonio, John Gerzema, Philip Kotler Narrator: Ray Chase Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 59 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: How we, consumers, responded to the 2008 recession and continue to respond to its aftermath is the crux of much speculation. Will we remain 'frugal' or will we go back to our spending ways? What about this economic crisis has changed the way we live and how will it affect America's future? After decades of unfettered indulgence, Americans are spent. We over-consumed--financed with debt--which has overleveraged our country and erased 13 trillion of consumer wealth and nearly 45% in America's equities and housing values. In the process, we have decimated trust in our financial system, government, and business. In SPEND SHIFT, John Gerzema, Chief Insights Officer at Young how we are moving from mindless to mindful consumption; and how we are opting for better goods and services, rather than just 'more.' As a consequence, companies are presented with an extraordinary opportunity to revolutionize their models to reconnect with the new, unwound consumer. Businesses that adapt to these new consumer behaviors will drive business that scale reputation, not debt, and that will expand profit margins by delivering both 'value' and 'values.' Through insight, social data, and in depth observation, SPEND SHIFT analyzes the changing American consumer psyche, documents the five shifting values and consumer behaviors that are remaking America, and explains what it means to businesses and leaders. This will be a must-read for anyone interested in how consumerism is changing and how to understand and connect with consumer during and after the recession. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465839 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465839]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Jimmy Stewart Is Dead: Ending the World's Ongoing Financial Plague with Limited Purpose Banking Author: Laurence J. Kotlikoff Narrator: Christian Rummel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 20 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: We let Wall Street play craps with our financial system, our economy, and our tax dollars. The result -- we lost big time. Jimmy Stewart is Dead  is a call to return to basics with a strategy that is very much like the one used by Stewart's character George Bailey in It's a Wonderful Life: banks should be no more than intermediaries between borrowers and lenders and savers and investors. The book describes in plain English and simple terms the big con underlying the big game the web of interconnected financial, political, and regulatory malfeasance that culminated in financial meltdown and brought us to our economic knees. It also proposes the financial fix. Kotlikoff's solution is an idea he has termed limited purpose banking, a simple and essentially costless change to our financial system. It limits banks to their legitimate purpose, namely connecting (intermediating between) borrowers and lenders and savers and investors. Under limited purpose banking, all banks would operate as saving institutions and mutual funds that sell safe as well as risky collections of securities to the public. As mutual funds, the banks would simply function as middlemen. They would never, themselves, own financial assets or borrow to invest in anything except assets, needed to run their mutual funds. Hence, banks would never be in a position to fail because of ill-advised financial bets. Engaging and enlightening, Jimmy Stewart is Dead introduces a strategy for no-risk banking. The book explains the tenets of the plan such as the regained government control of the money supply and the new role of insurance companies. Author Laurence Kotlikoff, a leading economist, believes there is a better way to restore trust in our financial system and get our economy rolling than by having Unce Sam pledge to always clean up the mess. Its not to let the mess happen to begin with. Laurence J. Kotlikoff Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465839 thebookvoice.com 8:20:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465839]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Jimmy Stewart Is Dead: Ending the World's Ongoing Financial Plague with Limited Purpose Banking Author: Laurence J. Kotlikoff Narrator: Christian Rummel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 20 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: We let Wall Street play craps with our financial system, our economy, and our tax dollars. The result -- we lost big time. Jimmy Stewart is Dead  is a call to return to basics with a strategy that is very much like the one used by Stewart's character George Bailey in It's a Wonderful Life: banks should be no more than intermediaries between borrowers and lenders and savers and investors. The book describes in plain English and simple terms the big con underlying the big game the web of interconnected financial, political, and regulatory malfeasance that culminated in financial meltdown and brought us to our economic knees. It also proposes the financial fix. Kotlikoff's solution is an idea he has termed limited purpose banking, a simple and essentially costless change to our financial system. It limits banks to their legitimate purpose, namely connecting (intermediating between) borrowers and lenders and savers and investors. Under limited purpose banking, all banks would operate as saving institutions and mutual funds that sell safe as well as risky collections of securities to the public. As mutual funds, the banks would simply function as middlemen. They would never, themselves, own financial assets or borrow to invest in anything except assets, needed to run their mutual funds. Hence, banks would never be in a position to fail because of ill-advised financial bets. Engaging and enlightening, Jimmy Stewart is Dead introduces a strategy for no-risk banking. The book explains the tenets of the plan such as the regained government control of the money supply and the new role of insurance companies. Author Laurence Kotlikoff, a leading economist, believes there is a better way to restore trust in our financial system and get our economy rolling than by having Unce Sam pledge to always clean up the mess. Its not to let the mess happen to begin with. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465839]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Jimmy Stewart Is Dead: Ending the World's Ongoing Financial Plague with Limited Purpose Banking Author: Laurence J. Kotlikoff Narrator: Christian Rummel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 20 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: We let Wall Street play craps with our financial system, our economy, and our tax dollars. The result -- we lost big time. Jimmy Stewart is Dead  is a call to return to basics with a strategy that is very much like the one used by Stewart's character George Bailey in It's a Wonderful Life: banks should be no more than intermediaries between borrowers and lenders and savers and investors. The book describes in plain English and simple terms the big con underlying the big game the web of interconnected financial, political, and regulatory malfeasance that culminated in financial meltdown and brought us to our economic knees. It also proposes the financial fix. Kotlikoff's solution is an idea he has termed limited purpose banking, a simple and essentially costless change to our financial system. It limits banks to their legitimate purpose, namely connecting (intermediating between) borrowers and lenders and savers and investors. Under limited purpose banking, all banks would operate as saving institutions and mutual funds that sell safe as well as risky collections of securities to the public. As mutual funds, the banks would simply function as middlemen. They would never, themselves, own financial assets or borrow to invest in anything except assets, needed to run their mutual funds. Hence, banks would never be in a position to fail because of ill-advised financial bets. Engaging and enlightening, Jimmy Stewart is Dead introduces a strategy for no-risk banking. The book explains the tenets of the plan such as the regained government control of the money supply and the new role of insurance companies. Author Laurence Kotlikoff, a leading economist, believes there is a better way to restore trust in our financial system and get our economy rolling than by having Unce Sam pledge to always clean up the mess. Its not to let the mess happen to begin with. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465772 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465772]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Up the Organization: How to Stop the Corporation from Stifling People and Strangling Profits Series: #144 of J-B Warren Bennis Series Author: Robert C. Townsend, Warren G. Bennis Narrator: Robert Blumenfeld Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 34 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This commemorative edition remains true to the 1970 original text with alphabetical entries defining Townsend's unique, often hilarious and always provacative take on business. Now with a new chapter on leadership, a Warren Bennis foreword, and essays from many of Townsend's influential friends, including Bob Davids, former CEO of Radica Games, former New Yorker editor Robert Gottlieb, and USC professor Jim O'Toole. Includes an afterword by Townsend's son. Robert C. Townsend, Warren G. Bennis Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465772 thebookvoice.com 4:34:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465772]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Up the Organization: How to Stop the Corporation from Stifling People and Strangling Profits Series: #144 of J-B Warren Bennis Series Author: Robert C. Townsend, Warren G. Bennis Narrator: Robert Blumenfeld Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 34 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This commemorative edition remains true to the 1970 original text with alphabetical entries defining Townsend's unique, often hilarious and always provacative take on business. Now with a new chapter on leadership, a Warren Bennis foreword, and essays from many of Townsend's influential friends, including Bob Davids, former CEO of Radica Games, former New Yorker editor Robert Gottlieb, and USC professor Jim O'Toole. Includes an afterword by Townsend's son. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/465772]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Up the Organization: How to Stop the Corporation from Stifling People and Strangling Profits Series: #144 of J-B Warren Bennis Series Author: Robert C. Townsend, Warren G. Bennis Narrator: Robert Blumenfeld Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 34 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This commemorative edition remains true to the 1970 original text with alphabetical entries defining Townsend's unique, often hilarious and always provacative take on business. Now with a new chapter on leadership, a Warren Bennis foreword, and essays from many of Townsend's influential friends, including Bob Davids, former CEO of Radica Games, former New Yorker editor Robert Gottlieb, and USC professor Jim O'Toole. Includes an afterword by Townsend's son. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464861 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464861]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: When Free Markets Fail: Saving the Market When It Can't Save Itself Author: Scott Mccleskey Narrator: Mike Chamberlain Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 56 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Significant reform of the financial markets is coming. Financial Regulation will specifically cover the new rules, the theory behind these rules, and their impact on both the corporations and the individual.  The book is organized into three sections. The first section will provide the background needed to understand the issues of regulation.  This section will briefly cover theory, as well as the most common issues raised in the course of debate on financial regulation in general.  This will not be an exhaustive coverage of the topic, but an overview to make sure the reader has the necessary background to fully understand the need for and the intention of the new laws. The second section will look at the process the new regulations went through prior to being enacted, the debate and the result. The final section focus on the new regulations and the recent financial crisis. The book will cover the reforms that have been enacted and look toward any future reforms. The book will cover the new laws from both a theoretical point of view, as well as addressing what financial institutions will need to do to comply with these laws. Scott Mccleskey Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464861 thebookvoice.com 8:56:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464861]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: When Free Markets Fail: Saving the Market When It Can't Save Itself Author: Scott Mccleskey Narrator: Mike Chamberlain Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 56 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Significant reform of the financial markets is coming. Financial Regulation will specifically cover the new rules, the theory behind these rules, and their impact on both the corporations and the individual.  The book is organized into three sections. The first section will provide the background needed to understand the issues of regulation.  This section will briefly cover theory, as well as the most common issues raised in the course of debate on financial regulation in general.  This will not be an exhaustive coverage of the topic, but an overview to make sure the reader has the necessary background to fully understand the need for and the intention of the new laws. The second section will look at the process the new regulations went through prior to being enacted, the debate and the result. The final section focus on the new regulations and the recent financial crisis. The book will cover the reforms that have been enacted and look toward any future reforms. The book will cover the new laws from both a theoretical point of view, as well as addressing what financial institutions will need to do to comply with these laws. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464861]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: When Free Markets Fail: Saving the Market When It Can't Save Itself Author: Scott Mccleskey Narrator: Mike Chamberlain Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 56 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Significant reform of the financial markets is coming. Financial Regulation will specifically cover the new rules, the theory behind these rules, and their impact on both the corporations and the individual.  The book is organized into three sections. The first section will provide the background needed to understand the issues of regulation.  This section will briefly cover theory, as well as the most common issues raised in the course of debate on financial regulation in general.  This will not be an exhaustive coverage of the topic, but an overview to make sure the reader has the necessary background to fully understand the need for and the intention of the new laws. The second section will look at the process the new regulations went through prior to being enacted, the debate and the result. The final section focus on the new regulations and the recent financial crisis. The book will cover the reforms that have been enacted and look toward any future reforms. The book will cover the new laws from both a theoretical point of view, as well as addressing what financial institutions will need to do to comply with these laws. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464848 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464848]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Social Innovation, Inc.: 5 Strategies for Driving Business Growth through Social Change Author: Jason Saul Narrator: Mel Foster Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 58 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Social Innovation, Inc. explodes the concept of social responsibility and empowers companies to take back control of the social agenda.  These days, its ok not to be purely altruistic. Consumers purchase hybrid cars not to show solidarity for the environment, but primarily to protect their wallets. Donors can use websites like kiva.org to make micro-loans to poor entrepreneurs--and get their money back with interest. Even Wal-Mart, the worlds largest retailer, didnt see a dime of return on hundreds of millions it has spent on philanthropyuntil it implemented its $4 prescription drug program in 2006. Since its inception, the program has generated more than $2 billion in savings for Wal-Mart customers, particularly the uninsured and Medicare recipients. The business impact has been tremendous: the $4 drug program skyrocketed sales at Wal-Mart and Sams Club pharmacies and attracted scores of new customers who, but for the $4 program, would not have walked into a Wal-Mart. What made Wal-Marts program extraordinary is that it was designed as a business strategy. The initiative had a much greater impact on health care than any grant Wal-Mart could make, and more important, it was sustainable.  To compete in this new economy, companies must find innovative ways to create economic value through positive social change. Social innovation is about making social change work for the business, not the other way around.  Social innovations differ from traditional corporate philanthropy and social responsibility initiatives in four fundamental ways.  Social innovations: 1) are primarily designed to produce business value; 2) leverage the machinery of the business to solve social problems; 3) are scalable and sustainable; and 4) often address market failures. Jason Saul Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464848 thebookvoice.com 6:58:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464848]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Social Innovation, Inc.: 5 Strategies for Driving Business Growth through Social Change Author: Jason Saul Narrator: Mel Foster Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 58 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Social Innovation, Inc. explodes the concept of social responsibility and empowers companies to take back control of the social agenda.  These days, its ok not to be purely altruistic. Consumers purchase hybrid cars not to show solidarity for the environment, but primarily to protect their wallets. Donors can use websites like kiva.org to make micro-loans to poor entrepreneurs--and get their money back with interest. Even Wal-Mart, the worlds largest retailer, didnt see a dime of return on hundreds of millions it has spent on philanthropyuntil it implemented its $4 prescription drug program in 2006. Since its inception, the program has generated more than $2 billion in savings for Wal-Mart customers, particularly the uninsured and Medicare recipients. The business impact has been tremendous: the $4 drug program skyrocketed sales at Wal-Mart and Sams Club pharmacies and attracted scores of new customers who, but for the $4 program, would not have walked into a Wal-Mart. What made Wal-Marts program extraordinary is that it was designed as a business strategy. The initiative had a much greater impact on health care than any grant Wal-Mart could make, and more important, it was sustainable.  To compete in this new economy, companies must find innovative ways to create economic value through positive social change. Social innovation is about making social change work for the business, not the other way around.  Social innovations differ from traditional corporate philanthropy and social responsibility initiatives in four fundamental ways.  Social innovations: 1) are primarily designed to produce business value; 2) leverage the machinery of the business to solve social problems; 3) are scalable and sustainable; and 4) often address market failures. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464848]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Social Innovation, Inc.: 5 Strategies for Driving Business Growth through Social Change Author: Jason Saul Narrator: Mel Foster Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 58 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Social Innovation, Inc. explodes the concept of social responsibility and empowers companies to take back control of the social agenda.  These days, its ok not to be purely altruistic. Consumers purchase hybrid cars not to show solidarity for the environment, but primarily to protect their wallets. Donors can use websites like kiva.org to make micro-loans to poor entrepreneurs--and get their money back with interest. Even Wal-Mart, the worlds largest retailer, didnt see a dime of return on hundreds of millions it has spent on philanthropyuntil it implemented its $4 prescription drug program in 2006. Since its inception, the program has generated more than $2 billion in savings for Wal-Mart customers, particularly the uninsured and Medicare recipients. The business impact has been tremendous: the $4 drug program skyrocketed sales at Wal-Mart and Sams Club pharmacies and attracted scores of new customers who, but for the $4 program, would not have walked into a Wal-Mart. What made Wal-Marts program extraordinary is that it was designed as a business strategy. The initiative had a much greater impact on health care than any grant Wal-Mart could make, and more important, it was sustainable.  To compete in this new economy, companies must find innovative ways to create economic value through positive social change. Social innovation is about making social change work for the business, not the other way around.  Social innovations differ from traditional corporate philanthropy and social responsibility initiatives in four fundamental ways.  Social innovations: 1) are primarily designed to produce business value; 2) leverage the machinery of the business to solve social problems; 3) are scalable and sustainable; and 4) often address market failures. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464821 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464821]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New Financial Deal: Understanding the Dodd-Frank Act and Its (Unintended) Consequences Author: David Skeel, William D. Cohan Narrator: Todd Mclaren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 14 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What can we expect from our eras New Deal? To answer this question, The New Financial Deal will begin with an inside account of the legislative process, then outline and access its key components: the new framework for regulating derivatives, the regulation of banking and systemic risk, and the new resolution regime. It will explain the implications of the new framework, and propose correctives that would better align its ostensible objectivessuch as preventing future bailoutswith the new regulatory structure. The legislations key theme is government partnership with and regulation of large concentrated institutions in order to reduce their risk and manage their failure. In place of the decentralized pre-crisis regulation of derivatives, the new legislation will require that most derivatives be cleared through a clearing house and traded on exchanges. The stability of the derivatives market will therefore depend on a small number of potentially enormous clearing houses. For large financial institutions that encounter financial distress, the legislation gives bank regulators sweeping new authority to step in and take over the institution. Regulators, rather than negotiations among the parties themselves, will determine the outcomes. These epochal reforms are posed to change Wall Street forever, but whether they help to regulate supermarket banks or create even more moral hazard is worthy of serious debate. David Skeel, William D. Cohan Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464821 thebookvoice.com 7:14:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464821]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New Financial Deal: Understanding the Dodd-Frank Act and Its (Unintended) Consequences Author: David Skeel, William D. Cohan Narrator: Todd Mclaren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 14 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What can we expect from our eras New Deal? To answer this question, The New Financial Deal will begin with an inside account of the legislative process, then outline and access its key components: the new framework for regulating derivatives, the regulation of banking and systemic risk, and the new resolution regime. It will explain the implications of the new framework, and propose correctives that would better align its ostensible objectivessuch as preventing future bailoutswith the new regulatory structure. The legislations key theme is government partnership with and regulation of large concentrated institutions in order to reduce their risk and manage their failure. In place of the decentralized pre-crisis regulation of derivatives, the new legislation will require that most derivatives be cleared through a clearing house and traded on exchanges. The stability of the derivatives market will therefore depend on a small number of potentially enormous clearing houses. For large financial institutions that encounter financial distress, the legislation gives bank regulators sweeping new authority to step in and take over the institution. Regulators, rather than negotiations among the parties themselves, will determine the outcomes. These epochal reforms are posed to change Wall Street forever, but whether they help to regulate supermarket banks or create even more moral hazard is worthy of serious debate. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464821]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New Financial Deal: Understanding the Dodd-Frank Act and Its (Unintended) Consequences Author: David Skeel, William D. Cohan Narrator: Todd Mclaren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 14 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What can we expect from our eras New Deal? To answer this question, The New Financial Deal will begin with an inside account of the legislative process, then outline and access its key components: the new framework for regulating derivatives, the regulation of banking and systemic risk, and the new resolution regime. It will explain the implications of the new framework, and propose correctives that would better align its ostensible objectivessuch as preventing future bailoutswith the new regulatory structure. The legislations key theme is government partnership with and regulation of large concentrated institutions in order to reduce their risk and manage their failure. In place of the decentralized pre-crisis regulation of derivatives, the new legislation will require that most derivatives be cleared through a clearing house and traded on exchanges. The stability of the derivatives market will therefore depend on a small number of potentially enormous clearing houses. For large financial institutions that encounter financial distress, the legislation gives bank regulators sweeping new authority to step in and take over the institution. Regulators, rather than negotiations among the parties themselves, will determine the outcomes. These epochal reforms are posed to change Wall Street forever, but whether they help to regulate supermarket banks or create even more moral hazard is worthy of serious debate. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464783 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464783]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes Author: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Narrator: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 36 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In How an Economy Grows and Why it Crashes, economic expert and bestselling author of Crash Proof and The Little Book of Bull Moves in Bear Markets, Peter Schiff, presents economics in two informative, yet thoroughly entertaining tales. The illustrations were previously published by Peter Schiff's father, Irwin A. Schiff, a trader and financial expert. The book takes complex economic issues and distills them into a rousing allegory. For example, a story takes place on a tropical island where hunter-gatherer cavemen struggle daily to catch fish for basic survival. As the economy of the island becomes increasingly dynamic, institutions and government entities develop to protect the islanders' savings and assets, and Schiff explains the complexities that accompany this growth. With wit and humor, Schiff explains the roots of economic growth, the uses of capital, the destructive nature of consumer credit, and many other topical principles of economic theory. The tales leave you with a powerful understanding of inflation and the abuses of the monetary system. How an Economy Grows is an insightful illustrated book that both entertains and teaches readers about the economic system. Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464783 thebookvoice.com 3:36:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464783]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes Author: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Narrator: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 36 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In How an Economy Grows and Why it Crashes, economic expert and bestselling author of Crash Proof and The Little Book of Bull Moves in Bear Markets, Peter Schiff, presents economics in two informative, yet thoroughly entertaining tales. The illustrations were previously published by Peter Schiff's father, Irwin A. Schiff, a trader and financial expert. The book takes complex economic issues and distills them into a rousing allegory. For example, a story takes place on a tropical island where hunter-gatherer cavemen struggle daily to catch fish for basic survival. As the economy of the island becomes increasingly dynamic, institutions and government entities develop to protect the islanders' savings and assets, and Schiff explains the complexities that accompany this growth. With wit and humor, Schiff explains the roots of economic growth, the uses of capital, the destructive nature of consumer credit, and many other topical principles of economic theory. The tales leave you with a powerful understanding of inflation and the abuses of the monetary system. How an Economy Grows is an insightful illustrated book that both entertains and teaches readers about the economic system. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464783]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes Author: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Narrator: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 36 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In How an Economy Grows and Why it Crashes, economic expert and bestselling author of Crash Proof and The Little Book of Bull Moves in Bear Markets, Peter Schiff, presents economics in two informative, yet thoroughly entertaining tales. The illustrations were previously published by Peter Schiff's father, Irwin A. Schiff, a trader and financial expert. The book takes complex economic issues and distills them into a rousing allegory. For example, a story takes place on a tropical island where hunter-gatherer cavemen struggle daily to catch fish for basic survival. As the economy of the island becomes increasingly dynamic, institutions and government entities develop to protect the islanders' savings and assets, and Schiff explains the complexities that accompany this growth. With wit and humor, Schiff explains the roots of economic growth, the uses of capital, the destructive nature of consumer credit, and many other topical principles of economic theory. The tales leave you with a powerful understanding of inflation and the abuses of the monetary system. How an Economy Grows is an insightful illustrated book that both entertains and teaches readers about the economic system. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464781 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464781]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Behind the Cloud: The Untold Story of How Salesforce.com Went from Idea to Billion-Dollar Company-and Revolutionized an Industry Author: Marc Benioff, Carlye Adler Narrator: Ax Norman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 54 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In less than a decade, salesforce.com has grown from a simple idea to a company with a billion dollars in revenue and the market leader of a new $52 billion industry that it created. How did salesforce.com grow from a start up in a rented apartment into the worlds fastest growing software company? Marc Benioff, the visionary founder, chairman and CEO of salesforce.com, and his team have created and employed new business, technology, and philanthropic models tailored to this time of extraordinary change. Through compelling, candid, and unlikely first person stories, Benioff shows how salesforce.com pioneered a simple idea (delivering business applications as a service over the Internet) to change the way all businesses use software applications, and ultimately, change the way the software industry works. With Benioffs unconventional advice and unusual call-out lessons from the Salesforce.com Playbook, any business can go against the grain, rapidly change the game, and learn how to achieve success on demand. This book will help you: Align your organization through Benioffs proprietary management tool, V2MOM, which until now, only a limited number of people had access. Those who do useV2MOMincluding all salesforce.com employees and prominent business leaders who are Benioffs friendshave found significant benefits.  Evolve a product or service from adoption to addiction by using Benioffs Feedback Loop, which allows you to give customers what they ask for (not what you think theyll ask for). Legendary company founders Michael Dell and Howard Schultz both turned to Benioff when they reclaimed the CEO reigns of their companies to learn how to use this process, as well as salesforce.coms Ideas technology, because they work. Build Street Teams (an idea Benioff borrowed from hip-hop personality MC Hammer) and develop customer testimony (learned from the Reverend Billy Graham) to turn customers into evangelists for your brand. Scale your company by using Benioffs process of intelligent reaction, not grand design, which allows you to best respond to the changing marketplace and reap the rewards of constant innovation. Establish an international presence quickly by thinking globally from the very beginning, and raise significant start-up money through unconventional means. Integrate philanthropy into your business model with the unique model Benioff invented for salesforce.com and that has since been copied by myriad companies, including Google for its new foundation. Marc Benioff, Carlye Adler Mon, 20 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464781 thebookvoice.com 7:54:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464781]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Behind the Cloud: The Untold Story of How Salesforce.com Went from Idea to Billion-Dollar Company-and Revolutionized an Industry Author: Marc Benioff, Carlye Adler Narrator: Ax Norman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 54 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In less than a decade, salesforce.com has grown from a simple idea to a company with a billion dollars in revenue and the market leader of a new $52 billion industry that it created. How did salesforce.com grow from a start up in a rented apartment into the worlds fastest growing software company? Marc Benioff, the visionary founder, chairman and CEO of salesforce.com, and his team have created and employed new business, technology, and philanthropic models tailored to this time of extraordinary change. Through compelling, candid, and unlikely first person stories, Benioff shows how salesforce.com pioneered a simple idea (delivering business applications as a service over the Internet) to change the way all businesses use software applications, and ultimately, change the way the software industry works. With Benioffs unconventional advice and unusual call-out lessons from the Salesforce.com Playbook, any business can go against the grain, rapidly change the game, and learn how to achieve success on demand. This book will help you: Align your organization through Benioffs proprietary management tool, V2MOM, which until now, only a limited number of people had access. Those who do useV2MOMincluding all salesforce.com employees and prominent business leaders who are Benioffs friendshave found significant benefits.  Evolve a product or service from adoption to addiction by using Benioffs Feedback Loop, which allows you to give customers what they ask for (not what you think theyll ask for). Legendary company founders Michael Dell and Howard Schultz both turned to Benioff when they reclaimed the CEO reigns of their companies to learn how to use this process, as well as salesforce.coms Ideas technology, because they work. Build Street Teams (an idea Benioff borrowed from hip-hop personality MC Hammer) and develop customer testimony (learned from the Reverend Billy Graham) to turn customers into evangelists for your brand. Scale your company by using Benioffs process of intelligent reaction, not grand design, which allows you to best respond to the changing marketplace and reap the rewards of constant innovation. Establish an international presence quickly by thinking globally from the very beginning, and raise significant start-up money through unconventional means. Integrate philanthropy into your business model with the unique model Benioff invented for salesforce.com and that has since been copied by myriad companies, including Google for its new foundation. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/464781]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Behind the Cloud: The Untold Story of How Salesforce.com Went from Idea to Billion-Dollar Company-and Revolutionized an Industry Author: Marc Benioff, Carlye Adler Narrator: Ax Norman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 54 minutes Release date: July 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In less than a decade, salesforce.com has grown from a simple idea to a company with a billion dollars in revenue and the market leader of a new $52 billion industry that it created. How did salesforce.com grow from a start up in a rented apartment into the worlds fastest growing software company? Marc Benioff, the visionary founder, chairman and CEO of salesforce.com, and his team have created and employed new business, technology, and philanthropic models tailored to this time of extraordinary change. Through compelling, candid, and unlikely first person stories, Benioff shows how salesforce.com pioneered a simple idea (delivering business applications as a service over the Internet) to change the way all businesses use software applications, and ultimately, change the way the software industry works. With Benioffs unconventional advice and unusual call-out lessons from the Salesforce.com Playbook, any business can go against the grain, rapidly change the game, and learn how to achieve success on demand. This book will help you: Align your organization through Benioffs proprietary management tool, V2MOM, which until now, only a limited number of people had access. Those who do useV2MOMincluding all salesforce.com employees and prominent business leaders who are Benioffs friendshave found significant benefits.  Evolve a product or service from adoption to addiction by using Benioffs Feedback Loop, which allows you to give customers what they ask for (not what you think theyll ask for). Legendary company founders Michael Dell and Howard Schultz both turned to Benioff when they reclaimed the CEO reigns of their companies to learn how to use this process, as well as salesforce.coms Ideas technology, because they work. Build Street Teams (an idea Benioff borrowed from hip-hop personality MC Hammer) and develop customer testimony (learned from the Reverend Billy Graham) to turn customers into evangelists for your brand. Scale your company by using Benioffs process of intelligent reaction, not grand design, which allows you to best respond to the changing marketplace and reap the rewards of constant innovation. Establish an international presence quickly by thinking globally from the very beginning, and raise significant start-up money through unconventional means. Integrate philanthropy into your business model with the unique model Benioff invented for salesforce.com and that has since been copied by myriad companies, including Google for its new foundation. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/462057 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/462057]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: An Infinite History: The Story of a Family in France over Three Centuries Author: Emma Rothschild Narrator: Eve Matheson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 0 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by Eve Matheson tells the story of social change in France through the experiences of a single extended family across five generations Marie Aymard was an illiterate widow who lived in the provincial town of Angoulême in southwestern France, a place where seemingly nothing ever happened. Yet, in 1764, she made her fleeting mark on the historical record through two documents: a power of attorney in connection with the property of her late husband, a carpenter on the island of Grenada, and a prenuptial contract for her daughter, signed by eighty-three people in Angoulême. Who was Marie Aymard? Who were all these people? And why were they together on a dark afternoon in December 1764? Beginning with these questions, An Infinite History offers a panoramic look at an extended family over five generations. Through ninety-eight connected stories about inquisitive, sociable individuals, ending with Marie Aymard's great-great granddaughter in 1906, Emma Rothschild unfurls an innovative modern history of social and family networks, emigration, immobility, the French revolution, and the transformation of nineteenth-century economic life. Rothschild spins a vast narrative resembling a period novel, one that looks at a large, obscure family, of whom almost no private letters survive, whose members traveled to Syria, Mexico, and Tahiti, and whose destinies were profoundly unequal, from a seamstress living in poverty in Paris to her third cousin, the Cardinal of Algiers. Rothschild not only draws on discoveries in local archives but also uses new technologies, including the visualization of social networks, large-scale searches, and groundbreaking methods of genealogical research. An Infinite History demonstrates how the ordinary lives of one family over three centuries can constitute a remarkable record of deep social and economic changes. Emma Rothschild Tue, 26 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/462057 thebookvoice.com 13:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/462057]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: An Infinite History: The Story of a Family in France over Three Centuries Author: Emma Rothschild Narrator: Eve Matheson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 0 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by Eve Matheson tells the story of social change in France through the experiences of a single extended family across five generations Marie Aymard was an illiterate widow who lived in the provincial town of Angoulême in southwestern France, a place where seemingly nothing ever happened. Yet, in 1764, she made her fleeting mark on the historical record through two documents: a power of attorney in connection with the property of her late husband, a carpenter on the island of Grenada, and a prenuptial contract for her daughter, signed by eighty-three people in Angoulême. Who was Marie Aymard? Who were all these people? And why were they together on a dark afternoon in December 1764? Beginning with these questions, An Infinite History offers a panoramic look at an extended family over five generations. Through ninety-eight connected stories about inquisitive, sociable individuals, ending with Marie Aymard's great-great granddaughter in 1906, Emma Rothschild unfurls an innovative modern history of social and family networks, emigration, immobility, the French revolution, and the transformation of nineteenth-century economic life. Rothschild spins a vast narrative resembling a period novel, one that looks at a large, obscure family, of whom almost no private letters survive, whose members traveled to Syria, Mexico, and Tahiti, and whose destinies were profoundly unequal, from a seamstress living in poverty in Paris to her third cousin, the Cardinal of Algiers. Rothschild not only draws on discoveries in local archives but also uses new technologies, including the visualization of social networks, large-scale searches, and groundbreaking methods of genealogical research. An Infinite History demonstrates how the ordinary lives of one family over three centuries can constitute a remarkable record of deep social and economic changes. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/462057]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: An Infinite History: The Story of a Family in France over Three Centuries Author: Emma Rothschild Narrator: Eve Matheson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 0 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by Eve Matheson tells the story of social change in France through the experiences of a single extended family across five generations Marie Aymard was an illiterate widow who lived in the provincial town of Angoulême in southwestern France, a place where seemingly nothing ever happened. Yet, in 1764, she made her fleeting mark on the historical record through two documents: a power of attorney in connection with the property of her late husband, a carpenter on the island of Grenada, and a prenuptial contract for her daughter, signed by eighty-three people in Angoulême. Who was Marie Aymard? Who were all these people? And why were they together on a dark afternoon in December 1764? Beginning with these questions, An Infinite History offers a panoramic look at an extended family over five generations. Through ninety-eight connected stories about inquisitive, sociable individuals, ending with Marie Aymard's great-great granddaughter in 1906, Emma Rothschild unfurls an innovative modern history of social and family networks, emigration, immobility, the French revolution, and the transformation of nineteenth-century economic life. Rothschild spins a vast narrative resembling a period novel, one that looks at a large, obscure family, of whom almost no private letters survive, whose members traveled to Syria, Mexico, and Tahiti, and whose destinies were profoundly unequal, from a seamstress living in poverty in Paris to her third cousin, the Cardinal of Algiers. Rothschild not only draws on discoveries in local archives but also uses new technologies, including the visualization of social networks, large-scale searches, and groundbreaking methods of genealogical research. An Infinite History demonstrates how the ordinary lives of one family over three centuries can constitute a remarkable record of deep social and economic changes. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/461653 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/461653]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation Author: Mark Mobius Narrator: Keith Sellon-Wright Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 2 minutes Release date: December 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What if everything you've learned about inflation is wrong? The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation illustrates our rapidly changing world where constant technological innovation leads to cheaper and better products. These changes are no longer reflected in the ways we measure inflation. Renowned investor and author Mark Mobius persuasively argues that what we believe to know about inflation today does not reflect the reality any longer. It is a myth, a legend, a fable, and, yes, a falsehood for a number of reasons. The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation tackles a number of fascinating topics, including: ● The political nature of inflation measurement where governments manipulate and exploit inflation numbers to fit their economic programs ● The extreme difficulty involved in gathering accurate data to measure inflation and the resulting inaccuracy of those measures ● The error of using currencies to measure inflation when those currencies are continually being debased by the governments who issue them ● Finally, and most importantly, the advances in technology and automation which are leading to continuously falling costs for goods and services Mark Mobius Tue, 08 Dec 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/461653 thebookvoice.com 5:2:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/461653]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation Author: Mark Mobius Narrator: Keith Sellon-Wright Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 2 minutes Release date: December 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What if everything you've learned about inflation is wrong? The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation illustrates our rapidly changing world where constant technological innovation leads to cheaper and better products. These changes are no longer reflected in the ways we measure inflation. Renowned investor and author Mark Mobius persuasively argues that what we believe to know about inflation today does not reflect the reality any longer. It is a myth, a legend, a fable, and, yes, a falsehood for a number of reasons. The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation tackles a number of fascinating topics, including: ● The political nature of inflation measurement where governments manipulate and exploit inflation numbers to fit their economic programs ● The extreme difficulty involved in gathering accurate data to measure inflation and the resulting inaccuracy of those measures ● The error of using currencies to measure inflation when those currencies are continually being debased by the governments who issue them ● Finally, and most importantly, the advances in technology and automation which are leading to continuously falling costs for goods and services Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/461653]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation Author: Mark Mobius Narrator: Keith Sellon-Wright Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 2 minutes Release date: December 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What if everything you've learned about inflation is wrong? The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation illustrates our rapidly changing world where constant technological innovation leads to cheaper and better products. These changes are no longer reflected in the ways we measure inflation. Renowned investor and author Mark Mobius persuasively argues that what we believe to know about inflation today does not reflect the reality any longer. It is a myth, a legend, a fable, and, yes, a falsehood for a number of reasons. The Inflation Myth and the Wonderful World of Deflation tackles a number of fascinating topics, including: ● The political nature of inflation measurement where governments manipulate and exploit inflation numbers to fit their economic programs ● The extreme difficulty involved in gathering accurate data to measure inflation and the resulting inaccuracy of those measures ● The error of using currencies to measure inflation when those currencies are continually being debased by the governments who issue them ● Finally, and most importantly, the advances in technology and automation which are leading to continuously falling costs for goods and services https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460677 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460677]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A Wasted: How We Squander Time, Money, and Natural Resources-and What We Can Do About It Author: Byron Reese, Scott Hoffman Narrator: Dan Woren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 12 minutes Release date: June 1, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Wasted is a riveting exploration of the complicated, and often surprising, ways that waste occurs in our businesses, our communities, and our lives “A smart, unconventional book that takes readers far beyond what they think they know about a complex subject.”—Kari Byron, former cast member of MythBusters Waste. We spend a great deal of energy trying to avoid it, but once you train your eyes to look for it, you’ll see it all around you—in your home, your business, and your everyday life.   In Wasted, futurist Byron Reese and entrepreneur Scott Hoffman take readers on a fascinating journey through this modern world of waste, drawing on science, economics, and human behavior to envision what a world with far less of it—or none of it at all—might look like. Along the way, they explore thought-provoking issues such as   • why the United States got a higher proportion of its energy from renewable sources in 1950 than it does today  • whether the amount of gold in unused mobile phones can be extracted for profit • how switching to water fountains on a single route from Singapore to Newark could prevent the use of 3,400 plastic bottles—on each flight • whether the amount of money you save buying goods in bulk is offset by the amount you lose when some spoil.   Ultimately, the question of reducing waste is scientific, philosophical, and, most of all, complex. According to Reese and Hoffman, the rush toward simple answers has often led to well-meaning efforts that cause more waste than they save. The only way we can hope to make progress is to treat waste as the complicated issue it is.    While the authors don’t promise easy answers, in this compelling book they take an important step toward solutions by examining the questions at play, giving actionable steps, and ensuring that you’ll never see the world of waste the same way again. Byron Reese, Scott Hoffman Tue, 01 Jun 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460677 thebookvoice.com 9:12:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460677]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A Wasted: How We Squander Time, Money, and Natural Resources-and What We Can Do About It Author: Byron Reese, Scott Hoffman Narrator: Dan Woren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 12 minutes Release date: June 1, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Wasted is a riveting exploration of the complicated, and often surprising, ways that waste occurs in our businesses, our communities, and our lives “A smart, unconventional book that takes readers far beyond what they think they know about a complex subject.”—Kari Byron, former cast member of MythBusters Waste. We spend a great deal of energy trying to avoid it, but once you train your eyes to look for it, you’ll see it all around you—in your home, your business, and your everyday life.   In Wasted, futurist Byron Reese and entrepreneur Scott Hoffman take readers on a fascinating journey through this modern world of waste, drawing on science, economics, and human behavior to envision what a world with far less of it—or none of it at all—might look like. Along the way, they explore thought-provoking issues such as   • why the United States got a higher proportion of its energy from renewable sources in 1950 than it does today  • whether the amount of gold in unused mobile phones can be extracted for profit • how switching to water fountains on a single route from Singapore to Newark could prevent the use of 3,400 plastic bottles—on each flight • whether the amount of money you save buying goods in bulk is offset by the amount you lose when some spoil.   Ultimately, the question of reducing waste is scientific, philosophical, and, most of all, complex. According to Reese and Hoffman, the rush toward simple answers has often led to well-meaning efforts that cause more waste than they save. The only way we can hope to make progress is to treat waste as the complicated issue it is.    While the authors don’t promise easy answers, in this compelling book they take an important step toward solutions by examining the questions at play, giving actionable steps, and ensuring that you’ll never see the world of waste the same way again. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460677]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A Wasted: How We Squander Time, Money, and Natural Resources-and What We Can Do About It Author: Byron Reese, Scott Hoffman Narrator: Dan Woren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 12 minutes Release date: June 1, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Wasted is a riveting exploration of the complicated, and often surprising, ways that waste occurs in our businesses, our communities, and our lives “A smart, unconventional book that takes readers far beyond what they think they know about a complex subject.”—Kari Byron, former cast member of MythBusters Waste. We spend a great deal of energy trying to avoid it, but once you train your eyes to look for it, you’ll see it all around you—in your home, your business, and your everyday life.   In Wasted, futurist Byron Reese and entrepreneur Scott Hoffman take readers on a fascinating journey through this modern world of waste, drawing on science, economics, and human behavior to envision what a world with far less of it—or none of it at all—might look like. Along the way, they explore thought-provoking issues such as   • why the United States got a higher proportion of its energy from renewable sources in 1950 than it does today  • whether the amount of gold in unused mobile phones can be extracted for profit • how switching to water fountains on a single route from Singapore to Newark could prevent the use of 3,400 plastic bottles—on each flight • whether the amount of money you save buying goods in bulk is offset by the amount you lose when some spoil.   Ultimately, the question of reducing waste is scientific, philosophical, and, most of all, complex. According to Reese and Hoffman, the rush toward simple answers has often led to well-meaning efforts that cause more waste than they save. The only way we can hope to make progress is to treat waste as the complicated issue it is.    While the authors don’t promise easy answers, in this compelling book they take an important step toward solutions by examining the questions at play, giving actionable steps, and ensuring that you’ll never see the world of waste the same way again. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460579 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460579]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Phantom Virus Author: Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Narrator: Christopher Slye Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 9 minutes Release date: September 15, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 9 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lies. Lies. Lies. Nearly everything you are being told about the COVID-19 pandemic by the mainstream media is untrue. The virus presents little threat to healthy individuals. Those who have died from the disease, by and large, were people over seventy in poor physical condition or at the very least with some underlying conditions. Many of the victims resided in nursing homes. The wearing of masks is, according to Dr. Anthony Fauci and the new medical mafia, only symbolic, and the quarantining of the healthy has resulted only in a sharp rise in suicide and deaths of despair. The pandemic has been orchestrated by a cabal of billionaires, known as "the Good Club," to initiate history's greatest transference of wealth and to further the globalization of poverty. The virus was created in military laboratories within the United States as a biological weapon. Even the riots have been staged. The Phantom Virus: How an Unseen Enemy Shut Down the Planet! by Rodney Howard-Browne and Paul L. Williams will prove it. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Tue, 15 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460579 thebookvoice.com 7:9:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460579]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Phantom Virus Author: Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Narrator: Christopher Slye Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 9 minutes Release date: September 15, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 9 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lies. Lies. Lies. Nearly everything you are being told about the COVID-19 pandemic by the mainstream media is untrue. The virus presents little threat to healthy individuals. Those who have died from the disease, by and large, were people over seventy in poor physical condition or at the very least with some underlying conditions. Many of the victims resided in nursing homes. The wearing of masks is, according to Dr. Anthony Fauci and the new medical mafia, only symbolic, and the quarantining of the healthy has resulted only in a sharp rise in suicide and deaths of despair. The pandemic has been orchestrated by a cabal of billionaires, known as "the Good Club," to initiate history's greatest transference of wealth and to further the globalization of poverty. The virus was created in military laboratories within the United States as a biological weapon. Even the riots have been staged. The Phantom Virus: How an Unseen Enemy Shut Down the Planet! by Rodney Howard-Browne and Paul L. Williams will prove it. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/460579]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Phantom Virus Author: Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Narrator: Christopher Slye Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 9 minutes Release date: September 15, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 9 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lies. Lies. Lies. Nearly everything you are being told about the COVID-19 pandemic by the mainstream media is untrue. The virus presents little threat to healthy individuals. Those who have died from the disease, by and large, were people over seventy in poor physical condition or at the very least with some underlying conditions. Many of the victims resided in nursing homes. The wearing of masks is, according to Dr. Anthony Fauci and the new medical mafia, only symbolic, and the quarantining of the healthy has resulted only in a sharp rise in suicide and deaths of despair. The pandemic has been orchestrated by a cabal of billionaires, known as "the Good Club," to initiate history's greatest transference of wealth and to further the globalization of poverty. The virus was created in military laboratories within the United States as a biological weapon. Even the riots have been staged. The Phantom Virus: How an Unseen Enemy Shut Down the Planet! by Rodney Howard-Browne and Paul L. Williams will prove it. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459559 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459559]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Framers: Human Advantage in an Age of Technology and Turmoil Author: Francis De Véricourt, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, Kenneth Cukier Narrator: Kaleo Griffith Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 46 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Cukier and his co-authors have a more ambitious project than Kahneman and Harari. They don’t want to just point out how powerfully we are influenced by our perspectives and prejudices—our frames. They want to show us that these frames are tools, and that we can optimise their use.” —Forbes From pandemics to populism, AI to ISIS, wealth inequity to climate change, humanity faces unprecedented challenges that threaten our very existence. The essential tool that will enable humanity to find the best way foward is defined in Framers by internationally renowned authors Kenneth Cukier, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, and Francis de Véricourt.    To frame is to make a mental model that enables us to make sense of new situations. Frames guide the decisions we make and the results we attain. People have long focused on traits like memory and reasoning, leaving framing all but ignored. But with computers becoming better at some of those cognitive tasks, framing stands out as a critical function—and only humans can do it. This book is the first guide to mastering this human ability.   Illustrating their case with compelling examples and the latest research, authors Cukier, Mayer-Schönberger, and de Véricourt examine:   ·       Why advice to “think outside the box” is useless ·       How Spotify beat Apple by reframing music as an experience ·       How the #MeToo twitter hashtag reframed the perception of sexual assault ·       The disaster of framing Covid-19 as equivalent to seasonal flu, and how framing it akin to SARS delivered New Zealand from the pandemic   Framers shows how framing is not just a way to improve how we make decisions in the era of algorithms—but why it will be a matter of survival for humanity in a time of societal upheaval and machine prosperity. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Francis De Véricourt, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, Kenneth Cukier Tue, 11 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459559 thebookvoice.com 7:46:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459559]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Framers: Human Advantage in an Age of Technology and Turmoil Author: Francis De Véricourt, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, Kenneth Cukier Narrator: Kaleo Griffith Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 46 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Cukier and his co-authors have a more ambitious project than Kahneman and Harari. They don’t want to just point out how powerfully we are influenced by our perspectives and prejudices—our frames. They want to show us that these frames are tools, and that we can optimise their use.” —Forbes From pandemics to populism, AI to ISIS, wealth inequity to climate change, humanity faces unprecedented challenges that threaten our very existence. The essential tool that will enable humanity to find the best way foward is defined in Framers by internationally renowned authors Kenneth Cukier, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, and Francis de Véricourt.    To frame is to make a mental model that enables us to make sense of new situations. Frames guide the decisions we make and the results we attain. People have long focused on traits like memory and reasoning, leaving framing all but ignored. But with computers becoming better at some of those cognitive tasks, framing stands out as a critical function—and only humans can do it. This book is the first guide to mastering this human ability.   Illustrating their case with compelling examples and the latest research, authors Cukier, Mayer-Schönberger, and de Véricourt examine:   ·       Why advice to “think outside the box” is useless ·       How Spotify beat Apple by reframing music as an experience ·       How the #MeToo twitter hashtag reframed the perception of sexual assault ·       The disaster of framing Covid-19 as equivalent to seasonal flu, and how framing it akin to SARS delivered New Zealand from the pandemic   Framers shows how framing is not just a way to improve how we make decisions in the era of algorithms—but why it will be a matter of survival for humanity in a time of societal upheaval and machine prosperity. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459559]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Framers: Human Advantage in an Age of Technology and Turmoil Author: Francis De Véricourt, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, Kenneth Cukier Narrator: Kaleo Griffith Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 46 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Cukier and his co-authors have a more ambitious project than Kahneman and Harari. They don’t want to just point out how powerfully we are influenced by our perspectives and prejudices—our frames. They want to show us that these frames are tools, and that we can optimise their use.” —Forbes From pandemics to populism, AI to ISIS, wealth inequity to climate change, humanity faces unprecedented challenges that threaten our very existence. The essential tool that will enable humanity to find the best way foward is defined in Framers by internationally renowned authors Kenneth Cukier, Viktor Mayer-Schönberger, and Francis de Véricourt.    To frame is to make a mental model that enables us to make sense of new situations. Frames guide the decisions we make and the results we attain. People have long focused on traits like memory and reasoning, leaving framing all but ignored. But with computers becoming better at some of those cognitive tasks, framing stands out as a critical function—and only humans can do it. This book is the first guide to mastering this human ability.   Illustrating their case with compelling examples and the latest research, authors Cukier, Mayer-Schönberger, and de Véricourt examine:   ·       Why advice to “think outside the box” is useless ·       How Spotify beat Apple by reframing music as an experience ·       How the #MeToo twitter hashtag reframed the perception of sexual assault ·       The disaster of framing Covid-19 as equivalent to seasonal flu, and how framing it akin to SARS delivered New Zealand from the pandemic   Framers shows how framing is not just a way to improve how we make decisions in the era of algorithms—but why it will be a matter of survival for humanity in a time of societal upheaval and machine prosperity. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459320 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459320]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - ¡Contrátame!: Destaca tus fortalezas. Imponte en las entrevistas. Haz un currículo perfecto Author: Ivonne Vargas Narrator: Ivonne Vargas Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 48 minutes Release date: September 30, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Consejos y tips sobre las prácticas esenciales para conseguir empleo. Desde las entrevistas de trabajo hasta negociar el primer salario. De Ivonne Vargas, consultora de ZonaJobs y ganadora del Premio de Periodismo en Recursos Humanos de la Bolsa de Empleo OCCMundial . ¡Quiero trabajar! Currículum, entrevistas, preguntas, jefes, experiencia, desempleo, todos los tips que necesitas saber para que seas el candidato perfecto para ese empleo. Logra que tu currículo grite: ¡contrátame!, con el apoyo de este libro indispensable para dejar el desempleo para otros. La competencia por un trabajo es feroz y una cosa es segura: con sólo enviar un currículo (¡y para colmo mal redactado!) no consigues empleo. Contratarse requiere de un plan de acción y este libro es LA GUÍA para conseguir empleo, ¡YA! Encontrarás consejos y soluciones a preguntas prácticas sobre cómo marcar la diferencia, las reglas para negociar tu primer salario y los pasos de una entrevista de trabajo; conocerás el decálogo del buen candidato y sabrás cuántos segundos tienes para impactar a tu reclutador. Ivonne Vargas Wed, 30 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459320 thebookvoice.com 3:48:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459320]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - ¡Contrátame!: Destaca tus fortalezas. Imponte en las entrevistas. Haz un currículo perfecto Author: Ivonne Vargas Narrator: Ivonne Vargas Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 48 minutes Release date: September 30, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Consejos y tips sobre las prácticas esenciales para conseguir empleo. Desde las entrevistas de trabajo hasta negociar el primer salario. De Ivonne Vargas, consultora de ZonaJobs y ganadora del Premio de Periodismo en Recursos Humanos de la Bolsa de Empleo OCCMundial . ¡Quiero trabajar! Currículum, entrevistas, preguntas, jefes, experiencia, desempleo, todos los tips que necesitas saber para que seas el candidato perfecto para ese empleo. Logra que tu currículo grite: ¡contrátame!, con el apoyo de este libro indispensable para dejar el desempleo para otros. La competencia por un trabajo es feroz y una cosa es segura: con sólo enviar un currículo (¡y para colmo mal redactado!) no consigues empleo. Contratarse requiere de un plan de acción y este libro es LA GUÍA para conseguir empleo, ¡YA! Encontrarás consejos y soluciones a preguntas prácticas sobre cómo marcar la diferencia, las reglas para negociar tu primer salario y los pasos de una entrevista de trabajo; conocerás el decálogo del buen candidato y sabrás cuántos segundos tienes para impactar a tu reclutador. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/459320]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - ¡Contrátame!: Destaca tus fortalezas. Imponte en las entrevistas. Haz un currículo perfecto Author: Ivonne Vargas Narrator: Ivonne Vargas Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 48 minutes Release date: September 30, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Consejos y tips sobre las prácticas esenciales para conseguir empleo. Desde las entrevistas de trabajo hasta negociar el primer salario. De Ivonne Vargas, consultora de ZonaJobs y ganadora del Premio de Periodismo en Recursos Humanos de la Bolsa de Empleo OCCMundial . ¡Quiero trabajar! Currículum, entrevistas, preguntas, jefes, experiencia, desempleo, todos los tips que necesitas saber para que seas el candidato perfecto para ese empleo. Logra que tu currículo grite: ¡contrátame!, con el apoyo de este libro indispensable para dejar el desempleo para otros. La competencia por un trabajo es feroz y una cosa es segura: con sólo enviar un currículo (¡y para colmo mal redactado!) no consigues empleo. Contratarse requiere de un plan de acción y este libro es LA GUÍA para conseguir empleo, ¡YA! Encontrarás consejos y soluciones a preguntas prácticas sobre cómo marcar la diferencia, las reglas para negociar tu primer salario y los pasos de una entrevista de trabajo; conocerás el decálogo del buen candidato y sabrás cuántos segundos tienes para impactar a tu reclutador. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457893 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457893]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Investing To Save The Planet: How Your Money Can Make a Difference Author: Alice Ross Narrator: Alice Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 39 minutes Release date: November 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Your money, and how you invest it, could help solve the global climate crisis. In Investing to Save the Planet, Alice Ross reveals why green investing is an untapped opportunity for you to make a positive impact on the health of the planet and your portfolio. The world is changing. The climate crisis has given rise to a wave of companies that are developing cutting-edge, technological solutions to climate change; from improving energy efficiency to engineering alternative meat. These companies, part of an increasingly-popular investment segment collectively known as Environmental, Social and Governance strategies (ESG), are helping tackle our environmental challenges and reshaping the investment landscape. Urgent and indispensable, this investor's guide will provide you with the vital information you need to build your successful ESG investment strategy to secure a positive future for you and the planet. © Alice Ross 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Alice Ross Thu, 19 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457893 thebookvoice.com 4:39:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457893]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Investing To Save The Planet: How Your Money Can Make a Difference Author: Alice Ross Narrator: Alice Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 39 minutes Release date: November 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Your money, and how you invest it, could help solve the global climate crisis. In Investing to Save the Planet, Alice Ross reveals why green investing is an untapped opportunity for you to make a positive impact on the health of the planet and your portfolio. The world is changing. The climate crisis has given rise to a wave of companies that are developing cutting-edge, technological solutions to climate change; from improving energy efficiency to engineering alternative meat. These companies, part of an increasingly-popular investment segment collectively known as Environmental, Social and Governance strategies (ESG), are helping tackle our environmental challenges and reshaping the investment landscape. Urgent and indispensable, this investor's guide will provide you with the vital information you need to build your successful ESG investment strategy to secure a positive future for you and the planet. © Alice Ross 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457893]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Investing To Save The Planet: How Your Money Can Make a Difference Author: Alice Ross Narrator: Alice Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 39 minutes Release date: November 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Your money, and how you invest it, could help solve the global climate crisis. In Investing to Save the Planet, Alice Ross reveals why green investing is an untapped opportunity for you to make a positive impact on the health of the planet and your portfolio. The world is changing. The climate crisis has given rise to a wave of companies that are developing cutting-edge, technological solutions to climate change; from improving energy efficiency to engineering alternative meat. These companies, part of an increasingly-popular investment segment collectively known as Environmental, Social and Governance strategies (ESG), are helping tackle our environmental challenges and reshaping the investment landscape. Urgent and indispensable, this investor's guide will provide you with the vital information you need to build your successful ESG investment strategy to secure a positive future for you and the planet. © Alice Ross 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457102 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457102]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Post Corona: From Crisis to Opportunity Author: Scott Galloway Narrator: Scott Galloway Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 39 minutes Release date: November 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 15 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: New York Times bestseller!    'Few are better positioned to illuminate the vagaries of this transformation than Galloway, a tech entrepreneur, author and professor at New York University’s Stern School. In brisk prose and catchy illustrations, he vividly demonstrates how the largest technology companies turned the crisis of the pandemic into the market-share-grabbing opportunity of a lifetime.' --The New York Times   'As good an analysis as you could wish to read.' --The Financial Times From bestselling author and NYU Business School professor Scott Galloway comes a keenly insightful, urgent analysis of who stands to win and who's at risk to lose in a post-pandemic world The COVID-19 outbreak has turned bedrooms into offices, pitted young against old, and widened the gaps between rich and poor, red and blue, the mask wearers and the mask haters. Some businesses--like home exercise company Peloton, video conference software maker Zoom, and Amazon--woke up to find themselves crushed under an avalanche of consumer demand. Others--like the restaurant, travel, hospitality, and live entertainment industries--scrambled to escape obliteration. But as New York Times bestselling author Scott Galloway argues, the pandemic has not been a change agent so much as an accelerant of trends already well underway. In Post Corona, he outlines the contours of the crisis and the opportunities that lie ahead. Some businesses, like the powerful tech monopolies, will thrive as a result of the disruption. Other industries, like higher education, will struggle to maintain a value proposition that no longer makes sense when we can't stand shoulder to shoulder. And the pandemic has accelerated deeper trends in government and society, exposing a widening gap between our vision of America as a land of opportunity, and the troubling realities of our declining wellbeing. Combining his signature humor and brash style with sharp business insights and the occasional dose of righteous anger, Galloway offers both warning and hope in equal measure. As he writes, 'Our commonwealth didn't just happen, it was shaped. We chose this path--no trend is permanent and can't be made worse or corrected.' THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Scott Galloway Tue, 24 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457102 thebookvoice.com 5:39:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457102]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Post Corona: From Crisis to Opportunity Author: Scott Galloway Narrator: Scott Galloway Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 39 minutes Release date: November 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 15 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: New York Times bestseller!    'Few are better positioned to illuminate the vagaries of this transformation than Galloway, a tech entrepreneur, author and professor at New York University’s Stern School. In brisk prose and catchy illustrations, he vividly demonstrates how the largest technology companies turned the crisis of the pandemic into the market-share-grabbing opportunity of a lifetime.' --The New York Times   'As good an analysis as you could wish to read.' --The Financial Times From bestselling author and NYU Business School professor Scott Galloway comes a keenly insightful, urgent analysis of who stands to win and who's at risk to lose in a post-pandemic world The COVID-19 outbreak has turned bedrooms into offices, pitted young against old, and widened the gaps between rich and poor, red and blue, the mask wearers and the mask haters. Some businesses--like home exercise company Peloton, video conference software maker Zoom, and Amazon--woke up to find themselves crushed under an avalanche of consumer demand. Others--like the restaurant, travel, hospitality, and live entertainment industries--scrambled to escape obliteration. But as New York Times bestselling author Scott Galloway argues, the pandemic has not been a change agent so much as an accelerant of trends already well underway. In Post Corona, he outlines the contours of the crisis and the opportunities that lie ahead. Some businesses, like the powerful tech monopolies, will thrive as a result of the disruption. Other industries, like higher education, will struggle to maintain a value proposition that no longer makes sense when we can't stand shoulder to shoulder. And the pandemic has accelerated deeper trends in government and society, exposing a widening gap between our vision of America as a land of opportunity, and the troubling realities of our declining wellbeing. Combining his signature humor and brash style with sharp business insights and the occasional dose of righteous anger, Galloway offers both warning and hope in equal measure. As he writes, 'Our commonwealth didn't just happen, it was shaped. We chose this path--no trend is permanent and can't be made worse or corrected.' THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/457102]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Post Corona: From Crisis to Opportunity Author: Scott Galloway Narrator: Scott Galloway Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 39 minutes Release date: November 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 15 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: New York Times bestseller!    'Few are better positioned to illuminate the vagaries of this transformation than Galloway, a tech entrepreneur, author and professor at New York University’s Stern School. In brisk prose and catchy illustrations, he vividly demonstrates how the largest technology companies turned the crisis of the pandemic into the market-share-grabbing opportunity of a lifetime.' --The New York Times   'As good an analysis as you could wish to read.' --The Financial Times From bestselling author and NYU Business School professor Scott Galloway comes a keenly insightful, urgent analysis of who stands to win and who's at risk to lose in a post-pandemic world The COVID-19 outbreak has turned bedrooms into offices, pitted young against old, and widened the gaps between rich and poor, red and blue, the mask wearers and the mask haters. Some businesses--like home exercise company Peloton, video conference software maker Zoom, and Amazon--woke up to find themselves crushed under an avalanche of consumer demand. Others--like the restaurant, travel, hospitality, and live entertainment industries--scrambled to escape obliteration. But as New York Times bestselling author Scott Galloway argues, the pandemic has not been a change agent so much as an accelerant of trends already well underway. In Post Corona, he outlines the contours of the crisis and the opportunities that lie ahead. Some businesses, like the powerful tech monopolies, will thrive as a result of the disruption. Other industries, like higher education, will struggle to maintain a value proposition that no longer makes sense when we can't stand shoulder to shoulder. And the pandemic has accelerated deeper trends in government and society, exposing a widening gap between our vision of America as a land of opportunity, and the troubling realities of our declining wellbeing. Combining his signature humor and brash style with sharp business insights and the occasional dose of righteous anger, Galloway offers both warning and hope in equal measure. As he writes, 'Our commonwealth didn't just happen, it was shaped. We chose this path--no trend is permanent and can't be made worse or corrected.' THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456840 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456840]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Uncaring: How the Culture of Medicine Kills Doctors and Patients Author: Robert Pearl Narrator: James Fouhey Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 17 minutes Release date: May 18, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Doctors are taught how to cure people. But they don’t always know how to care for them. Hardly anyone is happy with American healthcare these days. Patients are getting sicker and going bankrupt from medical bills. Doctors are burning out and making dangerous mistakes. Both parties blame our nation’s outdated and dysfunctional healthcare system. But that’s only part of the problem. In this important and timely book, Dr. Robert Pearl shines a light on the unseen and often toxic culture of medicine. Today’s physicians have a surprising disdain for technology, an unhealthy obsession with status, and an increasingly complicated relationship with their patients. All of this can be traced back to their earliest experiences in medical school, where doctors inherit a set of norms, beliefs, and expectations that shape almost every decision they make, with profound consequences for the rest of us. Uncaring draws an original and revealing portrait of what it’s actually like to be a doctor. It illuminates the complex and intimidating world of medicine for readers, and in the end offers a clear plan to save American healthcare. Robert Pearl Tue, 18 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456840 thebookvoice.com 13:17:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456840]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Uncaring: How the Culture of Medicine Kills Doctors and Patients Author: Robert Pearl Narrator: James Fouhey Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 17 minutes Release date: May 18, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Doctors are taught how to cure people. But they don’t always know how to care for them. Hardly anyone is happy with American healthcare these days. Patients are getting sicker and going bankrupt from medical bills. Doctors are burning out and making dangerous mistakes. Both parties blame our nation’s outdated and dysfunctional healthcare system. But that’s only part of the problem. In this important and timely book, Dr. Robert Pearl shines a light on the unseen and often toxic culture of medicine. Today’s physicians have a surprising disdain for technology, an unhealthy obsession with status, and an increasingly complicated relationship with their patients. All of this can be traced back to their earliest experiences in medical school, where doctors inherit a set of norms, beliefs, and expectations that shape almost every decision they make, with profound consequences for the rest of us. Uncaring draws an original and revealing portrait of what it’s actually like to be a doctor. It illuminates the complex and intimidating world of medicine for readers, and in the end offers a clear plan to save American healthcare. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456840]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Uncaring: How the Culture of Medicine Kills Doctors and Patients Author: Robert Pearl Narrator: James Fouhey Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 17 minutes Release date: May 18, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Doctors are taught how to cure people. But they don’t always know how to care for them. Hardly anyone is happy with American healthcare these days. Patients are getting sicker and going bankrupt from medical bills. Doctors are burning out and making dangerous mistakes. Both parties blame our nation’s outdated and dysfunctional healthcare system. But that’s only part of the problem. In this important and timely book, Dr. Robert Pearl shines a light on the unseen and often toxic culture of medicine. Today’s physicians have a surprising disdain for technology, an unhealthy obsession with status, and an increasingly complicated relationship with their patients. All of this can be traced back to their earliest experiences in medical school, where doctors inherit a set of norms, beliefs, and expectations that shape almost every decision they make, with profound consequences for the rest of us. Uncaring draws an original and revealing portrait of what it’s actually like to be a doctor. It illuminates the complex and intimidating world of medicine for readers, and in the end offers a clear plan to save American healthcare. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456838 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456838]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Tarzan Economics: Eight Principles for Pivoting Through Disruption Author: Tbd Narrator: Angus King Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 2 minutes Release date: May 18, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Taking the lessons learned from his years studying the rise and fall of the modern music industry, Spotify's Chief Economist  has crafted “a compelling and generous read” (Scott Galloway) that provides the tools to recognize and adapt to disruption in any industry.   As the chief economist at Spotify, Will Page has had the best seat in the house for witnessing—and harnessing—the power of disruptive change. Music has often been the canary in the coal mine for major technological and societal shifts, and if there’s one thing Page learned from the digital revolution, it’s that businesses must be ready to pivot. Drawing practical lessons from a variety of fresh case studies covering Radiohead, Starbucks, and even Groucho Marx, Page examines the eight principles that disruption has thrown into sharp relief as keys to survival in any sector. Businesses need to be ready and willing to change and, if necessary, be prepared to rebuild entire organizations and business models to do so. Pivoting through disruption has everything to do with being able to see the revolutionary changes around the corner, recognizing your strengths, and having the confidence to let go of the old vine of doing business and grab onto the new.  A rare book of economics offering actionable takeaways in easy-to-understand language, Tarzan Economics is the must-read book for anyone staring at their own Napster moment and wishing they knew how to fail-safe their business. Tbd Tue, 18 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456838 thebookvoice.com 10:2:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456838]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Tarzan Economics: Eight Principles for Pivoting Through Disruption Author: Tbd Narrator: Angus King Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 2 minutes Release date: May 18, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Taking the lessons learned from his years studying the rise and fall of the modern music industry, Spotify's Chief Economist  has crafted “a compelling and generous read” (Scott Galloway) that provides the tools to recognize and adapt to disruption in any industry.   As the chief economist at Spotify, Will Page has had the best seat in the house for witnessing—and harnessing—the power of disruptive change. Music has often been the canary in the coal mine for major technological and societal shifts, and if there’s one thing Page learned from the digital revolution, it’s that businesses must be ready to pivot. Drawing practical lessons from a variety of fresh case studies covering Radiohead, Starbucks, and even Groucho Marx, Page examines the eight principles that disruption has thrown into sharp relief as keys to survival in any sector. Businesses need to be ready and willing to change and, if necessary, be prepared to rebuild entire organizations and business models to do so. Pivoting through disruption has everything to do with being able to see the revolutionary changes around the corner, recognizing your strengths, and having the confidence to let go of the old vine of doing business and grab onto the new.  A rare book of economics offering actionable takeaways in easy-to-understand language, Tarzan Economics is the must-read book for anyone staring at their own Napster moment and wishing they knew how to fail-safe their business. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456838]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Tarzan Economics: Eight Principles for Pivoting Through Disruption Author: Tbd Narrator: Angus King Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 2 minutes Release date: May 18, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Taking the lessons learned from his years studying the rise and fall of the modern music industry, Spotify's Chief Economist  has crafted “a compelling and generous read” (Scott Galloway) that provides the tools to recognize and adapt to disruption in any industry.   As the chief economist at Spotify, Will Page has had the best seat in the house for witnessing—and harnessing—the power of disruptive change. Music has often been the canary in the coal mine for major technological and societal shifts, and if there’s one thing Page learned from the digital revolution, it’s that businesses must be ready to pivot. Drawing practical lessons from a variety of fresh case studies covering Radiohead, Starbucks, and even Groucho Marx, Page examines the eight principles that disruption has thrown into sharp relief as keys to survival in any sector. Businesses need to be ready and willing to change and, if necessary, be prepared to rebuild entire organizations and business models to do so. Pivoting through disruption has everything to do with being able to see the revolutionary changes around the corner, recognizing your strengths, and having the confidence to let go of the old vine of doing business and grab onto the new.  A rare book of economics offering actionable takeaways in easy-to-understand language, Tarzan Economics is the must-read book for anyone staring at their own Napster moment and wishing they knew how to fail-safe their business. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456088 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456088]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Exponential: How Accelerating Technology Is Leaving Us Behind and What to Do About It Author: Azeem Azhar Narrator: Azeem Azhar Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 43 minutes Release date: September 7, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. A revelatory guide to how technology is changing the world, from the creator of Exponential View We are entering the Exponential Age. Between faster computers, better software and bigger data, ours is the first era in human history in which technology is constantly accelerating. Azeem Azhar - writer, technologist, and creator of the acclaimed Exponential View newsletter - understands this shift better than anyone. Technology, he argues, is developing at an increasing, exponential rate. But human society - from our businesses to our political institutions - can only ever adapt at a slower, incremental pace. The result is an 'exponential gap' - between the power of new technology and humans' ability to keep up. In Exponential, Azhar shows how this exponential gap can explain our society's most pressing problems. The gulf between established businesses and fast-growing digital platforms. The inability of nation states to deal with new forms of cyberwarfare. And the sclerotic response of liberal democracies to fast-moving social problems. But the exponential gap is not inevitable. Drawing on fields as varied as economics, political science and psychology, Azhar sketches out how we can harness the power of tech to serve our real needs - fostering new ways of doing business, innovative forms of politics, and fresh approaches to national defence. The result is a holistic new way to make sense of the modern world. Exponential technology is transforming all of our lives. This book explains how. 'Comprehensive but lively . . . An essential addition to the ongoing discourse about where remarkable new technologies can take us, and where we should be aiming to go. Highly recommended!' Reid Hoffman, co-founder of LinkedIn and author of Blitzscaling 'Read this book if you are interested in how we can design a more inclusive and sustainable system with a re-direction of technological change at its centre.' Mariana Mazzucato, UCL professor and author of The Value of Everything 'A powerful argument . . . Azeem Azhar's writing is informative and accessible, and his prescient ideas are only going to become more important as time goes on.' Hannah Fry, BBC Radio 4 presenter and author of Hello World 'Brilliant . . . Demystifies exponentially fast changes and - importantly - shows how the chronic volatility can be harnessed for good. Essential reading for anyone who wants to understand how to reclaim a good society from the snapping jaws of looming chaos.' Robert Peston, ITV Political Editor and author of WTF 'Azeem Azhar is one of the best-regarded thought leaders in the industry . . . He has a broad understanding of the ways technology can be used to solve our biggest problems, shape our society, and bridge cultural divides.' Daniel Ek, co-founder and CEO of Spotify 'Azeem Azhar is a globally recognised voice on technology and its impact. He has written a fascinating and important book, required reading for anyone seeking to understand the new economy and the massive global corporations that seek to dominate that economy.' Matthew Taylor, Chief Executive, Royal Society of Arts © Azeem Azhar 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Azeem Azhar Tue, 07 Sep 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456088 thebookvoice.com 9:43:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456088]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Exponential: How Accelerating Technology Is Leaving Us Behind and What to Do About It Author: Azeem Azhar Narrator: Azeem Azhar Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 43 minutes Release date: September 7, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. A revelatory guide to how technology is changing the world, from the creator of Exponential View We are entering the Exponential Age. Between faster computers, better software and bigger data, ours is the first era in human history in which technology is constantly accelerating. Azeem Azhar - writer, technologist, and creator of the acclaimed Exponential View newsletter - understands this shift better than anyone. Technology, he argues, is developing at an increasing, exponential rate. But human society - from our businesses to our political institutions - can only ever adapt at a slower, incremental pace. The result is an 'exponential gap' - between the power of new technology and humans' ability to keep up. In Exponential, Azhar shows how this exponential gap can explain our society's most pressing problems. The gulf between established businesses and fast-growing digital platforms. The inability of nation states to deal with new forms of cyberwarfare. And the sclerotic response of liberal democracies to fast-moving social problems. But the exponential gap is not inevitable. Drawing on fields as varied as economics, political science and psychology, Azhar sketches out how we can harness the power of tech to serve our real needs - fostering new ways of doing business, innovative forms of politics, and fresh approaches to national defence. The result is a holistic new way to make sense of the modern world. Exponential technology is transforming all of our lives. This book explains how. 'Comprehensive but lively . . . An essential addition to the ongoing discourse about where remarkable new technologies can take us, and where we should be aiming to go. Highly recommended!' Reid Hoffman, co-founder of LinkedIn and author of Blitzscaling 'Read this book if you are interested in how we can design a more inclusive and sustainable system with a re-direction of technological change at its centre.' Mariana Mazzucato, UCL professor and author of The Value of Everything 'A powerful argument . . . Azeem Azhar's writing is informative and accessible, and his prescient ideas are only going to become more important as time goes on.' Hannah Fry, BBC Radio 4 presenter and author of Hello World 'Brilliant . . . Demystifies exponentially fast changes and - importantly - shows how the chronic volatility can be harnessed for good. Essential reading for anyone who wants to understand how to reclaim a good society from the snapping jaws of looming chaos.' Robert Peston, ITV Political Editor and author of WTF 'Azeem Azhar is one of the best-regarded thought leaders in the industry . . . He has a broad understanding of the ways technology can be used to solve our biggest problems, shape our society, and bridge cultural divides.' Daniel Ek, co-founder and CEO of Spotify 'Azeem Azhar is a globally recognised voice on technology and its impact. He has written a fascinating and important book, required reading for anyone seeking to understand the new economy and the massive global corporations that seek to dominate that economy.' Matthew Taylor, Chief Executive, Royal Society of Arts © Azeem Azhar 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/456088]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Exponential: How Accelerating Technology Is Leaving Us Behind and What to Do About It Author: Azeem Azhar Narrator: Azeem Azhar Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 43 minutes Release date: September 7, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. A revelatory guide to how technology is changing the world, from the creator of Exponential View We are entering the Exponential Age. Between faster computers, better software and bigger data, ours is the first era in human history in which technology is constantly accelerating. Azeem Azhar - writer, technologist, and creator of the acclaimed Exponential View newsletter - understands this shift better than anyone. Technology, he argues, is developing at an increasing, exponential rate. But human society - from our businesses to our political institutions - can only ever adapt at a slower, incremental pace. The result is an 'exponential gap' - between the power of new technology and humans' ability to keep up. In Exponential, Azhar shows how this exponential gap can explain our society's most pressing problems. The gulf between established businesses and fast-growing digital platforms. The inability of nation states to deal with new forms of cyberwarfare. And the sclerotic response of liberal democracies to fast-moving social problems. But the exponential gap is not inevitable. Drawing on fields as varied as economics, political science and psychology, Azhar sketches out how we can harness the power of tech to serve our real needs - fostering new ways of doing business, innovative forms of politics, and fresh approaches to national defence. The result is a holistic new way to make sense of the modern world. Exponential technology is transforming all of our lives. This book explains how. 'Comprehensive but lively . . . An essential addition to the ongoing discourse about where remarkable new technologies can take us, and where we should be aiming to go. Highly recommended!' Reid Hoffman, co-founder of LinkedIn and author of Blitzscaling 'Read this book if you are interested in how we can design a more inclusive and sustainable system with a re-direction of technological change at its centre.' Mariana Mazzucato, UCL professor and author of The Value of Everything 'A powerful argument . . . Azeem Azhar's writing is informative and accessible, and his prescient ideas are only going to become more important as time goes on.' Hannah Fry, BBC Radio 4 presenter and author of Hello World 'Brilliant . . . Demystifies exponentially fast changes and - importantly - shows how the chronic volatility can be harnessed for good. Essential reading for anyone who wants to understand how to reclaim a good society from the snapping jaws of looming chaos.' Robert Peston, ITV Political Editor and author of WTF 'Azeem Azhar is one of the best-regarded thought leaders in the industry . . . He has a broad understanding of the ways technology can be used to solve our biggest problems, shape our society, and bridge cultural divides.' Daniel Ek, co-founder and CEO of Spotify 'Azeem Azhar is a globally recognised voice on technology and its impact. He has written a fascinating and important book, required reading for anyone seeking to understand the new economy and the massive global corporations that seek to dominate that economy.' Matthew Taylor, Chief Executive, Royal Society of Arts © Azeem Azhar 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/455841 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/455841]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Irrational Exuberance: Revised and Expanded Third Edition Author: Robert J. Shiller Narrator: Mike Chamberlain Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 47 minutes Release date: November 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this revised, updated, and expanded edition of his New York Times bestseller, Nobel Prize–winning economist Robert Shiller, who warned of both the tech and housing bubbles, cautions that signs of irrational exuberance among investors have only increased since the 2008–9 financial crisis. With high stock and bond prices and the rising cost of housing, the post-subprime boom may well turn out to be another illustration of Shiller's influential argument that psychologically driven volatility is an inherent characteristic of all asset markets. In other words, Irrational Exuberance is as relevant as ever. Previous editions covered the stock and housing markets—and famously predicted their crashes. This edition expands its coverage to include the bond market, so that the book now addresses all of the major investment markets. It also includes updated data throughout, as well as Shiller's 2013 Nobel Prize lecture, which places the book in broader context. In addition to diagnosing the causes of asset bubbles, Irrational Exuberance recommends urgent policy changes to lessen their likelihood and severity—and suggests ways that individuals can decrease their risk before the next bubble bursts. No one whose future depends on a retirement account, a house, or other investments can afford not to listen to this book. Robert J. Shiller Tue, 24 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/455841 thebookvoice.com 13:47:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/455841]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Irrational Exuberance: Revised and Expanded Third Edition Author: Robert J. Shiller Narrator: Mike Chamberlain Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 47 minutes Release date: November 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this revised, updated, and expanded edition of his New York Times bestseller, Nobel Prize–winning economist Robert Shiller, who warned of both the tech and housing bubbles, cautions that signs of irrational exuberance among investors have only increased since the 2008–9 financial crisis. With high stock and bond prices and the rising cost of housing, the post-subprime boom may well turn out to be another illustration of Shiller's influential argument that psychologically driven volatility is an inherent characteristic of all asset markets. In other words, Irrational Exuberance is as relevant as ever. Previous editions covered the stock and housing markets—and famously predicted their crashes. This edition expands its coverage to include the bond market, so that the book now addresses all of the major investment markets. It also includes updated data throughout, as well as Shiller's 2013 Nobel Prize lecture, which places the book in broader context. In addition to diagnosing the causes of asset bubbles, Irrational Exuberance recommends urgent policy changes to lessen their likelihood and severity—and suggests ways that individuals can decrease their risk before the next bubble bursts. No one whose future depends on a retirement account, a house, or other investments can afford not to listen to this book. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/455841]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Irrational Exuberance: Revised and Expanded Third Edition Author: Robert J. Shiller Narrator: Mike Chamberlain Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 47 minutes Release date: November 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this revised, updated, and expanded edition of his New York Times bestseller, Nobel Prize–winning economist Robert Shiller, who warned of both the tech and housing bubbles, cautions that signs of irrational exuberance among investors have only increased since the 2008–9 financial crisis. With high stock and bond prices and the rising cost of housing, the post-subprime boom may well turn out to be another illustration of Shiller's influential argument that psychologically driven volatility is an inherent characteristic of all asset markets. In other words, Irrational Exuberance is as relevant as ever. Previous editions covered the stock and housing markets—and famously predicted their crashes. This edition expands its coverage to include the bond market, so that the book now addresses all of the major investment markets. It also includes updated data throughout, as well as Shiller's 2013 Nobel Prize lecture, which places the book in broader context. In addition to diagnosing the causes of asset bubbles, Irrational Exuberance recommends urgent policy changes to lessen their likelihood and severity—and suggests ways that individuals can decrease their risk before the next bubble bursts. No one whose future depends on a retirement account, a house, or other investments can afford not to listen to this book. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453980 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453980]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A Good War: Mobilizing Canada for the Climate Emergency Author: Seth Klein Narrator: John Cleland Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 50 minutes Release date: September 1, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: "This is the roadmap out of climate crisis that Canadians have been waiting for." - Naomi Klein, activist and New York Times bestselling author of This Changes Everything and The Shock Doctrine - One of Canada's top policy analysts provides the first full-scale blueprint for meeting our climate change commitments - Contains the results of a national poll on Canadians' attitudes to the climate crisis - Shows that radical transformative climate action can be done, while producing jobs and reducing inequality as we retool how we live and work. - Deeply researched and targeted specifically to Canada and Canadians while providing a model that other countries could follow Canada needs to reduce its greenhouse gas emissions by 50% to prevent a catastrophic 1.5 degree increase in the earth's average temperature - assumed by many scientists to be a critical "danger line" for the planet and human life as we know it. It's 2020, and Canada is not on track to meet our targets. To do so, we'll need radical systemic change to how we live and work-and fast. How can we ever achieve this? Top policy analyst and author Seth Klein reveals we can do it now because we've done it before. During the Second World War, Canadian citizens and government remade the economy by retooling factories, transforming their workforce, and making the war effort a common cause for all Canadians to contribute to. Klein demonstrates how wartime thinking and community efforts can be repurposed today for Canada's own Green New Deal. He shares how we can create jobs and reduce inequality while tackling our climate obligations for a climate neutral-or even climate zero-future. From enlisting broad public support for new economic models, to job creation through investment in green infrastructure, Klein shows us a bold, practical policy plan for Canada's sustainable future. More than this: A Good War offers a remarkably hopeful message for how we can meet the defining challenge of our lives. COVID-19 has brought a previously unthinkable pace of change to the world-one which demonstrates our ability to adapt rapidly when we're at risk. Many recent changes are what Klein proposes in these very pages. The world can, actually, turn on a dime if necessary. This is the blueprint for how to do it. Seth Klein Tue, 01 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453980 thebookvoice.com 18:50:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453980]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A Good War: Mobilizing Canada for the Climate Emergency Author: Seth Klein Narrator: John Cleland Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 50 minutes Release date: September 1, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: "This is the roadmap out of climate crisis that Canadians have been waiting for." - Naomi Klein, activist and New York Times bestselling author of This Changes Everything and The Shock Doctrine - One of Canada's top policy analysts provides the first full-scale blueprint for meeting our climate change commitments - Contains the results of a national poll on Canadians' attitudes to the climate crisis - Shows that radical transformative climate action can be done, while producing jobs and reducing inequality as we retool how we live and work. - Deeply researched and targeted specifically to Canada and Canadians while providing a model that other countries could follow Canada needs to reduce its greenhouse gas emissions by 50% to prevent a catastrophic 1.5 degree increase in the earth's average temperature - assumed by many scientists to be a critical "danger line" for the planet and human life as we know it. It's 2020, and Canada is not on track to meet our targets. To do so, we'll need radical systemic change to how we live and work-and fast. How can we ever achieve this? Top policy analyst and author Seth Klein reveals we can do it now because we've done it before. During the Second World War, Canadian citizens and government remade the economy by retooling factories, transforming their workforce, and making the war effort a common cause for all Canadians to contribute to. Klein demonstrates how wartime thinking and community efforts can be repurposed today for Canada's own Green New Deal. He shares how we can create jobs and reduce inequality while tackling our climate obligations for a climate neutral-or even climate zero-future. From enlisting broad public support for new economic models, to job creation through investment in green infrastructure, Klein shows us a bold, practical policy plan for Canada's sustainable future. More than this: A Good War offers a remarkably hopeful message for how we can meet the defining challenge of our lives. COVID-19 has brought a previously unthinkable pace of change to the world-one which demonstrates our ability to adapt rapidly when we're at risk. Many recent changes are what Klein proposes in these very pages. The world can, actually, turn on a dime if necessary. This is the blueprint for how to do it. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453980]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A Good War: Mobilizing Canada for the Climate Emergency Author: Seth Klein Narrator: John Cleland Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 50 minutes Release date: September 1, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: "This is the roadmap out of climate crisis that Canadians have been waiting for." - Naomi Klein, activist and New York Times bestselling author of This Changes Everything and The Shock Doctrine - One of Canada's top policy analysts provides the first full-scale blueprint for meeting our climate change commitments - Contains the results of a national poll on Canadians' attitudes to the climate crisis - Shows that radical transformative climate action can be done, while producing jobs and reducing inequality as we retool how we live and work. - Deeply researched and targeted specifically to Canada and Canadians while providing a model that other countries could follow Canada needs to reduce its greenhouse gas emissions by 50% to prevent a catastrophic 1.5 degree increase in the earth's average temperature - assumed by many scientists to be a critical "danger line" for the planet and human life as we know it. It's 2020, and Canada is not on track to meet our targets. To do so, we'll need radical systemic change to how we live and work-and fast. How can we ever achieve this? Top policy analyst and author Seth Klein reveals we can do it now because we've done it before. During the Second World War, Canadian citizens and government remade the economy by retooling factories, transforming their workforce, and making the war effort a common cause for all Canadians to contribute to. Klein demonstrates how wartime thinking and community efforts can be repurposed today for Canada's own Green New Deal. He shares how we can create jobs and reduce inequality while tackling our climate obligations for a climate neutral-or even climate zero-future. From enlisting broad public support for new economic models, to job creation through investment in green infrastructure, Klein shows us a bold, practical policy plan for Canada's sustainable future. More than this: A Good War offers a remarkably hopeful message for how we can meet the defining challenge of our lives. COVID-19 has brought a previously unthinkable pace of change to the world-one which demonstrates our ability to adapt rapidly when we're at risk. Many recent changes are what Klein proposes in these very pages. The world can, actually, turn on a dime if necessary. This is the blueprint for how to do it. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453646 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453646]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: God and Mammon: Chronicles of American Money Author: Lance Morrow Narrator: Tom Parks Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 23 minutes Release date: October 27, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book is about the partnership of God and Mammon in the New World—about how Americans have made money and lost money, and about how they have thought about that obsessive and peculiarly American subject. Money is the basic American thing, the life's blood of the country. God and Mammon shows how the dynamics of money in its many dimensions (material, spiritual, cultural, psychological) worked to make America what it is. It traces the grand American binaries of success and failure to their theological origins in Calvinism's anxieties about salvation and damnation. Lance Morrow Tue, 27 Oct 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453646 thebookvoice.com 6:23:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453646]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: God and Mammon: Chronicles of American Money Author: Lance Morrow Narrator: Tom Parks Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 23 minutes Release date: October 27, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book is about the partnership of God and Mammon in the New World—about how Americans have made money and lost money, and about how they have thought about that obsessive and peculiarly American subject. Money is the basic American thing, the life's blood of the country. God and Mammon shows how the dynamics of money in its many dimensions (material, spiritual, cultural, psychological) worked to make America what it is. It traces the grand American binaries of success and failure to their theological origins in Calvinism's anxieties about salvation and damnation. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453646]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: God and Mammon: Chronicles of American Money Author: Lance Morrow Narrator: Tom Parks Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 23 minutes Release date: October 27, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book is about the partnership of God and Mammon in the New World—about how Americans have made money and lost money, and about how they have thought about that obsessive and peculiarly American subject. Money is the basic American thing, the life's blood of the country. God and Mammon shows how the dynamics of money in its many dimensions (material, spiritual, cultural, psychological) worked to make America what it is. It traces the grand American binaries of success and failure to their theological origins in Calvinism's anxieties about salvation and damnation. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453067 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453067]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: New Ideas from Dead Economists: The Introduction to Modern Economic Thought, 4th Edition Author: Todd G. Buchholz Narrator: Todd G. Buchholz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 40 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The classic introduction to economic thought, now updated in time for the publication of New Ideas from Dead CEOs This entertaining and accessible introduction to the great economic thinkers throughout history? Adam Smith, John Stuart Mill, Karl Marx, John Maynard Keynes, and more?shows how their ideas still apply to our modern world. In this revised edition, renowned economist Todd Buchholz offers an insightful and informed perspective on key economic issues in the new millennium: increasing demand for energy, the rise of China, international trade, aging populations, health care, and the effects of global warming. New Ideas from Dead Economists is a fascinating guide to understanding both the evolution of economic theory and our complex contemporary economy. Todd G. Buchholz Tue, 26 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453067 thebookvoice.com 18:40:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453067]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: New Ideas from Dead Economists: The Introduction to Modern Economic Thought, 4th Edition Author: Todd G. Buchholz Narrator: Todd G. Buchholz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 40 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The classic introduction to economic thought, now updated in time for the publication of New Ideas from Dead CEOs This entertaining and accessible introduction to the great economic thinkers throughout history? Adam Smith, John Stuart Mill, Karl Marx, John Maynard Keynes, and more?shows how their ideas still apply to our modern world. In this revised edition, renowned economist Todd Buchholz offers an insightful and informed perspective on key economic issues in the new millennium: increasing demand for energy, the rise of China, international trade, aging populations, health care, and the effects of global warming. New Ideas from Dead Economists is a fascinating guide to understanding both the evolution of economic theory and our complex contemporary economy. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/453067]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: New Ideas from Dead Economists: The Introduction to Modern Economic Thought, 4th Edition Author: Todd G. Buchholz Narrator: Todd G. Buchholz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 40 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The classic introduction to economic thought, now updated in time for the publication of New Ideas from Dead CEOs This entertaining and accessible introduction to the great economic thinkers throughout history? Adam Smith, John Stuart Mill, Karl Marx, John Maynard Keynes, and more?shows how their ideas still apply to our modern world. In this revised edition, renowned economist Todd Buchholz offers an insightful and informed perspective on key economic issues in the new millennium: increasing demand for energy, the rise of China, international trade, aging populations, health care, and the effects of global warming. New Ideas from Dead Economists is a fascinating guide to understanding both the evolution of economic theory and our complex contemporary economy. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451446 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451446]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New Great Depression: Winners and Losers in a Post-Pandemic World Author: James Rickards Narrator: James Rickards Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 27 minutes Release date: January 12, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.1 of Total 39 Ratings of Narrator: 4.14 of Total 7 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A Wall Street Journal and National Bestseller! The man who predicted the worst economic crisis in US history shows you how to survive it. The current crisis is not like 2008 or even 1929. The New Depression that has emerged from the COVID pandemic is the worst economic crisis in U.S. history. Most fired employees will remain redundant. Bankruptcies will be common, and banks will buckle under the weight of bad debts. Deflation, debt, and demography will wreck any chance of recovery, and social disorder will follow closely on the heels of market chaos. The happy talk from Wall Street and the White House is an illusion. The worst is yet to come. But for knowledgeable investors, all hope is not lost. In The New Great Depression, James Rickards, New York Times bestselling author of Aftermath and The New Case for Gold, pulls back the curtain to reveal the true risks to our financial system and what savvy investors can do to survive -- even prosper -- during a time of unrivaled turbulence. Drawing on historical case studies, monetary theory, and behind-the-scenes access to the halls of power, Rickards shines a clarifying light on the events taking place, so investors understand what's really happening and what they can do about it. A must-read for any fans of Rickards and for investors everywhere who want to understand how to preserve their wealth during the worst economic crisis in US history. James Rickards Tue, 12 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451446 thebookvoice.com 5:27:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451446]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New Great Depression: Winners and Losers in a Post-Pandemic World Author: James Rickards Narrator: James Rickards Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 27 minutes Release date: January 12, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.1 of Total 39 Ratings of Narrator: 4.14 of Total 7 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A Wall Street Journal and National Bestseller! The man who predicted the worst economic crisis in US history shows you how to survive it. The current crisis is not like 2008 or even 1929. The New Depression that has emerged from the COVID pandemic is the worst economic crisis in U.S. history. Most fired employees will remain redundant. Bankruptcies will be common, and banks will buckle under the weight of bad debts. Deflation, debt, and demography will wreck any chance of recovery, and social disorder will follow closely on the heels of market chaos. The happy talk from Wall Street and the White House is an illusion. The worst is yet to come. But for knowledgeable investors, all hope is not lost. In The New Great Depression, James Rickards, New York Times bestselling author of Aftermath and The New Case for Gold, pulls back the curtain to reveal the true risks to our financial system and what savvy investors can do to survive -- even prosper -- during a time of unrivaled turbulence. Drawing on historical case studies, monetary theory, and behind-the-scenes access to the halls of power, Rickards shines a clarifying light on the events taking place, so investors understand what's really happening and what they can do about it. A must-read for any fans of Rickards and for investors everywhere who want to understand how to preserve their wealth during the worst economic crisis in US history. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451446]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New Great Depression: Winners and Losers in a Post-Pandemic World Author: James Rickards Narrator: James Rickards Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 27 minutes Release date: January 12, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.1 of Total 39 Ratings of Narrator: 4.14 of Total 7 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A Wall Street Journal and National Bestseller! The man who predicted the worst economic crisis in US history shows you how to survive it. The current crisis is not like 2008 or even 1929. The New Depression that has emerged from the COVID pandemic is the worst economic crisis in U.S. history. Most fired employees will remain redundant. Bankruptcies will be common, and banks will buckle under the weight of bad debts. Deflation, debt, and demography will wreck any chance of recovery, and social disorder will follow closely on the heels of market chaos. The happy talk from Wall Street and the White House is an illusion. The worst is yet to come. But for knowledgeable investors, all hope is not lost. In The New Great Depression, James Rickards, New York Times bestselling author of Aftermath and The New Case for Gold, pulls back the curtain to reveal the true risks to our financial system and what savvy investors can do to survive -- even prosper -- during a time of unrivaled turbulence. Drawing on historical case studies, monetary theory, and behind-the-scenes access to the halls of power, Rickards shines a clarifying light on the events taking place, so investors understand what's really happening and what they can do about it. A must-read for any fans of Rickards and for investors everywhere who want to understand how to preserve their wealth during the worst economic crisis in US history. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451014 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451014]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Statistics for Beginners: How easy it is to lie with statistics in business, social science, politics, criminology and law Author: Bob Mather Narrator: Cliff Weldon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 2 minutes Release date: July 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Big Brother is watching you. Discover how statistics can be used to control our society. Have you ever wondered what your neighbor does every morning at 8:35 am, when you hear weird sounds coming from his balcony? Did you ever realize that the “likes“ you put on other people´s Instagram account will influence the next summer collection of Zara, H&M, and Nike? Are you aware that whenever you swipe your credit card in the supermarket, you are not only paying with money, but you are giving valuable personal data away for free? The science of collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data became a powerful tool to get useful information about humans and their environment. Personal data has more value than ever and yet you leave terabytes of it for free on your devices or floating around in your cloud. Not only do Google and Facebook harvest billions from using your data for advertising, but talented hackers have also created a luxurious living from stealing and selling your data. In our high tech world, decision making is based on evidence instead of assumptions. By now our entire world is build around reliable statistics. ...ehm hold on. Reliable? In Statistics for Beginners, you´ll discover: How statistics replaced religion and what happened to god What will happen when robots will take the world leadership and how close we are to a gigantic robot invasion How statistics can save or destroy the world with simple tricks scientists use to present their so called “proven evidence“ How statistics helped an old lady to get her stolen purse back Discover the power of statistics and how they change your daily life. You should know how to interpret the numbers, facts, and studies you consume to be ahead of everyone else and become an insider instead of an innocent victim. Bob Mather Wed, 08 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451014 thebookvoice.com 3:2:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451014]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Statistics for Beginners: How easy it is to lie with statistics in business, social science, politics, criminology and law Author: Bob Mather Narrator: Cliff Weldon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 2 minutes Release date: July 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Big Brother is watching you. Discover how statistics can be used to control our society. Have you ever wondered what your neighbor does every morning at 8:35 am, when you hear weird sounds coming from his balcony? Did you ever realize that the “likes“ you put on other people´s Instagram account will influence the next summer collection of Zara, H&M, and Nike? Are you aware that whenever you swipe your credit card in the supermarket, you are not only paying with money, but you are giving valuable personal data away for free? The science of collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data became a powerful tool to get useful information about humans and their environment. Personal data has more value than ever and yet you leave terabytes of it for free on your devices or floating around in your cloud. Not only do Google and Facebook harvest billions from using your data for advertising, but talented hackers have also created a luxurious living from stealing and selling your data. In our high tech world, decision making is based on evidence instead of assumptions. By now our entire world is build around reliable statistics. ...ehm hold on. Reliable? In Statistics for Beginners, you´ll discover: How statistics replaced religion and what happened to god What will happen when robots will take the world leadership and how close we are to a gigantic robot invasion How statistics can save or destroy the world with simple tricks scientists use to present their so called “proven evidence“ How statistics helped an old lady to get her stolen purse back Discover the power of statistics and how they change your daily life. You should know how to interpret the numbers, facts, and studies you consume to be ahead of everyone else and become an insider instead of an innocent victim. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/451014]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Statistics for Beginners: How easy it is to lie with statistics in business, social science, politics, criminology and law Author: Bob Mather Narrator: Cliff Weldon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 2 minutes Release date: July 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Big Brother is watching you. Discover how statistics can be used to control our society. Have you ever wondered what your neighbor does every morning at 8:35 am, when you hear weird sounds coming from his balcony? Did you ever realize that the “likes“ you put on other people´s Instagram account will influence the next summer collection of Zara, H&M, and Nike? Are you aware that whenever you swipe your credit card in the supermarket, you are not only paying with money, but you are giving valuable personal data away for free? The science of collecting, analyzing, and interpreting data became a powerful tool to get useful information about humans and their environment. Personal data has more value than ever and yet you leave terabytes of it for free on your devices or floating around in your cloud. Not only do Google and Facebook harvest billions from using your data for advertising, but talented hackers have also created a luxurious living from stealing and selling your data. In our high tech world, decision making is based on evidence instead of assumptions. By now our entire world is build around reliable statistics. ...ehm hold on. Reliable? In Statistics for Beginners, you´ll discover: How statistics replaced religion and what happened to god What will happen when robots will take the world leadership and how close we are to a gigantic robot invasion How statistics can save or destroy the world with simple tricks scientists use to present their so called “proven evidence“ How statistics helped an old lady to get her stolen purse back Discover the power of statistics and how they change your daily life. You should know how to interpret the numbers, facts, and studies you consume to be ahead of everyone else and become an insider instead of an innocent victim. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/450966 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/450966]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Cooperation and Coercion: How Busybodies Became Busybullies and What that Means for Economics and Politics Author: Antony Davies, James R. Harrigan Narrator: Pat Grimes Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 33 minutes Release date: August 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: There are only two ways that humans work together: they cooperate with one another, or they coerce one another. And once you realize this fundamental fact, it will change how you see the world. In this myth-busting book, Antony Davies and James R. Harrigan display their wisdom and talent for explaining complex topics, which have attracted a devoted audience to their weekly podcast, Words & Numbers, and made them popular speakers around the country. By looking for cooperation and coercion in everyday life, they help make sense of a wide range of issues that dominate the public debate. You’ll come away from this book with a clear understanding of everything from the minimum wage to taxes, from gun control to government regulations, from the War on Terror to the War on Drugs to the War on Poverty. It turns out that coercion is necessary...sometimes. Even in a democracy, we all abide by rules, including plenty that we don’t agree with, in the name of getting along. But in the end, Davies and Harrigan show that cooperation, without question, is the key to human happiness and progress. The more we encourage it, the better off we all are. Antony Davies, James R. Harrigan Tue, 25 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/450966 thebookvoice.com 4:33:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/450966]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Cooperation and Coercion: How Busybodies Became Busybullies and What that Means for Economics and Politics Author: Antony Davies, James R. Harrigan Narrator: Pat Grimes Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 33 minutes Release date: August 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: There are only two ways that humans work together: they cooperate with one another, or they coerce one another. And once you realize this fundamental fact, it will change how you see the world. In this myth-busting book, Antony Davies and James R. Harrigan display their wisdom and talent for explaining complex topics, which have attracted a devoted audience to their weekly podcast, Words & Numbers, and made them popular speakers around the country. By looking for cooperation and coercion in everyday life, they help make sense of a wide range of issues that dominate the public debate. You’ll come away from this book with a clear understanding of everything from the minimum wage to taxes, from gun control to government regulations, from the War on Terror to the War on Drugs to the War on Poverty. It turns out that coercion is necessary...sometimes. Even in a democracy, we all abide by rules, including plenty that we don’t agree with, in the name of getting along. But in the end, Davies and Harrigan show that cooperation, without question, is the key to human happiness and progress. The more we encourage it, the better off we all are. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/450966]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Cooperation and Coercion: How Busybodies Became Busybullies and What that Means for Economics and Politics Author: Antony Davies, James R. Harrigan Narrator: Pat Grimes Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 33 minutes Release date: August 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: There are only two ways that humans work together: they cooperate with one another, or they coerce one another. And once you realize this fundamental fact, it will change how you see the world. In this myth-busting book, Antony Davies and James R. Harrigan display their wisdom and talent for explaining complex topics, which have attracted a devoted audience to their weekly podcast, Words & Numbers, and made them popular speakers around the country. By looking for cooperation and coercion in everyday life, they help make sense of a wide range of issues that dominate the public debate. You’ll come away from this book with a clear understanding of everything from the minimum wage to taxes, from gun control to government regulations, from the War on Terror to the War on Drugs to the War on Poverty. It turns out that coercion is necessary...sometimes. Even in a democracy, we all abide by rules, including plenty that we don’t agree with, in the name of getting along. But in the end, Davies and Harrigan show that cooperation, without question, is the key to human happiness and progress. The more we encourage it, the better off we all are. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/447195 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/447195]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Cost of Free Money: How Unfettered Capital Threatens Our Economic Future Author: Paola Subacchi Narrator: Henrietta Meire Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 36 minutes Release date: September 29, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A penetrating account of how unchecked capital mobility is damaging international cooperation, polarizing the economic landscape, and ultimately reshaping the global order When it comes to the afflictions of the global economy, almost everyone—and especially Donald Trump—is quick to point the finger of blame at the state of international trade. But what about unconstrained capital flows? Unfettered capital has resulted in a string of financial and economic crises that have left our political systems strained and dialogue corroded. The once perceived benefits of openness have been cast to the wayside and the cracks in the global order can no longer be ignored. Paola Subacchi argues that international cooperation and interdependence have become crippled. Regional restrictions will soon strengthen and a multipolar order will take shape, leading to a distinctly transformed economic landscape in which China challenges the dominance of the US dollar. Combining history, analysis, and prediction, this book provides penetrating insight into the challenges facing the international economic order. Paola Subacchi Tue, 29 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/447195 thebookvoice.com 11:36:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/447195]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Cost of Free Money: How Unfettered Capital Threatens Our Economic Future Author: Paola Subacchi Narrator: Henrietta Meire Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 36 minutes Release date: September 29, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A penetrating account of how unchecked capital mobility is damaging international cooperation, polarizing the economic landscape, and ultimately reshaping the global order When it comes to the afflictions of the global economy, almost everyone—and especially Donald Trump—is quick to point the finger of blame at the state of international trade. But what about unconstrained capital flows? Unfettered capital has resulted in a string of financial and economic crises that have left our political systems strained and dialogue corroded. The once perceived benefits of openness have been cast to the wayside and the cracks in the global order can no longer be ignored. Paola Subacchi argues that international cooperation and interdependence have become crippled. Regional restrictions will soon strengthen and a multipolar order will take shape, leading to a distinctly transformed economic landscape in which China challenges the dominance of the US dollar. Combining history, analysis, and prediction, this book provides penetrating insight into the challenges facing the international economic order. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/447195]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Cost of Free Money: How Unfettered Capital Threatens Our Economic Future Author: Paola Subacchi Narrator: Henrietta Meire Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 36 minutes Release date: September 29, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A penetrating account of how unchecked capital mobility is damaging international cooperation, polarizing the economic landscape, and ultimately reshaping the global order When it comes to the afflictions of the global economy, almost everyone—and especially Donald Trump—is quick to point the finger of blame at the state of international trade. But what about unconstrained capital flows? Unfettered capital has resulted in a string of financial and economic crises that have left our political systems strained and dialogue corroded. The once perceived benefits of openness have been cast to the wayside and the cracks in the global order can no longer be ignored. Paola Subacchi argues that international cooperation and interdependence have become crippled. Regional restrictions will soon strengthen and a multipolar order will take shape, leading to a distinctly transformed economic landscape in which China challenges the dominance of the US dollar. Combining history, analysis, and prediction, this book provides penetrating insight into the challenges facing the international economic order. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445922 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445922]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Servant Economy: Where America's Elite is Sending the Middle Class Author: Jeff Faux Narrator: Jim Seybert Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 45 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: America's political and economic elite spent so long making such terrible decisions that they caused the collapse of 2008. So how can they continue down the same road? The simple answer that no one in charge wants to publicly acknowledge is that things are still pretty great for the people who run America. It was an accident of history, Jeff Faux explains, that after World War II the U.S. could afford a prosperous middle class, a dominant military, and a booming economic elite at the same time. For the past three decades, all three have been competing, with the middle class always losing. Soon the military will decline as well. Faux's last book, The Global Class War, sold over 20,000 copies by correctly predicting the permanent decline of our debt-burdened middle class at the hands of our off-shoring executives, out-of-control financiers, and their friends in Washington. Since his last book, Faux is repeatedly asked what either party will do to face these mounting crises. After looking over actual policies, proposed plans, non-partisan reports, and think-tank papers, his astonishing conclusion is that they’ll just do more of the same. Jeff Faux Tue, 04 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445922 thebookvoice.com 10:45:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445922]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Servant Economy: Where America's Elite is Sending the Middle Class Author: Jeff Faux Narrator: Jim Seybert Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 45 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: America's political and economic elite spent so long making such terrible decisions that they caused the collapse of 2008. So how can they continue down the same road? The simple answer that no one in charge wants to publicly acknowledge is that things are still pretty great for the people who run America. It was an accident of history, Jeff Faux explains, that after World War II the U.S. could afford a prosperous middle class, a dominant military, and a booming economic elite at the same time. For the past three decades, all three have been competing, with the middle class always losing. Soon the military will decline as well. Faux's last book, The Global Class War, sold over 20,000 copies by correctly predicting the permanent decline of our debt-burdened middle class at the hands of our off-shoring executives, out-of-control financiers, and their friends in Washington. Since his last book, Faux is repeatedly asked what either party will do to face these mounting crises. After looking over actual policies, proposed plans, non-partisan reports, and think-tank papers, his astonishing conclusion is that they’ll just do more of the same. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445922]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Servant Economy: Where America's Elite is Sending the Middle Class Author: Jeff Faux Narrator: Jim Seybert Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 45 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: America's political and economic elite spent so long making such terrible decisions that they caused the collapse of 2008. So how can they continue down the same road? The simple answer that no one in charge wants to publicly acknowledge is that things are still pretty great for the people who run America. It was an accident of history, Jeff Faux explains, that after World War II the U.S. could afford a prosperous middle class, a dominant military, and a booming economic elite at the same time. For the past three decades, all three have been competing, with the middle class always losing. Soon the military will decline as well. Faux's last book, The Global Class War, sold over 20,000 copies by correctly predicting the permanent decline of our debt-burdened middle class at the hands of our off-shoring executives, out-of-control financiers, and their friends in Washington. Since his last book, Faux is repeatedly asked what either party will do to face these mounting crises. After looking over actual policies, proposed plans, non-partisan reports, and think-tank papers, his astonishing conclusion is that they’ll just do more of the same. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445639 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445639]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Debt Trap: How Student Loans Became a National Catastrophe Author: Josh Mitchell Narrator: Jonathan Todd Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 5 minutes Release date: August 3, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: AN NPR AND NEW YORK POST BEST BOOK OF THE YEAR From acclaimed Wall Street Journal reporter Josh Mitchell, the “devastating account” (The Wall Street Journal) of student debt in America. In 1981, a new executive at Sallie Mae took home the company’s financial documents to review. “You’ve got to be shitting me,” he later told the company’s CEO. “This place is a gold mine.” Over the next four decades, the student loan industry that Sallie Mae and Congress created blew up into a crisis that would submerge a generation of Americans into $1.5 trillion in student debt. In The Debt Trap, Wall Street Journal reporter Josh Mitchell tells the “vivid and compelling” (Chicago Tribune) untold story of the scandals, scams, predatory actors, and government malpractice that have created the behemoth that one of its original architects called a “monster.” As he charts the “jaw-dropping” (Jeffrey Selingo, New York Times bestselling author of Who Gets in and Why) seventy-year history of student debt in America, Mitchell never loses sight of the countless student victims ensnared by an exploitative system that depends on their debt. Mitchell also draws alarming parallels to the housing crisis in the late 2000s, showing the catastrophic consequences student debt has had on families and the nation’s future. Mitchell’s character-driven narrative is “necessary reading” (The New York Times) for anyone wanting to understand the central economic issue of our day. Josh Mitchell Tue, 03 Aug 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445639 thebookvoice.com 8:5:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445639]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Debt Trap: How Student Loans Became a National Catastrophe Author: Josh Mitchell Narrator: Jonathan Todd Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 5 minutes Release date: August 3, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: AN NPR AND NEW YORK POST BEST BOOK OF THE YEAR From acclaimed Wall Street Journal reporter Josh Mitchell, the “devastating account” (The Wall Street Journal) of student debt in America. In 1981, a new executive at Sallie Mae took home the company’s financial documents to review. “You’ve got to be shitting me,” he later told the company’s CEO. “This place is a gold mine.” Over the next four decades, the student loan industry that Sallie Mae and Congress created blew up into a crisis that would submerge a generation of Americans into $1.5 trillion in student debt. In The Debt Trap, Wall Street Journal reporter Josh Mitchell tells the “vivid and compelling” (Chicago Tribune) untold story of the scandals, scams, predatory actors, and government malpractice that have created the behemoth that one of its original architects called a “monster.” As he charts the “jaw-dropping” (Jeffrey Selingo, New York Times bestselling author of Who Gets in and Why) seventy-year history of student debt in America, Mitchell never loses sight of the countless student victims ensnared by an exploitative system that depends on their debt. Mitchell also draws alarming parallels to the housing crisis in the late 2000s, showing the catastrophic consequences student debt has had on families and the nation’s future. Mitchell’s character-driven narrative is “necessary reading” (The New York Times) for anyone wanting to understand the central economic issue of our day. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/445639]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Debt Trap: How Student Loans Became a National Catastrophe Author: Josh Mitchell Narrator: Jonathan Todd Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 5 minutes Release date: August 3, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: AN NPR AND NEW YORK POST BEST BOOK OF THE YEAR From acclaimed Wall Street Journal reporter Josh Mitchell, the “devastating account” (The Wall Street Journal) of student debt in America. In 1981, a new executive at Sallie Mae took home the company’s financial documents to review. “You’ve got to be shitting me,” he later told the company’s CEO. “This place is a gold mine.” Over the next four decades, the student loan industry that Sallie Mae and Congress created blew up into a crisis that would submerge a generation of Americans into $1.5 trillion in student debt. In The Debt Trap, Wall Street Journal reporter Josh Mitchell tells the “vivid and compelling” (Chicago Tribune) untold story of the scandals, scams, predatory actors, and government malpractice that have created the behemoth that one of its original architects called a “monster.” As he charts the “jaw-dropping” (Jeffrey Selingo, New York Times bestselling author of Who Gets in and Why) seventy-year history of student debt in America, Mitchell never loses sight of the countless student victims ensnared by an exploitative system that depends on their debt. Mitchell also draws alarming parallels to the housing crisis in the late 2000s, showing the catastrophic consequences student debt has had on families and the nation’s future. Mitchell’s character-driven narrative is “necessary reading” (The New York Times) for anyone wanting to understand the central economic issue of our day. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444920 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444920]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Seventeen Contradictions and the End of Capitalism Author: David Harvey Narrator: James Cameron Stewart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 46 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: To modern Western society, capitalism is the air we breathe, and most people rarely think to question it, for good or for ill. But knowing what makes capitalism work—and what makes it fail—is crucial to understanding its long-term health, and the vast implications for the global economy that go along with it. In Seventeen Contradictions and the End of Capitalism, the eminent scholar David Harvey, author of A Brief History of Neoliberalism, examines the internal contradictions within the flow of capital that have precipitated recent crises. He contends that while the contradictions have made capitalism flexible and resilient, they also contain the seeds of systemic catastrophe. Many of the contradictions are manageable, but some are fatal: the stress on endless compound growth, the necessity to exploit nature to its limits, and tendency toward universal alienation. Capitalism has always managed to extend the outer limits through 'spatial fixes,' expanding the geography of the system to cover nations and people formerly outside of its range. Whether it can continue to expand is an open question, but Harvey thinks it unlikely in the medium term future: the limits cannot extend much further, and the recent financial crisis is a harbinger of this. David Harvey Tue, 08 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444920 thebookvoice.com 13:46:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444920]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Seventeen Contradictions and the End of Capitalism Author: David Harvey Narrator: James Cameron Stewart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 46 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: To modern Western society, capitalism is the air we breathe, and most people rarely think to question it, for good or for ill. But knowing what makes capitalism work—and what makes it fail—is crucial to understanding its long-term health, and the vast implications for the global economy that go along with it. In Seventeen Contradictions and the End of Capitalism, the eminent scholar David Harvey, author of A Brief History of Neoliberalism, examines the internal contradictions within the flow of capital that have precipitated recent crises. He contends that while the contradictions have made capitalism flexible and resilient, they also contain the seeds of systemic catastrophe. Many of the contradictions are manageable, but some are fatal: the stress on endless compound growth, the necessity to exploit nature to its limits, and tendency toward universal alienation. Capitalism has always managed to extend the outer limits through 'spatial fixes,' expanding the geography of the system to cover nations and people formerly outside of its range. Whether it can continue to expand is an open question, but Harvey thinks it unlikely in the medium term future: the limits cannot extend much further, and the recent financial crisis is a harbinger of this. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444920]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Seventeen Contradictions and the End of Capitalism Author: David Harvey Narrator: James Cameron Stewart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 46 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: To modern Western society, capitalism is the air we breathe, and most people rarely think to question it, for good or for ill. But knowing what makes capitalism work—and what makes it fail—is crucial to understanding its long-term health, and the vast implications for the global economy that go along with it. In Seventeen Contradictions and the End of Capitalism, the eminent scholar David Harvey, author of A Brief History of Neoliberalism, examines the internal contradictions within the flow of capital that have precipitated recent crises. He contends that while the contradictions have made capitalism flexible and resilient, they also contain the seeds of systemic catastrophe. Many of the contradictions are manageable, but some are fatal: the stress on endless compound growth, the necessity to exploit nature to its limits, and tendency toward universal alienation. Capitalism has always managed to extend the outer limits through 'spatial fixes,' expanding the geography of the system to cover nations and people formerly outside of its range. Whether it can continue to expand is an open question, but Harvey thinks it unlikely in the medium term future: the limits cannot extend much further, and the recent financial crisis is a harbinger of this. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444630 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444630]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Value(s): Building a Better World for All Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 19 minutes Release date: May 25, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A bold, urgent argument on the misplacement of value in financial markets and how we can and need to maximize value for the many, not few. As an economist and former banker, Mark Carney has spent his life in various financial roles, in both the public and private sector. VALUE(S) is a meditation on his experiences that examines the short-comings and challenges of the market in the past decade which he argues has led to rampant, public distrust and the need for radical change. Focusing on four major crises-the Global Financial Crisis, the Global Health Crisis, Climate Change and the 4th Industrial Revolution-- Carney proposes responses to each. His solutions are tangible action plans for leaders, companies and countries to transform the value of the market back into the value of humanity. Mark Carney Tue, 25 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444630 thebookvoice.com 20:19:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444630]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Value(s): Building a Better World for All Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 19 minutes Release date: May 25, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A bold, urgent argument on the misplacement of value in financial markets and how we can and need to maximize value for the many, not few. As an economist and former banker, Mark Carney has spent his life in various financial roles, in both the public and private sector. VALUE(S) is a meditation on his experiences that examines the short-comings and challenges of the market in the past decade which he argues has led to rampant, public distrust and the need for radical change. Focusing on four major crises-the Global Financial Crisis, the Global Health Crisis, Climate Change and the 4th Industrial Revolution-- Carney proposes responses to each. His solutions are tangible action plans for leaders, companies and countries to transform the value of the market back into the value of humanity. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444630]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Value(s): Building a Better World for All Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 19 minutes Release date: May 25, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A bold, urgent argument on the misplacement of value in financial markets and how we can and need to maximize value for the many, not few. As an economist and former banker, Mark Carney has spent his life in various financial roles, in both the public and private sector. VALUE(S) is a meditation on his experiences that examines the short-comings and challenges of the market in the past decade which he argues has led to rampant, public distrust and the need for radical change. Focusing on four major crises-the Global Financial Crisis, the Global Health Crisis, Climate Change and the 4th Industrial Revolution-- Carney proposes responses to each. His solutions are tangible action plans for leaders, companies and countries to transform the value of the market back into the value of humanity. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444628 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444628]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Broken Windows, Broken Business: The Revolutionary Broken Windows Theory: How the Smallest Remedies Reap the Biggest Rewards Author: Michael Levine Narrator: Allan Robertson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 46 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Now revised and updated, this "inspired, impactful, and important" book shows how to achieve the ultimate success by rectifying the small problems that can sink a business (Stephen R, Covey, author of The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People). Once every few years a book comes along with an insight so penetrating, so powerful—and so simply, demonstrably true—that it instantly changes the way we think and do business. Such a book is Broken Windows, Broken Business, a breakthrough in management theory that can alter the destiny of countless companies striving to stay ahead of their competition. In this vital work, author Michael Levine offers compelling evidence that problems in business, large and small, typically stem from inattention to tiny details. Social psychologists and criminologists agree that if a window in a building is broken and left unrepaired, soon thereafter the rest of the windows will be broken—and the perception will build that crime in that neighborhood is out of control. The same principle applies to business. Drawing on real-world corporate examples, from JetBlue's decision to give fliers what they really want—leather seats, personal televisions, online ticketing - to Google's customer-based strategy for breaking out of the pack of Internet search engines, to business-to-business firms' successes and failures, Levine proves again and again how constant vigilance and an obsession with detail can make or break a business or a brand. With tips and advice on changing any business to one that dots its i's, crosses its t's, and attracts more clients, Broken Windows, Broken Business goes straight to the heart of what makes all enterprises successful—the little things that mean a lot. Michael Levine Tue, 11 May 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444628 thebookvoice.com 6:46:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444628]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Broken Windows, Broken Business: The Revolutionary Broken Windows Theory: How the Smallest Remedies Reap the Biggest Rewards Author: Michael Levine Narrator: Allan Robertson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 46 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Now revised and updated, this "inspired, impactful, and important" book shows how to achieve the ultimate success by rectifying the small problems that can sink a business (Stephen R, Covey, author of The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People). Once every few years a book comes along with an insight so penetrating, so powerful—and so simply, demonstrably true—that it instantly changes the way we think and do business. Such a book is Broken Windows, Broken Business, a breakthrough in management theory that can alter the destiny of countless companies striving to stay ahead of their competition. In this vital work, author Michael Levine offers compelling evidence that problems in business, large and small, typically stem from inattention to tiny details. Social psychologists and criminologists agree that if a window in a building is broken and left unrepaired, soon thereafter the rest of the windows will be broken—and the perception will build that crime in that neighborhood is out of control. The same principle applies to business. Drawing on real-world corporate examples, from JetBlue's decision to give fliers what they really want—leather seats, personal televisions, online ticketing - to Google's customer-based strategy for breaking out of the pack of Internet search engines, to business-to-business firms' successes and failures, Levine proves again and again how constant vigilance and an obsession with detail can make or break a business or a brand. With tips and advice on changing any business to one that dots its i's, crosses its t's, and attracts more clients, Broken Windows, Broken Business goes straight to the heart of what makes all enterprises successful—the little things that mean a lot. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444628]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Broken Windows, Broken Business: The Revolutionary Broken Windows Theory: How the Smallest Remedies Reap the Biggest Rewards Author: Michael Levine Narrator: Allan Robertson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 46 minutes Release date: May 11, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Now revised and updated, this "inspired, impactful, and important" book shows how to achieve the ultimate success by rectifying the small problems that can sink a business (Stephen R, Covey, author of The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People). Once every few years a book comes along with an insight so penetrating, so powerful—and so simply, demonstrably true—that it instantly changes the way we think and do business. Such a book is Broken Windows, Broken Business, a breakthrough in management theory that can alter the destiny of countless companies striving to stay ahead of their competition. In this vital work, author Michael Levine offers compelling evidence that problems in business, large and small, typically stem from inattention to tiny details. Social psychologists and criminologists agree that if a window in a building is broken and left unrepaired, soon thereafter the rest of the windows will be broken—and the perception will build that crime in that neighborhood is out of control. The same principle applies to business. Drawing on real-world corporate examples, from JetBlue's decision to give fliers what they really want—leather seats, personal televisions, online ticketing - to Google's customer-based strategy for breaking out of the pack of Internet search engines, to business-to-business firms' successes and failures, Levine proves again and again how constant vigilance and an obsession with detail can make or break a business or a brand. With tips and advice on changing any business to one that dots its i's, crosses its t's, and attracts more clients, Broken Windows, Broken Business goes straight to the heart of what makes all enterprises successful—the little things that mean a lot. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444626 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444626]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Tyranny of Experts: Economists, Dictators, and the Forgotten Rights of the Poor Author: William Easterly Narrator: Chris Ciulla Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 9 minutes Release date: March 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this "bracingly iconoclastic” book (New York Times Book Review), a renowned economics scholar breaks down the fight to end global poverty and the rights that poor individuals have had taken away for generations. In The Tyranny of Experts, renowned economist William Easterly examines our failing efforts to fight global poverty, and argues that the "expert approved" top-down approach to development has not only made little lasting progress, but has proven a convenient rationale for decades of human rights violations perpetrated by colonialists, postcolonial dictators, and US and UK foreign policymakers seeking autocratic allies. Demonstrating how our traditional antipoverty tactics have both trampled the freedom of the world's poor and suppressed a vital debate about alternative approaches to solving poverty, Easterly presents a devastating critique of the blighted record of authoritarian development. In this masterful work, Easterly reveals the fundamental errors inherent in our traditional approach and offers new principles for Western agencies and developing countries alike: principles that, because they are predicated on respect for the rights of poor people, have the power to end global poverty once and for all. William Easterly Tue, 16 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444626 thebookvoice.com 15:9:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444626]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Tyranny of Experts: Economists, Dictators, and the Forgotten Rights of the Poor Author: William Easterly Narrator: Chris Ciulla Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 9 minutes Release date: March 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this "bracingly iconoclastic” book (New York Times Book Review), a renowned economics scholar breaks down the fight to end global poverty and the rights that poor individuals have had taken away for generations. In The Tyranny of Experts, renowned economist William Easterly examines our failing efforts to fight global poverty, and argues that the "expert approved" top-down approach to development has not only made little lasting progress, but has proven a convenient rationale for decades of human rights violations perpetrated by colonialists, postcolonial dictators, and US and UK foreign policymakers seeking autocratic allies. Demonstrating how our traditional antipoverty tactics have both trampled the freedom of the world's poor and suppressed a vital debate about alternative approaches to solving poverty, Easterly presents a devastating critique of the blighted record of authoritarian development. In this masterful work, Easterly reveals the fundamental errors inherent in our traditional approach and offers new principles for Western agencies and developing countries alike: principles that, because they are predicated on respect for the rights of poor people, have the power to end global poverty once and for all. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444626]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Tyranny of Experts: Economists, Dictators, and the Forgotten Rights of the Poor Author: William Easterly Narrator: Chris Ciulla Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 9 minutes Release date: March 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this "bracingly iconoclastic” book (New York Times Book Review), a renowned economics scholar breaks down the fight to end global poverty and the rights that poor individuals have had taken away for generations. In The Tyranny of Experts, renowned economist William Easterly examines our failing efforts to fight global poverty, and argues that the "expert approved" top-down approach to development has not only made little lasting progress, but has proven a convenient rationale for decades of human rights violations perpetrated by colonialists, postcolonial dictators, and US and UK foreign policymakers seeking autocratic allies. Demonstrating how our traditional antipoverty tactics have both trampled the freedom of the world's poor and suppressed a vital debate about alternative approaches to solving poverty, Easterly presents a devastating critique of the blighted record of authoritarian development. In this masterful work, Easterly reveals the fundamental errors inherent in our traditional approach and offers new principles for Western agencies and developing countries alike: principles that, because they are predicated on respect for the rights of poor people, have the power to end global poverty once and for all. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444510 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444510]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Honor Thy Label: Dr. Bronner's Unconventional Journey to a Clean, Green, and Ethical Supply Chain Author: Gero Leson Narrator: Kiff Vandenheuvel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 14 minutes Release date: March 9, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “A compelling story about the kind of moral, life-giving decisions that businesses can make to do good while doing well.”—Mark Bittman, author of Animal, Vegetable, Junk What's in a label? For Dr. Bronner's, more than ingredients or intentions—it spells out an ethical commitment to fairness and sustainable growth, uniting consumers and companies worldwide.  Dr. Bronner’s Magic Soaps are renowned for their dense product labels (“All-One!”) and the curious tingling of peppermint. But how did this unusual natural soap transform the small print into soaring sales—inspiring customer loyalty not just with lather, but with good clean business? In Honor Thy Label, Dr. Bronner’s head of Special Operations, Gero Leson, reveals the inside story of how a little-known family-run soap company grew from countercultural roots to create a revolutionary fair trade and organic supply chain from the ground up—and rode the waves of popular demand without losing sight of the process. Through stories of harrowing setbacks and hard-won triumphs in projects that spanned the globe, in Sri Lanka, Ghana, India, and beyond, Leson demystifies the process of building and scaling ethical production. And he proves that if done right, the results ripple outward to benefit customers, communities, and the environment we share. Told with spirit and conviction, Honor Thy Label invites socially conscious entrepreneurs and shoppers on a journey to break the boundaries of production with the pioneers of socially just business—spreading Dr. Bronner’s radical vision of simple ingredients with cosmic impact. Gero Leson Tue, 09 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444510 thebookvoice.com 12:14:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444510]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Honor Thy Label: Dr. Bronner's Unconventional Journey to a Clean, Green, and Ethical Supply Chain Author: Gero Leson Narrator: Kiff Vandenheuvel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 14 minutes Release date: March 9, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “A compelling story about the kind of moral, life-giving decisions that businesses can make to do good while doing well.”—Mark Bittman, author of Animal, Vegetable, Junk What's in a label? For Dr. Bronner's, more than ingredients or intentions—it spells out an ethical commitment to fairness and sustainable growth, uniting consumers and companies worldwide.  Dr. Bronner’s Magic Soaps are renowned for their dense product labels (“All-One!”) and the curious tingling of peppermint. But how did this unusual natural soap transform the small print into soaring sales—inspiring customer loyalty not just with lather, but with good clean business? In Honor Thy Label, Dr. Bronner’s head of Special Operations, Gero Leson, reveals the inside story of how a little-known family-run soap company grew from countercultural roots to create a revolutionary fair trade and organic supply chain from the ground up—and rode the waves of popular demand without losing sight of the process. Through stories of harrowing setbacks and hard-won triumphs in projects that spanned the globe, in Sri Lanka, Ghana, India, and beyond, Leson demystifies the process of building and scaling ethical production. And he proves that if done right, the results ripple outward to benefit customers, communities, and the environment we share. Told with spirit and conviction, Honor Thy Label invites socially conscious entrepreneurs and shoppers on a journey to break the boundaries of production with the pioneers of socially just business—spreading Dr. Bronner’s radical vision of simple ingredients with cosmic impact. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/444510]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Honor Thy Label: Dr. Bronner's Unconventional Journey to a Clean, Green, and Ethical Supply Chain Author: Gero Leson Narrator: Kiff Vandenheuvel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 14 minutes Release date: March 9, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “A compelling story about the kind of moral, life-giving decisions that businesses can make to do good while doing well.”—Mark Bittman, author of Animal, Vegetable, Junk What's in a label? For Dr. Bronner's, more than ingredients or intentions—it spells out an ethical commitment to fairness and sustainable growth, uniting consumers and companies worldwide.  Dr. Bronner’s Magic Soaps are renowned for their dense product labels (“All-One!”) and the curious tingling of peppermint. But how did this unusual natural soap transform the small print into soaring sales—inspiring customer loyalty not just with lather, but with good clean business? In Honor Thy Label, Dr. Bronner’s head of Special Operations, Gero Leson, reveals the inside story of how a little-known family-run soap company grew from countercultural roots to create a revolutionary fair trade and organic supply chain from the ground up—and rode the waves of popular demand without losing sight of the process. Through stories of harrowing setbacks and hard-won triumphs in projects that spanned the globe, in Sri Lanka, Ghana, India, and beyond, Leson demystifies the process of building and scaling ethical production. And he proves that if done right, the results ripple outward to benefit customers, communities, and the environment we share. Told with spirit and conviction, Honor Thy Label invites socially conscious entrepreneurs and shoppers on a journey to break the boundaries of production with the pioneers of socially just business—spreading Dr. Bronner’s radical vision of simple ingredients with cosmic impact. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/443389 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/443389]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The 10 Rules of Successful Nations Author: Ruchir Sharma Narrator: William Hughes Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 56 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A pithy guide to real-world economics, abridged from Sharma’s New York Times bestseller The Rise and Fall of Nations. This slim primer distills Sharma’s decades of experience into ten rules for identifying nations that are poised to take off or crash. A wake-up call to economists who failed to foresee every recent crisis, including the cataclysm of 2008, 10 Rules is full of pioneering insights on signs of political, economic, and social change. Sharma explains, for example, why autocrats are bad for the economy; robots are a blessing, not a curse; and consumer prices don’t tell you all you need to know about inflation. He shows how currency crises begin with the flight of savvy locals, not evil foreigners; debt crises start in private companies, not government; and the best news for any country is none at all. Rethinking economics as a practical art, 10 Rules is a must-read for business, political, and academic leaders who want to understand the most important forces that shape a nation’s future. Ruchir Sharma Tue, 31 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/443389 thebookvoice.com 5:56:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/443389]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The 10 Rules of Successful Nations Author: Ruchir Sharma Narrator: William Hughes Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 56 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A pithy guide to real-world economics, abridged from Sharma’s New York Times bestseller The Rise and Fall of Nations. This slim primer distills Sharma’s decades of experience into ten rules for identifying nations that are poised to take off or crash. A wake-up call to economists who failed to foresee every recent crisis, including the cataclysm of 2008, 10 Rules is full of pioneering insights on signs of political, economic, and social change. Sharma explains, for example, why autocrats are bad for the economy; robots are a blessing, not a curse; and consumer prices don’t tell you all you need to know about inflation. He shows how currency crises begin with the flight of savvy locals, not evil foreigners; debt crises start in private companies, not government; and the best news for any country is none at all. Rethinking economics as a practical art, 10 Rules is a must-read for business, political, and academic leaders who want to understand the most important forces that shape a nation’s future. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/443389]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The 10 Rules of Successful Nations Author: Ruchir Sharma Narrator: William Hughes Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 56 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A pithy guide to real-world economics, abridged from Sharma’s New York Times bestseller The Rise and Fall of Nations. This slim primer distills Sharma’s decades of experience into ten rules for identifying nations that are poised to take off or crash. A wake-up call to economists who failed to foresee every recent crisis, including the cataclysm of 2008, 10 Rules is full of pioneering insights on signs of political, economic, and social change. Sharma explains, for example, why autocrats are bad for the economy; robots are a blessing, not a curse; and consumer prices don’t tell you all you need to know about inflation. He shows how currency crises begin with the flight of savvy locals, not evil foreigners; debt crises start in private companies, not government; and the best news for any country is none at all. Rethinking economics as a practical art, 10 Rules is a must-read for business, political, and academic leaders who want to understand the most important forces that shape a nation’s future. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441788 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441788]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics even a President could understand Author: Mike Smart Narrator: Mike Smart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 53 minutes Release date: June 14, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Despite being the planet’s apex predator we are secretly fearful that terrible things will happen. Our anticipation of the 21st century was delicious, but our mood is desperate looking to the 22nd. Will our climate and democratic freedoms survive? Why do authoritarian populists prevail? What has gone wrong with modern life, and how can we fix these problems? With subtle humor, here is a lucid and engaging framework for understanding why we are the problem, and how economics can help us to solve it. Mike Smart Sun, 14 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441788 thebookvoice.com 4:53:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441788]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics even a President could understand Author: Mike Smart Narrator: Mike Smart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 53 minutes Release date: June 14, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Despite being the planet’s apex predator we are secretly fearful that terrible things will happen. Our anticipation of the 21st century was delicious, but our mood is desperate looking to the 22nd. Will our climate and democratic freedoms survive? Why do authoritarian populists prevail? What has gone wrong with modern life, and how can we fix these problems? With subtle humor, here is a lucid and engaging framework for understanding why we are the problem, and how economics can help us to solve it. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441788]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics even a President could understand Author: Mike Smart Narrator: Mike Smart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 53 minutes Release date: June 14, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Despite being the planet’s apex predator we are secretly fearful that terrible things will happen. Our anticipation of the 21st century was delicious, but our mood is desperate looking to the 22nd. Will our climate and democratic freedoms survive? Why do authoritarian populists prevail? What has gone wrong with modern life, and how can we fix these problems? With subtle humor, here is a lucid and engaging framework for understanding why we are the problem, and how economics can help us to solve it. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441606 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441606]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: When More Is Not Better: Overcoming America's Obsession with Economic Efficiency Author: Roger L. Martin Narrator: Steve Menasche Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 10 minutes Release date: September 29, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 2 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 2 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: For its first 200 years, the American economy exhibited truly impressive performance. The combination of democratically elected governments and a capitalist system worked, with ever-increasing levels of efficiency, spurred by division of labor, international trade, and scientific management of companies. But since then, outcomes have changed dramatically. Growth in the economic prosperity of the average American family has slowed to a crawl, while the wealth of the richest Americans has grown to a level never seen before. This imbalance threatens the American democratic capitalist system, which only works when the average family benefits enough to keep voting for it. In this book, Roger Martin starkly outlines the fundamental problem: we have treated the economy as a machine for which the pursuit of ever-greater efficiency is considered an inherently good thing. But it has become too much of a good thing. Our obsession with efficiency has inadvertently shifted the shape of our economic outcomes: from a large middle class and smaller numbers of rich and poor to a greater share of benefits accruing to a thin tail of already rich Americans. Filled with keen economic insight and advice for citizens, executives, policymakers, and educators, When More Is Not Better is the must-listen guide for saving democratic capitalism. Roger L. Martin Tue, 29 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441606 thebookvoice.com 8:10:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441606]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: When More Is Not Better: Overcoming America's Obsession with Economic Efficiency Author: Roger L. Martin Narrator: Steve Menasche Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 10 minutes Release date: September 29, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 2 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 2 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: For its first 200 years, the American economy exhibited truly impressive performance. The combination of democratically elected governments and a capitalist system worked, with ever-increasing levels of efficiency, spurred by division of labor, international trade, and scientific management of companies. But since then, outcomes have changed dramatically. Growth in the economic prosperity of the average American family has slowed to a crawl, while the wealth of the richest Americans has grown to a level never seen before. This imbalance threatens the American democratic capitalist system, which only works when the average family benefits enough to keep voting for it. In this book, Roger Martin starkly outlines the fundamental problem: we have treated the economy as a machine for which the pursuit of ever-greater efficiency is considered an inherently good thing. But it has become too much of a good thing. Our obsession with efficiency has inadvertently shifted the shape of our economic outcomes: from a large middle class and smaller numbers of rich and poor to a greater share of benefits accruing to a thin tail of already rich Americans. Filled with keen economic insight and advice for citizens, executives, policymakers, and educators, When More Is Not Better is the must-listen guide for saving democratic capitalism. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/441606]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: When More Is Not Better: Overcoming America's Obsession with Economic Efficiency Author: Roger L. Martin Narrator: Steve Menasche Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 10 minutes Release date: September 29, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 2 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 2 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: For its first 200 years, the American economy exhibited truly impressive performance. The combination of democratically elected governments and a capitalist system worked, with ever-increasing levels of efficiency, spurred by division of labor, international trade, and scientific management of companies. But since then, outcomes have changed dramatically. Growth in the economic prosperity of the average American family has slowed to a crawl, while the wealth of the richest Americans has grown to a level never seen before. This imbalance threatens the American democratic capitalist system, which only works when the average family benefits enough to keep voting for it. In this book, Roger Martin starkly outlines the fundamental problem: we have treated the economy as a machine for which the pursuit of ever-greater efficiency is considered an inherently good thing. But it has become too much of a good thing. Our obsession with efficiency has inadvertently shifted the shape of our economic outcomes: from a large middle class and smaller numbers of rich and poor to a greater share of benefits accruing to a thin tail of already rich Americans. Filled with keen economic insight and advice for citizens, executives, policymakers, and educators, When More Is Not Better is the must-listen guide for saving democratic capitalism. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/440968 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/440968]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Mutualism: Building the Next Economy from the Ground Up Author: Sara Horowitz Narrator: Melinda Wade Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A profound look at the crisis of work and the collapse of the safety net, and a vision for a better way forward, rooted in America’s cooperative spirit, from the founder of the Freelancers Union    “Read this essential book to see how we can and must build the future.”—Reid Hoffman, co-founder of Linkedin   Mutualism: It’s not capitalism and it’s not socialism. It’s the future.  The twentieth century changed every facet of life for American workers: how much they could expect to earn and what they had the right to demand. But by 2027, a majority of Americans—from low-wage service workers to white-collar professionals—won’t be traditional employees. Benefits like paid sick leave, pensions, 401(k)s, disability insurance, and health care will be nearly extinct. To meet the needs of this new generation of workers, the government has done almost nothing.    In this book, labor lawyer, former chair of the board of the New York Federal Reserve, and MacArthur “genius” Sara Horowitz brings us a solution to the current crisis of work that’s rooted in the best of American traditions, which she calls mutualism. Horowitz shows how the future of our economic safety net rests on this approach and demonstrates how mutualist organizations have helped us solve common problems in the past and are now quietly driving rural and urban economies alike all over the world, inspired not by for-profit corporations but by labor unions and trade associations, religious organizations and mutual aid societies, and vital social movements from women’s suffrage to civil rights.    Mutualism is for anyone who feels that the system is not working for them, and is looking for a new way to build collaboratively, create the new American social contract, and prosper in the twenty-first century. Sara Horowitz Tue, 16 Feb 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/440968 thebookvoice.com 7:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/440968]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Mutualism: Building the Next Economy from the Ground Up Author: Sara Horowitz Narrator: Melinda Wade Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A profound look at the crisis of work and the collapse of the safety net, and a vision for a better way forward, rooted in America’s cooperative spirit, from the founder of the Freelancers Union    “Read this essential book to see how we can and must build the future.”—Reid Hoffman, co-founder of Linkedin   Mutualism: It’s not capitalism and it’s not socialism. It’s the future.  The twentieth century changed every facet of life for American workers: how much they could expect to earn and what they had the right to demand. But by 2027, a majority of Americans—from low-wage service workers to white-collar professionals—won’t be traditional employees. Benefits like paid sick leave, pensions, 401(k)s, disability insurance, and health care will be nearly extinct. To meet the needs of this new generation of workers, the government has done almost nothing.    In this book, labor lawyer, former chair of the board of the New York Federal Reserve, and MacArthur “genius” Sara Horowitz brings us a solution to the current crisis of work that’s rooted in the best of American traditions, which she calls mutualism. Horowitz shows how the future of our economic safety net rests on this approach and demonstrates how mutualist organizations have helped us solve common problems in the past and are now quietly driving rural and urban economies alike all over the world, inspired not by for-profit corporations but by labor unions and trade associations, religious organizations and mutual aid societies, and vital social movements from women’s suffrage to civil rights.    Mutualism is for anyone who feels that the system is not working for them, and is looking for a new way to build collaboratively, create the new American social contract, and prosper in the twenty-first century. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/440968]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Mutualism: Building the Next Economy from the Ground Up Author: Sara Horowitz Narrator: Melinda Wade Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A profound look at the crisis of work and the collapse of the safety net, and a vision for a better way forward, rooted in America’s cooperative spirit, from the founder of the Freelancers Union    “Read this essential book to see how we can and must build the future.”—Reid Hoffman, co-founder of Linkedin   Mutualism: It’s not capitalism and it’s not socialism. It’s the future.  The twentieth century changed every facet of life for American workers: how much they could expect to earn and what they had the right to demand. But by 2027, a majority of Americans—from low-wage service workers to white-collar professionals—won’t be traditional employees. Benefits like paid sick leave, pensions, 401(k)s, disability insurance, and health care will be nearly extinct. To meet the needs of this new generation of workers, the government has done almost nothing.    In this book, labor lawyer, former chair of the board of the New York Federal Reserve, and MacArthur “genius” Sara Horowitz brings us a solution to the current crisis of work that’s rooted in the best of American traditions, which she calls mutualism. Horowitz shows how the future of our economic safety net rests on this approach and demonstrates how mutualist organizations have helped us solve common problems in the past and are now quietly driving rural and urban economies alike all over the world, inspired not by for-profit corporations but by labor unions and trade associations, religious organizations and mutual aid societies, and vital social movements from women’s suffrage to civil rights.    Mutualism is for anyone who feels that the system is not working for them, and is looking for a new way to build collaboratively, create the new American social contract, and prosper in the twenty-first century. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439915 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439915]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Touching the Jaguar: Transforming Fear into Action to Change Your Life and the World Author: John Perkins Narrator: Tom Taylorson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 0 minutes Release date: June 16, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'This eloquent book inspires us to create a new reality of what it means to be humans on this magnificent planet.' -Deepak Chopra When New York Times bestselling author John Perkins was a young Peace Corps volunteer, his life was saved by an Amazonian shaman who taught him to 'touch the jaguar'-to transform his fears into positive action. He went on to become an 'economic hit man' (EHM), convincing developing countries to build huge infrastructure projects that put them perpetually in debt to the World Bank and other US-controlled institutions. Although he sincerely believed this was the best model for economic development, he came to realize it was really a new form of colonialism. Returning to the Amazon, he saw the destructive impact of his EHM work. But he also was inspired by a previously uncontacted tribe that touched its jaguar by uniting with its enemies to defend its territory against invading oil and mining companies. For the first time, Perkins details how his experiences in the Amazon converted him from an EHM to a crusader for transforming our failing Death Economy that destroys its own resources and nature itself into a flourishing Life Economy that renews itself. He provides a strategy for each of us to change our lives and defend our territory-the earth-against destructive policies and systems. John Perkins Tue, 16 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439915 thebookvoice.com 7:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439915]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Touching the Jaguar: Transforming Fear into Action to Change Your Life and the World Author: John Perkins Narrator: Tom Taylorson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 0 minutes Release date: June 16, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'This eloquent book inspires us to create a new reality of what it means to be humans on this magnificent planet.' -Deepak Chopra When New York Times bestselling author John Perkins was a young Peace Corps volunteer, his life was saved by an Amazonian shaman who taught him to 'touch the jaguar'-to transform his fears into positive action. He went on to become an 'economic hit man' (EHM), convincing developing countries to build huge infrastructure projects that put them perpetually in debt to the World Bank and other US-controlled institutions. Although he sincerely believed this was the best model for economic development, he came to realize it was really a new form of colonialism. Returning to the Amazon, he saw the destructive impact of his EHM work. But he also was inspired by a previously uncontacted tribe that touched its jaguar by uniting with its enemies to defend its territory against invading oil and mining companies. For the first time, Perkins details how his experiences in the Amazon converted him from an EHM to a crusader for transforming our failing Death Economy that destroys its own resources and nature itself into a flourishing Life Economy that renews itself. He provides a strategy for each of us to change our lives and defend our territory-the earth-against destructive policies and systems. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439915]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Touching the Jaguar: Transforming Fear into Action to Change Your Life and the World Author: John Perkins Narrator: Tom Taylorson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 0 minutes Release date: June 16, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'This eloquent book inspires us to create a new reality of what it means to be humans on this magnificent planet.' -Deepak Chopra When New York Times bestselling author John Perkins was a young Peace Corps volunteer, his life was saved by an Amazonian shaman who taught him to 'touch the jaguar'-to transform his fears into positive action. He went on to become an 'economic hit man' (EHM), convincing developing countries to build huge infrastructure projects that put them perpetually in debt to the World Bank and other US-controlled institutions. Although he sincerely believed this was the best model for economic development, he came to realize it was really a new form of colonialism. Returning to the Amazon, he saw the destructive impact of his EHM work. But he also was inspired by a previously uncontacted tribe that touched its jaguar by uniting with its enemies to defend its territory against invading oil and mining companies. For the first time, Perkins details how his experiences in the Amazon converted him from an EHM to a crusader for transforming our failing Death Economy that destroys its own resources and nature itself into a flourishing Life Economy that renews itself. He provides a strategy for each of us to change our lives and defend our territory-the earth-against destructive policies and systems. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439901 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439901]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Value(s): An Economist’s Guide to Everything That Matters Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 18 minutes Release date: March 18, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: THE SUNDAY TIMES BESTSELLER Horrified by the current financial crisis? Want to learn how we might get out of it? This is a pivotal moment in our economy. With the markets in free-fall, financial challenges are growing for us all. A winter of inflation and spiralling energy costs looms. But it doesn’t have to be this way. As former Governor for the Bank of England Mark Carney said to the BBC: ‘The message from the financial markets is there’s a limit to unfunded spending and unfunded tax cuts in this environment.’ His book is essential reading for today’s economic crisis and provides answers to your questions as well as solutions for the future. In Value(s), Carney offers a roadmap out of this chaos and towards a better, fairer society. This moment could be an opportunity for change, for overhaul. We cannot go on as we have, something must change. Drawing on a truly international perspective, this book offers a blueprint for how we can channel the dynamism of the market to transform intractable global problems into opportunities. And in so doing build a better world for all. Read as one of the great global thinkers of our time examines how what we value has become misaligned and how we can rethink and rebuild before it is too late. Mark Carney Thu, 18 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439901 thebookvoice.com 20:18:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439901]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Value(s): An Economist’s Guide to Everything That Matters Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 18 minutes Release date: March 18, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: THE SUNDAY TIMES BESTSELLER Horrified by the current financial crisis? Want to learn how we might get out of it? This is a pivotal moment in our economy. With the markets in free-fall, financial challenges are growing for us all. A winter of inflation and spiralling energy costs looms. But it doesn’t have to be this way. As former Governor for the Bank of England Mark Carney said to the BBC: ‘The message from the financial markets is there’s a limit to unfunded spending and unfunded tax cuts in this environment.’ His book is essential reading for today’s economic crisis and provides answers to your questions as well as solutions for the future. In Value(s), Carney offers a roadmap out of this chaos and towards a better, fairer society. This moment could be an opportunity for change, for overhaul. We cannot go on as we have, something must change. Drawing on a truly international perspective, this book offers a blueprint for how we can channel the dynamism of the market to transform intractable global problems into opportunities. And in so doing build a better world for all. Read as one of the great global thinkers of our time examines how what we value has become misaligned and how we can rethink and rebuild before it is too late. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439901]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Value(s): An Economist’s Guide to Everything That Matters Author: Mark Carney Narrator: Mark Carney Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 20 hours 18 minutes Release date: March 18, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: THE SUNDAY TIMES BESTSELLER Horrified by the current financial crisis? Want to learn how we might get out of it? This is a pivotal moment in our economy. With the markets in free-fall, financial challenges are growing for us all. A winter of inflation and spiralling energy costs looms. But it doesn’t have to be this way. As former Governor for the Bank of England Mark Carney said to the BBC: ‘The message from the financial markets is there’s a limit to unfunded spending and unfunded tax cuts in this environment.’ His book is essential reading for today’s economic crisis and provides answers to your questions as well as solutions for the future. In Value(s), Carney offers a roadmap out of this chaos and towards a better, fairer society. This moment could be an opportunity for change, for overhaul. We cannot go on as we have, something must change. Drawing on a truly international perspective, this book offers a blueprint for how we can channel the dynamism of the market to transform intractable global problems into opportunities. And in so doing build a better world for all. Read as one of the great global thinkers of our time examines how what we value has become misaligned and how we can rethink and rebuild before it is too late. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439840 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439840]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Climate Change: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Adam Lofbomm Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 39 minutes Release date: September 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Climate change is threatening our world. How are you responding? Heat waves, flooding, extreme storms, harsh winters. The effects of climate change are only getting worse. How can you ensure your organization is taking the right steps to mitigate this threat—and what can you, as an individual, do to help? These articles by experts and researchers will help you understand how climate change is affecting the future of business. Climate Change: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review will prepare you to join in the current discussion, identify immediate and long-term risks for your company, and plan for the future. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues—blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more—each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. Harvard Business Review Tue, 22 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439840 thebookvoice.com 2:39:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439840]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Climate Change: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Adam Lofbomm Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 39 minutes Release date: September 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Climate change is threatening our world. How are you responding? Heat waves, flooding, extreme storms, harsh winters. The effects of climate change are only getting worse. How can you ensure your organization is taking the right steps to mitigate this threat—and what can you, as an individual, do to help? These articles by experts and researchers will help you understand how climate change is affecting the future of business. Climate Change: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review will prepare you to join in the current discussion, identify immediate and long-term risks for your company, and plan for the future. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues—blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more—each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439840]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Climate Change: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Adam Lofbomm Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 39 minutes Release date: September 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Climate change is threatening our world. How are you responding? Heat waves, flooding, extreme storms, harsh winters. The effects of climate change are only getting worse. How can you ensure your organization is taking the right steps to mitigate this threat—and what can you, as an individual, do to help? These articles by experts and researchers will help you understand how climate change is affecting the future of business. Climate Change: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review will prepare you to join in the current discussion, identify immediate and long-term risks for your company, and plan for the future. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues—blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more—each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439835 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439835]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Coronavirus: Leadership and Recovery: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Mike Lenz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 59 minutes Release date: July 28, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: As the pandemic is exacting its toll on our lives and wreaking havoc in the global economy, forward-looking organizations are moving past crisis management and positioning themselves to leap ahead when the economy turns around. What should you and your business be doing now to stay afloat today-while planning for tomorrow so you can come out of the crisis stronger? Part of the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series, Coronavirus: Leadership and Recovery provides you with essential thinking about managing your company through the Covid-19 pandemic, keeping your employees (and yourself) healthy and productive, and challenging your business to continue innovating and reinvent itself ahead of the recovery. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues-blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more-each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Harvard Business Review Tue, 28 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439835 thebookvoice.com 2:59:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439835]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Coronavirus: Leadership and Recovery: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Mike Lenz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 59 minutes Release date: July 28, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: As the pandemic is exacting its toll on our lives and wreaking havoc in the global economy, forward-looking organizations are moving past crisis management and positioning themselves to leap ahead when the economy turns around. What should you and your business be doing now to stay afloat today-while planning for tomorrow so you can come out of the crisis stronger? Part of the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series, Coronavirus: Leadership and Recovery provides you with essential thinking about managing your company through the Covid-19 pandemic, keeping your employees (and yourself) healthy and productive, and challenging your business to continue innovating and reinvent itself ahead of the recovery. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues-blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more-each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439835]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Coronavirus: Leadership and Recovery: The Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review Author: Harvard Business Review Narrator: Mike Lenz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 2 hours 59 minutes Release date: July 28, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: As the pandemic is exacting its toll on our lives and wreaking havoc in the global economy, forward-looking organizations are moving past crisis management and positioning themselves to leap ahead when the economy turns around. What should you and your business be doing now to stay afloat today-while planning for tomorrow so you can come out of the crisis stronger? Part of the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series, Coronavirus: Leadership and Recovery provides you with essential thinking about managing your company through the Covid-19 pandemic, keeping your employees (and yourself) healthy and productive, and challenging your business to continue innovating and reinvent itself ahead of the recovery. Business is changing. Will you adapt or be left behind? Get up to speed and deepen your understanding of the topics that are shaping your company's future with the Insights You Need from Harvard Business Review series. Featuring HBR's smartest thinking on fast-moving issues-blockchain, cybersecurity, AI, and more-each book provides the foundational introduction and practical case studies your organization needs to compete today and collects the best research, interviews, and analysis to get it ready for tomorrow. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439586 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439586]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Mission Economy: A Moonshot Guide to Changing Capitalism Author: Mariana Mazzucato Narrator: Lexie Mcdougall Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 45 minutes Release date: March 23, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Longlisted for the 2021 Porchlight Business Book Awards, Big Ideas & New Perspectives “She offers something both broad and scarce: a compelling new story about how to create a desirable future.”—New York Times  An award-winning author and leading international economist delivers a hard-hitting and much needed critique of modern capitalism in which she argues that, to solve the massive crises facing us, we must be innovative—we must use collaborative, mission-oriented thinking while also bringing a stakeholder view of public private partnerships which means not only taking risks together but also sharing the rewards.  Capitalism is in crisis. The rich have gotten richer—the 1 percent, those with more than $1 million, own 44 percent of the world's wealth—while climate change is transforming—and in some cases wiping out—life on the planet. We are plagued by crises threatening our lives, and this situation is unsustainable. But how do we fix these problems decades in the making?  Mission Economy looks at the grand challenges facing us in a radically new way. Global warming, pollution, dementia, obesity, gun violence, mobility—these environmental, health, and social dilemmas are huge, complex, and have no simple solutions. Mariana Mazzucato argues we need to think bigger and mobilize our resources in a way that is as bold as inspirational as the moon landing—this time to the most ‘wicked’ social problems of our time.. We can only begin to find answers if we fundamentally restructure capitalism to make it inclusive, sustainable, and driven by innovation that tackles concrete problems from the digital divide, to health pandemics, to our polluted cities. That means changing government tools and culture, creating new markers of corporate governance, and ensuring that corporations, society, and the government coalesce to share a common goal. We did it to go to the moon. We can do it again to fix our problems and improve the lives of every one of us. We simply can no longer afford not to. Mariana Mazzucato Tue, 23 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439586 thebookvoice.com 6:45:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439586]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Mission Economy: A Moonshot Guide to Changing Capitalism Author: Mariana Mazzucato Narrator: Lexie Mcdougall Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 45 minutes Release date: March 23, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Longlisted for the 2021 Porchlight Business Book Awards, Big Ideas & New Perspectives “She offers something both broad and scarce: a compelling new story about how to create a desirable future.”—New York Times  An award-winning author and leading international economist delivers a hard-hitting and much needed critique of modern capitalism in which she argues that, to solve the massive crises facing us, we must be innovative—we must use collaborative, mission-oriented thinking while also bringing a stakeholder view of public private partnerships which means not only taking risks together but also sharing the rewards.  Capitalism is in crisis. The rich have gotten richer—the 1 percent, those with more than $1 million, own 44 percent of the world's wealth—while climate change is transforming—and in some cases wiping out—life on the planet. We are plagued by crises threatening our lives, and this situation is unsustainable. But how do we fix these problems decades in the making?  Mission Economy looks at the grand challenges facing us in a radically new way. Global warming, pollution, dementia, obesity, gun violence, mobility—these environmental, health, and social dilemmas are huge, complex, and have no simple solutions. Mariana Mazzucato argues we need to think bigger and mobilize our resources in a way that is as bold as inspirational as the moon landing—this time to the most ‘wicked’ social problems of our time.. We can only begin to find answers if we fundamentally restructure capitalism to make it inclusive, sustainable, and driven by innovation that tackles concrete problems from the digital divide, to health pandemics, to our polluted cities. That means changing government tools and culture, creating new markers of corporate governance, and ensuring that corporations, society, and the government coalesce to share a common goal. We did it to go to the moon. We can do it again to fix our problems and improve the lives of every one of us. We simply can no longer afford not to. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439586]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Mission Economy: A Moonshot Guide to Changing Capitalism Author: Mariana Mazzucato Narrator: Lexie Mcdougall Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 45 minutes Release date: March 23, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Longlisted for the 2021 Porchlight Business Book Awards, Big Ideas & New Perspectives “She offers something both broad and scarce: a compelling new story about how to create a desirable future.”—New York Times  An award-winning author and leading international economist delivers a hard-hitting and much needed critique of modern capitalism in which she argues that, to solve the massive crises facing us, we must be innovative—we must use collaborative, mission-oriented thinking while also bringing a stakeholder view of public private partnerships which means not only taking risks together but also sharing the rewards.  Capitalism is in crisis. The rich have gotten richer—the 1 percent, those with more than $1 million, own 44 percent of the world's wealth—while climate change is transforming—and in some cases wiping out—life on the planet. We are plagued by crises threatening our lives, and this situation is unsustainable. But how do we fix these problems decades in the making?  Mission Economy looks at the grand challenges facing us in a radically new way. Global warming, pollution, dementia, obesity, gun violence, mobility—these environmental, health, and social dilemmas are huge, complex, and have no simple solutions. Mariana Mazzucato argues we need to think bigger and mobilize our resources in a way that is as bold as inspirational as the moon landing—this time to the most ‘wicked’ social problems of our time.. We can only begin to find answers if we fundamentally restructure capitalism to make it inclusive, sustainable, and driven by innovation that tackles concrete problems from the digital divide, to health pandemics, to our polluted cities. That means changing government tools and culture, creating new markers of corporate governance, and ensuring that corporations, society, and the government coalesce to share a common goal. We did it to go to the moon. We can do it again to fix our problems and improve the lives of every one of us. We simply can no longer afford not to. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439524 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439524]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Religion and the Rise of Capitalism Author: Benjamin M. Friedman Narrator: Paul Bellantoni Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 15 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From one of the nation's preeminent experts on economic policy, a major reassessment of the foundations of modern economic thinking that explores the profound influence of an until-now unrecognized force—religion. 'Friedman has given us an original and brilliant new perspective on the terrifying divisions of our own times. No book could be more important.” —George A. Akerlof, Nobel Laureate in Economics   Critics of contemporary economics complain that belief in free markets—among economists as well as many ordinary citizens—is a form of religion. And, it turns out, that in a deeper, more historically grounded sense there is something to that idea.   Contrary to the conventional historical view of economics as an entirely secular product of the Enlightenment, Benjamin M. Friedman demonstrates that religion exerted a powerful influence from the outset. Friedman makes clear how the foundational transition in thinking about what we now call economics, beginning in the eighteenth century, was decisively shaped by the hotly contended lines of religious thought within the English-speaking Protestant world. Beliefs about God-given human character, about the after-life, and about the purpose of our existence, were all under scrutiny in the world in which Adam Smith and his contemporaries lived.   Friedman explores how those debates go far in explaining the puzzling behavior of so many of our fellow citizens whose views about economic policies—and whose voting behavior—seems sharply at odds with what would be to their own economic benefit. Illuminating the origins of the relationship between religious thinking and economic thinking, together with its ongoing consequences, Friedman provides invaluable insights into our current economic policy debates and demonstrates ways to shape more functional policies for all citizens. Benjamin M. Friedman Tue, 26 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439524 thebookvoice.com 18:15:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439524]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Religion and the Rise of Capitalism Author: Benjamin M. Friedman Narrator: Paul Bellantoni Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 15 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From one of the nation's preeminent experts on economic policy, a major reassessment of the foundations of modern economic thinking that explores the profound influence of an until-now unrecognized force—religion. 'Friedman has given us an original and brilliant new perspective on the terrifying divisions of our own times. No book could be more important.” —George A. Akerlof, Nobel Laureate in Economics   Critics of contemporary economics complain that belief in free markets—among economists as well as many ordinary citizens—is a form of religion. And, it turns out, that in a deeper, more historically grounded sense there is something to that idea.   Contrary to the conventional historical view of economics as an entirely secular product of the Enlightenment, Benjamin M. Friedman demonstrates that religion exerted a powerful influence from the outset. Friedman makes clear how the foundational transition in thinking about what we now call economics, beginning in the eighteenth century, was decisively shaped by the hotly contended lines of religious thought within the English-speaking Protestant world. Beliefs about God-given human character, about the after-life, and about the purpose of our existence, were all under scrutiny in the world in which Adam Smith and his contemporaries lived.   Friedman explores how those debates go far in explaining the puzzling behavior of so many of our fellow citizens whose views about economic policies—and whose voting behavior—seems sharply at odds with what would be to their own economic benefit. Illuminating the origins of the relationship between religious thinking and economic thinking, together with its ongoing consequences, Friedman provides invaluable insights into our current economic policy debates and demonstrates ways to shape more functional policies for all citizens. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439524]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Religion and the Rise of Capitalism Author: Benjamin M. Friedman Narrator: Paul Bellantoni Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 15 minutes Release date: January 26, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From one of the nation's preeminent experts on economic policy, a major reassessment of the foundations of modern economic thinking that explores the profound influence of an until-now unrecognized force—religion. 'Friedman has given us an original and brilliant new perspective on the terrifying divisions of our own times. No book could be more important.” —George A. Akerlof, Nobel Laureate in Economics   Critics of contemporary economics complain that belief in free markets—among economists as well as many ordinary citizens—is a form of religion. And, it turns out, that in a deeper, more historically grounded sense there is something to that idea.   Contrary to the conventional historical view of economics as an entirely secular product of the Enlightenment, Benjamin M. Friedman demonstrates that religion exerted a powerful influence from the outset. Friedman makes clear how the foundational transition in thinking about what we now call economics, beginning in the eighteenth century, was decisively shaped by the hotly contended lines of religious thought within the English-speaking Protestant world. Beliefs about God-given human character, about the after-life, and about the purpose of our existence, were all under scrutiny in the world in which Adam Smith and his contemporaries lived.   Friedman explores how those debates go far in explaining the puzzling behavior of so many of our fellow citizens whose views about economic policies—and whose voting behavior—seems sharply at odds with what would be to their own economic benefit. Illuminating the origins of the relationship between religious thinking and economic thinking, together with its ongoing consequences, Friedman provides invaluable insights into our current economic policy debates and demonstrates ways to shape more functional policies for all citizens. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439293 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439293]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Overheated: How Capitalism Broke the Planet--And How We Fight Back Author: Kate Aronoff Narrator: Erin Bennett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 15 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This damning account of the forces that have hijacked progress on climate change shares a bold vision of what it will take, politically and economically, to face the existential threat of global warming head-on. It has become impossible to deny that the planet is warming, and that governments must act. But a new denialism is taking root in the halls of power, shaped by decades of neoliberal policies and centuries of anti-democratic thinking. Since the 1980s, Democrats and Republicans have each granted enormous concessions to industries hell bent on maintaining business as usual. What’s worse, policymakers have given oil and gas executives a seat at the table designing policies that should euthanize their business model. This approach, journalist Kate Aronoff makes clear, will only drive the planet further into emergency. Drawing on years of reporting, Aronoff lays out an alternative vision, detailing how democratic majorities can curb polluters’ power; create millions of well-paid, union jobs; enact climate reparations; and transform the economy into a more leisurely and sustainable one. Our future will require a radical reimagining of politics—with the world at stake. Kate Aronoff Tue, 20 Apr 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439293 thebookvoice.com 16:15:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439293]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Overheated: How Capitalism Broke the Planet--And How We Fight Back Author: Kate Aronoff Narrator: Erin Bennett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 15 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This damning account of the forces that have hijacked progress on climate change shares a bold vision of what it will take, politically and economically, to face the existential threat of global warming head-on. It has become impossible to deny that the planet is warming, and that governments must act. But a new denialism is taking root in the halls of power, shaped by decades of neoliberal policies and centuries of anti-democratic thinking. Since the 1980s, Democrats and Republicans have each granted enormous concessions to industries hell bent on maintaining business as usual. What’s worse, policymakers have given oil and gas executives a seat at the table designing policies that should euthanize their business model. This approach, journalist Kate Aronoff makes clear, will only drive the planet further into emergency. Drawing on years of reporting, Aronoff lays out an alternative vision, detailing how democratic majorities can curb polluters’ power; create millions of well-paid, union jobs; enact climate reparations; and transform the economy into a more leisurely and sustainable one. Our future will require a radical reimagining of politics—with the world at stake. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/439293]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Overheated: How Capitalism Broke the Planet--And How We Fight Back Author: Kate Aronoff Narrator: Erin Bennett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 15 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This damning account of the forces that have hijacked progress on climate change shares a bold vision of what it will take, politically and economically, to face the existential threat of global warming head-on. It has become impossible to deny that the planet is warming, and that governments must act. But a new denialism is taking root in the halls of power, shaped by decades of neoliberal policies and centuries of anti-democratic thinking. Since the 1980s, Democrats and Republicans have each granted enormous concessions to industries hell bent on maintaining business as usual. What’s worse, policymakers have given oil and gas executives a seat at the table designing policies that should euthanize their business model. This approach, journalist Kate Aronoff makes clear, will only drive the planet further into emergency. Drawing on years of reporting, Aronoff lays out an alternative vision, detailing how democratic majorities can curb polluters’ power; create millions of well-paid, union jobs; enact climate reparations; and transform the economy into a more leisurely and sustainable one. Our future will require a radical reimagining of politics—with the world at stake. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438562 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438562]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Don't Trust Your Gut: Using Data to Get What You Really Want in Life Author: Seth Stephens-Davidowitz Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 10 minutes Release date: May 10, 2022 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.75 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Seth Stephens-Davidowitz is as good a data storyteller as I have ever met.” — Steven Levitt, co-author, Freakonomics Big decisions are hard. We consult friends and family, make sense of confusing “expert” advice online, maybe we read a self-help book to guide us. In the end, we usually just do what feels right, pursuing high stakes self-improvement—such as who we marry, how to date, where to live, what makes us happy—based solely on what our gut instinct tells us. But what if our gut is wrong? Biased, unpredictable, and misinformed, our gut, it turns out, is not all that reliable. And data can prove this. In Don’t Trust Your Gut, economist, former Google data scientist, and New York Times bestselling author Seth Stephens-Davidowitz reveals just how wrong we really are when it comes to improving our own lives. In the past decade, scholars have mined enormous datasets to find remarkable new approaches to life’s biggest self-help puzzles. Data from hundreds of thousands of dating profiles have revealed surprising successful strategies to get a date; data from hundreds of millions of tax records have uncovered the best places to raise children; data from millions of career trajectories have found previously unknown reasons why some rise to the top. Telling fascinating, unexpected stories with these numbers and the latest big data research, Stephens-Davidowitz exposes that, while we often think we know how to better ourselves, the numbers disagree. Hard facts and figures consistently contradict our instincts and demonstrate self-help that actually works—whether it involves the best time in life to start a business or how happy it actually makes us to skip a friend’s birthday party for a night of Netflix on the couch. From the boring careers that produce the most wealth, to the old-school, data-backed relationship advice so well-worn it’s become a literal joke, he unearths the startling conclusions that the right data can teach us about who we are and what will make our lives better. Lively, engrossing, and provocative, the end result opens up a new world of self-improvement made possible with massive troves of data. Packed with fresh, entertaining insights, Don’t Trust Your Gut redefines how to tackle our most consequential choices, one that hacks the market inefficiencies of life and leads us to make smarter decisions about how to improve our lives. Because in the end, the numbers don’t lie. Supplemental enhancement PDF accompanies the audiobook. Seth Stephens-Davidowitz Tue, 10 May 2022 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438562 thebookvoice.com 6:10:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438562]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Don't Trust Your Gut: Using Data to Get What You Really Want in Life Author: Seth Stephens-Davidowitz Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 10 minutes Release date: May 10, 2022 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.75 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Seth Stephens-Davidowitz is as good a data storyteller as I have ever met.” — Steven Levitt, co-author, Freakonomics Big decisions are hard. We consult friends and family, make sense of confusing “expert” advice online, maybe we read a self-help book to guide us. In the end, we usually just do what feels right, pursuing high stakes self-improvement—such as who we marry, how to date, where to live, what makes us happy—based solely on what our gut instinct tells us. But what if our gut is wrong? Biased, unpredictable, and misinformed, our gut, it turns out, is not all that reliable. And data can prove this. In Don’t Trust Your Gut, economist, former Google data scientist, and New York Times bestselling author Seth Stephens-Davidowitz reveals just how wrong we really are when it comes to improving our own lives. In the past decade, scholars have mined enormous datasets to find remarkable new approaches to life’s biggest self-help puzzles. Data from hundreds of thousands of dating profiles have revealed surprising successful strategies to get a date; data from hundreds of millions of tax records have uncovered the best places to raise children; data from millions of career trajectories have found previously unknown reasons why some rise to the top. Telling fascinating, unexpected stories with these numbers and the latest big data research, Stephens-Davidowitz exposes that, while we often think we know how to better ourselves, the numbers disagree. Hard facts and figures consistently contradict our instincts and demonstrate self-help that actually works—whether it involves the best time in life to start a business or how happy it actually makes us to skip a friend’s birthday party for a night of Netflix on the couch. From the boring careers that produce the most wealth, to the old-school, data-backed relationship advice so well-worn it’s become a literal joke, he unearths the startling conclusions that the right data can teach us about who we are and what will make our lives better. Lively, engrossing, and provocative, the end result opens up a new world of self-improvement made possible with massive troves of data. Packed with fresh, entertaining insights, Don’t Trust Your Gut redefines how to tackle our most consequential choices, one that hacks the market inefficiencies of life and leads us to make smarter decisions about how to improve our lives. Because in the end, the numbers don’t lie. Supplemental enhancement PDF accompanies the audiobook. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438562]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Don't Trust Your Gut: Using Data to Get What You Really Want in Life Author: Seth Stephens-Davidowitz Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 10 minutes Release date: May 10, 2022 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.75 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Seth Stephens-Davidowitz is as good a data storyteller as I have ever met.” — Steven Levitt, co-author, Freakonomics Big decisions are hard. We consult friends and family, make sense of confusing “expert” advice online, maybe we read a self-help book to guide us. In the end, we usually just do what feels right, pursuing high stakes self-improvement—such as who we marry, how to date, where to live, what makes us happy—based solely on what our gut instinct tells us. But what if our gut is wrong? Biased, unpredictable, and misinformed, our gut, it turns out, is not all that reliable. And data can prove this. In Don’t Trust Your Gut, economist, former Google data scientist, and New York Times bestselling author Seth Stephens-Davidowitz reveals just how wrong we really are when it comes to improving our own lives. In the past decade, scholars have mined enormous datasets to find remarkable new approaches to life’s biggest self-help puzzles. Data from hundreds of thousands of dating profiles have revealed surprising successful strategies to get a date; data from hundreds of millions of tax records have uncovered the best places to raise children; data from millions of career trajectories have found previously unknown reasons why some rise to the top. Telling fascinating, unexpected stories with these numbers and the latest big data research, Stephens-Davidowitz exposes that, while we often think we know how to better ourselves, the numbers disagree. Hard facts and figures consistently contradict our instincts and demonstrate self-help that actually works—whether it involves the best time in life to start a business or how happy it actually makes us to skip a friend’s birthday party for a night of Netflix on the couch. From the boring careers that produce the most wealth, to the old-school, data-backed relationship advice so well-worn it’s become a literal joke, he unearths the startling conclusions that the right data can teach us about who we are and what will make our lives better. Lively, engrossing, and provocative, the end result opens up a new world of self-improvement made possible with massive troves of data. Packed with fresh, entertaining insights, Don’t Trust Your Gut redefines how to tackle our most consequential choices, one that hacks the market inefficiencies of life and leads us to make smarter decisions about how to improve our lives. Because in the end, the numbers don’t lie. Supplemental enhancement PDF accompanies the audiobook. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438087 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438087]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: GDP: A Brief but Affectionate History - Revised and expanded Edition Author: Diane Coyle Narrator: Diane Coyle Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 34 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by acclaimed economist Diane Coyle explains how GDP came to rule our lives—and why it needs to change Why did the size of the U.S. economy increase by 3 percent on one day in mid-2013—or Ghana's balloon by 60 percent overnight in 2010? Why did the U.K. financial industry show its fastest expansion ever at the end of 2008—just as the world's financial system went into meltdown? And why was Greece's chief statistician charged with treason in 2013 for apparently doing nothing more than trying to accurately report the size of his country's economy? The answers to all these questions lie in the way we define and measure national economies around the world: Gross Domestic Product. This entertaining and informative book tells the story of GDP, making sense of a statistic that appears constantly in the news, business, and politics, and that seems to rule our lives—but that hardly anyone actually understands. Diane Coyle traces the history of this artificial, abstract, complex, but exceedingly important statistic from its eighteenth- and nineteenth-century precursors through its invention in the 1940s and its postwar golden age, and then through the Great Crash up to today. The reader learns why this standard measure of the size of a country's economy was invented, how it has changed over the decades, and what its strengths and weaknesses are. The book explains why even small changes in GDP can decide elections, influence major political decisions, and determine whether countries can keep borrowing or be thrown into recession. The book ends by making the case that GDP was a good measure for the twentieth century but is increasingly inappropriate for a twenty-first-century economy driven by innovation, services, and intangible goods. Diane Coyle Tue, 04 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438087 thebookvoice.com 4:34:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438087]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: GDP: A Brief but Affectionate History - Revised and expanded Edition Author: Diane Coyle Narrator: Diane Coyle Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 34 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by acclaimed economist Diane Coyle explains how GDP came to rule our lives—and why it needs to change Why did the size of the U.S. economy increase by 3 percent on one day in mid-2013—or Ghana's balloon by 60 percent overnight in 2010? Why did the U.K. financial industry show its fastest expansion ever at the end of 2008—just as the world's financial system went into meltdown? And why was Greece's chief statistician charged with treason in 2013 for apparently doing nothing more than trying to accurately report the size of his country's economy? The answers to all these questions lie in the way we define and measure national economies around the world: Gross Domestic Product. This entertaining and informative book tells the story of GDP, making sense of a statistic that appears constantly in the news, business, and politics, and that seems to rule our lives—but that hardly anyone actually understands. Diane Coyle traces the history of this artificial, abstract, complex, but exceedingly important statistic from its eighteenth- and nineteenth-century precursors through its invention in the 1940s and its postwar golden age, and then through the Great Crash up to today. The reader learns why this standard measure of the size of a country's economy was invented, how it has changed over the decades, and what its strengths and weaknesses are. The book explains why even small changes in GDP can decide elections, influence major political decisions, and determine whether countries can keep borrowing or be thrown into recession. The book ends by making the case that GDP was a good measure for the twentieth century but is increasingly inappropriate for a twenty-first-century economy driven by innovation, services, and intangible goods. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/438087]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: GDP: A Brief but Affectionate History - Revised and expanded Edition Author: Diane Coyle Narrator: Diane Coyle Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 34 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by acclaimed economist Diane Coyle explains how GDP came to rule our lives—and why it needs to change Why did the size of the U.S. economy increase by 3 percent on one day in mid-2013—or Ghana's balloon by 60 percent overnight in 2010? Why did the U.K. financial industry show its fastest expansion ever at the end of 2008—just as the world's financial system went into meltdown? And why was Greece's chief statistician charged with treason in 2013 for apparently doing nothing more than trying to accurately report the size of his country's economy? The answers to all these questions lie in the way we define and measure national economies around the world: Gross Domestic Product. This entertaining and informative book tells the story of GDP, making sense of a statistic that appears constantly in the news, business, and politics, and that seems to rule our lives—but that hardly anyone actually understands. Diane Coyle traces the history of this artificial, abstract, complex, but exceedingly important statistic from its eighteenth- and nineteenth-century precursors through its invention in the 1940s and its postwar golden age, and then through the Great Crash up to today. The reader learns why this standard measure of the size of a country's economy was invented, how it has changed over the decades, and what its strengths and weaknesses are. The book explains why even small changes in GDP can decide elections, influence major political decisions, and determine whether countries can keep borrowing or be thrown into recession. The book ends by making the case that GDP was a good measure for the twentieth century but is increasingly inappropriate for a twenty-first-century economy driven by innovation, services, and intangible goods. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437333 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437333]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Data Detective: Ten Easy Rules to Make Sense of Statistics Author: Tim Harford Narrator: Tim Harford Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 24 minutes Release date: February 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From “one of the great (greatest?) contemporary popular writers on economics” (Tyler Cowen) comes a smart, lively, and encouraging rethinking of how to use statistics. Today we think statistics are the enemy, numbers used to mislead and confuse us. That’s a mistake, Tim Harford says in The Data Detective. We shouldn’t be suspicious of statistics—we need to understand what they mean and how they can improve our lives: they are, at heart, human behavior seen through the prism of numbers and are often “the only way of grasping much of what is going on around us.” If we can toss aside our fears and learn to approach them clearly—understanding how our own preconceptions lead us astray—statistics can point to ways we can live better and work smarter. As “perhaps the best popular economics writer in the world” (New Statesman), Tim Harford is an expert at taking complicated ideas and untangling them for millions of readers. In The Data Detective, he uses new research in science and psychology to set out ten strategies for using statistics to erase our biases and replace them with new ideas that use virtues like patience, curiosity, and good sense to better understand ourselves and the world. As a result, The Data Detective is a big-idea book about statistics and human behavior that is fresh, unexpected, and insightful. Tim Harford Tue, 02 Feb 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437333 thebookvoice.com 10:24:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437333]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Data Detective: Ten Easy Rules to Make Sense of Statistics Author: Tim Harford Narrator: Tim Harford Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 24 minutes Release date: February 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From “one of the great (greatest?) contemporary popular writers on economics” (Tyler Cowen) comes a smart, lively, and encouraging rethinking of how to use statistics. Today we think statistics are the enemy, numbers used to mislead and confuse us. That’s a mistake, Tim Harford says in The Data Detective. We shouldn’t be suspicious of statistics—we need to understand what they mean and how they can improve our lives: they are, at heart, human behavior seen through the prism of numbers and are often “the only way of grasping much of what is going on around us.” If we can toss aside our fears and learn to approach them clearly—understanding how our own preconceptions lead us astray—statistics can point to ways we can live better and work smarter. As “perhaps the best popular economics writer in the world” (New Statesman), Tim Harford is an expert at taking complicated ideas and untangling them for millions of readers. In The Data Detective, he uses new research in science and psychology to set out ten strategies for using statistics to erase our biases and replace them with new ideas that use virtues like patience, curiosity, and good sense to better understand ourselves and the world. As a result, The Data Detective is a big-idea book about statistics and human behavior that is fresh, unexpected, and insightful. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437333]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Data Detective: Ten Easy Rules to Make Sense of Statistics Author: Tim Harford Narrator: Tim Harford Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 24 minutes Release date: February 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 4.5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From “one of the great (greatest?) contemporary popular writers on economics” (Tyler Cowen) comes a smart, lively, and encouraging rethinking of how to use statistics. Today we think statistics are the enemy, numbers used to mislead and confuse us. That’s a mistake, Tim Harford says in The Data Detective. We shouldn’t be suspicious of statistics—we need to understand what they mean and how they can improve our lives: they are, at heart, human behavior seen through the prism of numbers and are often “the only way of grasping much of what is going on around us.” If we can toss aside our fears and learn to approach them clearly—understanding how our own preconceptions lead us astray—statistics can point to ways we can live better and work smarter. As “perhaps the best popular economics writer in the world” (New Statesman), Tim Harford is an expert at taking complicated ideas and untangling them for millions of readers. In The Data Detective, he uses new research in science and psychology to set out ten strategies for using statistics to erase our biases and replace them with new ideas that use virtues like patience, curiosity, and good sense to better understand ourselves and the world. As a result, The Data Detective is a big-idea book about statistics and human behavior that is fresh, unexpected, and insightful. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437303 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437303]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - La gran apuesta Author: Michael Lewis Narrator: Raúl Arrieta Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 24 minutes Release date: June 11, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: La excepcional crónica del crac inmobiliario que originó la mayor crisis de los últimos 80 años. Descubre el libro en el que se ha inspirado la película que ya ha sido nominada a cinco Óscar. La gran apuesta es la excepcional crónica del crac inmobiliario que originó la mayor crisis de los últimos ochenta años. Cuando en otoño de 2008 la economía estadounidense se hundió, arrastrando tras de sí a buena parte del mundo desarrollado a una crisis de la que aún no hemos salido, a un grupo de personas no le sorprendió en absoluto. Eran unos cuantos inversores y analistas inteligentes que habían comprendido lo que estaba pasando, pero no dijeron nada, paralizados por el miedo y las posibles ganancias. La pregunta clave que plantea Michael Lewis es: ¿quién se dio cuenta del riesgo que suponía dar por sentado que los precios del sector inmobiliario seguirían siempre al alza? Un riesgo complicado, además, por la creación de esos activos extraños y artificiales a partir de hipotecas dudosas. Para contestar esta pregunta, Lewis nos presenta una historia increíble a través de los personajes que la protagonizaron, plena de indignación y oscura ironía. Reseñas: «Probablemente el mejor libro de periodismo financiero de la historia.» Felix Salmon, Reuters «El mejor contador de historias de nuestra generación.» Malcolm Gladwell «Nadie escribe con mayor agilidad narrativa sobre dinero y finanzas que Michael Lewis. Logra usar las historias de sus protagonistas para explicar la avaricia, la estupidez y la hipocresía de un sistema con una carencia notoria de supervisión seria. Con un estilo parecido al de Tom Wolfe, Lewis consigue introducir al lector de modo colorido en el mundo darwiniano del mercado de bonos.» Michiko Kakutani, The New York Times Michael Lewis Thu, 11 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437303 thebookvoice.com 12:24:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437303]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - La gran apuesta Author: Michael Lewis Narrator: Raúl Arrieta Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 24 minutes Release date: June 11, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: La excepcional crónica del crac inmobiliario que originó la mayor crisis de los últimos 80 años. Descubre el libro en el que se ha inspirado la película que ya ha sido nominada a cinco Óscar. La gran apuesta es la excepcional crónica del crac inmobiliario que originó la mayor crisis de los últimos ochenta años. Cuando en otoño de 2008 la economía estadounidense se hundió, arrastrando tras de sí a buena parte del mundo desarrollado a una crisis de la que aún no hemos salido, a un grupo de personas no le sorprendió en absoluto. Eran unos cuantos inversores y analistas inteligentes que habían comprendido lo que estaba pasando, pero no dijeron nada, paralizados por el miedo y las posibles ganancias. La pregunta clave que plantea Michael Lewis es: ¿quién se dio cuenta del riesgo que suponía dar por sentado que los precios del sector inmobiliario seguirían siempre al alza? Un riesgo complicado, además, por la creación de esos activos extraños y artificiales a partir de hipotecas dudosas. Para contestar esta pregunta, Lewis nos presenta una historia increíble a través de los personajes que la protagonizaron, plena de indignación y oscura ironía. Reseñas: «Probablemente el mejor libro de periodismo financiero de la historia.» Felix Salmon, Reuters «El mejor contador de historias de nuestra generación.» Malcolm Gladwell «Nadie escribe con mayor agilidad narrativa sobre dinero y finanzas que Michael Lewis. Logra usar las historias de sus protagonistas para explicar la avaricia, la estupidez y la hipocresía de un sistema con una carencia notoria de supervisión seria. Con un estilo parecido al de Tom Wolfe, Lewis consigue introducir al lector de modo colorido en el mundo darwiniano del mercado de bonos.» Michiko Kakutani, The New York Times Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437303]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - La gran apuesta Author: Michael Lewis Narrator: Raúl Arrieta Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 24 minutes Release date: June 11, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: La excepcional crónica del crac inmobiliario que originó la mayor crisis de los últimos 80 años. Descubre el libro en el que se ha inspirado la película que ya ha sido nominada a cinco Óscar. La gran apuesta es la excepcional crónica del crac inmobiliario que originó la mayor crisis de los últimos ochenta años. Cuando en otoño de 2008 la economía estadounidense se hundió, arrastrando tras de sí a buena parte del mundo desarrollado a una crisis de la que aún no hemos salido, a un grupo de personas no le sorprendió en absoluto. Eran unos cuantos inversores y analistas inteligentes que habían comprendido lo que estaba pasando, pero no dijeron nada, paralizados por el miedo y las posibles ganancias. La pregunta clave que plantea Michael Lewis es: ¿quién se dio cuenta del riesgo que suponía dar por sentado que los precios del sector inmobiliario seguirían siempre al alza? Un riesgo complicado, además, por la creación de esos activos extraños y artificiales a partir de hipotecas dudosas. Para contestar esta pregunta, Lewis nos presenta una historia increíble a través de los personajes que la protagonizaron, plena de indignación y oscura ironía. Reseñas: «Probablemente el mejor libro de periodismo financiero de la historia.» Felix Salmon, Reuters «El mejor contador de historias de nuestra generación.» Malcolm Gladwell «Nadie escribe con mayor agilidad narrativa sobre dinero y finanzas que Michael Lewis. Logra usar las historias de sus protagonistas para explicar la avaricia, la estupidez y la hipocresía de un sistema con una carencia notoria de supervisión seria. Con un estilo parecido al de Tom Wolfe, Lewis consigue introducir al lector de modo colorido en el mundo darwiniano del mercado de bonos.» Michiko Kakutani, The New York Times https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437130 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437130]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Winning the Green New Deal: Why We Must, How We Can Author: Tbd Narrator: Inés Del Castillo, Joniece Abbott-Pratt, David Sadzin, Samantha Desz, Shaun Taylor-Corbett, Timothy Andrés Pabon, Priya Ayyar, Jonathan Todd Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 49 minutes Release date: August 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An urgent and definitive collection of essays from leaders and experts championing the Green New Deal—and a detailed playbook for how we can win it—including contributions by leading activists and progressive writers like Varshini Prakash, Rhiana Gunn-Wright, Bill McKibben, Rev William Barber II, and more. In October 2018, scientists warned that we have less than 12 years left to transform our economy away from fossil fuels, or face catastrophic climate change. At that moment, there was no plan in the US to decarbonize our economy that fast. Less than two years later, every major Democratic presidential candidate has embraced the vision of the Green New Deal—a rapid, vast transformation of our economy to avert climate catastrophe while securing economic and racial justice for all. What happened? A new generation of leaders confronted the political establishment in Washington DC with a simple message: the climate crisis is here, and the Green New Deal is our last, best hope for a livable future. Now comes the hard part: turning that vision into the law of the land. In Winning a Green New Deal, leading youth activists, journalists, and policymakers explain why we need a transformative agenda to avert climate catastrophe, and how our movement can organize to win. Featuring essays by Varshini Prakash, cofounder of Sunrise Movement; Rhiana Gunn-Wright, Green New Deal policy architect; Joseph Stiglitz, Nobel Prize–winning economist; Bill McKibben, internationally renowned environmentalist; Mary Kay Henry, the President of the Service Employees International Union, and others we’ll learn why the climate crisis cannot be solved unless we also confront inequality and racism, how movements can redefine what’s politically possible and overcome the opposition of fossil fuel billionaires, and how a Green New Deal will build a just and thriving economy for all of us. For anyone looking to understand the movement for a Green New Deal, and join the fight for a livable future, there is no resource as clear and practical as Winning the Green New Deal. Tbd Tue, 25 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437130 thebookvoice.com 9:49:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437130]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Winning the Green New Deal: Why We Must, How We Can Author: Tbd Narrator: Inés Del Castillo, Joniece Abbott-Pratt, David Sadzin, Samantha Desz, Shaun Taylor-Corbett, Timothy Andrés Pabon, Priya Ayyar, Jonathan Todd Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 49 minutes Release date: August 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An urgent and definitive collection of essays from leaders and experts championing the Green New Deal—and a detailed playbook for how we can win it—including contributions by leading activists and progressive writers like Varshini Prakash, Rhiana Gunn-Wright, Bill McKibben, Rev William Barber II, and more. In October 2018, scientists warned that we have less than 12 years left to transform our economy away from fossil fuels, or face catastrophic climate change. At that moment, there was no plan in the US to decarbonize our economy that fast. Less than two years later, every major Democratic presidential candidate has embraced the vision of the Green New Deal—a rapid, vast transformation of our economy to avert climate catastrophe while securing economic and racial justice for all. What happened? A new generation of leaders confronted the political establishment in Washington DC with a simple message: the climate crisis is here, and the Green New Deal is our last, best hope for a livable future. Now comes the hard part: turning that vision into the law of the land. In Winning a Green New Deal, leading youth activists, journalists, and policymakers explain why we need a transformative agenda to avert climate catastrophe, and how our movement can organize to win. Featuring essays by Varshini Prakash, cofounder of Sunrise Movement; Rhiana Gunn-Wright, Green New Deal policy architect; Joseph Stiglitz, Nobel Prize–winning economist; Bill McKibben, internationally renowned environmentalist; Mary Kay Henry, the President of the Service Employees International Union, and others we’ll learn why the climate crisis cannot be solved unless we also confront inequality and racism, how movements can redefine what’s politically possible and overcome the opposition of fossil fuel billionaires, and how a Green New Deal will build a just and thriving economy for all of us. For anyone looking to understand the movement for a Green New Deal, and join the fight for a livable future, there is no resource as clear and practical as Winning the Green New Deal. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/437130]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Winning the Green New Deal: Why We Must, How We Can Author: Tbd Narrator: Inés Del Castillo, Joniece Abbott-Pratt, David Sadzin, Samantha Desz, Shaun Taylor-Corbett, Timothy Andrés Pabon, Priya Ayyar, Jonathan Todd Ross Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 49 minutes Release date: August 25, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An urgent and definitive collection of essays from leaders and experts championing the Green New Deal—and a detailed playbook for how we can win it—including contributions by leading activists and progressive writers like Varshini Prakash, Rhiana Gunn-Wright, Bill McKibben, Rev William Barber II, and more. In October 2018, scientists warned that we have less than 12 years left to transform our economy away from fossil fuels, or face catastrophic climate change. At that moment, there was no plan in the US to decarbonize our economy that fast. Less than two years later, every major Democratic presidential candidate has embraced the vision of the Green New Deal—a rapid, vast transformation of our economy to avert climate catastrophe while securing economic and racial justice for all. What happened? A new generation of leaders confronted the political establishment in Washington DC with a simple message: the climate crisis is here, and the Green New Deal is our last, best hope for a livable future. Now comes the hard part: turning that vision into the law of the land. In Winning a Green New Deal, leading youth activists, journalists, and policymakers explain why we need a transformative agenda to avert climate catastrophe, and how our movement can organize to win. Featuring essays by Varshini Prakash, cofounder of Sunrise Movement; Rhiana Gunn-Wright, Green New Deal policy architect; Joseph Stiglitz, Nobel Prize–winning economist; Bill McKibben, internationally renowned environmentalist; Mary Kay Henry, the President of the Service Employees International Union, and others we’ll learn why the climate crisis cannot be solved unless we also confront inequality and racism, how movements can redefine what’s politically possible and overcome the opposition of fossil fuel billionaires, and how a Green New Deal will build a just and thriving economy for all of us. For anyone looking to understand the movement for a Green New Deal, and join the fight for a livable future, there is no resource as clear and practical as Winning the Green New Deal. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436971 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436971]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics in the Age of COVID-19 Author: Joshua Gans Narrator: Barry Abrams Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 58 minutes Release date: July 7, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The COVID-19 pandemic has unleashed a firehose of information (much of it wrong) and an avalanche of opinions (many of them ill-founded). Most of us are so distracted by the everyday awfulness that we don't see the broader issues in play. In this book, economist Joshua Gans steps back from the short-term chaos to take a clear and systematic look at how economic choices are being made in response to COVID-19. He shows that containing the virus and pausing the economy are the necessary first steps. Gans outlines the phases of the pandemic economy, from containment to reset to recovery and enhancement. Warning against thinking in terms of a 'tradeoff' between public health and economic health, Gans explains that containment gives us the opportunity to develop effective testing that will make it safe for people to interact. Once the virus is contained, we will need to pivot toward innovating, and, finally, we will come together to plan how to protect ourselves from future pandemics. He looks at policy tools that might aid an economic recovery, distinguishing between economic losses during a pandemic and a recession. Gans lays out the economic choices accessibly but with urgency, leaving politics out of it. Economics in the Age of COVID-19 is a must-listen book for anyone interested in the long-term implications of our current crisis. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Joshua Gans Tue, 07 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436971 thebookvoice.com 3:58:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436971]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics in the Age of COVID-19 Author: Joshua Gans Narrator: Barry Abrams Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 58 minutes Release date: July 7, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The COVID-19 pandemic has unleashed a firehose of information (much of it wrong) and an avalanche of opinions (many of them ill-founded). Most of us are so distracted by the everyday awfulness that we don't see the broader issues in play. In this book, economist Joshua Gans steps back from the short-term chaos to take a clear and systematic look at how economic choices are being made in response to COVID-19. He shows that containing the virus and pausing the economy are the necessary first steps. Gans outlines the phases of the pandemic economy, from containment to reset to recovery and enhancement. Warning against thinking in terms of a 'tradeoff' between public health and economic health, Gans explains that containment gives us the opportunity to develop effective testing that will make it safe for people to interact. Once the virus is contained, we will need to pivot toward innovating, and, finally, we will come together to plan how to protect ourselves from future pandemics. He looks at policy tools that might aid an economic recovery, distinguishing between economic losses during a pandemic and a recession. Gans lays out the economic choices accessibly but with urgency, leaving politics out of it. Economics in the Age of COVID-19 is a must-listen book for anyone interested in the long-term implications of our current crisis. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436971]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics in the Age of COVID-19 Author: Joshua Gans Narrator: Barry Abrams Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 58 minutes Release date: July 7, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The COVID-19 pandemic has unleashed a firehose of information (much of it wrong) and an avalanche of opinions (many of them ill-founded). Most of us are so distracted by the everyday awfulness that we don't see the broader issues in play. In this book, economist Joshua Gans steps back from the short-term chaos to take a clear and systematic look at how economic choices are being made in response to COVID-19. He shows that containing the virus and pausing the economy are the necessary first steps. Gans outlines the phases of the pandemic economy, from containment to reset to recovery and enhancement. Warning against thinking in terms of a 'tradeoff' between public health and economic health, Gans explains that containment gives us the opportunity to develop effective testing that will make it safe for people to interact. Once the virus is contained, we will need to pivot toward innovating, and, finally, we will come together to plan how to protect ourselves from future pandemics. He looks at policy tools that might aid an economic recovery, distinguishing between economic losses during a pandemic and a recession. Gans lays out the economic choices accessibly but with urgency, leaving politics out of it. Economics in the Age of COVID-19 is a must-listen book for anyone interested in the long-term implications of our current crisis. THIS AUDIOBOOK MAY INCLUDE INFORMATION REGARDING THE COVID-19 PANDEMIC. INFORMATION RELATED TO COVID-19 CONTINUES TO EVOLVE. AUDIOBOOKS.COM ENCOURAGES YOU TO SEEK UP-TO-DATE INFORMATION AND GUIDANCE FROM YOUR LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH UNIT. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436048 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436048]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Hospital: Life, Death, and Dollars in a Small American Town Author: Brian Alexander Narrator: Nick Landrum Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 51 minutes Release date: March 9, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An intimate, heart wrenching portrait of one small hospital that reveals the magnitude of America’s health care crises. “With his signature gut-punching prose, Alexander breaks our hearts as he opens our eyes to America’s deep-rooted sickness and despair by immersing us in the lives of a small town hospital and the people it serves. “ —Beth Macy, bestselling author of Dopesick By following the struggle for survival of one small-town hospital, and the patients who walk, or are carried, through its doors, The Hospital takes listeners into the world of the American medical industry in a way no audiobook has done before. Americans are dying sooner, and living in poorer health. Alexander argues that no plan will solve America’s health crisis until the deeper causes of that crisis are addressed. Bryan, Ohio's hospital, is losing money, making it vulnerable to big health systems seeking domination and Phil Ennen, CEO, has been fighting to preserve its independence. Meanwhile, Bryan, a town of 8,500 people in Ohio’s northwest corner, is still trying to recover from the Great Recession. As local leaders struggle to address the town’s problems, and the hospital fights for its life amid a rapidly consolidating medical and hospital industry, a 39-year-old diabetic literally fights for his limbs, and a 55-year-old contractor lies dying in the emergency room. With these and other stories, Alexander strips away the wonkiness of policy to reveal Americans’ struggle for health against a powerful system that’s stacked against them, but yet so fragile it blows apart when the pandemic hits. Culminating with COVID-19, this audiobook offers a blueprint for how we created the crisis we're in. A Macmillan Audio production from St. Martin's Press 'A brilliantly imaginative and creative way of telling the story of today's America and the roots of what ails it, through the travails of a small-town hospital. In The Hospital, Brian Alexander does again so well what he did in Glass House—telling the big story from the small place.' —Sam Quinones, author of Dreamland: The True Tale of America's Opiate Epidemic Brian Alexander Tue, 09 Mar 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436048 thebookvoice.com 14:51:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436048]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Hospital: Life, Death, and Dollars in a Small American Town Author: Brian Alexander Narrator: Nick Landrum Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 51 minutes Release date: March 9, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An intimate, heart wrenching portrait of one small hospital that reveals the magnitude of America’s health care crises. “With his signature gut-punching prose, Alexander breaks our hearts as he opens our eyes to America’s deep-rooted sickness and despair by immersing us in the lives of a small town hospital and the people it serves. “ —Beth Macy, bestselling author of Dopesick By following the struggle for survival of one small-town hospital, and the patients who walk, or are carried, through its doors, The Hospital takes listeners into the world of the American medical industry in a way no audiobook has done before. Americans are dying sooner, and living in poorer health. Alexander argues that no plan will solve America’s health crisis until the deeper causes of that crisis are addressed. Bryan, Ohio's hospital, is losing money, making it vulnerable to big health systems seeking domination and Phil Ennen, CEO, has been fighting to preserve its independence. Meanwhile, Bryan, a town of 8,500 people in Ohio’s northwest corner, is still trying to recover from the Great Recession. As local leaders struggle to address the town’s problems, and the hospital fights for its life amid a rapidly consolidating medical and hospital industry, a 39-year-old diabetic literally fights for his limbs, and a 55-year-old contractor lies dying in the emergency room. With these and other stories, Alexander strips away the wonkiness of policy to reveal Americans’ struggle for health against a powerful system that’s stacked against them, but yet so fragile it blows apart when the pandemic hits. Culminating with COVID-19, this audiobook offers a blueprint for how we created the crisis we're in. A Macmillan Audio production from St. Martin's Press 'A brilliantly imaginative and creative way of telling the story of today's America and the roots of what ails it, through the travails of a small-town hospital. In The Hospital, Brian Alexander does again so well what he did in Glass House—telling the big story from the small place.' —Sam Quinones, author of Dreamland: The True Tale of America's Opiate Epidemic Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/436048]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Hospital: Life, Death, and Dollars in a Small American Town Author: Brian Alexander Narrator: Nick Landrum Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 51 minutes Release date: March 9, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An intimate, heart wrenching portrait of one small hospital that reveals the magnitude of America’s health care crises. “With his signature gut-punching prose, Alexander breaks our hearts as he opens our eyes to America’s deep-rooted sickness and despair by immersing us in the lives of a small town hospital and the people it serves. “ —Beth Macy, bestselling author of Dopesick By following the struggle for survival of one small-town hospital, and the patients who walk, or are carried, through its doors, The Hospital takes listeners into the world of the American medical industry in a way no audiobook has done before. Americans are dying sooner, and living in poorer health. Alexander argues that no plan will solve America’s health crisis until the deeper causes of that crisis are addressed. Bryan, Ohio's hospital, is losing money, making it vulnerable to big health systems seeking domination and Phil Ennen, CEO, has been fighting to preserve its independence. Meanwhile, Bryan, a town of 8,500 people in Ohio’s northwest corner, is still trying to recover from the Great Recession. As local leaders struggle to address the town’s problems, and the hospital fights for its life amid a rapidly consolidating medical and hospital industry, a 39-year-old diabetic literally fights for his limbs, and a 55-year-old contractor lies dying in the emergency room. With these and other stories, Alexander strips away the wonkiness of policy to reveal Americans’ struggle for health against a powerful system that’s stacked against them, but yet so fragile it blows apart when the pandemic hits. Culminating with COVID-19, this audiobook offers a blueprint for how we created the crisis we're in. A Macmillan Audio production from St. Martin's Press 'A brilliantly imaginative and creative way of telling the story of today's America and the roots of what ails it, through the travails of a small-town hospital. In The Hospital, Brian Alexander does again so well what he did in Glass House—telling the big story from the small place.' —Sam Quinones, author of Dreamland: The True Tale of America's Opiate Epidemic https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434677 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434677]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Free Lunch Thinking: 8 Economic Myths and Why Politicians Fall for Them Author: Tom Bergin Narrator: Charles Armstrong Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 33 minutes Release date: January 28, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Economic theories and models shape our everyday lives. They are relied on by politicians when tax rises or cuts are being considered. They inform debates about everything from bonuses for CEOs to minimum wage rates to the level of job protection enshrined in law. They determine what levels of tobacco or petrol duty are charged, and influence government approaches to issues as diverse as obesity and climate change. The question is: are policy makers right to be so slavishly reliant on them? Tom Bergin is sceptical, and in Free Lunch Thinking he subjects eight of the most prevalent economic mantras to close scrutiny, assessing how they play out in practice. Again and again, he shows how individuals, companies and markets fail to respond to policy changes as theory predicts. He exposes the missed opportunities and wasted resources that result. And by tracing the development of key economic tenets, he demonstrates how their champions' tendency to believe in phenomena for which they have little hard evidence leaves accepted economic wisdom frequently being more about faith than facts. His book both exposes and challenges lazy thinking. It also sets out a path for more considered future. © Tom Bergin 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Tom Bergin Thu, 28 Jan 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434677 thebookvoice.com 9:33:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434677]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Free Lunch Thinking: 8 Economic Myths and Why Politicians Fall for Them Author: Tom Bergin Narrator: Charles Armstrong Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 33 minutes Release date: January 28, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Economic theories and models shape our everyday lives. They are relied on by politicians when tax rises or cuts are being considered. They inform debates about everything from bonuses for CEOs to minimum wage rates to the level of job protection enshrined in law. They determine what levels of tobacco or petrol duty are charged, and influence government approaches to issues as diverse as obesity and climate change. The question is: are policy makers right to be so slavishly reliant on them? Tom Bergin is sceptical, and in Free Lunch Thinking he subjects eight of the most prevalent economic mantras to close scrutiny, assessing how they play out in practice. Again and again, he shows how individuals, companies and markets fail to respond to policy changes as theory predicts. He exposes the missed opportunities and wasted resources that result. And by tracing the development of key economic tenets, he demonstrates how their champions' tendency to believe in phenomena for which they have little hard evidence leaves accepted economic wisdom frequently being more about faith than facts. His book both exposes and challenges lazy thinking. It also sets out a path for more considered future. © Tom Bergin 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434677]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Free Lunch Thinking: 8 Economic Myths and Why Politicians Fall for Them Author: Tom Bergin Narrator: Charles Armstrong Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 33 minutes Release date: January 28, 2021 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Economic theories and models shape our everyday lives. They are relied on by politicians when tax rises or cuts are being considered. They inform debates about everything from bonuses for CEOs to minimum wage rates to the level of job protection enshrined in law. They determine what levels of tobacco or petrol duty are charged, and influence government approaches to issues as diverse as obesity and climate change. The question is: are policy makers right to be so slavishly reliant on them? Tom Bergin is sceptical, and in Free Lunch Thinking he subjects eight of the most prevalent economic mantras to close scrutiny, assessing how they play out in practice. Again and again, he shows how individuals, companies and markets fail to respond to policy changes as theory predicts. He exposes the missed opportunities and wasted resources that result. And by tracing the development of key economic tenets, he demonstrates how their champions' tendency to believe in phenomena for which they have little hard evidence leaves accepted economic wisdom frequently being more about faith than facts. His book both exposes and challenges lazy thinking. It also sets out a path for more considered future. © Tom Bergin 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434110 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434110]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Impact: Reshaping capitalism to drive real change Author: Sir Ronald Cohen Narrator: Sir Ronald Cohen, Finlay Robertson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 23 minutes Release date: August 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: WHAT KIND OF WORLD DO WE WANT TO LIVE IN? Envisage a world where inequality is shrinking, where natural resources are regenerated, and people can benefit from shared prosperity. In IMPACT, Sir Ronald Cohen proposes a new theory about how the Impact Revolution will enable us to achieve systemic social and environmental improvement. Impact investing is about creating a chain reaction. One that brings innovation to the stakeholders whose engagement is crucial to tackling massive social and environmental challenges at scale. One that changes the mindset and behavior of investors, philanthropists, entrepreneurs, social organizations, big business, governments and the general public and places impact at the center of our decision-making. The Impact Revolution is already transforming the way we think about social responsibility, business models and investment. It is beginning to change our economies, turning them into powerful engines that drive capital to achieve impact alongside profit. We can already see it marking the twenty-first century as much as the tech revolution marked the twentieth. Billions of people's lives depend on the success of the Impact Revolution. There has never been a more tangible opportunity. Sir Ronald Cohen Thu, 20 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434110 thebookvoice.com 6:23:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434110]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Impact: Reshaping capitalism to drive real change Author: Sir Ronald Cohen Narrator: Sir Ronald Cohen, Finlay Robertson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 23 minutes Release date: August 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: WHAT KIND OF WORLD DO WE WANT TO LIVE IN? Envisage a world where inequality is shrinking, where natural resources are regenerated, and people can benefit from shared prosperity. In IMPACT, Sir Ronald Cohen proposes a new theory about how the Impact Revolution will enable us to achieve systemic social and environmental improvement. Impact investing is about creating a chain reaction. One that brings innovation to the stakeholders whose engagement is crucial to tackling massive social and environmental challenges at scale. One that changes the mindset and behavior of investors, philanthropists, entrepreneurs, social organizations, big business, governments and the general public and places impact at the center of our decision-making. The Impact Revolution is already transforming the way we think about social responsibility, business models and investment. It is beginning to change our economies, turning them into powerful engines that drive capital to achieve impact alongside profit. We can already see it marking the twenty-first century as much as the tech revolution marked the twentieth. Billions of people's lives depend on the success of the Impact Revolution. There has never been a more tangible opportunity. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434110]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Impact: Reshaping capitalism to drive real change Author: Sir Ronald Cohen Narrator: Sir Ronald Cohen, Finlay Robertson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 23 minutes Release date: August 20, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: WHAT KIND OF WORLD DO WE WANT TO LIVE IN? Envisage a world where inequality is shrinking, where natural resources are regenerated, and people can benefit from shared prosperity. In IMPACT, Sir Ronald Cohen proposes a new theory about how the Impact Revolution will enable us to achieve systemic social and environmental improvement. Impact investing is about creating a chain reaction. One that brings innovation to the stakeholders whose engagement is crucial to tackling massive social and environmental challenges at scale. One that changes the mindset and behavior of investors, philanthropists, entrepreneurs, social organizations, big business, governments and the general public and places impact at the center of our decision-making. The Impact Revolution is already transforming the way we think about social responsibility, business models and investment. It is beginning to change our economies, turning them into powerful engines that drive capital to achieve impact alongside profit. We can already see it marking the twenty-first century as much as the tech revolution marked the twentieth. Billions of people's lives depend on the success of the Impact Revolution. There has never been a more tangible opportunity. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434066 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434066]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Treasury's War: The Unleashing of a New Era of Financial Warfare Author: Juan Zarate Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 55 minutes Release date: July 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: For more than a decade, America has been waging a new kind of war against the financial networks of rogue regimes, proliferators, terrorist groups, and criminal syndicates. Juan Zarate, a chief architect of modern financial warfare and a former senior Treasury and White House official, pulls back the curtain on this shadowy world. In this gripping story, he explains in unprecedented detail how a small, dedicated group of officials redefined the Treasury's role and used its unique powers, relationships, and reputation to apply financial pressure against America's enemies. This group unleashed a new brand of financial power—one that leveraged the private sector and banks directly to isolate rogues from the international financial system. By harnessing the forces of globalization and the centrality of the American market and dollar, Treasury developed a new way of undermining America's foes. Treasury and its tools soon became, and remain, critical in the most vital geopolitical challenges facing the United States, including terrorism, nuclear proliferation, and the regimes in Iran, North Korea, and Syria. This is the unique story of the United States' financial war campaigns and the contours and uses of financial power, and of the warfare to come. Juan Zarate Tue, 21 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434066 thebookvoice.com 16:55:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434066]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Treasury's War: The Unleashing of a New Era of Financial Warfare Author: Juan Zarate Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 55 minutes Release date: July 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: For more than a decade, America has been waging a new kind of war against the financial networks of rogue regimes, proliferators, terrorist groups, and criminal syndicates. Juan Zarate, a chief architect of modern financial warfare and a former senior Treasury and White House official, pulls back the curtain on this shadowy world. In this gripping story, he explains in unprecedented detail how a small, dedicated group of officials redefined the Treasury's role and used its unique powers, relationships, and reputation to apply financial pressure against America's enemies. This group unleashed a new brand of financial power—one that leveraged the private sector and banks directly to isolate rogues from the international financial system. By harnessing the forces of globalization and the centrality of the American market and dollar, Treasury developed a new way of undermining America's foes. Treasury and its tools soon became, and remain, critical in the most vital geopolitical challenges facing the United States, including terrorism, nuclear proliferation, and the regimes in Iran, North Korea, and Syria. This is the unique story of the United States' financial war campaigns and the contours and uses of financial power, and of the warfare to come. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/434066]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Treasury's War: The Unleashing of a New Era of Financial Warfare Author: Juan Zarate Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 55 minutes Release date: July 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: For more than a decade, America has been waging a new kind of war against the financial networks of rogue regimes, proliferators, terrorist groups, and criminal syndicates. Juan Zarate, a chief architect of modern financial warfare and a former senior Treasury and White House official, pulls back the curtain on this shadowy world. In this gripping story, he explains in unprecedented detail how a small, dedicated group of officials redefined the Treasury's role and used its unique powers, relationships, and reputation to apply financial pressure against America's enemies. This group unleashed a new brand of financial power—one that leveraged the private sector and banks directly to isolate rogues from the international financial system. By harnessing the forces of globalization and the centrality of the American market and dollar, Treasury developed a new way of undermining America's foes. Treasury and its tools soon became, and remain, critical in the most vital geopolitical challenges facing the United States, including terrorism, nuclear proliferation, and the regimes in Iran, North Korea, and Syria. This is the unique story of the United States' financial war campaigns and the contours and uses of financial power, and of the warfare to come. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/433357 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/433357]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order: Why Nations Succeed or Fail Author: Ray Dalio Narrator: Ray Dalio, Jeremy Bobb Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 48 minutes Release date: November 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.44 of Total 16 Ratings of Narrator: 4.25 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From legendary investor Ray Dalio, author of the international bestseller Principles, who has spent half a century studying global economies and markets, Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order examines history’s most turbulent economic and political periods to reveal why the times ahead will likely be radically different from those we’ve experienced in our lifetimes - but similar to those that have happened many times before. A few years ago, Ray Dalio noticed a confluence of political and economic conditions he hadn’t encountered before. They included huge debts and zero or near-zero interest rates that led to massive printing of money in the world’s three major reserve currencies; big political and social conflicts within countries, especially the US, due to the largest wealth, political and values disparities in more than 100 years; and the rising of a world power (China) to challenge the existing world power (US) and the existing world order. The last time that this confluence occurred was between 1930 and 1945. This realisation sent Dalio on a search for the repeating patterns and cause/effect relationships underlying all major changes in wealth and power over the last 500 years. In this remarkable and timely addition to his Principles series, Dalio brings readers along for his study of the major empires - including the Dutch, the British and the American - putting into perspective the 'Big Cycle' that has driven the successes and failures of all the world’s major countries throughout history. Dalio reveals the timeless and universal forces behind these shifts and uses them to look into the future, offering practical principles for positioning oneself for what’s ahead. Ray Dalio Tue, 30 Nov 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/433357 thebookvoice.com 16:48:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/433357]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order: Why Nations Succeed or Fail Author: Ray Dalio Narrator: Ray Dalio, Jeremy Bobb Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 48 minutes Release date: November 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.44 of Total 16 Ratings of Narrator: 4.25 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From legendary investor Ray Dalio, author of the international bestseller Principles, who has spent half a century studying global economies and markets, Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order examines history’s most turbulent economic and political periods to reveal why the times ahead will likely be radically different from those we’ve experienced in our lifetimes - but similar to those that have happened many times before. A few years ago, Ray Dalio noticed a confluence of political and economic conditions he hadn’t encountered before. They included huge debts and zero or near-zero interest rates that led to massive printing of money in the world’s three major reserve currencies; big political and social conflicts within countries, especially the US, due to the largest wealth, political and values disparities in more than 100 years; and the rising of a world power (China) to challenge the existing world power (US) and the existing world order. The last time that this confluence occurred was between 1930 and 1945. This realisation sent Dalio on a search for the repeating patterns and cause/effect relationships underlying all major changes in wealth and power over the last 500 years. In this remarkable and timely addition to his Principles series, Dalio brings readers along for his study of the major empires - including the Dutch, the British and the American - putting into perspective the 'Big Cycle' that has driven the successes and failures of all the world’s major countries throughout history. Dalio reveals the timeless and universal forces behind these shifts and uses them to look into the future, offering practical principles for positioning oneself for what’s ahead. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/433357]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order: Why Nations Succeed or Fail Author: Ray Dalio Narrator: Ray Dalio, Jeremy Bobb Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 48 minutes Release date: November 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.44 of Total 16 Ratings of Narrator: 4.25 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From legendary investor Ray Dalio, author of the international bestseller Principles, who has spent half a century studying global economies and markets, Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order examines history’s most turbulent economic and political periods to reveal why the times ahead will likely be radically different from those we’ve experienced in our lifetimes - but similar to those that have happened many times before. A few years ago, Ray Dalio noticed a confluence of political and economic conditions he hadn’t encountered before. They included huge debts and zero or near-zero interest rates that led to massive printing of money in the world’s three major reserve currencies; big political and social conflicts within countries, especially the US, due to the largest wealth, political and values disparities in more than 100 years; and the rising of a world power (China) to challenge the existing world power (US) and the existing world order. The last time that this confluence occurred was between 1930 and 1945. This realisation sent Dalio on a search for the repeating patterns and cause/effect relationships underlying all major changes in wealth and power over the last 500 years. In this remarkable and timely addition to his Principles series, Dalio brings readers along for his study of the major empires - including the Dutch, the British and the American - putting into perspective the 'Big Cycle' that has driven the successes and failures of all the world’s major countries throughout history. Dalio reveals the timeless and universal forces behind these shifts and uses them to look into the future, offering practical principles for positioning oneself for what’s ahead. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/431030 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/431030]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Monopolized: Life in the Age of Corporate Power Author: David Dayen Narrator: Stephen R. Thorne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 19 minutes Release date: July 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Over the last forty years our choices have narrowed, our opportunities have shrunk, and our lives have become governed by a handful of very large and very powerful corporations. Today, practically everything we buy, everywhere we shop, and every service we secure comes from a heavily concentrated market. This is a world where four major banks control most of our money, four airlines shuttle most of us around the country, and four major cell phone providers connect most of our communications. If you are sick you can go to one of three main pharmacies to fill your prescription, and if you end up in a hospital almost every accessory to heal you comes from one of a handful of large medical suppliers. Dayen, the editor of the American Prospect and author of the acclaimed Chain of Title, provides a riveting account of what it means to live in this new age of monopoly and how we might resist this corporate hegemony. Through vignettes and vivid case studies Dayen shows how these monopolies have transformed us, inverted us, and truly changed our lives, at the same time providing listeners with the raw material to make monopoly a consequential issue in American life and revive a long-dormant antitrust movement. David Dayen Tue, 21 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/431030 thebookvoice.com 13:19:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/431030]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Monopolized: Life in the Age of Corporate Power Author: David Dayen Narrator: Stephen R. Thorne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 19 minutes Release date: July 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Over the last forty years our choices have narrowed, our opportunities have shrunk, and our lives have become governed by a handful of very large and very powerful corporations. Today, practically everything we buy, everywhere we shop, and every service we secure comes from a heavily concentrated market. This is a world where four major banks control most of our money, four airlines shuttle most of us around the country, and four major cell phone providers connect most of our communications. If you are sick you can go to one of three main pharmacies to fill your prescription, and if you end up in a hospital almost every accessory to heal you comes from one of a handful of large medical suppliers. Dayen, the editor of the American Prospect and author of the acclaimed Chain of Title, provides a riveting account of what it means to live in this new age of monopoly and how we might resist this corporate hegemony. Through vignettes and vivid case studies Dayen shows how these monopolies have transformed us, inverted us, and truly changed our lives, at the same time providing listeners with the raw material to make monopoly a consequential issue in American life and revive a long-dormant antitrust movement. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/431030]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Monopolized: Life in the Age of Corporate Power Author: David Dayen Narrator: Stephen R. Thorne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 19 minutes Release date: July 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Over the last forty years our choices have narrowed, our opportunities have shrunk, and our lives have become governed by a handful of very large and very powerful corporations. Today, practically everything we buy, everywhere we shop, and every service we secure comes from a heavily concentrated market. This is a world where four major banks control most of our money, four airlines shuttle most of us around the country, and four major cell phone providers connect most of our communications. If you are sick you can go to one of three main pharmacies to fill your prescription, and if you end up in a hospital almost every accessory to heal you comes from one of a handful of large medical suppliers. Dayen, the editor of the American Prospect and author of the acclaimed Chain of Title, provides a riveting account of what it means to live in this new age of monopoly and how we might resist this corporate hegemony. Through vignettes and vivid case studies Dayen shows how these monopolies have transformed us, inverted us, and truly changed our lives, at the same time providing listeners with the raw material to make monopoly a consequential issue in American life and revive a long-dormant antitrust movement. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430959 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430959]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Lean Analytics: Use Data to Build a Better Startup Faster Author: Benjamin Yoskovitz, Alistair Croll Narrator: Daniel Henning Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 48 minutes Release date: June 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Marc Andreesen once said that 'markets that don't exist don't care how smart you are.' Whether you're a startup founder trying to disrupt an industry, or an intrapreneur trying to provoke change from within, your biggest risk is building something nobody wants. Lean Analytics can help. By measuring and analyzing as you grow, you can validate whether a problem is real, find the right customers, and decide what to build, how to monetize it, and how to spread the word. Focusing on the One Metric That Matters to your business right now gives you the focus you need to move ahead—and the discipline to know when to change course. Written by Alistair Croll and Ben Yoskovitz, the book lays out practical, proven steps to take your startup from initial idea to product/market fit and beyond. Packed with over thirty case studies, and based on a year of interviews with over a hundred founders and investors, the book is an invaluable, practical guide for Lean Startup practitioners everywhere. Benjamin Yoskovitz, Alistair Croll Tue, 30 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430959 thebookvoice.com 12:48:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430959]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Lean Analytics: Use Data to Build a Better Startup Faster Author: Benjamin Yoskovitz, Alistair Croll Narrator: Daniel Henning Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 48 minutes Release date: June 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Marc Andreesen once said that 'markets that don't exist don't care how smart you are.' Whether you're a startup founder trying to disrupt an industry, or an intrapreneur trying to provoke change from within, your biggest risk is building something nobody wants. Lean Analytics can help. By measuring and analyzing as you grow, you can validate whether a problem is real, find the right customers, and decide what to build, how to monetize it, and how to spread the word. Focusing on the One Metric That Matters to your business right now gives you the focus you need to move ahead—and the discipline to know when to change course. Written by Alistair Croll and Ben Yoskovitz, the book lays out practical, proven steps to take your startup from initial idea to product/market fit and beyond. Packed with over thirty case studies, and based on a year of interviews with over a hundred founders and investors, the book is an invaluable, practical guide for Lean Startup practitioners everywhere. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430959]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Lean Analytics: Use Data to Build a Better Startup Faster Author: Benjamin Yoskovitz, Alistair Croll Narrator: Daniel Henning Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 48 minutes Release date: June 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Marc Andreesen once said that 'markets that don't exist don't care how smart you are.' Whether you're a startup founder trying to disrupt an industry, or an intrapreneur trying to provoke change from within, your biggest risk is building something nobody wants. Lean Analytics can help. By measuring and analyzing as you grow, you can validate whether a problem is real, find the right customers, and decide what to build, how to monetize it, and how to spread the word. Focusing on the One Metric That Matters to your business right now gives you the focus you need to move ahead—and the discipline to know when to change course. Written by Alistair Croll and Ben Yoskovitz, the book lays out practical, proven steps to take your startup from initial idea to product/market fit and beyond. Packed with over thirty case studies, and based on a year of interviews with over a hundred founders and investors, the book is an invaluable, practical guide for Lean Startup practitioners everywhere. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430202 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430202]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order: Why Nations Succeed or Fail Author: Ray Dalio Narrator: Ray Dalio, Jeremy Bobb Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 48 minutes Release date: November 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.32 of Total 119 Ratings of Narrator: 4.25 of Total 16 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER * MORE THAN ONE MILLION COPIES SOLD “A provocative read...There are few tomes that coherently map such broad economic histories as well as Mr. Dalio’s. Perhaps more unusually, Mr. Dalio has managed to identify metrics from that history that can be applied to understand today.” —Andrew Ross Sorkin, The New York Times From legendary investor Ray Dalio, author of the #1 New York Times bestseller Principles, who has spent half a century studying global economies and markets, Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order examines history’s most turbulent economic and political periods to reveal why the times ahead will likely be radically different from those we’ve experienced in our lifetimes—and to offer practical advice on how to navigate them well. A few years ago, Ray Dalio noticed a confluence of political and economic conditions he hadn’t encountered before. They included huge debts and zero or near-zero interest rates that led to massive printing of money in the world’s three major reserve currencies; big political and social conflicts within countries, especially the US, due to the largest wealth, political, and values disparities in more than 100 years; and the rising of a world power (China) to challenge the existing world power (US) and the existing world order. The last time that this confluence occurred was between 1930 and 1945. This realization sent Dalio on a search for the repeating patterns and cause/effect relationships underlying all major changes in wealth and power over the last 500 years. In this remarkable and timely addition to his Principles series, Dalio brings readers along for his study of the major empires—including the Dutch, the British, and the American—putting into perspective the “Big Cycle” that has driven the successes and failures of all the world’s major countries throughout history. He reveals the timeless and universal forces behind these shifts and uses them to look into the future, offering practical principles for positioning oneself for what’s ahead. Ray Dalio Tue, 30 Nov 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430202 thebookvoice.com 16:48:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430202]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order: Why Nations Succeed or Fail Author: Ray Dalio Narrator: Ray Dalio, Jeremy Bobb Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 48 minutes Release date: November 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.32 of Total 119 Ratings of Narrator: 4.25 of Total 16 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER * MORE THAN ONE MILLION COPIES SOLD “A provocative read...There are few tomes that coherently map such broad economic histories as well as Mr. Dalio’s. Perhaps more unusually, Mr. Dalio has managed to identify metrics from that history that can be applied to understand today.” —Andrew Ross Sorkin, The New York Times From legendary investor Ray Dalio, author of the #1 New York Times bestseller Principles, who has spent half a century studying global economies and markets, Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order examines history’s most turbulent economic and political periods to reveal why the times ahead will likely be radically different from those we’ve experienced in our lifetimes—and to offer practical advice on how to navigate them well. A few years ago, Ray Dalio noticed a confluence of political and economic conditions he hadn’t encountered before. They included huge debts and zero or near-zero interest rates that led to massive printing of money in the world’s three major reserve currencies; big political and social conflicts within countries, especially the US, due to the largest wealth, political, and values disparities in more than 100 years; and the rising of a world power (China) to challenge the existing world power (US) and the existing world order. The last time that this confluence occurred was between 1930 and 1945. This realization sent Dalio on a search for the repeating patterns and cause/effect relationships underlying all major changes in wealth and power over the last 500 years. In this remarkable and timely addition to his Principles series, Dalio brings readers along for his study of the major empires—including the Dutch, the British, and the American—putting into perspective the “Big Cycle” that has driven the successes and failures of all the world’s major countries throughout history. He reveals the timeless and universal forces behind these shifts and uses them to look into the future, offering practical principles for positioning oneself for what’s ahead. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430202]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order: Why Nations Succeed or Fail Author: Ray Dalio Narrator: Ray Dalio, Jeremy Bobb Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 48 minutes Release date: November 30, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.32 of Total 119 Ratings of Narrator: 4.25 of Total 16 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER * MORE THAN ONE MILLION COPIES SOLD “A provocative read...There are few tomes that coherently map such broad economic histories as well as Mr. Dalio’s. Perhaps more unusually, Mr. Dalio has managed to identify metrics from that history that can be applied to understand today.” —Andrew Ross Sorkin, The New York Times From legendary investor Ray Dalio, author of the #1 New York Times bestseller Principles, who has spent half a century studying global economies and markets, Principles for Dealing with the Changing World Order examines history’s most turbulent economic and political periods to reveal why the times ahead will likely be radically different from those we’ve experienced in our lifetimes—and to offer practical advice on how to navigate them well. A few years ago, Ray Dalio noticed a confluence of political and economic conditions he hadn’t encountered before. They included huge debts and zero or near-zero interest rates that led to massive printing of money in the world’s three major reserve currencies; big political and social conflicts within countries, especially the US, due to the largest wealth, political, and values disparities in more than 100 years; and the rising of a world power (China) to challenge the existing world power (US) and the existing world order. The last time that this confluence occurred was between 1930 and 1945. This realization sent Dalio on a search for the repeating patterns and cause/effect relationships underlying all major changes in wealth and power over the last 500 years. In this remarkable and timely addition to his Principles series, Dalio brings readers along for his study of the major empires—including the Dutch, the British, and the American—putting into perspective the “Big Cycle” that has driven the successes and failures of all the world’s major countries throughout history. He reveals the timeless and universal forces behind these shifts and uses them to look into the future, offering practical principles for positioning oneself for what’s ahead. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430110 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430110]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Myth of Chinese Capitalism: The Worker, the Factory, and the Future of the World Author: Dexter Roberts Narrator: Joe Barrett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 19 minutes Release date: July 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The untold story of how restrictive policies are preventing China from becoming the world's largest economy Dexter Roberts lived in Beijing for two decades working as a reporter on economics, business and politics for Bloomberg Businessweek. In The Myth of Chinese Capitalism, Roberts explores the reality behind today's financially-ascendant China and pulls the curtain back on how the Chinese manufacturing machine is actually powered. He focuses on two places: the village of Binghuacun in the province of Guizhou, one of China's poorest regions that sends the highest proportion of its youth away to become migrants; and Dongguan, China's most infamous factory town located in Guangdong, home to both the largest number of migrant workers and the country's biggest manufacturing base. Within these two towns and the people that move between them, Roberts focuses on the story of the Mo family, former farmers-turned-migrant-workers who are struggling to make a living in a fast-changing country that relegates one-half of its people to second-class status via household registration, land tenure policies and inequality in education and health care systems. Dexter Roberts Fri, 31 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430110 thebookvoice.com 8:19:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430110]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Myth of Chinese Capitalism: The Worker, the Factory, and the Future of the World Author: Dexter Roberts Narrator: Joe Barrett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 19 minutes Release date: July 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The untold story of how restrictive policies are preventing China from becoming the world's largest economy Dexter Roberts lived in Beijing for two decades working as a reporter on economics, business and politics for Bloomberg Businessweek. In The Myth of Chinese Capitalism, Roberts explores the reality behind today's financially-ascendant China and pulls the curtain back on how the Chinese manufacturing machine is actually powered. He focuses on two places: the village of Binghuacun in the province of Guizhou, one of China's poorest regions that sends the highest proportion of its youth away to become migrants; and Dongguan, China's most infamous factory town located in Guangdong, home to both the largest number of migrant workers and the country's biggest manufacturing base. Within these two towns and the people that move between them, Roberts focuses on the story of the Mo family, former farmers-turned-migrant-workers who are struggling to make a living in a fast-changing country that relegates one-half of its people to second-class status via household registration, land tenure policies and inequality in education and health care systems. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/430110]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Myth of Chinese Capitalism: The Worker, the Factory, and the Future of the World Author: Dexter Roberts Narrator: Joe Barrett Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 19 minutes Release date: July 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The untold story of how restrictive policies are preventing China from becoming the world's largest economy Dexter Roberts lived in Beijing for two decades working as a reporter on economics, business and politics for Bloomberg Businessweek. In The Myth of Chinese Capitalism, Roberts explores the reality behind today's financially-ascendant China and pulls the curtain back on how the Chinese manufacturing machine is actually powered. He focuses on two places: the village of Binghuacun in the province of Guizhou, one of China's poorest regions that sends the highest proportion of its youth away to become migrants; and Dongguan, China's most infamous factory town located in Guangdong, home to both the largest number of migrant workers and the country's biggest manufacturing base. Within these two towns and the people that move between them, Roberts focuses on the story of the Mo family, former farmers-turned-migrant-workers who are struggling to make a living in a fast-changing country that relegates one-half of its people to second-class status via household registration, land tenure policies and inequality in education and health care systems. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/429014 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/429014]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Head, Hand, Heart: Why Intelligence Is Overrated, Manual Workers Matter, and Caregivers Deserve More Respect Author: David Goodhart Narrator: David Goodhart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 10 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A Financial Times best book of 2020, an “utterly compelling” (The Sunday Times, London) argument from leading political analyst David Goodhart about the severely imbalanced distribution of status and work in western societies. The coronavirus pandemic revealed what we ought to have already known: that nurses, caregivers, supermarket workers, delivery drivers, cleaners, and so many others are essential. Until recently, this work was largely regarded as menial by the same society that now lauds them as heroes. How did we get here? “With great clarity and unfailing sympathy for the human condition,” (Matthew Crawford, New York Times bestselling author of Shop Class as Soulcraft) this follow-up to the bestselling The Road to Somewhere divides society into people who work with their Heads (cognitive work), with their Hands (manual work), or with their Hearts (caring work), and considers each group’s changing status and influence. Today the “best and the brightest” trump the “decent and hardworking.” Qualities like character, compassion, craft, and physical labor command far less respect in our workforce. This imbalance has led to the disaffection and alienation of millions of people. David Goodhart reveals the untold history behind this disparity and outlines the challenges we face as a result. Cognitive ability has become the gold standard of human esteem, and those in the cognitive class now shape society largely in their own interest. To put it bluntly: smart people have become too powerful. A healthy, democratic society respects and rewards a broad range of achievements, and provides meaning and value for people who cannot—or do not want to—achieve in the classroom and professional career market. We must shift our thinking to see all workers as essential, and not just during crises like the coronavirus pandemic. “Insightful and provocative,” (Michael Lind, author of The New Class War) this is a “deeply felt and persuasive call for rethinking the social order” (Publishers Weekly). David Goodhart Tue, 08 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/429014 thebookvoice.com 11:10:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/429014]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Head, Hand, Heart: Why Intelligence Is Overrated, Manual Workers Matter, and Caregivers Deserve More Respect Author: David Goodhart Narrator: David Goodhart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 10 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A Financial Times best book of 2020, an “utterly compelling” (The Sunday Times, London) argument from leading political analyst David Goodhart about the severely imbalanced distribution of status and work in western societies. The coronavirus pandemic revealed what we ought to have already known: that nurses, caregivers, supermarket workers, delivery drivers, cleaners, and so many others are essential. Until recently, this work was largely regarded as menial by the same society that now lauds them as heroes. How did we get here? “With great clarity and unfailing sympathy for the human condition,” (Matthew Crawford, New York Times bestselling author of Shop Class as Soulcraft) this follow-up to the bestselling The Road to Somewhere divides society into people who work with their Heads (cognitive work), with their Hands (manual work), or with their Hearts (caring work), and considers each group’s changing status and influence. Today the “best and the brightest” trump the “decent and hardworking.” Qualities like character, compassion, craft, and physical labor command far less respect in our workforce. This imbalance has led to the disaffection and alienation of millions of people. David Goodhart reveals the untold history behind this disparity and outlines the challenges we face as a result. Cognitive ability has become the gold standard of human esteem, and those in the cognitive class now shape society largely in their own interest. To put it bluntly: smart people have become too powerful. A healthy, democratic society respects and rewards a broad range of achievements, and provides meaning and value for people who cannot—or do not want to—achieve in the classroom and professional career market. We must shift our thinking to see all workers as essential, and not just during crises like the coronavirus pandemic. “Insightful and provocative,” (Michael Lind, author of The New Class War) this is a “deeply felt and persuasive call for rethinking the social order” (Publishers Weekly). Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/429014]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Head, Hand, Heart: Why Intelligence Is Overrated, Manual Workers Matter, and Caregivers Deserve More Respect Author: David Goodhart Narrator: David Goodhart Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 10 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A Financial Times best book of 2020, an “utterly compelling” (The Sunday Times, London) argument from leading political analyst David Goodhart about the severely imbalanced distribution of status and work in western societies. The coronavirus pandemic revealed what we ought to have already known: that nurses, caregivers, supermarket workers, delivery drivers, cleaners, and so many others are essential. Until recently, this work was largely regarded as menial by the same society that now lauds them as heroes. How did we get here? “With great clarity and unfailing sympathy for the human condition,” (Matthew Crawford, New York Times bestselling author of Shop Class as Soulcraft) this follow-up to the bestselling The Road to Somewhere divides society into people who work with their Heads (cognitive work), with their Hands (manual work), or with their Hearts (caring work), and considers each group’s changing status and influence. Today the “best and the brightest” trump the “decent and hardworking.” Qualities like character, compassion, craft, and physical labor command far less respect in our workforce. This imbalance has led to the disaffection and alienation of millions of people. David Goodhart reveals the untold history behind this disparity and outlines the challenges we face as a result. Cognitive ability has become the gold standard of human esteem, and those in the cognitive class now shape society largely in their own interest. To put it bluntly: smart people have become too powerful. A healthy, democratic society respects and rewards a broad range of achievements, and provides meaning and value for people who cannot—or do not want to—achieve in the classroom and professional career market. We must shift our thinking to see all workers as essential, and not just during crises like the coronavirus pandemic. “Insightful and provocative,” (Michael Lind, author of The New Class War) this is a “deeply felt and persuasive call for rethinking the social order” (Publishers Weekly). https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428949 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428949]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: affiliate marketing pro Author: Evelyn Taylor Narrator: Peter Evans Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 18 minutes Release date: April 3, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: is a book for developement affiliate marketing Evelyn Taylor Fri, 03 Apr 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428949 thebookvoice.com 3:18:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428949]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: affiliate marketing pro Author: Evelyn Taylor Narrator: Peter Evans Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 18 minutes Release date: April 3, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: is a book for developement affiliate marketing Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428949]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: affiliate marketing pro Author: Evelyn Taylor Narrator: Peter Evans Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 18 minutes Release date: April 3, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: is a book for developement affiliate marketing https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428428 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428428]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Dealmaking: The New Strategy of Negotiauctions (Second Edition) Author: Guhan Subramanian Narrator: David H. Lawrence Xvii Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 5 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Packed with transformative insights, Dealmaking will help a new generation of business leaders get to yes.”—William Ury, coauthor of Getting to Yes Informed by meticulous research, field experience, and classroom-tested strategies, Dealmaking offers essential insights for anyone involved in buying or selling everything from cars to corporations. Leading business scholar Guhan Subramanian provides a lively tour of both negotiation and auction theory, then takes an in-depth look at his own hybrid theory, outlining three specific strategies readers can use in complex dealmaking situations. Along the way, he examines case studies as diverse as buying a house, haggling over the rights to a TV show, and participating in the auction of a multimillion-dollar company. Based on broad research and detailed case studies, Dealmaking brings together negotiation and auction strategies for the first time, providing the jargon-free, empirically sound advice professionals need to close the deal. Originally published in hardcover under the title Negotiauctions. This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF that contains charts and graphs from the book. Guhan Subramanian Tue, 04 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428428 thebookvoice.com 8:5:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428428]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Dealmaking: The New Strategy of Negotiauctions (Second Edition) Author: Guhan Subramanian Narrator: David H. Lawrence Xvii Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 5 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Packed with transformative insights, Dealmaking will help a new generation of business leaders get to yes.”—William Ury, coauthor of Getting to Yes Informed by meticulous research, field experience, and classroom-tested strategies, Dealmaking offers essential insights for anyone involved in buying or selling everything from cars to corporations. Leading business scholar Guhan Subramanian provides a lively tour of both negotiation and auction theory, then takes an in-depth look at his own hybrid theory, outlining three specific strategies readers can use in complex dealmaking situations. Along the way, he examines case studies as diverse as buying a house, haggling over the rights to a TV show, and participating in the auction of a multimillion-dollar company. Based on broad research and detailed case studies, Dealmaking brings together negotiation and auction strategies for the first time, providing the jargon-free, empirically sound advice professionals need to close the deal. Originally published in hardcover under the title Negotiauctions. This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF that contains charts and graphs from the book. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428428]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Dealmaking: The New Strategy of Negotiauctions (Second Edition) Author: Guhan Subramanian Narrator: David H. Lawrence Xvii Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 5 minutes Release date: August 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Packed with transformative insights, Dealmaking will help a new generation of business leaders get to yes.”—William Ury, coauthor of Getting to Yes Informed by meticulous research, field experience, and classroom-tested strategies, Dealmaking offers essential insights for anyone involved in buying or selling everything from cars to corporations. Leading business scholar Guhan Subramanian provides a lively tour of both negotiation and auction theory, then takes an in-depth look at his own hybrid theory, outlining three specific strategies readers can use in complex dealmaking situations. Along the way, he examines case studies as diverse as buying a house, haggling over the rights to a TV show, and participating in the auction of a multimillion-dollar company. Based on broad research and detailed case studies, Dealmaking brings together negotiation and auction strategies for the first time, providing the jargon-free, empirically sound advice professionals need to close the deal. Originally published in hardcover under the title Negotiauctions. This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF that contains charts and graphs from the book. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428379 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428379]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Divested: Inequality in the Age of Finance Author: Ken-Hou Lin, Megan Tobias Neely Narrator: Chris Sorensen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 8 minutes Release date: June 23, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Finance is an inescapable part of American life. From how one pursues an education, buys a home, runs a business, or saves for retirement, finance orders the lives of ordinary Americans. And as finance continues to expand, inequality soars. In Divested, Ken-Hou Lin and Megan Tobias Neely document how the ascendance of finance on Wall Street, Main Street, and among households is a fundamental cause of economic inequality. They argue that finance has reshaped the economy in three important ways. First, the financial sector extracts resources from the economy at large without providing commensurate economic benefits to those outside the financial services industry. Second, firms in other economic sectors have become increasingly involved in lending and speculative investing, which weakens the demand for labor and the bargaining power of workers. And third, the shift of risks and uncertainties once shouldered by unions, corporations, and governments onto families escalates the consumption of financial products, which in turns exacerbates wealth inequality. A clear, comprehensive, and convincing account of the forces driving economic inequality in America, Divested warns us that the most damaging consequence of the expanding financial system is not simply recurrent financial crises but a widening social divide between the have and have-nots. Ken-Hou Lin, Megan Tobias Neely Tue, 23 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428379 thebookvoice.com 9:8:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428379]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Divested: Inequality in the Age of Finance Author: Ken-Hou Lin, Megan Tobias Neely Narrator: Chris Sorensen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 8 minutes Release date: June 23, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Finance is an inescapable part of American life. From how one pursues an education, buys a home, runs a business, or saves for retirement, finance orders the lives of ordinary Americans. And as finance continues to expand, inequality soars. In Divested, Ken-Hou Lin and Megan Tobias Neely document how the ascendance of finance on Wall Street, Main Street, and among households is a fundamental cause of economic inequality. They argue that finance has reshaped the economy in three important ways. First, the financial sector extracts resources from the economy at large without providing commensurate economic benefits to those outside the financial services industry. Second, firms in other economic sectors have become increasingly involved in lending and speculative investing, which weakens the demand for labor and the bargaining power of workers. And third, the shift of risks and uncertainties once shouldered by unions, corporations, and governments onto families escalates the consumption of financial products, which in turns exacerbates wealth inequality. A clear, comprehensive, and convincing account of the forces driving economic inequality in America, Divested warns us that the most damaging consequence of the expanding financial system is not simply recurrent financial crises but a widening social divide between the have and have-nots. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428379]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Divested: Inequality in the Age of Finance Author: Ken-Hou Lin, Megan Tobias Neely Narrator: Chris Sorensen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 8 minutes Release date: June 23, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Finance is an inescapable part of American life. From how one pursues an education, buys a home, runs a business, or saves for retirement, finance orders the lives of ordinary Americans. And as finance continues to expand, inequality soars. In Divested, Ken-Hou Lin and Megan Tobias Neely document how the ascendance of finance on Wall Street, Main Street, and among households is a fundamental cause of economic inequality. They argue that finance has reshaped the economy in three important ways. First, the financial sector extracts resources from the economy at large without providing commensurate economic benefits to those outside the financial services industry. Second, firms in other economic sectors have become increasingly involved in lending and speculative investing, which weakens the demand for labor and the bargaining power of workers. And third, the shift of risks and uncertainties once shouldered by unions, corporations, and governments onto families escalates the consumption of financial products, which in turns exacerbates wealth inequality. A clear, comprehensive, and convincing account of the forces driving economic inequality in America, Divested warns us that the most damaging consequence of the expanding financial system is not simply recurrent financial crises but a widening social divide between the have and have-nots. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428219 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428219]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economics of Belonging: A Radical Plan to Win Back the Left Behind and Achieve Prosperity for All Author: Martin Sandbu Narrator: Stephen Perring Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 56 minutes Release date: June 16, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by Stephen Perring presents a radical new approach to economic policy that addresses the symptoms and causes of inequality in Western society today Fueled by populism and the frustrations of the disenfranchised, the past few years have witnessed the widespread rejection of the economic and political order that Western countries built up after 1945. Political debates have turned into violent clashes between those who want to 'take their country back' and those viewed as defending an elitist, broken, and unpatriotic social contract. There seems to be an increasing polarization of values. The Economics of Belonging argues that we should step back and take a fresh look at the root causes of our current challenges. In this original, engaging book, Martin Sandbu argues that economics remains at the heart of our widening inequality and it is only by focusing on the right policies that we can address it. He proposes a detailed, radical plan for creating a just economy where everyone can belong. Sandbu demonstrates that the rising numbers of the left behind are not due to globalization gone too far. Rather, technological change and flawed but avoidable domestic policies have eroded the foundations of an economy in which everyone can participate—and would have done so even with a much less globalized economy. Sandbu contends that we have to double down on economic openness while pursuing dramatic reforms involving productivity, regional development, support for small- and medium-sized businesses, and increased worker representation. He discusses how a more active macroeconomic policy, education for all, universal basic income, and better taxation of capital could work together for society's benefit. Offering real answers, not invective, for facing our most serious political issues, The Economics of Belonging shows how a better economic system can work for all. Martin Sandbu Tue, 16 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428219 thebookvoice.com 6:56:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428219]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economics of Belonging: A Radical Plan to Win Back the Left Behind and Achieve Prosperity for All Author: Martin Sandbu Narrator: Stephen Perring Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 56 minutes Release date: June 16, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by Stephen Perring presents a radical new approach to economic policy that addresses the symptoms and causes of inequality in Western society today Fueled by populism and the frustrations of the disenfranchised, the past few years have witnessed the widespread rejection of the economic and political order that Western countries built up after 1945. Political debates have turned into violent clashes between those who want to 'take their country back' and those viewed as defending an elitist, broken, and unpatriotic social contract. There seems to be an increasing polarization of values. The Economics of Belonging argues that we should step back and take a fresh look at the root causes of our current challenges. In this original, engaging book, Martin Sandbu argues that economics remains at the heart of our widening inequality and it is only by focusing on the right policies that we can address it. He proposes a detailed, radical plan for creating a just economy where everyone can belong. Sandbu demonstrates that the rising numbers of the left behind are not due to globalization gone too far. Rather, technological change and flawed but avoidable domestic policies have eroded the foundations of an economy in which everyone can participate—and would have done so even with a much less globalized economy. Sandbu contends that we have to double down on economic openness while pursuing dramatic reforms involving productivity, regional development, support for small- and medium-sized businesses, and increased worker representation. He discusses how a more active macroeconomic policy, education for all, universal basic income, and better taxation of capital could work together for society's benefit. Offering real answers, not invective, for facing our most serious political issues, The Economics of Belonging shows how a better economic system can work for all. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/428219]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economics of Belonging: A Radical Plan to Win Back the Left Behind and Achieve Prosperity for All Author: Martin Sandbu Narrator: Stephen Perring Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 56 minutes Release date: June 16, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This audiobook narrated by Stephen Perring presents a radical new approach to economic policy that addresses the symptoms and causes of inequality in Western society today Fueled by populism and the frustrations of the disenfranchised, the past few years have witnessed the widespread rejection of the economic and political order that Western countries built up after 1945. Political debates have turned into violent clashes between those who want to 'take their country back' and those viewed as defending an elitist, broken, and unpatriotic social contract. There seems to be an increasing polarization of values. The Economics of Belonging argues that we should step back and take a fresh look at the root causes of our current challenges. In this original, engaging book, Martin Sandbu argues that economics remains at the heart of our widening inequality and it is only by focusing on the right policies that we can address it. He proposes a detailed, radical plan for creating a just economy where everyone can belong. Sandbu demonstrates that the rising numbers of the left behind are not due to globalization gone too far. Rather, technological change and flawed but avoidable domestic policies have eroded the foundations of an economy in which everyone can participate—and would have done so even with a much less globalized economy. Sandbu contends that we have to double down on economic openness while pursuing dramatic reforms involving productivity, regional development, support for small- and medium-sized businesses, and increased worker representation. He discusses how a more active macroeconomic policy, education for all, universal basic income, and better taxation of capital could work together for society's benefit. Offering real answers, not invective, for facing our most serious political issues, The Economics of Belonging shows how a better economic system can work for all. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/427398 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/427398]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Evil Geniuses: The Unmaking of America: A Recent History Author: Kurt Andersen Narrator: Kurt Andersen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 24 minutes Release date: August 11, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.34 of Total 35 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER • When did America give up on fairness? The author of Fantasyland tells the epic history of how America decided that big business gets whatever it wants, only the rich get richer, and nothing should ever change—and charts a way back to the future.   “Essential, absorbing . . . a graceful, authoritative guide . . . a radicalized moderate’s moderate case for radical change.”—The New York Times Book Review During the twentieth century, America managed to make its economic and social systems both more and more fair and more and more prosperous. A huge, secure, and contented middle class emerged. All boats rose together. But then the New Deal gave way to the Raw Deal. Beginning in the early 1970s, by means of a long war conceived of and executed by a confederacy of big business CEOs, the superrich, and right-wing zealots, the rules and norms that made the American middle class possible were undermined and dismantled. The clock was turned back on a century of economic progress, making greed good, workers powerless, and the market all-powerful while weaponizing nostalgia, lifting up an oligarchy that served only its own interests, and leaving the huge majority of Americans with dwindling economic prospects and hope. Why and how did America take such a wrong turn? In this deeply researched and brilliantly woven cultural, economic, and political chronicle, Kurt Andersen offers a fresh, provocative, and eye-opening history of America’s undoing, naming names, showing receipts, and unsparingly assigning blame—to the radical right in economics and the law, the high priests of high finance, a complacent and complicit Establishment, and liberal “useful idiots,” among whom he includes himself. Only a writer with Andersen’s crackling energy, deep insight, and ability to connect disparate dots and see complex systems with clarity could make such a book both intellectually formidable and vastly entertaining. And only a writer of Andersen’s vision could reckon with our current high-stakes inflection point, and show the way out of this man-made disaster. Kurt Andersen Tue, 11 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/427398 thebookvoice.com 16:24:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/427398]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Evil Geniuses: The Unmaking of America: A Recent History Author: Kurt Andersen Narrator: Kurt Andersen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 24 minutes Release date: August 11, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.34 of Total 35 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER • When did America give up on fairness? The author of Fantasyland tells the epic history of how America decided that big business gets whatever it wants, only the rich get richer, and nothing should ever change—and charts a way back to the future.   “Essential, absorbing . . . a graceful, authoritative guide . . . a radicalized moderate’s moderate case for radical change.”—The New York Times Book Review During the twentieth century, America managed to make its economic and social systems both more and more fair and more and more prosperous. A huge, secure, and contented middle class emerged. All boats rose together. But then the New Deal gave way to the Raw Deal. Beginning in the early 1970s, by means of a long war conceived of and executed by a confederacy of big business CEOs, the superrich, and right-wing zealots, the rules and norms that made the American middle class possible were undermined and dismantled. The clock was turned back on a century of economic progress, making greed good, workers powerless, and the market all-powerful while weaponizing nostalgia, lifting up an oligarchy that served only its own interests, and leaving the huge majority of Americans with dwindling economic prospects and hope. Why and how did America take such a wrong turn? In this deeply researched and brilliantly woven cultural, economic, and political chronicle, Kurt Andersen offers a fresh, provocative, and eye-opening history of America’s undoing, naming names, showing receipts, and unsparingly assigning blame—to the radical right in economics and the law, the high priests of high finance, a complacent and complicit Establishment, and liberal “useful idiots,” among whom he includes himself. Only a writer with Andersen’s crackling energy, deep insight, and ability to connect disparate dots and see complex systems with clarity could make such a book both intellectually formidable and vastly entertaining. And only a writer of Andersen’s vision could reckon with our current high-stakes inflection point, and show the way out of this man-made disaster. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/427398]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Evil Geniuses: The Unmaking of America: A Recent History Author: Kurt Andersen Narrator: Kurt Andersen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 16 hours 24 minutes Release date: August 11, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.34 of Total 35 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER • When did America give up on fairness? The author of Fantasyland tells the epic history of how America decided that big business gets whatever it wants, only the rich get richer, and nothing should ever change—and charts a way back to the future.   “Essential, absorbing . . . a graceful, authoritative guide . . . a radicalized moderate’s moderate case for radical change.”—The New York Times Book Review During the twentieth century, America managed to make its economic and social systems both more and more fair and more and more prosperous. A huge, secure, and contented middle class emerged. All boats rose together. But then the New Deal gave way to the Raw Deal. Beginning in the early 1970s, by means of a long war conceived of and executed by a confederacy of big business CEOs, the superrich, and right-wing zealots, the rules and norms that made the American middle class possible were undermined and dismantled. The clock was turned back on a century of economic progress, making greed good, workers powerless, and the market all-powerful while weaponizing nostalgia, lifting up an oligarchy that served only its own interests, and leaving the huge majority of Americans with dwindling economic prospects and hope. Why and how did America take such a wrong turn? In this deeply researched and brilliantly woven cultural, economic, and political chronicle, Kurt Andersen offers a fresh, provocative, and eye-opening history of America’s undoing, naming names, showing receipts, and unsparingly assigning blame—to the radical right in economics and the law, the high priests of high finance, a complacent and complicit Establishment, and liberal “useful idiots,” among whom he includes himself. Only a writer with Andersen’s crackling energy, deep insight, and ability to connect disparate dots and see complex systems with clarity could make such a book both intellectually formidable and vastly entertaining. And only a writer of Andersen’s vision could reckon with our current high-stakes inflection point, and show the way out of this man-made disaster. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424918 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424918]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Making Futures: Young Entrepreneurs in a Dynamic Africa Author: Sangu Delle Narrator: Sangu Delle Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 45 minutes Release date: November 17, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Making Futures brings together 18 young entrepreneurs from 14 countries doing incredible work across the continent. Their stories are both inspirational and aspirational; providing a template for readers who might be interested in embarking on their own entrepreneurial journey, and allowing others to see the incredible energy and work that is happening across the continent. There’s the story of David Sengeh, who has worked on combatting malaria and lack of energy in Sierra Leone before turning to custom-made prosthetics, to Farida Bedwei, co-founder of the largest microfinance banking software platform in Ghana.These are entrepreneurs who are helping to reconfigure the narrative about Africa by simply making things for the masses of their population. They represent what is possible and what can be scaled up in different African contexts, despite the dysfunctionality witnessed across the continent. With such diversity of stories, readers have access to potential business ideas, while learning a little about the history of that country and what it takes to build a business in an emerging economy. These men and women have done it and are doing it!This collection equips readers with intimate knowledge about the markets and growth across the region, and how young creative entrepreneurs are identifying problems as opportunities and seeding growth in a continent that has been long overlooked, but is poised for explosive growth and opportunity, enabled by technology. Sangu Delle Tue, 17 Nov 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424918 thebookvoice.com 8:45:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424918]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Making Futures: Young Entrepreneurs in a Dynamic Africa Author: Sangu Delle Narrator: Sangu Delle Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 45 minutes Release date: November 17, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Making Futures brings together 18 young entrepreneurs from 14 countries doing incredible work across the continent. Their stories are both inspirational and aspirational; providing a template for readers who might be interested in embarking on their own entrepreneurial journey, and allowing others to see the incredible energy and work that is happening across the continent. There’s the story of David Sengeh, who has worked on combatting malaria and lack of energy in Sierra Leone before turning to custom-made prosthetics, to Farida Bedwei, co-founder of the largest microfinance banking software platform in Ghana.These are entrepreneurs who are helping to reconfigure the narrative about Africa by simply making things for the masses of their population. They represent what is possible and what can be scaled up in different African contexts, despite the dysfunctionality witnessed across the continent. With such diversity of stories, readers have access to potential business ideas, while learning a little about the history of that country and what it takes to build a business in an emerging economy. These men and women have done it and are doing it!This collection equips readers with intimate knowledge about the markets and growth across the region, and how young creative entrepreneurs are identifying problems as opportunities and seeding growth in a continent that has been long overlooked, but is poised for explosive growth and opportunity, enabled by technology. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424918]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Making Futures: Young Entrepreneurs in a Dynamic Africa Author: Sangu Delle Narrator: Sangu Delle Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 45 minutes Release date: November 17, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Making Futures brings together 18 young entrepreneurs from 14 countries doing incredible work across the continent. Their stories are both inspirational and aspirational; providing a template for readers who might be interested in embarking on their own entrepreneurial journey, and allowing others to see the incredible energy and work that is happening across the continent. There’s the story of David Sengeh, who has worked on combatting malaria and lack of energy in Sierra Leone before turning to custom-made prosthetics, to Farida Bedwei, co-founder of the largest microfinance banking software platform in Ghana.These are entrepreneurs who are helping to reconfigure the narrative about Africa by simply making things for the masses of their population. They represent what is possible and what can be scaled up in different African contexts, despite the dysfunctionality witnessed across the continent. With such diversity of stories, readers have access to potential business ideas, while learning a little about the history of that country and what it takes to build a business in an emerging economy. These men and women have done it and are doing it!This collection equips readers with intimate knowledge about the markets and growth across the region, and how young creative entrepreneurs are identifying problems as opportunities and seeding growth in a continent that has been long overlooked, but is poised for explosive growth and opportunity, enabled by technology. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424586 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424586]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Case for Climate Capitalism: Economic Solutions for a Planet in Crisis Author: Tom Rand Narrator: Jim Seybert Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 11 minutes Release date: December 17, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A warming climate and a general distrust of Wall Street has opened a new cultural divide: anti-market critics from Naomi Klein to the Pope target capitalism itself as a root cause of climate change, while neoconservatives who diminish the climate threat are in favor of market fundamentalism. Tom Rand argues that both sides in this emerging cultural war are ill-equipped to provide solutions to the climate crisis, and each is remarkably naïve in their view of capitalism. On one hand, we cannot possibly transition off fossil fuels without the financial might and entrepreneurial talent market forces alone can unlock. On the other, without radical changes to the way markets operate, capitalism will take us right off the climate cliff. Rejecting the old Left/Right ideologies, Rand develops a more pragmatic view capable of delivering practical solutions to this critical problem. A renewed capitalism harnessed to the task is the only way we might replace fossil fuels fast enough to mitigate severe climate risk. If we leave our dogma at the door, Rand argues, we might just build an economy that survives the century. Tom Rand Tue, 17 Dec 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424586 thebookvoice.com 10:11:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424586]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Case for Climate Capitalism: Economic Solutions for a Planet in Crisis Author: Tom Rand Narrator: Jim Seybert Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 11 minutes Release date: December 17, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A warming climate and a general distrust of Wall Street has opened a new cultural divide: anti-market critics from Naomi Klein to the Pope target capitalism itself as a root cause of climate change, while neoconservatives who diminish the climate threat are in favor of market fundamentalism. Tom Rand argues that both sides in this emerging cultural war are ill-equipped to provide solutions to the climate crisis, and each is remarkably naïve in their view of capitalism. On one hand, we cannot possibly transition off fossil fuels without the financial might and entrepreneurial talent market forces alone can unlock. On the other, without radical changes to the way markets operate, capitalism will take us right off the climate cliff. Rejecting the old Left/Right ideologies, Rand develops a more pragmatic view capable of delivering practical solutions to this critical problem. A renewed capitalism harnessed to the task is the only way we might replace fossil fuels fast enough to mitigate severe climate risk. If we leave our dogma at the door, Rand argues, we might just build an economy that survives the century. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424586]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Case for Climate Capitalism: Economic Solutions for a Planet in Crisis Author: Tom Rand Narrator: Jim Seybert Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 11 minutes Release date: December 17, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A warming climate and a general distrust of Wall Street has opened a new cultural divide: anti-market critics from Naomi Klein to the Pope target capitalism itself as a root cause of climate change, while neoconservatives who diminish the climate threat are in favor of market fundamentalism. Tom Rand argues that both sides in this emerging cultural war are ill-equipped to provide solutions to the climate crisis, and each is remarkably naïve in their view of capitalism. On one hand, we cannot possibly transition off fossil fuels without the financial might and entrepreneurial talent market forces alone can unlock. On the other, without radical changes to the way markets operate, capitalism will take us right off the climate cliff. Rejecting the old Left/Right ideologies, Rand develops a more pragmatic view capable of delivering practical solutions to this critical problem. A renewed capitalism harnessed to the task is the only way we might replace fossil fuels fast enough to mitigate severe climate risk. If we leave our dogma at the door, Rand argues, we might just build an economy that survives the century. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424313 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424313]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Secrets Of Successful Entrepreneurship: Start a Business, Grow a Business, Sell a Business Author: Stephen Hawley Martin Narrator: Ben Mclean Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 15 minutes Release date: February 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Would you like to become rich? Stephen Hawley Martin, an entrepreneur who founded and sold two businesses, explains in this book how anyone capable of getting and holding a job can become incredibly wealthy by following one of several paths he sets out. One path is to start a business, grow a business, and sell a business. Alternatives to that direction include keeping a day job and building a fortune by starting and running a business on the side, or by investing in real estate or other passive income generators. Targeted for those under the age of 40 who possess an entrepreneurial spirit, anyone seeking financial independence who reads this book will gain valuable insights about growing his or her net worth to a point the individual will be able to spend each day in his or her own way. Martin asks, "Why complain about the richest one percent? Why not become one of them, instead?" He writes that anyone living in America today can become comfortably well off-even very, very rich-by following certain steps, provided the individual does not wait too long in life to begin. This is true whether a person starts out with a mindset of scarcity or with one of abundance. The right mindset-a winner's attitude-is, however, vitally important, which is why he devotes an entire chapter to personal transformation and self-improvement techniques anyone can use to create the mindset needed to attract riches. He argues that if you think of yourself as rich-that you deserve to be rich because it is your birthright-with a sufficient amount of effort, you will become rich. That, he writes, is the basic message of two of the most popular self-help, get-rich books of all time: "Think, and Grow Rich" by Napoleon Hill [1883-1970] and "The Science of Getting Rich" by Wallace D. Wattles [1860-1911]. In summary, Martin shares valuable, hard-earned knowledge acquired over a period of forty years. For six of those years right after college, he worked in an advertising agency, learning that business and industry. He then joined is brother as partner and a principal of The Martin Agency, the ad firm that created the GEICO Gecko and "Virginia is for Lovers." He helped grow that business to the point that it was one of the nation's top ad agencies when the Ogilvy Group purchased it for an unheard of ten-times earnings. He then founded an ad agency called Hawley Martin Partners that was acquired by a New York Stock Exchange company, the Interpublic Group, following five years of rapid growth. For a while after that he was self-employed, freelancing for a number of years before founding The Oaklea Press Inc., a book-publishing firm he continues to operate today. Martin has ghostwritten a number of books, and he has authored 18 more under his own name. Many of his titles have reached bestseller status in their categories on Amazon. He is the only three-time winner of the Writer's Digest Book Award, having won first prize twice for fiction and once for nonfiction. He also has won a first prize for visionary fiction from Independent Publisher and a first prize for nonfiction from USA Book News. Stephen Hawley Martin Sat, 22 Feb 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424313 thebookvoice.com 3:15:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424313]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Secrets Of Successful Entrepreneurship: Start a Business, Grow a Business, Sell a Business Author: Stephen Hawley Martin Narrator: Ben Mclean Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 15 minutes Release date: February 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Would you like to become rich? Stephen Hawley Martin, an entrepreneur who founded and sold two businesses, explains in this book how anyone capable of getting and holding a job can become incredibly wealthy by following one of several paths he sets out. One path is to start a business, grow a business, and sell a business. Alternatives to that direction include keeping a day job and building a fortune by starting and running a business on the side, or by investing in real estate or other passive income generators. Targeted for those under the age of 40 who possess an entrepreneurial spirit, anyone seeking financial independence who reads this book will gain valuable insights about growing his or her net worth to a point the individual will be able to spend each day in his or her own way. Martin asks, "Why complain about the richest one percent? Why not become one of them, instead?" He writes that anyone living in America today can become comfortably well off-even very, very rich-by following certain steps, provided the individual does not wait too long in life to begin. This is true whether a person starts out with a mindset of scarcity or with one of abundance. The right mindset-a winner's attitude-is, however, vitally important, which is why he devotes an entire chapter to personal transformation and self-improvement techniques anyone can use to create the mindset needed to attract riches. He argues that if you think of yourself as rich-that you deserve to be rich because it is your birthright-with a sufficient amount of effort, you will become rich. That, he writes, is the basic message of two of the most popular self-help, get-rich books of all time: "Think, and Grow Rich" by Napoleon Hill [1883-1970] and "The Science of Getting Rich" by Wallace D. Wattles [1860-1911]. In summary, Martin shares valuable, hard-earned knowledge acquired over a period of forty years. For six of those years right after college, he worked in an advertising agency, learning that business and industry. He then joined is brother as partner and a principal of The Martin Agency, the ad firm that created the GEICO Gecko and "Virginia is for Lovers." He helped grow that business to the point that it was one of the nation's top ad agencies when the Ogilvy Group purchased it for an unheard of ten-times earnings. He then founded an ad agency called Hawley Martin Partners that was acquired by a New York Stock Exchange company, the Interpublic Group, following five years of rapid growth. For a while after that he was self-employed, freelancing for a number of years before founding The Oaklea Press Inc., a book-publishing firm he continues to operate today. Martin has ghostwritten a number of books, and he has authored 18 more under his own name. Many of his titles have reached bestseller status in their categories on Amazon. He is the only three-time winner of the Writer's Digest Book Award, having won first prize twice for fiction and once for nonfiction. He also has won a first prize for visionary fiction from Independent Publisher and a first prize for nonfiction from USA Book News. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/424313]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Secrets Of Successful Entrepreneurship: Start a Business, Grow a Business, Sell a Business Author: Stephen Hawley Martin Narrator: Ben Mclean Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 15 minutes Release date: February 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Would you like to become rich? Stephen Hawley Martin, an entrepreneur who founded and sold two businesses, explains in this book how anyone capable of getting and holding a job can become incredibly wealthy by following one of several paths he sets out. One path is to start a business, grow a business, and sell a business. Alternatives to that direction include keeping a day job and building a fortune by starting and running a business on the side, or by investing in real estate or other passive income generators. Targeted for those under the age of 40 who possess an entrepreneurial spirit, anyone seeking financial independence who reads this book will gain valuable insights about growing his or her net worth to a point the individual will be able to spend each day in his or her own way. Martin asks, "Why complain about the richest one percent? Why not become one of them, instead?" He writes that anyone living in America today can become comfortably well off-even very, very rich-by following certain steps, provided the individual does not wait too long in life to begin. This is true whether a person starts out with a mindset of scarcity or with one of abundance. The right mindset-a winner's attitude-is, however, vitally important, which is why he devotes an entire chapter to personal transformation and self-improvement techniques anyone can use to create the mindset needed to attract riches. He argues that if you think of yourself as rich-that you deserve to be rich because it is your birthright-with a sufficient amount of effort, you will become rich. That, he writes, is the basic message of two of the most popular self-help, get-rich books of all time: "Think, and Grow Rich" by Napoleon Hill [1883-1970] and "The Science of Getting Rich" by Wallace D. Wattles [1860-1911]. In summary, Martin shares valuable, hard-earned knowledge acquired over a period of forty years. For six of those years right after college, he worked in an advertising agency, learning that business and industry. He then joined is brother as partner and a principal of The Martin Agency, the ad firm that created the GEICO Gecko and "Virginia is for Lovers." He helped grow that business to the point that it was one of the nation's top ad agencies when the Ogilvy Group purchased it for an unheard of ten-times earnings. He then founded an ad agency called Hawley Martin Partners that was acquired by a New York Stock Exchange company, the Interpublic Group, following five years of rapid growth. For a while after that he was self-employed, freelancing for a number of years before founding The Oaklea Press Inc., a book-publishing firm he continues to operate today. Martin has ghostwritten a number of books, and he has authored 18 more under his own name. Many of his titles have reached bestseller status in their categories on Amazon. He is the only three-time winner of the Writer's Digest Book Award, having won first prize twice for fiction and once for nonfiction. He also has won a first prize for visionary fiction from Independent Publisher and a first prize for nonfiction from USA Book News. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423909 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423909]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Kapitalfehler - Wie unser Wohlstand vernichtet wird und warum wir ein neues Wirtschaftsdenken brauchen Author: Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Narrator: Robert Frank Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 15 minutes Release date: May 13, 2016 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Kriminelle Spekulanten und ahnungslose Politiker haben ein nachhaltiges Wirtschaften verdrängt. Der Mensch ist in den Hintergrund geraten und wir mussten erkennen: Finanzkapitalismus ist schlicht und einfach schlechter Kapitalismus. In Kapitalfehler erklärt das Bestsellerduo Weick/Friedrich allgemein verständlich, wie ein vernünftiger Kapitalismus wirklich funktionieren kann, und es scheut sich nicht, Fehlentwicklungen, die verbrecherischen Banken sowie die wahren Abzocker klar zu benennen. Denn nur wenn sich jetzt etwas ändert, können wir unser Geld retten. Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Fri, 13 May 2016 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423909 thebookvoice.com 7:15:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423909]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Kapitalfehler - Wie unser Wohlstand vernichtet wird und warum wir ein neues Wirtschaftsdenken brauchen Author: Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Narrator: Robert Frank Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 15 minutes Release date: May 13, 2016 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Kriminelle Spekulanten und ahnungslose Politiker haben ein nachhaltiges Wirtschaften verdrängt. Der Mensch ist in den Hintergrund geraten und wir mussten erkennen: Finanzkapitalismus ist schlicht und einfach schlechter Kapitalismus. In Kapitalfehler erklärt das Bestsellerduo Weick/Friedrich allgemein verständlich, wie ein vernünftiger Kapitalismus wirklich funktionieren kann, und es scheut sich nicht, Fehlentwicklungen, die verbrecherischen Banken sowie die wahren Abzocker klar zu benennen. Denn nur wenn sich jetzt etwas ändert, können wir unser Geld retten. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423909]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [German] - Kapitalfehler - Wie unser Wohlstand vernichtet wird und warum wir ein neues Wirtschaftsdenken brauchen Author: Matthias Weik, Marc Friedrich Narrator: Robert Frank Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 15 minutes Release date: May 13, 2016 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Kriminelle Spekulanten und ahnungslose Politiker haben ein nachhaltiges Wirtschaften verdrängt. Der Mensch ist in den Hintergrund geraten und wir mussten erkennen: Finanzkapitalismus ist schlicht und einfach schlechter Kapitalismus. In Kapitalfehler erklärt das Bestsellerduo Weick/Friedrich allgemein verständlich, wie ein vernünftiger Kapitalismus wirklich funktionieren kann, und es scheut sich nicht, Fehlentwicklungen, die verbrecherischen Banken sowie die wahren Abzocker klar zu benennen. Denn nur wenn sich jetzt etwas ändert, können wir unser Geld retten. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423304 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423304]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Dark Towers: Deutsche Bank, Donald Trump, and an Epic Trail of Destruction Author: David Enrich Narrator: Bj Harrison Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 2 minutes Release date: April 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 4.67 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “In Dark Towers, David Enrich tells the story of how one of the world’s mightiest banks careened off the rails, threatening everything from our financial system to our democracy through its reckless entanglement with Donald Trump. Darkly fascinating and yet all too real, it’s a tale that will keep you up at night.”    — John Carreyrou, Pulitzer Prize winner and New York Times bestselling author of Bad Blood A searing exposé of the most scandalous bank in the world, including its shadowy ties to Donald Trump’s business empire On a rainy Sunday in 2014, a senior executive at Deutsche Bank was found hanging in his London apartment. Bill Broeksmit had helped build the 150-year-old financial institution into a global colossus, and his sudden death was a mystery, made more so by the bank’s efforts to deter investigation. Broeksmit, it turned out, was a man who knew too much. In Dark Towers, award-winning journalist David Enrich reveals the truth about Deutsche Bank and its epic path of devastation. Tracing the bank’s history back to its propping up of a default-prone American developer in the 1880s, helping the Nazis build Auschwitz, and wooing Eastern Bloc authoritarians, he shows how in the 1990s, via a succession of hard-charging executives, Deutsche made a fateful decision to pursue Wall Street riches, often at the expense of ethics and the law. Soon, the bank was manipulating markets, violating international sanctions to aid terrorist regimes, scamming investors, defrauding regulators, and laundering money for Russian oligarchs. Ever desperate for an American foothold, Deutsche also started doing business with a self-promoting real estate magnate nearly every other bank in the world deemed too dangerous to touch: Donald Trump. Over the next twenty years, Deutsche executives loaned billions to Trump, the Kushner family, and an array of scandal-tarred clients, including convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein. Dark Towers is the never-before-told saga of how Deutsche Bank became the global face of financial recklessness and criminality—the corporate equivalent of a weapon of mass destruction. It is also the story of a man who was consumed by fear of what he’d seen at the bank—and his son’s obsessive search for the secrets he kept. David Enrich Tue, 21 Apr 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423304 thebookvoice.com 13:2:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423304]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Dark Towers: Deutsche Bank, Donald Trump, and an Epic Trail of Destruction Author: David Enrich Narrator: Bj Harrison Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 2 minutes Release date: April 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 4.67 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “In Dark Towers, David Enrich tells the story of how one of the world’s mightiest banks careened off the rails, threatening everything from our financial system to our democracy through its reckless entanglement with Donald Trump. Darkly fascinating and yet all too real, it’s a tale that will keep you up at night.”    — John Carreyrou, Pulitzer Prize winner and New York Times bestselling author of Bad Blood A searing exposé of the most scandalous bank in the world, including its shadowy ties to Donald Trump’s business empire On a rainy Sunday in 2014, a senior executive at Deutsche Bank was found hanging in his London apartment. Bill Broeksmit had helped build the 150-year-old financial institution into a global colossus, and his sudden death was a mystery, made more so by the bank’s efforts to deter investigation. Broeksmit, it turned out, was a man who knew too much. In Dark Towers, award-winning journalist David Enrich reveals the truth about Deutsche Bank and its epic path of devastation. Tracing the bank’s history back to its propping up of a default-prone American developer in the 1880s, helping the Nazis build Auschwitz, and wooing Eastern Bloc authoritarians, he shows how in the 1990s, via a succession of hard-charging executives, Deutsche made a fateful decision to pursue Wall Street riches, often at the expense of ethics and the law. Soon, the bank was manipulating markets, violating international sanctions to aid terrorist regimes, scamming investors, defrauding regulators, and laundering money for Russian oligarchs. Ever desperate for an American foothold, Deutsche also started doing business with a self-promoting real estate magnate nearly every other bank in the world deemed too dangerous to touch: Donald Trump. Over the next twenty years, Deutsche executives loaned billions to Trump, the Kushner family, and an array of scandal-tarred clients, including convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein. Dark Towers is the never-before-told saga of how Deutsche Bank became the global face of financial recklessness and criminality—the corporate equivalent of a weapon of mass destruction. It is also the story of a man who was consumed by fear of what he’d seen at the bank—and his son’s obsessive search for the secrets he kept. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423304]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Dark Towers: Deutsche Bank, Donald Trump, and an Epic Trail of Destruction Author: David Enrich Narrator: Bj Harrison Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 2 minutes Release date: April 21, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 4.67 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “In Dark Towers, David Enrich tells the story of how one of the world’s mightiest banks careened off the rails, threatening everything from our financial system to our democracy through its reckless entanglement with Donald Trump. Darkly fascinating and yet all too real, it’s a tale that will keep you up at night.”    — John Carreyrou, Pulitzer Prize winner and New York Times bestselling author of Bad Blood A searing exposé of the most scandalous bank in the world, including its shadowy ties to Donald Trump’s business empire On a rainy Sunday in 2014, a senior executive at Deutsche Bank was found hanging in his London apartment. Bill Broeksmit had helped build the 150-year-old financial institution into a global colossus, and his sudden death was a mystery, made more so by the bank’s efforts to deter investigation. Broeksmit, it turned out, was a man who knew too much. In Dark Towers, award-winning journalist David Enrich reveals the truth about Deutsche Bank and its epic path of devastation. Tracing the bank’s history back to its propping up of a default-prone American developer in the 1880s, helping the Nazis build Auschwitz, and wooing Eastern Bloc authoritarians, he shows how in the 1990s, via a succession of hard-charging executives, Deutsche made a fateful decision to pursue Wall Street riches, often at the expense of ethics and the law. Soon, the bank was manipulating markets, violating international sanctions to aid terrorist regimes, scamming investors, defrauding regulators, and laundering money for Russian oligarchs. Ever desperate for an American foothold, Deutsche also started doing business with a self-promoting real estate magnate nearly every other bank in the world deemed too dangerous to touch: Donald Trump. Over the next twenty years, Deutsche executives loaned billions to Trump, the Kushner family, and an array of scandal-tarred clients, including convicted sex offender Jeffrey Epstein. Dark Towers is the never-before-told saga of how Deutsche Bank became the global face of financial recklessness and criminality—the corporate equivalent of a weapon of mass destruction. It is also the story of a man who was consumed by fear of what he’d seen at the bank—and his son’s obsessive search for the secrets he kept. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423293 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423293]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: GO BIG: How To Fix Our World Author: Ed Miliband Narrator: Ed Miliband Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 58 minutes Release date: June 3, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. ** INCLUDES BONUS CHAPTER: IN CONVERSATION WITH GEOFF LLOYD ** *A Guardian, Evening Standard and New Statesman Book to Look Out for in 2021* 'GO BIG should be the rallying cry of progressives around the world' Rutger Bregman, author of Humankind Good news: the solutions to our problems already exist. Great news: a once-in-a-generation appetite for change means we can make them happen. - How do we provide enough affordable housing for everyone? - How do we rein in the power of Big Tech? - How can we rebuild our broken politics? How do we tackle the climate crisis? - How do we really give people back control? For the past four years, Ed Miliband has been discovering and interviewing brilliant people all around the world who are successfully tackling these problems, transforming communities and pioneering global movements. From a citizens' assembly in Mongolia to the UK's largest walking and cycling network in Greater Manchester, from flexible working in Finland to the campaign for the first halal Nando's in Cardiff, Go Big draws on the most imaginative and ambitious of these ideas to provide a vision for how to remake society. The challenges we face are daunting, but in Go Big he shows that the scale of what is possible is far greater. We are at a rare moment in history when people everywhere see the need for big change. The future is not yet written. It's our job to write it. Go Big shows us how. 'Enthralling. I was left with such an unusual feeling that I didn't at first realise what it was, and then I remembered: optimism' PHILIP PULLMAN 'Inspired and inspiring, Miliband calls upon us to rise to our challenges with courageous boldness' CHRISTIANA FIGUERES, Lead Negotiator of the UN Paris Climate Agreement © Ed Miliband 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Ed Miliband Thu, 03 Jun 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423293 thebookvoice.com 9:58:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423293]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: GO BIG: How To Fix Our World Author: Ed Miliband Narrator: Ed Miliband Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 58 minutes Release date: June 3, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. ** INCLUDES BONUS CHAPTER: IN CONVERSATION WITH GEOFF LLOYD ** *A Guardian, Evening Standard and New Statesman Book to Look Out for in 2021* 'GO BIG should be the rallying cry of progressives around the world' Rutger Bregman, author of Humankind Good news: the solutions to our problems already exist. Great news: a once-in-a-generation appetite for change means we can make them happen. - How do we provide enough affordable housing for everyone? - How do we rein in the power of Big Tech? - How can we rebuild our broken politics? How do we tackle the climate crisis? - How do we really give people back control? For the past four years, Ed Miliband has been discovering and interviewing brilliant people all around the world who are successfully tackling these problems, transforming communities and pioneering global movements. From a citizens' assembly in Mongolia to the UK's largest walking and cycling network in Greater Manchester, from flexible working in Finland to the campaign for the first halal Nando's in Cardiff, Go Big draws on the most imaginative and ambitious of these ideas to provide a vision for how to remake society. The challenges we face are daunting, but in Go Big he shows that the scale of what is possible is far greater. We are at a rare moment in history when people everywhere see the need for big change. The future is not yet written. It's our job to write it. Go Big shows us how. 'Enthralling. I was left with such an unusual feeling that I didn't at first realise what it was, and then I remembered: optimism' PHILIP PULLMAN 'Inspired and inspiring, Miliband calls upon us to rise to our challenges with courageous boldness' CHRISTIANA FIGUERES, Lead Negotiator of the UN Paris Climate Agreement © Ed Miliband 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/423293]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: GO BIG: How To Fix Our World Author: Ed Miliband Narrator: Ed Miliband Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 58 minutes Release date: June 3, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. ** INCLUDES BONUS CHAPTER: IN CONVERSATION WITH GEOFF LLOYD ** *A Guardian, Evening Standard and New Statesman Book to Look Out for in 2021* 'GO BIG should be the rallying cry of progressives around the world' Rutger Bregman, author of Humankind Good news: the solutions to our problems already exist. Great news: a once-in-a-generation appetite for change means we can make them happen. - How do we provide enough affordable housing for everyone? - How do we rein in the power of Big Tech? - How can we rebuild our broken politics? How do we tackle the climate crisis? - How do we really give people back control? For the past four years, Ed Miliband has been discovering and interviewing brilliant people all around the world who are successfully tackling these problems, transforming communities and pioneering global movements. From a citizens' assembly in Mongolia to the UK's largest walking and cycling network in Greater Manchester, from flexible working in Finland to the campaign for the first halal Nando's in Cardiff, Go Big draws on the most imaginative and ambitious of these ideas to provide a vision for how to remake society. The challenges we face are daunting, but in Go Big he shows that the scale of what is possible is far greater. We are at a rare moment in history when people everywhere see the need for big change. The future is not yet written. It's our job to write it. Go Big shows us how. 'Enthralling. I was left with such an unusual feeling that I didn't at first realise what it was, and then I remembered: optimism' PHILIP PULLMAN 'Inspired and inspiring, Miliband calls upon us to rise to our challenges with courageous boldness' CHRISTIANA FIGUERES, Lead Negotiator of the UN Paris Climate Agreement © Ed Miliband 2021 (P) Penguin Audio 2021 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/422629 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/422629]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: FIND NEW CLIENTS Strategies to reach customers Author: Tony White Narrator: Marcus Jonson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book will teach you new techniques and strategies in the world of betting… Since clients are the soul of any kind of business. Without the clients, there is no way you can keep the lights on. In the most recent decades, governments have concentrated their endeavors towards advancing the financial development from inside, empowering the beginning of new enterprises and helping the little and medium-sized enterprises to develop. Tony White Wed, 19 Feb 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/422629 thebookvoice.com 4:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/422629]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: FIND NEW CLIENTS Strategies to reach customers Author: Tony White Narrator: Marcus Jonson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book will teach you new techniques and strategies in the world of betting… Since clients are the soul of any kind of business. Without the clients, there is no way you can keep the lights on. In the most recent decades, governments have concentrated their endeavors towards advancing the financial development from inside, empowering the beginning of new enterprises and helping the little and medium-sized enterprises to develop. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/422629]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: FIND NEW CLIENTS Strategies to reach customers Author: Tony White Narrator: Marcus Jonson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This book will teach you new techniques and strategies in the world of betting… Since clients are the soul of any kind of business. Without the clients, there is no way you can keep the lights on. In the most recent decades, governments have concentrated their endeavors towards advancing the financial development from inside, empowering the beginning of new enterprises and helping the little and medium-sized enterprises to develop. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421960 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421960]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: FIND MORE CLIENTS Techniques To Get Clients With Internet, Social Media and Phone Call Author: Tony White Narrator: Marcus Jonson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 14 minutes Release date: February 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Depending on also a couple of clients can leave you susceptible - shedding just one can suggest a cash flow situation. By regularly making an initiative to generate a brand-new organization, you'll minimize your risk of failure and expand your company in a lasting method. Something I've noticed recently is that everyone is speaking about making a company and its marketing 'customer-centered.' When you get right down to it, not all that lots of brands are actually doing it. It's a great chance for a brand to outshine the competitors as well as achieve ever-higher degrees of success. 81% of businesses that supply wonderful client experiences and also client fulfillment do a lot better than their rivals, according to the 2009 'Customer Experience Maturity Monitor' report from the Peppers & Rogers Group. Smart local business owner understands that every consumer connection shed, either to a competitor or otherwise, costs them an average of $289 yearly. As well as if you're believing you can simply make up for that cost with brand-new customers, think again. Ends up, it costs six to seven times even more to obtain a brand-new client than it does to preserve an existing one. A company can never ever put too much focus on its customers. The customer is the structure of any company's success. One of the main objectives of any advertising and marketing technique should be to recognize as well as fulfill the demands of the customer. Thinking about consumer importance in all phases of the advertising process helps your business to make certain better consumer contentment and also increase its long-term goal of repeat business. Firms want to remain innovative and also appropriate and frequently consider various other successful companies, warm sector fads or brand-new shiny items for motivation. Tony White Wed, 19 Feb 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421960 thebookvoice.com 6:14:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421960]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: FIND MORE CLIENTS Techniques To Get Clients With Internet, Social Media and Phone Call Author: Tony White Narrator: Marcus Jonson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 14 minutes Release date: February 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Depending on also a couple of clients can leave you susceptible - shedding just one can suggest a cash flow situation. By regularly making an initiative to generate a brand-new organization, you'll minimize your risk of failure and expand your company in a lasting method. Something I've noticed recently is that everyone is speaking about making a company and its marketing 'customer-centered.' When you get right down to it, not all that lots of brands are actually doing it. It's a great chance for a brand to outshine the competitors as well as achieve ever-higher degrees of success. 81% of businesses that supply wonderful client experiences and also client fulfillment do a lot better than their rivals, according to the 2009 'Customer Experience Maturity Monitor' report from the Peppers & Rogers Group. Smart local business owner understands that every consumer connection shed, either to a competitor or otherwise, costs them an average of $289 yearly. As well as if you're believing you can simply make up for that cost with brand-new customers, think again. Ends up, it costs six to seven times even more to obtain a brand-new client than it does to preserve an existing one. A company can never ever put too much focus on its customers. The customer is the structure of any company's success. One of the main objectives of any advertising and marketing technique should be to recognize as well as fulfill the demands of the customer. Thinking about consumer importance in all phases of the advertising process helps your business to make certain better consumer contentment and also increase its long-term goal of repeat business. Firms want to remain innovative and also appropriate and frequently consider various other successful companies, warm sector fads or brand-new shiny items for motivation. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421960]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: FIND MORE CLIENTS Techniques To Get Clients With Internet, Social Media and Phone Call Author: Tony White Narrator: Marcus Jonson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 14 minutes Release date: February 19, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Depending on also a couple of clients can leave you susceptible - shedding just one can suggest a cash flow situation. By regularly making an initiative to generate a brand-new organization, you'll minimize your risk of failure and expand your company in a lasting method. Something I've noticed recently is that everyone is speaking about making a company and its marketing 'customer-centered.' When you get right down to it, not all that lots of brands are actually doing it. It's a great chance for a brand to outshine the competitors as well as achieve ever-higher degrees of success. 81% of businesses that supply wonderful client experiences and also client fulfillment do a lot better than their rivals, according to the 2009 'Customer Experience Maturity Monitor' report from the Peppers & Rogers Group. Smart local business owner understands that every consumer connection shed, either to a competitor or otherwise, costs them an average of $289 yearly. As well as if you're believing you can simply make up for that cost with brand-new customers, think again. Ends up, it costs six to seven times even more to obtain a brand-new client than it does to preserve an existing one. A company can never ever put too much focus on its customers. The customer is the structure of any company's success. One of the main objectives of any advertising and marketing technique should be to recognize as well as fulfill the demands of the customer. Thinking about consumer importance in all phases of the advertising process helps your business to make certain better consumer contentment and also increase its long-term goal of repeat business. Firms want to remain innovative and also appropriate and frequently consider various other successful companies, warm sector fads or brand-new shiny items for motivation. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421278 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421278]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Other Peoples' Money and How The Bankers Use It Author: Louis D. Brandeis Narrator: D S Harvey Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 13 minutes Release date: February 10, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Other People's Money and How the Bankers Use It is a collection of essays by Louis D. Brandeis that first appeared in Harper's Weekly between November 22, 1913 and January 17, 1914 and published in book form in 1914. Other People's Money takes to task the small cadre of investment bankers led by J.P. Morgan & Co. and known as the "Money Trust", who would treat an ordinary person's money on deposit as their own to use to control the banks, trusts, life insurance companies, and public service and industrial corporations that dominated American business. Brandeis marshaled an exhaustive amount of detailed research to describe the exact extent of the holdings, the interlocking directorships, the interdependence and the resulting degree of control. In doing so he exposes the principles and practices that stifle competition and lead to self-dealing and excessive enrichment. He explains clearly how they inhibit creativity and progress, foster inefficiency, and go against the grain of fundamental ideas of liberty crucial to America's identity. His book is a warning and an analysis of the dangers to society when a small percentage of people control the yeoman's portion of the wealth. The consolidation of production and distribution in too few hands is a recipe for oligarchy, and no republic or democracy can thrive when it allows for such an entitled, favored, exempt and all but immune aristocracy whose bloodlines are bank accounts and whose manners are defined solely by what the markets allow. His warnings reverberate eerily today in light of the practices that so damaged the American economy in 2008. At times one feels that nothing much has changed except the decimal points in the numbers. Viewed in this light, Brandeis' writing has never been more relevant, more prophetic, or more on-point. Louis D. Brandeis Mon, 10 Feb 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421278 thebookvoice.com 5:13:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421278]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Other Peoples' Money and How The Bankers Use It Author: Louis D. Brandeis Narrator: D S Harvey Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 13 minutes Release date: February 10, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Other People's Money and How the Bankers Use It is a collection of essays by Louis D. Brandeis that first appeared in Harper's Weekly between November 22, 1913 and January 17, 1914 and published in book form in 1914. Other People's Money takes to task the small cadre of investment bankers led by J.P. Morgan & Co. and known as the "Money Trust", who would treat an ordinary person's money on deposit as their own to use to control the banks, trusts, life insurance companies, and public service and industrial corporations that dominated American business. Brandeis marshaled an exhaustive amount of detailed research to describe the exact extent of the holdings, the interlocking directorships, the interdependence and the resulting degree of control. In doing so he exposes the principles and practices that stifle competition and lead to self-dealing and excessive enrichment. He explains clearly how they inhibit creativity and progress, foster inefficiency, and go against the grain of fundamental ideas of liberty crucial to America's identity. His book is a warning and an analysis of the dangers to society when a small percentage of people control the yeoman's portion of the wealth. The consolidation of production and distribution in too few hands is a recipe for oligarchy, and no republic or democracy can thrive when it allows for such an entitled, favored, exempt and all but immune aristocracy whose bloodlines are bank accounts and whose manners are defined solely by what the markets allow. His warnings reverberate eerily today in light of the practices that so damaged the American economy in 2008. At times one feels that nothing much has changed except the decimal points in the numbers. Viewed in this light, Brandeis' writing has never been more relevant, more prophetic, or more on-point. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/421278]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Other Peoples' Money and How The Bankers Use It Author: Louis D. Brandeis Narrator: D S Harvey Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 13 minutes Release date: February 10, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Other People's Money and How the Bankers Use It is a collection of essays by Louis D. Brandeis that first appeared in Harper's Weekly between November 22, 1913 and January 17, 1914 and published in book form in 1914. Other People's Money takes to task the small cadre of investment bankers led by J.P. Morgan & Co. and known as the "Money Trust", who would treat an ordinary person's money on deposit as their own to use to control the banks, trusts, life insurance companies, and public service and industrial corporations that dominated American business. Brandeis marshaled an exhaustive amount of detailed research to describe the exact extent of the holdings, the interlocking directorships, the interdependence and the resulting degree of control. In doing so he exposes the principles and practices that stifle competition and lead to self-dealing and excessive enrichment. He explains clearly how they inhibit creativity and progress, foster inefficiency, and go against the grain of fundamental ideas of liberty crucial to America's identity. His book is a warning and an analysis of the dangers to society when a small percentage of people control the yeoman's portion of the wealth. The consolidation of production and distribution in too few hands is a recipe for oligarchy, and no republic or democracy can thrive when it allows for such an entitled, favored, exempt and all but immune aristocracy whose bloodlines are bank accounts and whose manners are defined solely by what the markets allow. His warnings reverberate eerily today in light of the practices that so damaged the American economy in 2008. At times one feels that nothing much has changed except the decimal points in the numbers. Viewed in this light, Brandeis' writing has never been more relevant, more prophetic, or more on-point. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419613 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419613]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The 100% Solution: A Plan for Solving Climate Change Author: Solomon Goldstein-Rose Narrator: Adam Lofbomm Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 37 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The world must reach negative greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 to avoid the most catastrophic effects of climate change. Yet no single plan has addressed the full scope of the problem—until now. In The 100% Solution, Solomon Goldstein-Rose—a leading millennial climate activist and a former Massachusetts state representative—makes clear what needs to happen to hit the 2050 target: the manufacturing booms we must spur, the moonshot projects we must fund, the amount of CO2 we'll have to sequester from the atmosphere, and much more. Most importantly, he shows us the more prosperous and equitable world we can build by uniting the efforts of activists, industries, governments, scientists, and voters to get the job done. This is the guide we've been waiting for. As calls for a World War II–scale mobilization intensify—especially among youth activists—this action-oriented book arms us with specific demands, sets the stakes for what our leaders must achieve, and proves that with this level of comprehensive thinking we can still take back our future. Solomon Goldstein-Rose Tue, 31 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419613 thebookvoice.com 4:37:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419613]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The 100% Solution: A Plan for Solving Climate Change Author: Solomon Goldstein-Rose Narrator: Adam Lofbomm Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 37 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The world must reach negative greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 to avoid the most catastrophic effects of climate change. Yet no single plan has addressed the full scope of the problem—until now. In The 100% Solution, Solomon Goldstein-Rose—a leading millennial climate activist and a former Massachusetts state representative—makes clear what needs to happen to hit the 2050 target: the manufacturing booms we must spur, the moonshot projects we must fund, the amount of CO2 we'll have to sequester from the atmosphere, and much more. Most importantly, he shows us the more prosperous and equitable world we can build by uniting the efforts of activists, industries, governments, scientists, and voters to get the job done. This is the guide we've been waiting for. As calls for a World War II–scale mobilization intensify—especially among youth activists—this action-oriented book arms us with specific demands, sets the stakes for what our leaders must achieve, and proves that with this level of comprehensive thinking we can still take back our future. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419613]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The 100% Solution: A Plan for Solving Climate Change Author: Solomon Goldstein-Rose Narrator: Adam Lofbomm Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 37 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The world must reach negative greenhouse gas emissions by 2050 to avoid the most catastrophic effects of climate change. Yet no single plan has addressed the full scope of the problem—until now. In The 100% Solution, Solomon Goldstein-Rose—a leading millennial climate activist and a former Massachusetts state representative—makes clear what needs to happen to hit the 2050 target: the manufacturing booms we must spur, the moonshot projects we must fund, the amount of CO2 we'll have to sequester from the atmosphere, and much more. Most importantly, he shows us the more prosperous and equitable world we can build by uniting the efforts of activists, industries, governments, scientists, and voters to get the job done. This is the guide we've been waiting for. As calls for a World War II–scale mobilization intensify—especially among youth activists—this action-oriented book arms us with specific demands, sets the stakes for what our leaders must achieve, and proves that with this level of comprehensive thinking we can still take back our future. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419146 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419146]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Uncharted: How to Navigate the Future Author: Margaret Heffernan Narrator: Margaret Heffernan Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 51 minutes Release date: September 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Excellent (and very timely).” —Financial Times * “Smartly assembled case studies and insights.” —Publishers Weekly * A Financial Times Best Book of the Year Former CEO and popular TED speaker Margaret Heffernan offers powerful and practical tools so you can face the future with confidence and courage. Most of us are addicted to prediction, desperate for certainty about the future. But the complexity of modern life won’t provide that; experts in forecasting are reluctant to look more than 400 days out. History doesn’t repeat itself and even genetics won’t tell you everything you want to know. Tomorrow remains uncharted territory, but Margaret Heffernan demonstrates how we can push aside uncertainty and forge ahead with agility. Drawing on a wide array of people and places, Uncharted traces long-term projects that shrewdly evolved over generations to meet the unpredictable challenges of every new age. Heffernan also looks at radical exercises and experiments that redefined standard practices by embracing different perspectives and testing fresh approaches. Preparing to confront a variable future provides the antidote to passivity and prediction. Ranging freely through history and from business to science, government to friendships, this refreshing book challenges us to mine our own creativity and humanity for the capacity to create the futures we want and can believe in. Margaret Heffernan Tue, 22 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419146 thebookvoice.com 10:51:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419146]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Uncharted: How to Navigate the Future Author: Margaret Heffernan Narrator: Margaret Heffernan Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 51 minutes Release date: September 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Excellent (and very timely).” —Financial Times * “Smartly assembled case studies and insights.” —Publishers Weekly * A Financial Times Best Book of the Year Former CEO and popular TED speaker Margaret Heffernan offers powerful and practical tools so you can face the future with confidence and courage. Most of us are addicted to prediction, desperate for certainty about the future. But the complexity of modern life won’t provide that; experts in forecasting are reluctant to look more than 400 days out. History doesn’t repeat itself and even genetics won’t tell you everything you want to know. Tomorrow remains uncharted territory, but Margaret Heffernan demonstrates how we can push aside uncertainty and forge ahead with agility. Drawing on a wide array of people and places, Uncharted traces long-term projects that shrewdly evolved over generations to meet the unpredictable challenges of every new age. Heffernan also looks at radical exercises and experiments that redefined standard practices by embracing different perspectives and testing fresh approaches. Preparing to confront a variable future provides the antidote to passivity and prediction. Ranging freely through history and from business to science, government to friendships, this refreshing book challenges us to mine our own creativity and humanity for the capacity to create the futures we want and can believe in. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/419146]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Uncharted: How to Navigate the Future Author: Margaret Heffernan Narrator: Margaret Heffernan Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 51 minutes Release date: September 22, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “Excellent (and very timely).” —Financial Times * “Smartly assembled case studies and insights.” —Publishers Weekly * A Financial Times Best Book of the Year Former CEO and popular TED speaker Margaret Heffernan offers powerful and practical tools so you can face the future with confidence and courage. Most of us are addicted to prediction, desperate for certainty about the future. But the complexity of modern life won’t provide that; experts in forecasting are reluctant to look more than 400 days out. History doesn’t repeat itself and even genetics won’t tell you everything you want to know. Tomorrow remains uncharted territory, but Margaret Heffernan demonstrates how we can push aside uncertainty and forge ahead with agility. Drawing on a wide array of people and places, Uncharted traces long-term projects that shrewdly evolved over generations to meet the unpredictable challenges of every new age. Heffernan also looks at radical exercises and experiments that redefined standard practices by embracing different perspectives and testing fresh approaches. Preparing to confront a variable future provides the antidote to passivity and prediction. Ranging freely through history and from business to science, government to friendships, this refreshing book challenges us to mine our own creativity and humanity for the capacity to create the futures we want and can believe in. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418927 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418927]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Cold Calling Techniques: Learn how to close sales with cold calls to sell anything on the phone Author: Robert William Narrator: Joseph Holbrook Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 5 minutes Release date: January 29, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Cold calls may seem outdated. But they work, they work very well. Cold calling is still the fastest and most profitable technique to close a sale. But it’s not easy: a lot of people experience troubles while trying to sell at the phone. An amazing tool, which only a few can master. And now you can too. With Cold Calling Techniques you will learn… - What makes a good prospect, and how to uncover them - Why cold calling still works in the Internet era - The anatomy of a cold call - Defining the goals of your call - The single, main, problem with cold calling - The step-by-step technique to maximize your phone sales skills - Five different cold calling methods - How to get prospects chase you - Specific cold calling techniques for job research, real estate agents, small businesses and much more case studies! Robert William Wed, 29 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418927 thebookvoice.com 6:5:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418927]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Cold Calling Techniques: Learn how to close sales with cold calls to sell anything on the phone Author: Robert William Narrator: Joseph Holbrook Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 5 minutes Release date: January 29, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Cold calls may seem outdated. But they work, they work very well. Cold calling is still the fastest and most profitable technique to close a sale. But it’s not easy: a lot of people experience troubles while trying to sell at the phone. An amazing tool, which only a few can master. And now you can too. With Cold Calling Techniques you will learn… - What makes a good prospect, and how to uncover them - Why cold calling still works in the Internet era - The anatomy of a cold call - Defining the goals of your call - The single, main, problem with cold calling - The step-by-step technique to maximize your phone sales skills - Five different cold calling methods - How to get prospects chase you - Specific cold calling techniques for job research, real estate agents, small businesses and much more case studies! Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418927]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Cold Calling Techniques: Learn how to close sales with cold calls to sell anything on the phone Author: Robert William Narrator: Joseph Holbrook Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 5 minutes Release date: January 29, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Cold calls may seem outdated. But they work, they work very well. Cold calling is still the fastest and most profitable technique to close a sale. But it’s not easy: a lot of people experience troubles while trying to sell at the phone. An amazing tool, which only a few can master. And now you can too. With Cold Calling Techniques you will learn… - What makes a good prospect, and how to uncover them - Why cold calling still works in the Internet era - The anatomy of a cold call - Defining the goals of your call - The single, main, problem with cold calling - The step-by-step technique to maximize your phone sales skills - Five different cold calling methods - How to get prospects chase you - Specific cold calling techniques for job research, real estate agents, small businesses and much more case studies! https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418452 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418452]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: TRADING: Discover the Secrets of Stocks, Forex and Commodities Exchanges for Day Trading or Long Term Investing Author: Jordan Parker Narrator: Joseph Holbrook Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 19 minutes Release date: January 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.38 of Total 8 Ratings of Narrator: 2.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: If you're interested in trading but too afraid to start out, this is your book. Trading is one of the most effective ways to earn a monthly income, right from your home. But most people are afraid of starting out. And they are right: trading is very risky, if you don't know what to do. Trading by Jordan Parker is your complete guide to start trading profitably with scientific, proven strategies and techniques. In this book you will discover: - What you need to know before you start trading - Which financial instruments are usually traded - The basic law of trading - The role of brokers, and which one to use when starting - How to check if a broker is safe or not - The basics of Technical Analysis - Dow's theory - The step-by-step day trading guide - What are market indicators and how to understand them - How to develop your own trading system - Use trading systems to automate your trading strategy Jordan Parker Fri, 24 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418452 thebookvoice.com 3:19:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418452]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: TRADING: Discover the Secrets of Stocks, Forex and Commodities Exchanges for Day Trading or Long Term Investing Author: Jordan Parker Narrator: Joseph Holbrook Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 19 minutes Release date: January 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.38 of Total 8 Ratings of Narrator: 2.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: If you're interested in trading but too afraid to start out, this is your book. Trading is one of the most effective ways to earn a monthly income, right from your home. But most people are afraid of starting out. And they are right: trading is very risky, if you don't know what to do. Trading by Jordan Parker is your complete guide to start trading profitably with scientific, proven strategies and techniques. In this book you will discover: - What you need to know before you start trading - Which financial instruments are usually traded - The basic law of trading - The role of brokers, and which one to use when starting - How to check if a broker is safe or not - The basics of Technical Analysis - Dow's theory - The step-by-step day trading guide - What are market indicators and how to understand them - How to develop your own trading system - Use trading systems to automate your trading strategy Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418452]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: TRADING: Discover the Secrets of Stocks, Forex and Commodities Exchanges for Day Trading or Long Term Investing Author: Jordan Parker Narrator: Joseph Holbrook Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 19 minutes Release date: January 24, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.38 of Total 8 Ratings of Narrator: 2.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: If you're interested in trading but too afraid to start out, this is your book. Trading is one of the most effective ways to earn a monthly income, right from your home. But most people are afraid of starting out. And they are right: trading is very risky, if you don't know what to do. Trading by Jordan Parker is your complete guide to start trading profitably with scientific, proven strategies and techniques. In this book you will discover: - What you need to know before you start trading - Which financial instruments are usually traded - The basic law of trading - The role of brokers, and which one to use when starting - How to check if a broker is safe or not - The basics of Technical Analysis - Dow's theory - The step-by-step day trading guide - What are market indicators and how to understand them - How to develop your own trading system - Use trading systems to automate your trading strategy https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418324 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418324]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Floating Coast: An Environmental History of the Bering Strait Author: Bathsheba Demuth Narrator: Christa Lewis Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 32 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The first-ever comprehensive history of Beringia, the Arctic land and waters stretching from Russia to Canada, Floating Coast breaks away from familiar narratives to provide a fresh and fascinating perspective on an overlooked landscape. The unforgiving territory along the Bering Strait had long been home to humans—the Inupiat and Yupik in Alaska, and the Yupik and Chukchi in Russia—before Americans and Europeans arrived with revolutionary ideas for progress. Rapidly, these frigid lands and waters became the site of an ongoing experiment: How, under conditions of extreme scarcity, would the great modern ideologies of capitalism and communism control and manage the resources they craved? Drawing on her own experience living with and interviewing indigenous people in the region, as well as from archival sources, Demuth shows how the social, the political, and the environmental clashed in this liminal space. Through the lens of the natural world, she views human life and economics as fundamentally about cycles of energy, bringing a fresh and visionary spin to the writing of human history. Floating Coast is a profoundly resonant tale of the dynamic changes and unforeseen consequences that immense human needs and ambitions have brought, and will continue to bring, to a finite planet. Bathsheba Demuth Tue, 31 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418324 thebookvoice.com 12:32:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418324]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Floating Coast: An Environmental History of the Bering Strait Author: Bathsheba Demuth Narrator: Christa Lewis Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 32 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The first-ever comprehensive history of Beringia, the Arctic land and waters stretching from Russia to Canada, Floating Coast breaks away from familiar narratives to provide a fresh and fascinating perspective on an overlooked landscape. The unforgiving territory along the Bering Strait had long been home to humans—the Inupiat and Yupik in Alaska, and the Yupik and Chukchi in Russia—before Americans and Europeans arrived with revolutionary ideas for progress. Rapidly, these frigid lands and waters became the site of an ongoing experiment: How, under conditions of extreme scarcity, would the great modern ideologies of capitalism and communism control and manage the resources they craved? Drawing on her own experience living with and interviewing indigenous people in the region, as well as from archival sources, Demuth shows how the social, the political, and the environmental clashed in this liminal space. Through the lens of the natural world, she views human life and economics as fundamentally about cycles of energy, bringing a fresh and visionary spin to the writing of human history. Floating Coast is a profoundly resonant tale of the dynamic changes and unforeseen consequences that immense human needs and ambitions have brought, and will continue to bring, to a finite planet. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/418324]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Floating Coast: An Environmental History of the Bering Strait Author: Bathsheba Demuth Narrator: Christa Lewis Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 32 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The first-ever comprehensive history of Beringia, the Arctic land and waters stretching from Russia to Canada, Floating Coast breaks away from familiar narratives to provide a fresh and fascinating perspective on an overlooked landscape. The unforgiving territory along the Bering Strait had long been home to humans—the Inupiat and Yupik in Alaska, and the Yupik and Chukchi in Russia—before Americans and Europeans arrived with revolutionary ideas for progress. Rapidly, these frigid lands and waters became the site of an ongoing experiment: How, under conditions of extreme scarcity, would the great modern ideologies of capitalism and communism control and manage the resources they craved? Drawing on her own experience living with and interviewing indigenous people in the region, as well as from archival sources, Demuth shows how the social, the political, and the environmental clashed in this liminal space. Through the lens of the natural world, she views human life and economics as fundamentally about cycles of energy, bringing a fresh and visionary spin to the writing of human history. Floating Coast is a profoundly resonant tale of the dynamic changes and unforeseen consequences that immense human needs and ambitions have brought, and will continue to bring, to a finite planet. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/417266 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/417266]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Lonely Century: How to Restore Human Connection in a World That's Pulling Apart Author: Noreena Hertz Narrator: Noreena Hertz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 35 minutes Release date: February 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A bold, hopeful, and thought-provoking account by “one of the world’s leading thinkers” (The Observer) of how we built a lonely world, how the pandemic accelerated the problem, and what we must do to come together again  “A compelling vision for how we can bridge our many divides at this time of great change and disruption.”—Arianna Huffington, founder and CEO of Thrive Global “An important new book.”—The Economist NEXT BIG IDEA CLUB NOMINEE • NAMED ONE OF THE BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY WIRED (UK) AND THE DAILY TELEGRAPH Loneliness has become the defining condition of the twenty-first century. It is damaging our health, our wealth, and our happiness and even threatening our democracy. Never has it been more pervasive or more widespread, but never has there been more that we can do about it.  Even before a global pandemic introduced us to terms like “social distancing,” the fabric of community was unraveling and our personal relationships were under threat. And technology isn’t the sole culprit. Equally to blame are the dismantling of civic institutions, the radical reorganization of the workplace, the mass migration to cities, and decades of neoliberal policies that have placed self-interest above the collective good. This is not merely a mental health crisis. Loneliness increases our risk of heart disease, cancer, and dementia. Statistically, it’s as bad for our health as smoking fifteen cigarettes a day. It’s also an economic crisis, costing us billions annually. And it’s a political crisis, as feelings of marginalization fuel divisiveness and extremism around the world. But it’s also a crisis we have the power to solve. Combining a decade of research with firsthand reporting, Noreena Hertz takes us from a “how to read a face” class at an Ivy League university to isolated remote workers in London during lockdown, from “renting a friend” in Manhattan to nursing home residents knitting bonnets for their robot caregivers in Japan. Offering bold solutions ranging from compassionate AI to innovative models for urban living to new ways of reinvigorating our neighborhoods and reconciling our differences, The Lonely Century offers a hopeful and empowering vision for how to heal our fractured communities and restore connection in our lives. Noreena Hertz Tue, 02 Feb 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/417266 thebookvoice.com 11:35:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/417266]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Lonely Century: How to Restore Human Connection in a World That's Pulling Apart Author: Noreena Hertz Narrator: Noreena Hertz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 35 minutes Release date: February 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A bold, hopeful, and thought-provoking account by “one of the world’s leading thinkers” (The Observer) of how we built a lonely world, how the pandemic accelerated the problem, and what we must do to come together again  “A compelling vision for how we can bridge our many divides at this time of great change and disruption.”—Arianna Huffington, founder and CEO of Thrive Global “An important new book.”—The Economist NEXT BIG IDEA CLUB NOMINEE • NAMED ONE OF THE BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY WIRED (UK) AND THE DAILY TELEGRAPH Loneliness has become the defining condition of the twenty-first century. It is damaging our health, our wealth, and our happiness and even threatening our democracy. Never has it been more pervasive or more widespread, but never has there been more that we can do about it.  Even before a global pandemic introduced us to terms like “social distancing,” the fabric of community was unraveling and our personal relationships were under threat. And technology isn’t the sole culprit. Equally to blame are the dismantling of civic institutions, the radical reorganization of the workplace, the mass migration to cities, and decades of neoliberal policies that have placed self-interest above the collective good. This is not merely a mental health crisis. Loneliness increases our risk of heart disease, cancer, and dementia. Statistically, it’s as bad for our health as smoking fifteen cigarettes a day. It’s also an economic crisis, costing us billions annually. And it’s a political crisis, as feelings of marginalization fuel divisiveness and extremism around the world. But it’s also a crisis we have the power to solve. Combining a decade of research with firsthand reporting, Noreena Hertz takes us from a “how to read a face” class at an Ivy League university to isolated remote workers in London during lockdown, from “renting a friend” in Manhattan to nursing home residents knitting bonnets for their robot caregivers in Japan. Offering bold solutions ranging from compassionate AI to innovative models for urban living to new ways of reinvigorating our neighborhoods and reconciling our differences, The Lonely Century offers a hopeful and empowering vision for how to heal our fractured communities and restore connection in our lives. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/417266]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Lonely Century: How to Restore Human Connection in a World That's Pulling Apart Author: Noreena Hertz Narrator: Noreena Hertz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 35 minutes Release date: February 2, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A bold, hopeful, and thought-provoking account by “one of the world’s leading thinkers” (The Observer) of how we built a lonely world, how the pandemic accelerated the problem, and what we must do to come together again  “A compelling vision for how we can bridge our many divides at this time of great change and disruption.”—Arianna Huffington, founder and CEO of Thrive Global “An important new book.”—The Economist NEXT BIG IDEA CLUB NOMINEE • NAMED ONE OF THE BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY WIRED (UK) AND THE DAILY TELEGRAPH Loneliness has become the defining condition of the twenty-first century. It is damaging our health, our wealth, and our happiness and even threatening our democracy. Never has it been more pervasive or more widespread, but never has there been more that we can do about it.  Even before a global pandemic introduced us to terms like “social distancing,” the fabric of community was unraveling and our personal relationships were under threat. And technology isn’t the sole culprit. Equally to blame are the dismantling of civic institutions, the radical reorganization of the workplace, the mass migration to cities, and decades of neoliberal policies that have placed self-interest above the collective good. This is not merely a mental health crisis. Loneliness increases our risk of heart disease, cancer, and dementia. Statistically, it’s as bad for our health as smoking fifteen cigarettes a day. It’s also an economic crisis, costing us billions annually. And it’s a political crisis, as feelings of marginalization fuel divisiveness and extremism around the world. But it’s also a crisis we have the power to solve. Combining a decade of research with firsthand reporting, Noreena Hertz takes us from a “how to read a face” class at an Ivy League university to isolated remote workers in London during lockdown, from “renting a friend” in Manhattan to nursing home residents knitting bonnets for their robot caregivers in Japan. Offering bold solutions ranging from compassionate AI to innovative models for urban living to new ways of reinvigorating our neighborhoods and reconciling our differences, The Lonely Century offers a hopeful and empowering vision for how to heal our fractured communities and restore connection in our lives. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/416970 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/416970]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Charter Schools and Their Enemies Author: Thomas Sowell Narrator: Brad Sanders Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 33 minutes Release date: June 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 7 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Winner of the 2021 Hayek Book Prize A leading conservative intellectual defends charter schools against the teachers' unions, politicians, and liberal educators who threaten to dismantle their success.  The black-white educational achievement gap -- so much discussed for so many years -- has already been closed by black students attending New York City's charter schools. This might be expected to be welcome news. But it has been very unwelcome news in traditional public schools whose students are transferring to charter schools. A backlash against charter schools has been led by teachers unions, politicians and others -- not only in New York but across the country. If those attacks succeed, the biggest losers will be minority youngsters for whom a quality education is their biggest chance for a better life. Thomas Sowell Tue, 30 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/416970 thebookvoice.com 4:33:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/416970]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Charter Schools and Their Enemies Author: Thomas Sowell Narrator: Brad Sanders Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 33 minutes Release date: June 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 7 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Winner of the 2021 Hayek Book Prize A leading conservative intellectual defends charter schools against the teachers' unions, politicians, and liberal educators who threaten to dismantle their success.  The black-white educational achievement gap -- so much discussed for so many years -- has already been closed by black students attending New York City's charter schools. This might be expected to be welcome news. But it has been very unwelcome news in traditional public schools whose students are transferring to charter schools. A backlash against charter schools has been led by teachers unions, politicians and others -- not only in New York but across the country. If those attacks succeed, the biggest losers will be minority youngsters for whom a quality education is their biggest chance for a better life. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/416970]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Charter Schools and Their Enemies Author: Thomas Sowell Narrator: Brad Sanders Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 33 minutes Release date: June 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 7 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Winner of the 2021 Hayek Book Prize A leading conservative intellectual defends charter schools against the teachers' unions, politicians, and liberal educators who threaten to dismantle their success.  The black-white educational achievement gap -- so much discussed for so many years -- has already been closed by black students attending New York City's charter schools. This might be expected to be welcome news. But it has been very unwelcome news in traditional public schools whose students are transferring to charter schools. A backlash against charter schools has been led by teachers unions, politicians and others -- not only in New York but across the country. If those attacks succeed, the biggest losers will be minority youngsters for whom a quality education is their biggest chance for a better life. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415323 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415323]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Killing the Planet Author: Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Narrator: Dan Woren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 15 minutes Release date: December 18, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.74 of Total 23 Ratings of Narrator: 4.56 of Total 9 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In Killing the Planet: How A Financial Cartel Doomed Mankind, best-selling authors Rodney Howard-Browne and Paul L. Williams investigate the true motives and consequences of the Pilgrim Society. Early members of the Society included J. P. Morgan, Andrew Carnegie, Andrew Mellon, Cornelius Vanderbilt, Paul Warburg, Mortimer I. Schiff, Otto Kahn, and John D. Rockefeller. Although the Pilgrim Society and the powerful men involved are often praised for their philanthropic actions, Howard-Browne and Williams show that the Society was self-serving and subjected the American people to a brutal system of economic tyranny, one which is still in place today. As a sequel to The Killing of Uncle Sam, Killing the Planet is a thoroughly documented and impeccably researched book, with over 1,500 footnotes. It shows how mankind has become enslaved within the Luciferian world system that is managed and controlled by the world’s wealthiest families. The book is not full of conspiracy theories but instead, unfortunately for all of humanity, full of gut-wrenching facts. Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Wed, 18 Dec 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415323 thebookvoice.com 14:15:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415323]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Killing the Planet Author: Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Narrator: Dan Woren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 15 minutes Release date: December 18, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.74 of Total 23 Ratings of Narrator: 4.56 of Total 9 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In Killing the Planet: How A Financial Cartel Doomed Mankind, best-selling authors Rodney Howard-Browne and Paul L. Williams investigate the true motives and consequences of the Pilgrim Society. Early members of the Society included J. P. Morgan, Andrew Carnegie, Andrew Mellon, Cornelius Vanderbilt, Paul Warburg, Mortimer I. Schiff, Otto Kahn, and John D. Rockefeller. Although the Pilgrim Society and the powerful men involved are often praised for their philanthropic actions, Howard-Browne and Williams show that the Society was self-serving and subjected the American people to a brutal system of economic tyranny, one which is still in place today. As a sequel to The Killing of Uncle Sam, Killing the Planet is a thoroughly documented and impeccably researched book, with over 1,500 footnotes. It shows how mankind has become enslaved within the Luciferian world system that is managed and controlled by the world’s wealthiest families. The book is not full of conspiracy theories but instead, unfortunately for all of humanity, full of gut-wrenching facts. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415323]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Killing the Planet Author: Rodney Howard-Browne, Paul L. Williams Narrator: Dan Woren Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 15 minutes Release date: December 18, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.74 of Total 23 Ratings of Narrator: 4.56 of Total 9 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In Killing the Planet: How A Financial Cartel Doomed Mankind, best-selling authors Rodney Howard-Browne and Paul L. Williams investigate the true motives and consequences of the Pilgrim Society. Early members of the Society included J. P. Morgan, Andrew Carnegie, Andrew Mellon, Cornelius Vanderbilt, Paul Warburg, Mortimer I. Schiff, Otto Kahn, and John D. Rockefeller. Although the Pilgrim Society and the powerful men involved are often praised for their philanthropic actions, Howard-Browne and Williams show that the Society was self-serving and subjected the American people to a brutal system of economic tyranny, one which is still in place today. As a sequel to The Killing of Uncle Sam, Killing the Planet is a thoroughly documented and impeccably researched book, with over 1,500 footnotes. It shows how mankind has become enslaved within the Luciferian world system that is managed and controlled by the world’s wealthiest families. The book is not full of conspiracy theories but instead, unfortunately for all of humanity, full of gut-wrenching facts. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415069 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415069]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Marginal Revolutionaries: How Austrian Economists Fought the War of Ideas Author: Janek Wasserman Narrator: Paul Boehmer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 19 minutes Release date: September 24, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A group history of the Austrian School of Economics, from the coffeehouses of imperial Vienna to the modern-day Tea Party The Austrian School of Economics—a movement that has had a vast impact on economics, politics, and society, especially among the American right—is poorly understood by supporters and detractors alike. Defining themselves in opposition to the mainstream, economists such as Ludwig von Mises, Friedrich Hayek, and Joseph Schumpeter built the School’s international reputation with their work on business cycles and monetary theory. Their focus on individualism—and deep antipathy toward socialism—ultimately won them a devoted audience among the upper echelons of business and government. In this collective biography, Janek Wasserman brings these figures to life, showing that in order to make sense of the Austrians and their continued influence, one must understand the backdrop against which their philosophy was formed—notably, the collapse of the Austro‑Hungarian Empire and a half‑century of war and exile. Janek Wasserman Tue, 24 Sep 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415069 thebookvoice.com 15:19:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415069]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Marginal Revolutionaries: How Austrian Economists Fought the War of Ideas Author: Janek Wasserman Narrator: Paul Boehmer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 19 minutes Release date: September 24, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A group history of the Austrian School of Economics, from the coffeehouses of imperial Vienna to the modern-day Tea Party The Austrian School of Economics—a movement that has had a vast impact on economics, politics, and society, especially among the American right—is poorly understood by supporters and detractors alike. Defining themselves in opposition to the mainstream, economists such as Ludwig von Mises, Friedrich Hayek, and Joseph Schumpeter built the School’s international reputation with their work on business cycles and monetary theory. Their focus on individualism—and deep antipathy toward socialism—ultimately won them a devoted audience among the upper echelons of business and government. In this collective biography, Janek Wasserman brings these figures to life, showing that in order to make sense of the Austrians and their continued influence, one must understand the backdrop against which their philosophy was formed—notably, the collapse of the Austro‑Hungarian Empire and a half‑century of war and exile. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/415069]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Marginal Revolutionaries: How Austrian Economists Fought the War of Ideas Author: Janek Wasserman Narrator: Paul Boehmer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 19 minutes Release date: September 24, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A group history of the Austrian School of Economics, from the coffeehouses of imperial Vienna to the modern-day Tea Party The Austrian School of Economics—a movement that has had a vast impact on economics, politics, and society, especially among the American right—is poorly understood by supporters and detractors alike. Defining themselves in opposition to the mainstream, economists such as Ludwig von Mises, Friedrich Hayek, and Joseph Schumpeter built the School’s international reputation with their work on business cycles and monetary theory. Their focus on individualism—and deep antipathy toward socialism—ultimately won them a devoted audience among the upper echelons of business and government. In this collective biography, Janek Wasserman brings these figures to life, showing that in order to make sense of the Austrians and their continued influence, one must understand the backdrop against which their philosophy was formed—notably, the collapse of the Austro‑Hungarian Empire and a half‑century of war and exile. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414790 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414790]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Ages of American Capitalism: A History of the United States Author: Jonathan Levy Narrator: John Lee Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 31 hours 44 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A leading economic historian traces the evolution of American capitalism from the colonial era to the present—and argues that we’ve reached a turning point that will define the era ahead. “The best one-volume history of American capitalism . . . It is impossible to understand the United States without understanding its economic history. This book, from one of the nation’s foremost historians of capitalism, brings that important and endlessly fascinating story to life.”—Sven Beckert, author of Empire of Cotton Today, in the midst of a new economic crisis and severe political discord, the nature of capitalism in United States is at a crossroads. Since the market crash and Great Recession of 2008, historian Jonathan Levy has been teaching a course to help his students understand everything that had happened to reach that disaster and the current state of the economy, but in doing so he discovered something more fundamental about American history. Now, in an ambitious single-volume history of the United States, he reveals how, from the beginning of U.S. history to the present, capitalism in America has evolved through four distinct ages and how the country’s economic evolution is inseparable from the nature of American life itself. The Age of Commerce spans the colonial era through the outbreak of the Civil War, a period of history in which economic growth and output largely depended on enslaved labor and was limited by what could be drawn from the land and where it could be traded. The Age of Capital traces the impact of the first major leap in economic development following the Civil War: the industrial revolution, when capitalists set capital down in factories to produce commercial goods, fueled by labor moving into cities. But investments in the new industrial economy led to great volatility, most dramatically with the onset of the Great Depression in 1929. The Depression immediately sparked the Age of Control, when the government took on a more active role in the economy, first trying to jump-start it and then funding military production during World War II. Skepticism of government intervention in the Cold War combined with recession and stagflation in the 1970s led to a crisis of industrial capitalism and the withdrawal of political will for regulation. In the Age of Chaos that followed, the combination of deregulation and the growth of the finance industry created a booming economy for some but also striking inequalities and a lack of oversight that led directly to the crash of 2008. In Ages of American Capitalism, Jonathan Levy proves that, contrary to political dogma, capitalism in the United States has never been just one thing. Instead, it has morphed throughout the country’s history—and it’s likely changing again right now. * This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF containing graphs and maps. Jonathan Levy Tue, 20 Apr 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414790 thebookvoice.com 31:44:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414790]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Ages of American Capitalism: A History of the United States Author: Jonathan Levy Narrator: John Lee Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 31 hours 44 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A leading economic historian traces the evolution of American capitalism from the colonial era to the present—and argues that we’ve reached a turning point that will define the era ahead. “The best one-volume history of American capitalism . . . It is impossible to understand the United States without understanding its economic history. This book, from one of the nation’s foremost historians of capitalism, brings that important and endlessly fascinating story to life.”—Sven Beckert, author of Empire of Cotton Today, in the midst of a new economic crisis and severe political discord, the nature of capitalism in United States is at a crossroads. Since the market crash and Great Recession of 2008, historian Jonathan Levy has been teaching a course to help his students understand everything that had happened to reach that disaster and the current state of the economy, but in doing so he discovered something more fundamental about American history. Now, in an ambitious single-volume history of the United States, he reveals how, from the beginning of U.S. history to the present, capitalism in America has evolved through four distinct ages and how the country’s economic evolution is inseparable from the nature of American life itself. The Age of Commerce spans the colonial era through the outbreak of the Civil War, a period of history in which economic growth and output largely depended on enslaved labor and was limited by what could be drawn from the land and where it could be traded. The Age of Capital traces the impact of the first major leap in economic development following the Civil War: the industrial revolution, when capitalists set capital down in factories to produce commercial goods, fueled by labor moving into cities. But investments in the new industrial economy led to great volatility, most dramatically with the onset of the Great Depression in 1929. The Depression immediately sparked the Age of Control, when the government took on a more active role in the economy, first trying to jump-start it and then funding military production during World War II. Skepticism of government intervention in the Cold War combined with recession and stagflation in the 1970s led to a crisis of industrial capitalism and the withdrawal of political will for regulation. In the Age of Chaos that followed, the combination of deregulation and the growth of the finance industry created a booming economy for some but also striking inequalities and a lack of oversight that led directly to the crash of 2008. In Ages of American Capitalism, Jonathan Levy proves that, contrary to political dogma, capitalism in the United States has never been just one thing. Instead, it has morphed throughout the country’s history—and it’s likely changing again right now. * This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF containing graphs and maps. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414790]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Ages of American Capitalism: A History of the United States Author: Jonathan Levy Narrator: John Lee Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 31 hours 44 minutes Release date: April 20, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A leading economic historian traces the evolution of American capitalism from the colonial era to the present—and argues that we’ve reached a turning point that will define the era ahead. “The best one-volume history of American capitalism . . . It is impossible to understand the United States without understanding its economic history. This book, from one of the nation’s foremost historians of capitalism, brings that important and endlessly fascinating story to life.”—Sven Beckert, author of Empire of Cotton Today, in the midst of a new economic crisis and severe political discord, the nature of capitalism in United States is at a crossroads. Since the market crash and Great Recession of 2008, historian Jonathan Levy has been teaching a course to help his students understand everything that had happened to reach that disaster and the current state of the economy, but in doing so he discovered something more fundamental about American history. Now, in an ambitious single-volume history of the United States, he reveals how, from the beginning of U.S. history to the present, capitalism in America has evolved through four distinct ages and how the country’s economic evolution is inseparable from the nature of American life itself. The Age of Commerce spans the colonial era through the outbreak of the Civil War, a period of history in which economic growth and output largely depended on enslaved labor and was limited by what could be drawn from the land and where it could be traded. The Age of Capital traces the impact of the first major leap in economic development following the Civil War: the industrial revolution, when capitalists set capital down in factories to produce commercial goods, fueled by labor moving into cities. But investments in the new industrial economy led to great volatility, most dramatically with the onset of the Great Depression in 1929. The Depression immediately sparked the Age of Control, when the government took on a more active role in the economy, first trying to jump-start it and then funding military production during World War II. Skepticism of government intervention in the Cold War combined with recession and stagflation in the 1970s led to a crisis of industrial capitalism and the withdrawal of political will for regulation. In the Age of Chaos that followed, the combination of deregulation and the growth of the finance industry created a booming economy for some but also striking inequalities and a lack of oversight that led directly to the crash of 2008. In Ages of American Capitalism, Jonathan Levy proves that, contrary to political dogma, capitalism in the United States has never been just one thing. Instead, it has morphed throughout the country’s history—and it’s likely changing again right now. * This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF containing graphs and maps. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414770 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414770]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: One Billion Americans: The Case for Thinking Bigger Author: Matthew Yglesias Narrator: Matthew Yglesias Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 2 minutes Release date: September 15, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NATIONAL BESTSELLER What would actually make America great: more people.   If the most challenging crisis in living memory has shown us anything, it’s that America has lost the will and the means to lead. We can’t compete with the huge population clusters of the global marketplace by keeping our population static or letting it diminish, or with our crumbling transit and unaffordable housing. The winner in the future world is going to have more—more ideas, more ambition, more utilization of resources, more people.    Exactly how many Americans do we need to win? According to Matthew Yglesias, one billion.   From one of our foremost policy writers, One Billion Americans is the provocative yet logical argument that if we aren’t moving forward, we’re losing. Vox founder Yglesias invites us to think bigger, while taking the problems of decline seriously. What really contributes to national prosperity should not be controversial: supporting parents and children, welcoming immigrants and their contributions, and exploring creative policies that support growth—like more housing, better transportation, improved education, revitalized welfare, and climate change mitigation. Drawing on examples and solutions from around the world, Yglesias shows not only that we can do this, but why we must.    Making the case for massive population growth with analytic rigor and imagination, One Billion Americans issues a radical but undeniable challenge: Why not do it all, and stay on top forever? Matthew Yglesias Tue, 15 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414770 thebookvoice.com 6:2:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414770]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: One Billion Americans: The Case for Thinking Bigger Author: Matthew Yglesias Narrator: Matthew Yglesias Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 2 minutes Release date: September 15, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NATIONAL BESTSELLER What would actually make America great: more people.   If the most challenging crisis in living memory has shown us anything, it’s that America has lost the will and the means to lead. We can’t compete with the huge population clusters of the global marketplace by keeping our population static or letting it diminish, or with our crumbling transit and unaffordable housing. The winner in the future world is going to have more—more ideas, more ambition, more utilization of resources, more people.    Exactly how many Americans do we need to win? According to Matthew Yglesias, one billion.   From one of our foremost policy writers, One Billion Americans is the provocative yet logical argument that if we aren’t moving forward, we’re losing. Vox founder Yglesias invites us to think bigger, while taking the problems of decline seriously. What really contributes to national prosperity should not be controversial: supporting parents and children, welcoming immigrants and their contributions, and exploring creative policies that support growth—like more housing, better transportation, improved education, revitalized welfare, and climate change mitigation. Drawing on examples and solutions from around the world, Yglesias shows not only that we can do this, but why we must.    Making the case for massive population growth with analytic rigor and imagination, One Billion Americans issues a radical but undeniable challenge: Why not do it all, and stay on top forever? Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/414770]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: One Billion Americans: The Case for Thinking Bigger Author: Matthew Yglesias Narrator: Matthew Yglesias Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 2 minutes Release date: September 15, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.67 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NATIONAL BESTSELLER What would actually make America great: more people.   If the most challenging crisis in living memory has shown us anything, it’s that America has lost the will and the means to lead. We can’t compete with the huge population clusters of the global marketplace by keeping our population static or letting it diminish, or with our crumbling transit and unaffordable housing. The winner in the future world is going to have more—more ideas, more ambition, more utilization of resources, more people.    Exactly how many Americans do we need to win? According to Matthew Yglesias, one billion.   From one of our foremost policy writers, One Billion Americans is the provocative yet logical argument that if we aren’t moving forward, we’re losing. Vox founder Yglesias invites us to think bigger, while taking the problems of decline seriously. What really contributes to national prosperity should not be controversial: supporting parents and children, welcoming immigrants and their contributions, and exploring creative policies that support growth—like more housing, better transportation, improved education, revitalized welfare, and climate change mitigation. Drawing on examples and solutions from around the world, Yglesias shows not only that we can do this, but why we must.    Making the case for massive population growth with analytic rigor and imagination, One Billion Americans issues a radical but undeniable challenge: Why not do it all, and stay on top forever? https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/413359 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/413359]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Russian] - Rich Dad's Conspiracy of the Rich: The 8 New Rules of Money Author: Robert Kiyosaki Narrator: Andrey Krupnik Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 1 minute Release date: December 11, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: "Rich Dad's Conspiracy of the Rich" shares Robert Kiyosaki's view of global economics and explores why people are finding themselves challenged by these turbulent times. He provides solutions to financial problems and explains what created today's economic chaos and how it can be eased. The book shows that what appears to be the worst of times is actually an opportunity in the making, and a chance for people to invest in their financial education. Robert Kiyosaki Wed, 11 Dec 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/413359 thebookvoice.com 10:1:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/413359]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Russian] - Rich Dad's Conspiracy of the Rich: The 8 New Rules of Money Author: Robert Kiyosaki Narrator: Andrey Krupnik Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 1 minute Release date: December 11, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: "Rich Dad's Conspiracy of the Rich" shares Robert Kiyosaki's view of global economics and explores why people are finding themselves challenged by these turbulent times. He provides solutions to financial problems and explains what created today's economic chaos and how it can be eased. The book shows that what appears to be the worst of times is actually an opportunity in the making, and a chance for people to invest in their financial education. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/413359]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Russian] - Rich Dad's Conspiracy of the Rich: The 8 New Rules of Money Author: Robert Kiyosaki Narrator: Andrey Krupnik Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 1 minute Release date: December 11, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: "Rich Dad's Conspiracy of the Rich" shares Robert Kiyosaki's view of global economics and explores why people are finding themselves challenged by these turbulent times. He provides solutions to financial problems and explains what created today's economic chaos and how it can be eased. The book shows that what appears to be the worst of times is actually an opportunity in the making, and a chance for people to invest in their financial education. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/412888 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/412888]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Another Now: Dispatches from an Alternative Present Author: Yanis Varoufakis Narrator: Leighton Pugh Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 28 minutes Release date: September 10, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. What would a fair and equal society actually look like? The world-renowned economist and bestselling author Yanis Varoufakis presents his radical and subversive answer. Imagine it is 2025. Years earlier, in the wake of the financial crisis of 2008, a global hi-tech uprising has birthed a post-capitalist world in which work, money, land, digital networks and politics have been truly democratised. In a thought-experiment of startling originality, world-famous economist Yanis Varoufakis offers a glimpse of this alternative reality. Through the eyes of three characters - a libertarian ex-banker, a Marxist-feminist and a maverick technologist - we see the genesis of a world without commercial banks or stock markets, where companies are owned equally by all staff, basic income is guaranteed, global imbalances and climate change cancel each other out, and housing is socialised. Is a liberal socialism feasible? Can prosperity grow without costing the Earth? Are we able to build the good society, despite our flaws? As radical in its form as in its vision, Another Now blends Platonic dialogue with speculative fiction to show that there is an alternative to capitalism, while also confronting us with the greatest question: how far are we willing to go to bring it about? (C) Yanis Varoufakis 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Yanis Varoufakis Thu, 10 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/412888 thebookvoice.com 7:28:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/412888]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Another Now: Dispatches from an Alternative Present Author: Yanis Varoufakis Narrator: Leighton Pugh Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 28 minutes Release date: September 10, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. What would a fair and equal society actually look like? The world-renowned economist and bestselling author Yanis Varoufakis presents his radical and subversive answer. Imagine it is 2025. Years earlier, in the wake of the financial crisis of 2008, a global hi-tech uprising has birthed a post-capitalist world in which work, money, land, digital networks and politics have been truly democratised. In a thought-experiment of startling originality, world-famous economist Yanis Varoufakis offers a glimpse of this alternative reality. Through the eyes of three characters - a libertarian ex-banker, a Marxist-feminist and a maverick technologist - we see the genesis of a world without commercial banks or stock markets, where companies are owned equally by all staff, basic income is guaranteed, global imbalances and climate change cancel each other out, and housing is socialised. Is a liberal socialism feasible? Can prosperity grow without costing the Earth? Are we able to build the good society, despite our flaws? As radical in its form as in its vision, Another Now blends Platonic dialogue with speculative fiction to show that there is an alternative to capitalism, while also confronting us with the greatest question: how far are we willing to go to bring it about? (C) Yanis Varoufakis 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/412888]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Another Now: Dispatches from an Alternative Present Author: Yanis Varoufakis Narrator: Leighton Pugh Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 28 minutes Release date: September 10, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. What would a fair and equal society actually look like? The world-renowned economist and bestselling author Yanis Varoufakis presents his radical and subversive answer. Imagine it is 2025. Years earlier, in the wake of the financial crisis of 2008, a global hi-tech uprising has birthed a post-capitalist world in which work, money, land, digital networks and politics have been truly democratised. In a thought-experiment of startling originality, world-famous economist Yanis Varoufakis offers a glimpse of this alternative reality. Through the eyes of three characters - a libertarian ex-banker, a Marxist-feminist and a maverick technologist - we see the genesis of a world without commercial banks or stock markets, where companies are owned equally by all staff, basic income is guaranteed, global imbalances and climate change cancel each other out, and housing is socialised. Is a liberal socialism feasible? Can prosperity grow without costing the Earth? Are we able to build the good society, despite our flaws? As radical in its form as in its vision, Another Now blends Platonic dialogue with speculative fiction to show that there is an alternative to capitalism, while also confronting us with the greatest question: how far are we willing to go to bring it about? (C) Yanis Varoufakis 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411693 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411693]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Riches of This Land: The Untold, True Story of America's Middle Class Author: Jim Tankersley Narrator: Jim Tankersley, Angelo Di Loreto Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 14 minutes Release date: August 11, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A vivid character-driven narrative, fused with important new economic and political reporting and research, that busts the myths about middle class decline and points the way to its revival. For over a decade, Jim Tankersley has been on a journey to understand what the hell happened to the world's greatest middle-class success story -- the post-World-War-II boom that faded into decades of stagnation and frustration for American workers. In The Riches of This Land, Tankersley fuses the story of forgotten Americans-- struggling women and men who he met on his journey into the travails of the middle class-- with important new economic and political research, providing fresh understanding how to create a more widespread prosperity. He begins by unraveling the real mystery of the American economy since the 1970s - not where did the jobs go, but why haven't new and better ones been created to replace them. His analysis begins with the revelation that women and minorities played a far more crucial role in building the post-war middle class than today's politicians typically acknowledge, and policies that have done nothing to address the structural shifts of the American economy have enabled a privileged few to capture nearly all the benefits of America's growing prosperity. Meanwhile, the 'angry white men of Ohio' have been sold by Trump and his ilk a theory of the economy that is dangerously backward, one that pits them against immigrants, minorities, and women who should be their allies. At the culmination of his journey, Tankersley lays out specific policy prescriptions and social undertakings that can begin moving the needle in the effort to make new and better jobs appear. By fostering an economy that opens new pathways for all workers to reach their full potential -- men and women, immigrant or native-born, regardless of race -- America can once again restore the upward flow of talent that can power growth and prosperity. Jim Tankersley Tue, 11 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411693 thebookvoice.com 9:14:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411693]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Riches of This Land: The Untold, True Story of America's Middle Class Author: Jim Tankersley Narrator: Jim Tankersley, Angelo Di Loreto Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 14 minutes Release date: August 11, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A vivid character-driven narrative, fused with important new economic and political reporting and research, that busts the myths about middle class decline and points the way to its revival. For over a decade, Jim Tankersley has been on a journey to understand what the hell happened to the world's greatest middle-class success story -- the post-World-War-II boom that faded into decades of stagnation and frustration for American workers. In The Riches of This Land, Tankersley fuses the story of forgotten Americans-- struggling women and men who he met on his journey into the travails of the middle class-- with important new economic and political research, providing fresh understanding how to create a more widespread prosperity. He begins by unraveling the real mystery of the American economy since the 1970s - not where did the jobs go, but why haven't new and better ones been created to replace them. His analysis begins with the revelation that women and minorities played a far more crucial role in building the post-war middle class than today's politicians typically acknowledge, and policies that have done nothing to address the structural shifts of the American economy have enabled a privileged few to capture nearly all the benefits of America's growing prosperity. Meanwhile, the 'angry white men of Ohio' have been sold by Trump and his ilk a theory of the economy that is dangerously backward, one that pits them against immigrants, minorities, and women who should be their allies. At the culmination of his journey, Tankersley lays out specific policy prescriptions and social undertakings that can begin moving the needle in the effort to make new and better jobs appear. By fostering an economy that opens new pathways for all workers to reach their full potential -- men and women, immigrant or native-born, regardless of race -- America can once again restore the upward flow of talent that can power growth and prosperity. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411693]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Riches of This Land: The Untold, True Story of America's Middle Class Author: Jim Tankersley Narrator: Jim Tankersley, Angelo Di Loreto Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 14 minutes Release date: August 11, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A vivid character-driven narrative, fused with important new economic and political reporting and research, that busts the myths about middle class decline and points the way to its revival. For over a decade, Jim Tankersley has been on a journey to understand what the hell happened to the world's greatest middle-class success story -- the post-World-War-II boom that faded into decades of stagnation and frustration for American workers. In The Riches of This Land, Tankersley fuses the story of forgotten Americans-- struggling women and men who he met on his journey into the travails of the middle class-- with important new economic and political research, providing fresh understanding how to create a more widespread prosperity. He begins by unraveling the real mystery of the American economy since the 1970s - not where did the jobs go, but why haven't new and better ones been created to replace them. His analysis begins with the revelation that women and minorities played a far more crucial role in building the post-war middle class than today's politicians typically acknowledge, and policies that have done nothing to address the structural shifts of the American economy have enabled a privileged few to capture nearly all the benefits of America's growing prosperity. Meanwhile, the 'angry white men of Ohio' have been sold by Trump and his ilk a theory of the economy that is dangerously backward, one that pits them against immigrants, minorities, and women who should be their allies. At the culmination of his journey, Tankersley lays out specific policy prescriptions and social undertakings that can begin moving the needle in the effort to make new and better jobs appear. By fostering an economy that opens new pathways for all workers to reach their full potential -- men and women, immigrant or native-born, regardless of race -- America can once again restore the upward flow of talent that can power growth and prosperity. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411351 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411351]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Rewriting the Rules of the European Economy: An Agenda for Growth and Shared Prosperity Author: Joseph E. Stiglitz Narrator: Robertson Dean Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 0 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Joseph E. Stiglitz, along with Carter Dougherty and the Foundation for European Progressive Studies, lays out the economic framework for a Europe with faster growth that is more equitably shared. Europe is in crisis. Sluggish economic growth in many countries, widespread income stagnation, and recession have led to severe political and social consequences. Social protections for citizens have been cut back. Governments offer timid responses to deep-seated problems. These economic and political failures have contributed to the rise of extremist parties on the right. Marginalized populations are being made scapegoats for Europe's woes. But the problems of today's Europe stem from decisions based on a blind worship of markets in too many areas of policy. If Europe is to return to an innovative and dynamic economy—and if there is to be shared prosperity, social solidarity, and justice—then EU countries need to break with their current, destructive trajectory. This volume offers concrete strategies for renewal that would also reinvigorate the project of European integration, with fresh ideas in the areas of both macroeconomics and microeconomics, including central banking, public investment, corporate governance and competition policy, social policy, and international trade. Joseph E. Stiglitz Tue, 28 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411351 thebookvoice.com 11:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411351]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Rewriting the Rules of the European Economy: An Agenda for Growth and Shared Prosperity Author: Joseph E. Stiglitz Narrator: Robertson Dean Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 0 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Joseph E. Stiglitz, along with Carter Dougherty and the Foundation for European Progressive Studies, lays out the economic framework for a Europe with faster growth that is more equitably shared. Europe is in crisis. Sluggish economic growth in many countries, widespread income stagnation, and recession have led to severe political and social consequences. Social protections for citizens have been cut back. Governments offer timid responses to deep-seated problems. These economic and political failures have contributed to the rise of extremist parties on the right. Marginalized populations are being made scapegoats for Europe's woes. But the problems of today's Europe stem from decisions based on a blind worship of markets in too many areas of policy. If Europe is to return to an innovative and dynamic economy—and if there is to be shared prosperity, social solidarity, and justice—then EU countries need to break with their current, destructive trajectory. This volume offers concrete strategies for renewal that would also reinvigorate the project of European integration, with fresh ideas in the areas of both macroeconomics and microeconomics, including central banking, public investment, corporate governance and competition policy, social policy, and international trade. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/411351]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Rewriting the Rules of the European Economy: An Agenda for Growth and Shared Prosperity Author: Joseph E. Stiglitz Narrator: Robertson Dean Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 0 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Joseph E. Stiglitz, along with Carter Dougherty and the Foundation for European Progressive Studies, lays out the economic framework for a Europe with faster growth that is more equitably shared. Europe is in crisis. Sluggish economic growth in many countries, widespread income stagnation, and recession have led to severe political and social consequences. Social protections for citizens have been cut back. Governments offer timid responses to deep-seated problems. These economic and political failures have contributed to the rise of extremist parties on the right. Marginalized populations are being made scapegoats for Europe's woes. But the problems of today's Europe stem from decisions based on a blind worship of markets in too many areas of policy. If Europe is to return to an innovative and dynamic economy—and if there is to be shared prosperity, social solidarity, and justice—then EU countries need to break with their current, destructive trajectory. This volume offers concrete strategies for renewal that would also reinvigorate the project of European integration, with fresh ideas in the areas of both macroeconomics and microeconomics, including central banking, public investment, corporate governance and competition policy, social policy, and international trade. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410959 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410959]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Expendables: How the Middle Class Got Screwed By Globalization Author: Jeff Rubin Narrator: Jeff Rubin Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 0 minutes Release date: August 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From the #1 bestselling author of Why Your World Is About to Get A Whole Lot Smaller, a provocative, far-reaching account of how the middle class got stuck with the bill for globalization, and how the blowback—from Brexit to Trump to populist Europe—will change the developed world. Real wages in North America have not risen since the 1970s. Union membership has collapsed. Full-time employment is beginning to look like a quaint idea from the distant past. If it seems that the middle class is in retreat around the developed world, it is.      Former CIBC World Markets Chief Economist Jeff Rubin argues that all this was foreseeable back when Canada, the United States and Mexico first started talking free trade. Labour argued then that manufacturing jobs would move to Mexico. Free-trade advocates disagreed. Today, Canadian and American factories sit idle. More steel is used to make bottlecaps than cars. Meanwhile, Mexico has become one of the world's biggest automotive exporters. And it's not just NAFTA. Cheap oil, low interest rates, global deregulation and tax policies that benefit the rich all have the same effect: the erosion of the middle class.      Growing global inequality is a problem of our own making, Rubin argues. And solving it won't be easy if we draw on the same ideas about capital and labour, right and left, that led us to this cliff. Articulating a vision that dovetails with the ideas of both Naomi Klein and Donald Trump, The Expendables is an exhilaratingly fresh perspective that is at once humane and irascible, fearless and rigorous, and most importantly, timely. GDP is growing, the stock market is up and unemployment is down, but the surprise of the book is that even the good news is good for only one percent of us. Jeff Rubin Tue, 18 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410959 thebookvoice.com 10:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410959]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Expendables: How the Middle Class Got Screwed By Globalization Author: Jeff Rubin Narrator: Jeff Rubin Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 0 minutes Release date: August 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From the #1 bestselling author of Why Your World Is About to Get A Whole Lot Smaller, a provocative, far-reaching account of how the middle class got stuck with the bill for globalization, and how the blowback—from Brexit to Trump to populist Europe—will change the developed world. Real wages in North America have not risen since the 1970s. Union membership has collapsed. Full-time employment is beginning to look like a quaint idea from the distant past. If it seems that the middle class is in retreat around the developed world, it is.      Former CIBC World Markets Chief Economist Jeff Rubin argues that all this was foreseeable back when Canada, the United States and Mexico first started talking free trade. Labour argued then that manufacturing jobs would move to Mexico. Free-trade advocates disagreed. Today, Canadian and American factories sit idle. More steel is used to make bottlecaps than cars. Meanwhile, Mexico has become one of the world's biggest automotive exporters. And it's not just NAFTA. Cheap oil, low interest rates, global deregulation and tax policies that benefit the rich all have the same effect: the erosion of the middle class.      Growing global inequality is a problem of our own making, Rubin argues. And solving it won't be easy if we draw on the same ideas about capital and labour, right and left, that led us to this cliff. Articulating a vision that dovetails with the ideas of both Naomi Klein and Donald Trump, The Expendables is an exhilaratingly fresh perspective that is at once humane and irascible, fearless and rigorous, and most importantly, timely. GDP is growing, the stock market is up and unemployment is down, but the surprise of the book is that even the good news is good for only one percent of us. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410959]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Expendables: How the Middle Class Got Screwed By Globalization Author: Jeff Rubin Narrator: Jeff Rubin Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 0 minutes Release date: August 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From the #1 bestselling author of Why Your World Is About to Get A Whole Lot Smaller, a provocative, far-reaching account of how the middle class got stuck with the bill for globalization, and how the blowback—from Brexit to Trump to populist Europe—will change the developed world. Real wages in North America have not risen since the 1970s. Union membership has collapsed. Full-time employment is beginning to look like a quaint idea from the distant past. If it seems that the middle class is in retreat around the developed world, it is.      Former CIBC World Markets Chief Economist Jeff Rubin argues that all this was foreseeable back when Canada, the United States and Mexico first started talking free trade. Labour argued then that manufacturing jobs would move to Mexico. Free-trade advocates disagreed. Today, Canadian and American factories sit idle. More steel is used to make bottlecaps than cars. Meanwhile, Mexico has become one of the world's biggest automotive exporters. And it's not just NAFTA. Cheap oil, low interest rates, global deregulation and tax policies that benefit the rich all have the same effect: the erosion of the middle class.      Growing global inequality is a problem of our own making, Rubin argues. And solving it won't be easy if we draw on the same ideas about capital and labour, right and left, that led us to this cliff. Articulating a vision that dovetails with the ideas of both Naomi Klein and Donald Trump, The Expendables is an exhilaratingly fresh perspective that is at once humane and irascible, fearless and rigorous, and most importantly, timely. GDP is growing, the stock market is up and unemployment is down, but the surprise of the book is that even the good news is good for only one percent of us. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410512 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410512]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Lift as You Climb: Women and the art of ambition Author: Viv Groskop Narrator: Viv Groskop Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 52 minutes Release date: March 5, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.67 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lift as You Climb is a dynamic guide to owning your ambition without having to be someone you don't want to be. It's about balancing ambition and compassion, and women being able to strive for personal success while trying to help – or lift – others along the way. We all have difficult moments at work, times when we feel awkward, when our daily micro interactions make us uncomfortable, perhaps when we have to say no or assert ourselves in a way that makes us feel less like ourselves, less 'sisterly'. Part self-help guide, part master class in survival skills for life and work, Lift as You Climb examines what sisterhood looks like these days, asks what you can do to make things better for other women and considers how to do that without disadvantaging yourself. It's the ultimate confidence bible for women who want to plan a career in a fast moving world, but without leaving anyone else behind. And it addresses one of the biggest issues women face in the workplace - how to be ambitious without losing your sense of self. It must be possible, right? Full of tips, takeaways and invaluable insights, this is everything you need to know about making life better for yourself - without making it worse for others. Praise for How to Own the Room: 'I recommend Viv Groskop's How to Own the Room to anyone wanting more self confidence. Full of helpful concepts you can get your head round and embody. I'm finding it very useful.' - Philippa Perry 'Plenty of tips and tricks... The most valuable lesson is that, in Groskop's words, 'You don't have to be a great speaker to give an amazing speech.'' - Style 'The ultimate guide to public speaking. Inspirational.' - Mary Portas 'Demystifies the art of talking to people and winning them round to your cause.' - The Times 'This book is going to help so many people. It's brilliant.' - Emma Gannon 'Easy steps to soothe the nerves and build confidence.' - Nina Stibbe 'An excellent, truly useful guide to getting more women front and centre, encouraging us to take part, noisily, in public life. (The podcast is also fabulous.)' - Daisy Buchanan Viv Groskop Thu, 05 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410512 thebookvoice.com 6:52:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410512]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Lift as You Climb: Women and the art of ambition Author: Viv Groskop Narrator: Viv Groskop Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 52 minutes Release date: March 5, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.67 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lift as You Climb is a dynamic guide to owning your ambition without having to be someone you don't want to be. It's about balancing ambition and compassion, and women being able to strive for personal success while trying to help – or lift – others along the way. We all have difficult moments at work, times when we feel awkward, when our daily micro interactions make us uncomfortable, perhaps when we have to say no or assert ourselves in a way that makes us feel less like ourselves, less 'sisterly'. Part self-help guide, part master class in survival skills for life and work, Lift as You Climb examines what sisterhood looks like these days, asks what you can do to make things better for other women and considers how to do that without disadvantaging yourself. It's the ultimate confidence bible for women who want to plan a career in a fast moving world, but without leaving anyone else behind. And it addresses one of the biggest issues women face in the workplace - how to be ambitious without losing your sense of self. It must be possible, right? Full of tips, takeaways and invaluable insights, this is everything you need to know about making life better for yourself - without making it worse for others. Praise for How to Own the Room: 'I recommend Viv Groskop's How to Own the Room to anyone wanting more self confidence. Full of helpful concepts you can get your head round and embody. I'm finding it very useful.' - Philippa Perry 'Plenty of tips and tricks... The most valuable lesson is that, in Groskop's words, 'You don't have to be a great speaker to give an amazing speech.'' - Style 'The ultimate guide to public speaking. Inspirational.' - Mary Portas 'Demystifies the art of talking to people and winning them round to your cause.' - The Times 'This book is going to help so many people. It's brilliant.' - Emma Gannon 'Easy steps to soothe the nerves and build confidence.' - Nina Stibbe 'An excellent, truly useful guide to getting more women front and centre, encouraging us to take part, noisily, in public life. (The podcast is also fabulous.)' - Daisy Buchanan Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/410512]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Lift as You Climb: Women and the art of ambition Author: Viv Groskop Narrator: Viv Groskop Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 52 minutes Release date: March 5, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.67 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Lift as You Climb is a dynamic guide to owning your ambition without having to be someone you don't want to be. It's about balancing ambition and compassion, and women being able to strive for personal success while trying to help – or lift – others along the way. We all have difficult moments at work, times when we feel awkward, when our daily micro interactions make us uncomfortable, perhaps when we have to say no or assert ourselves in a way that makes us feel less like ourselves, less 'sisterly'. Part self-help guide, part master class in survival skills for life and work, Lift as You Climb examines what sisterhood looks like these days, asks what you can do to make things better for other women and considers how to do that without disadvantaging yourself. It's the ultimate confidence bible for women who want to plan a career in a fast moving world, but without leaving anyone else behind. And it addresses one of the biggest issues women face in the workplace - how to be ambitious without losing your sense of self. It must be possible, right? Full of tips, takeaways and invaluable insights, this is everything you need to know about making life better for yourself - without making it worse for others. Praise for How to Own the Room: 'I recommend Viv Groskop's How to Own the Room to anyone wanting more self confidence. Full of helpful concepts you can get your head round and embody. I'm finding it very useful.' - Philippa Perry 'Plenty of tips and tricks... The most valuable lesson is that, in Groskop's words, 'You don't have to be a great speaker to give an amazing speech.'' - Style 'The ultimate guide to public speaking. Inspirational.' - Mary Portas 'Demystifies the art of talking to people and winning them round to your cause.' - The Times 'This book is going to help so many people. It's brilliant.' - Emma Gannon 'Easy steps to soothe the nerves and build confidence.' - Nina Stibbe 'An excellent, truly useful guide to getting more women front and centre, encouraging us to take part, noisily, in public life. (The podcast is also fabulous.)' - Daisy Buchanan https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409939 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409939]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Unstoppable Startup: Mastering Israel's Secret Rules of Chutzpah Author: Uri Adoni Narrator: Tom Parks Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 8 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Discover the bold secrets to Israel’s incredible track record of success in this new guide that will help make any startup unstoppable. More than half of all startups fail - often during the crucial early stages of development when they need to prove their viability on a limited budget. However, when it comes to startup success, one country stands out: Israel. Even though it is a relatively small country, Israel has one of the highest concentrations of startups in the world, has the highest venture capital per capita, is one of the top countries in terms of number of companies listed on NASDAQ, and is well-recognized as a global leader in research and development. In The Unstoppable Startup, veteran venture capitalist Uri Adoni goes behind the scenes to explain the principles and practices that can make any startup, anywhere in the world, become an unstoppable one. Packed with insider accounts from leaders who have realized bold visions, The Unstoppable Startup distills Israeli chutzpah into six operational rules that will help you to: - Build an unstoppable team; - Foresee the future and innovate to meet its demands; - Manage your funding and partnerships through all phases of growth; - Dominate the market category you are after or create a new one; - Build and manage an early stage investment vehicle; - Build and grow a healthy high-tech ecosystem. Adoni implemented these practices throughout his more than 12 years as a venture capitalist for one of Israel's most successful venture funds, and he continues to utilize these same proven startup strategies today in metropolitan areas in the US. The Unstoppable Startup provides readers with insights and operational advice on how to run a startup, and how to overcome challenges?that almost every startup faces. Uri Adoni Tue, 08 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409939 thebookvoice.com 8:8:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409939]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Unstoppable Startup: Mastering Israel's Secret Rules of Chutzpah Author: Uri Adoni Narrator: Tom Parks Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 8 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Discover the bold secrets to Israel’s incredible track record of success in this new guide that will help make any startup unstoppable. More than half of all startups fail - often during the crucial early stages of development when they need to prove their viability on a limited budget. However, when it comes to startup success, one country stands out: Israel. Even though it is a relatively small country, Israel has one of the highest concentrations of startups in the world, has the highest venture capital per capita, is one of the top countries in terms of number of companies listed on NASDAQ, and is well-recognized as a global leader in research and development. In The Unstoppable Startup, veteran venture capitalist Uri Adoni goes behind the scenes to explain the principles and practices that can make any startup, anywhere in the world, become an unstoppable one. Packed with insider accounts from leaders who have realized bold visions, The Unstoppable Startup distills Israeli chutzpah into six operational rules that will help you to: - Build an unstoppable team; - Foresee the future and innovate to meet its demands; - Manage your funding and partnerships through all phases of growth; - Dominate the market category you are after or create a new one; - Build and manage an early stage investment vehicle; - Build and grow a healthy high-tech ecosystem. Adoni implemented these practices throughout his more than 12 years as a venture capitalist for one of Israel's most successful venture funds, and he continues to utilize these same proven startup strategies today in metropolitan areas in the US. The Unstoppable Startup provides readers with insights and operational advice on how to run a startup, and how to overcome challenges?that almost every startup faces. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409939]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Unstoppable Startup: Mastering Israel's Secret Rules of Chutzpah Author: Uri Adoni Narrator: Tom Parks Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 8 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Discover the bold secrets to Israel’s incredible track record of success in this new guide that will help make any startup unstoppable. More than half of all startups fail - often during the crucial early stages of development when they need to prove their viability on a limited budget. However, when it comes to startup success, one country stands out: Israel. Even though it is a relatively small country, Israel has one of the highest concentrations of startups in the world, has the highest venture capital per capita, is one of the top countries in terms of number of companies listed on NASDAQ, and is well-recognized as a global leader in research and development. In The Unstoppable Startup, veteran venture capitalist Uri Adoni goes behind the scenes to explain the principles and practices that can make any startup, anywhere in the world, become an unstoppable one. Packed with insider accounts from leaders who have realized bold visions, The Unstoppable Startup distills Israeli chutzpah into six operational rules that will help you to: - Build an unstoppable team; - Foresee the future and innovate to meet its demands; - Manage your funding and partnerships through all phases of growth; - Dominate the market category you are after or create a new one; - Build and manage an early stage investment vehicle; - Build and grow a healthy high-tech ecosystem. Adoni implemented these practices throughout his more than 12 years as a venture capitalist for one of Israel's most successful venture funds, and he continues to utilize these same proven startup strategies today in metropolitan areas in the US. The Unstoppable Startup provides readers with insights and operational advice on how to run a startup, and how to overcome challenges?that almost every startup faces. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409562 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409562]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Capital and Ideology Author: Thomas Piketty Narrator: Rick Adamson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 49 hours 3 minutes Release date: March 10, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.52 of Total 21 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The epic successor to one of the most important books of the century: at once a retelling of global history, a scathing critique of contemporary politics, and a bold proposal for a new and fairer economic system Thomas Piketty’s bestselling Capital in the Twenty-First Century galvanized global debate about inequality. In this audacious follow-up, Piketty challenges us to revolutionize how we think about politics, ideology, and history. He exposes the ideas that have sustained inequality for the past millennium, reveals why the shallow politics of right and left are failing us today, and outlines the structure of a fairer economic system. Our economy, Piketty observes, is not a natural fact. Markets, profits, and capital are all historical constructs that depend on choices. Piketty explores the material and ideological interactions of conflicting social groups that have given us slavery, serfdom, colonialism, communism, and hypercapitalism, shaping the lives of billions. He concludes that the great driver of human progress over the centuries has been the struggle for equality and education, and not, as often argued, the assertion of property rights or the pursuit of stability. The new era of extreme inequality that has derailed that progress since the 1980s, he shows, is partly a reaction against communism, but it is also the fruit of ignorance, intellectual specialization, and our drift toward the dead-end politics of identity. Once we understand this, we can begin to envision a more balanced approach to economics and politics. Piketty argues for a new “participatory” socialism, a system founded on an ideology of equality, social property, education, and the sharing of knowledge and power. Capital and Ideology is destined to be one of the indispensable books of our time, a work that will not only help us understand the world, but that will change it. Thomas Piketty Tue, 10 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409562 thebookvoice.com 49:3:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409562]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Capital and Ideology Author: Thomas Piketty Narrator: Rick Adamson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 49 hours 3 minutes Release date: March 10, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.52 of Total 21 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The epic successor to one of the most important books of the century: at once a retelling of global history, a scathing critique of contemporary politics, and a bold proposal for a new and fairer economic system Thomas Piketty’s bestselling Capital in the Twenty-First Century galvanized global debate about inequality. In this audacious follow-up, Piketty challenges us to revolutionize how we think about politics, ideology, and history. He exposes the ideas that have sustained inequality for the past millennium, reveals why the shallow politics of right and left are failing us today, and outlines the structure of a fairer economic system. Our economy, Piketty observes, is not a natural fact. Markets, profits, and capital are all historical constructs that depend on choices. Piketty explores the material and ideological interactions of conflicting social groups that have given us slavery, serfdom, colonialism, communism, and hypercapitalism, shaping the lives of billions. He concludes that the great driver of human progress over the centuries has been the struggle for equality and education, and not, as often argued, the assertion of property rights or the pursuit of stability. The new era of extreme inequality that has derailed that progress since the 1980s, he shows, is partly a reaction against communism, but it is also the fruit of ignorance, intellectual specialization, and our drift toward the dead-end politics of identity. Once we understand this, we can begin to envision a more balanced approach to economics and politics. Piketty argues for a new “participatory” socialism, a system founded on an ideology of equality, social property, education, and the sharing of knowledge and power. Capital and Ideology is destined to be one of the indispensable books of our time, a work that will not only help us understand the world, but that will change it. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409562]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Capital and Ideology Author: Thomas Piketty Narrator: Rick Adamson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 49 hours 3 minutes Release date: March 10, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.52 of Total 21 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 4 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The epic successor to one of the most important books of the century: at once a retelling of global history, a scathing critique of contemporary politics, and a bold proposal for a new and fairer economic system Thomas Piketty’s bestselling Capital in the Twenty-First Century galvanized global debate about inequality. In this audacious follow-up, Piketty challenges us to revolutionize how we think about politics, ideology, and history. He exposes the ideas that have sustained inequality for the past millennium, reveals why the shallow politics of right and left are failing us today, and outlines the structure of a fairer economic system. Our economy, Piketty observes, is not a natural fact. Markets, profits, and capital are all historical constructs that depend on choices. Piketty explores the material and ideological interactions of conflicting social groups that have given us slavery, serfdom, colonialism, communism, and hypercapitalism, shaping the lives of billions. He concludes that the great driver of human progress over the centuries has been the struggle for equality and education, and not, as often argued, the assertion of property rights or the pursuit of stability. The new era of extreme inequality that has derailed that progress since the 1980s, he shows, is partly a reaction against communism, but it is also the fruit of ignorance, intellectual specialization, and our drift toward the dead-end politics of identity. Once we understand this, we can begin to envision a more balanced approach to economics and politics. Piketty argues for a new “participatory” socialism, a system founded on an ideology of equality, social property, education, and the sharing of knowledge and power. Capital and Ideology is destined to be one of the indispensable books of our time, a work that will not only help us understand the world, but that will change it. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409318 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409318]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Broken Bargain: Bankers, Bailouts, and the Struggle to Tame Wall Street Author: Kathleen Day Narrator: Bernadette Dunne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 43 minutes Release date: August 13, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A history of major financial crises—and how taxpayers have been left with the bill In the 1930s, battered and humbled by the Great Depression, the US financial sector struck a grand bargain with the federal government. Bankers gained a safety net in exchange for certain curbs on their freedom: transparency rules, record-keeping and anti-fraud measures, and fiduciary responsibilities. Despite subsequent periodic changes in these regulations, the underlying bargain played a major role in preserving the stability of the financial markets as well as the larger economy. By the free-market era of the 1980s and 90s, however, Wall Street argued that rules embodied in New Deal–era regulations to protect consumers and ultimately taxpayers were no longer needed—and government agreed. This engaging history documents the country’s financial crises, focusing on those of the 1920s, the 1980s, and the 2000s, and reveals how the two more recent crises arose from the neglect of this fundamental bargain. Kathleen Day Tue, 13 Aug 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409318 thebookvoice.com 15:43:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409318]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Broken Bargain: Bankers, Bailouts, and the Struggle to Tame Wall Street Author: Kathleen Day Narrator: Bernadette Dunne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 43 minutes Release date: August 13, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A history of major financial crises—and how taxpayers have been left with the bill In the 1930s, battered and humbled by the Great Depression, the US financial sector struck a grand bargain with the federal government. Bankers gained a safety net in exchange for certain curbs on their freedom: transparency rules, record-keeping and anti-fraud measures, and fiduciary responsibilities. Despite subsequent periodic changes in these regulations, the underlying bargain played a major role in preserving the stability of the financial markets as well as the larger economy. By the free-market era of the 1980s and 90s, however, Wall Street argued that rules embodied in New Deal–era regulations to protect consumers and ultimately taxpayers were no longer needed—and government agreed. This engaging history documents the country’s financial crises, focusing on those of the 1920s, the 1980s, and the 2000s, and reveals how the two more recent crises arose from the neglect of this fundamental bargain. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/409318]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Broken Bargain: Bankers, Bailouts, and the Struggle to Tame Wall Street Author: Kathleen Day Narrator: Bernadette Dunne Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 43 minutes Release date: August 13, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A history of major financial crises—and how taxpayers have been left with the bill In the 1930s, battered and humbled by the Great Depression, the US financial sector struck a grand bargain with the federal government. Bankers gained a safety net in exchange for certain curbs on their freedom: transparency rules, record-keeping and anti-fraud measures, and fiduciary responsibilities. Despite subsequent periodic changes in these regulations, the underlying bargain played a major role in preserving the stability of the financial markets as well as the larger economy. By the free-market era of the 1980s and 90s, however, Wall Street argued that rules embodied in New Deal–era regulations to protect consumers and ultimately taxpayers were no longer needed—and government agreed. This engaging history documents the country’s financial crises, focusing on those of the 1920s, the 1980s, and the 2000s, and reveals how the two more recent crises arose from the neglect of this fundamental bargain. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408398 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408398]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Reimagining Capitalism: Shortlisted for the FT & McKinsey Business Book of the Year Award 2020 Author: Rebecca Henderson Narrator: Lucinda Clare Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 39 minutes Release date: April 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Free market capitalism is one of humanity's greatest inventions, and the greatest source of prosperity the world has ever seen. But it's also on the verge of destroying the planet and destabilizing society in its single-minded pursuit of maximizing shareholder value. Rebecca Henderson, McArthur University Professor at Harvard University, argues for a new framework; one that can simultaneously make a positive societal impact by confronting the realities of the environment and the need to address social and economic inequality, while also delivering sustained financial performance to ensure economic growth that brings prosperity and wellbeing to society as a whole. Drawing on the lessons of companies from around the world who are acting on this responsibility - who are not only surviving but are thriving, becoming leaders in their industries and beginning to drive the wheels of change - Professor Henderson proves that this is not only a moral imperative for business but also the only way to remain competitive in our changing world. © Rebecca Henderson 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Rebecca Henderson Thu, 30 Apr 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408398 thebookvoice.com 10:39:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408398]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Reimagining Capitalism: Shortlisted for the FT & McKinsey Business Book of the Year Award 2020 Author: Rebecca Henderson Narrator: Lucinda Clare Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 39 minutes Release date: April 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Free market capitalism is one of humanity's greatest inventions, and the greatest source of prosperity the world has ever seen. But it's also on the verge of destroying the planet and destabilizing society in its single-minded pursuit of maximizing shareholder value. Rebecca Henderson, McArthur University Professor at Harvard University, argues for a new framework; one that can simultaneously make a positive societal impact by confronting the realities of the environment and the need to address social and economic inequality, while also delivering sustained financial performance to ensure economic growth that brings prosperity and wellbeing to society as a whole. Drawing on the lessons of companies from around the world who are acting on this responsibility - who are not only surviving but are thriving, becoming leaders in their industries and beginning to drive the wheels of change - Professor Henderson proves that this is not only a moral imperative for business but also the only way to remain competitive in our changing world. © Rebecca Henderson 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408398]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Reimagining Capitalism: Shortlisted for the FT & McKinsey Business Book of the Year Award 2020 Author: Rebecca Henderson Narrator: Lucinda Clare Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 39 minutes Release date: April 30, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin. Free market capitalism is one of humanity's greatest inventions, and the greatest source of prosperity the world has ever seen. But it's also on the verge of destroying the planet and destabilizing society in its single-minded pursuit of maximizing shareholder value. Rebecca Henderson, McArthur University Professor at Harvard University, argues for a new framework; one that can simultaneously make a positive societal impact by confronting the realities of the environment and the need to address social and economic inequality, while also delivering sustained financial performance to ensure economic growth that brings prosperity and wellbeing to society as a whole. Drawing on the lessons of companies from around the world who are acting on this responsibility - who are not only surviving but are thriving, becoming leaders in their industries and beginning to drive the wheels of change - Professor Henderson proves that this is not only a moral imperative for business but also the only way to remain competitive in our changing world. © Rebecca Henderson 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408315 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408315]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics in an Hour: An Interactive Course Author: J.-M. Kuczynski Narrator: Cameron Scriven Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 0 hours 27 minutes Release date: November 7, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The truly important parts of economics without the usual fluff. Each point is followed by a brief multiple-choice quiz, ensuring that knowledge is sealed in. J.-M. Kuczynski Thu, 07 Nov 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408315 thebookvoice.com 0:27:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408315]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics in an Hour: An Interactive Course Author: J.-M. Kuczynski Narrator: Cameron Scriven Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 0 hours 27 minutes Release date: November 7, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The truly important parts of economics without the usual fluff. Each point is followed by a brief multiple-choice quiz, ensuring that knowledge is sealed in. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408315]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Economics in an Hour: An Interactive Course Author: J.-M. Kuczynski Narrator: Cameron Scriven Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 0 hours 27 minutes Release date: November 7, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The truly important parts of economics without the usual fluff. Each point is followed by a brief multiple-choice quiz, ensuring that knowledge is sealed in. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408311 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408311]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Harness It: Renewable Energy Technologies and Project Development Models Transforming the Grid Author: Michael Ginsberg Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 47 minutes Release date: November 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Following an overview of the technical and historical development of the electric grid in the U.S. and Europe, this guide reviews hydropower, solar photovoltaics, wind energy, fuel cell, and battery technologies. The author also presents models for the connection of these renewable energy sources from large-scale to on-site and community power/microgrids. The models are explained through case studies in the developed and developing worlds that explore how technical evaluations are conducted, policy incentives implemented, and project finance applied. Considering the increasing importance of renewable energy for climate change mitigation, this book provides an overview of how renewable energy sources are integrated into the grid to promote better understanding among students and business professionals in the utility sector and across industries. Most literature on grid interconnection is highly technical, assuming an in-depth understanding of electrical engineering. With the rise of clean technologies and the diversity of interconnection models, this guide fills a gap in the existing literature by equipping non-technical business managers with the salient information they need to make critical decisions for their organizations. Michael Ginsberg Fri, 15 Nov 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408311 thebookvoice.com 3:47:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408311]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Harness It: Renewable Energy Technologies and Project Development Models Transforming the Grid Author: Michael Ginsberg Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 47 minutes Release date: November 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Following an overview of the technical and historical development of the electric grid in the U.S. and Europe, this guide reviews hydropower, solar photovoltaics, wind energy, fuel cell, and battery technologies. The author also presents models for the connection of these renewable energy sources from large-scale to on-site and community power/microgrids. The models are explained through case studies in the developed and developing worlds that explore how technical evaluations are conducted, policy incentives implemented, and project finance applied. Considering the increasing importance of renewable energy for climate change mitigation, this book provides an overview of how renewable energy sources are integrated into the grid to promote better understanding among students and business professionals in the utility sector and across industries. Most literature on grid interconnection is highly technical, assuming an in-depth understanding of electrical engineering. With the rise of clean technologies and the diversity of interconnection models, this guide fills a gap in the existing literature by equipping non-technical business managers with the salient information they need to make critical decisions for their organizations. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408311]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Harness It: Renewable Energy Technologies and Project Development Models Transforming the Grid Author: Michael Ginsberg Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 3 hours 47 minutes Release date: November 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Following an overview of the technical and historical development of the electric grid in the U.S. and Europe, this guide reviews hydropower, solar photovoltaics, wind energy, fuel cell, and battery technologies. The author also presents models for the connection of these renewable energy sources from large-scale to on-site and community power/microgrids. The models are explained through case studies in the developed and developing worlds that explore how technical evaluations are conducted, policy incentives implemented, and project finance applied. Considering the increasing importance of renewable energy for climate change mitigation, this book provides an overview of how renewable energy sources are integrated into the grid to promote better understanding among students and business professionals in the utility sector and across industries. Most literature on grid interconnection is highly technical, assuming an in-depth understanding of electrical engineering. With the rise of clean technologies and the diversity of interconnection models, this guide fills a gap in the existing literature by equipping non-technical business managers with the salient information they need to make critical decisions for their organizations. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408125 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408125]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Superpower Showdown: How the Battle between Trump and Xi Threatens a New Cold War Author: Lingling Wei, Bob Davis Narrator: Rick Adamson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 40 minutes Release date: June 9, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This is the inside story of the US–China trade war, how relations between these superpowers  unraveled, darkening prospects for global peace and prosperity, as told by two Wall Street Journal reporters, one based in Washington, D.C., the other in Beijing, who have had more access to the decision makers in the White House and in China’s Zhongnanhai leadership compound than anyone else.  The trade battle between China and the U.S. didn’t start with Trump and won’t end with him, argue Bob Davis and Lingling Wei. The two countries have a long and fraught political and economic history which has become more contentious over the past three years—an escalation that has negatively impacted both countries' economies and the world at large—and holds the potential for even more uncertainty and disruption.  How did this stand-off happen? How much are U.S. presidents and officials who haven't effectively confronted or negotiated with China to blame? What role have Chinese leaders, and U.S. business leaders who for decades acted as Beijing’s lobbyists in Washington, played in driving tensions between the two countries?  Superpower Showdown is the story of a romance gone bad. Uniquely positioned to tell the story, Davis and Wei have conducted hundreds of interviews with government and business officials in both nations over the seven years they have worked together writing for the Wall Street Journal. Analyzing U.S.-China relations, they explain how we have reached this tipping point, and look at where we could be headed. Vivid and provocative, Superpower Showdown will help readers understand the context of the trade war and prepare them for what may come next. Lingling Wei, Bob Davis Tue, 09 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408125 thebookvoice.com 15:40:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408125]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Superpower Showdown: How the Battle between Trump and Xi Threatens a New Cold War Author: Lingling Wei, Bob Davis Narrator: Rick Adamson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 40 minutes Release date: June 9, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This is the inside story of the US–China trade war, how relations between these superpowers  unraveled, darkening prospects for global peace and prosperity, as told by two Wall Street Journal reporters, one based in Washington, D.C., the other in Beijing, who have had more access to the decision makers in the White House and in China’s Zhongnanhai leadership compound than anyone else.  The trade battle between China and the U.S. didn’t start with Trump and won’t end with him, argue Bob Davis and Lingling Wei. The two countries have a long and fraught political and economic history which has become more contentious over the past three years—an escalation that has negatively impacted both countries' economies and the world at large—and holds the potential for even more uncertainty and disruption.  How did this stand-off happen? How much are U.S. presidents and officials who haven't effectively confronted or negotiated with China to blame? What role have Chinese leaders, and U.S. business leaders who for decades acted as Beijing’s lobbyists in Washington, played in driving tensions between the two countries?  Superpower Showdown is the story of a romance gone bad. Uniquely positioned to tell the story, Davis and Wei have conducted hundreds of interviews with government and business officials in both nations over the seven years they have worked together writing for the Wall Street Journal. Analyzing U.S.-China relations, they explain how we have reached this tipping point, and look at where we could be headed. Vivid and provocative, Superpower Showdown will help readers understand the context of the trade war and prepare them for what may come next. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408125]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Superpower Showdown: How the Battle between Trump and Xi Threatens a New Cold War Author: Lingling Wei, Bob Davis Narrator: Rick Adamson Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 40 minutes Release date: June 9, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This is the inside story of the US–China trade war, how relations between these superpowers  unraveled, darkening prospects for global peace and prosperity, as told by two Wall Street Journal reporters, one based in Washington, D.C., the other in Beijing, who have had more access to the decision makers in the White House and in China’s Zhongnanhai leadership compound than anyone else.  The trade battle between China and the U.S. didn’t start with Trump and won’t end with him, argue Bob Davis and Lingling Wei. The two countries have a long and fraught political and economic history which has become more contentious over the past three years—an escalation that has negatively impacted both countries' economies and the world at large—and holds the potential for even more uncertainty and disruption.  How did this stand-off happen? How much are U.S. presidents and officials who haven't effectively confronted or negotiated with China to blame? What role have Chinese leaders, and U.S. business leaders who for decades acted as Beijing’s lobbyists in Washington, played in driving tensions between the two countries?  Superpower Showdown is the story of a romance gone bad. Uniquely positioned to tell the story, Davis and Wei have conducted hundreds of interviews with government and business officials in both nations over the seven years they have worked together writing for the Wall Street Journal. Analyzing U.S.-China relations, they explain how we have reached this tipping point, and look at where we could be headed. Vivid and provocative, Superpower Showdown will help readers understand the context of the trade war and prepare them for what may come next. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408084 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408084]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - Lo que el dinero sí puede comprar Author: Carlos Peña Narrator: Fernando Oural Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 31 minutes Release date: April 1, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: El libro de Carlos Peña es un polémico ensayo sobre el crecimiento y la modernización asociados al capitalismo, elementos que han permitido a las clases históricamente más desposeídas lograr un bienestar difícil de cuestionar El crecimiento y la modernización asociados al capitalismo han permitido que las clases históricamente más desposeídas logren un bienestar difícil de cuestionar. Sin embargo, en los últimos años han surgido algunas interrogantes: ¿por qué la prosperidad genera, al mismo tiempo, un creciente rechazo al mercado? ¿De dónde proviene el malestar social que ha exigido un cambio urgente en las relaciones entre la economía y la sociedad? Lo que el dinero sí puede comprar es, también, una contundente réplica a las ideas de Michael Sandel sobre los límites morales del mercado, ofreciendo al lector un controvertido análisis sobre el proceso de modernización capitalista que (afirma Peña en esta reflexión) ha incrementado de manera significativa las condiciones materiales de los chilenos y, a fin de cuentas, sus libertades. Carlos Peña Mon, 01 Apr 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408084 thebookvoice.com 6:31:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408084]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - Lo que el dinero sí puede comprar Author: Carlos Peña Narrator: Fernando Oural Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 31 minutes Release date: April 1, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: El libro de Carlos Peña es un polémico ensayo sobre el crecimiento y la modernización asociados al capitalismo, elementos que han permitido a las clases históricamente más desposeídas lograr un bienestar difícil de cuestionar El crecimiento y la modernización asociados al capitalismo han permitido que las clases históricamente más desposeídas logren un bienestar difícil de cuestionar. Sin embargo, en los últimos años han surgido algunas interrogantes: ¿por qué la prosperidad genera, al mismo tiempo, un creciente rechazo al mercado? ¿De dónde proviene el malestar social que ha exigido un cambio urgente en las relaciones entre la economía y la sociedad? Lo que el dinero sí puede comprar es, también, una contundente réplica a las ideas de Michael Sandel sobre los límites morales del mercado, ofreciendo al lector un controvertido análisis sobre el proceso de modernización capitalista que (afirma Peña en esta reflexión) ha incrementado de manera significativa las condiciones materiales de los chilenos y, a fin de cuentas, sus libertades. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/408084]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - Lo que el dinero sí puede comprar Author: Carlos Peña Narrator: Fernando Oural Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 31 minutes Release date: April 1, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: El libro de Carlos Peña es un polémico ensayo sobre el crecimiento y la modernización asociados al capitalismo, elementos que han permitido a las clases históricamente más desposeídas lograr un bienestar difícil de cuestionar El crecimiento y la modernización asociados al capitalismo han permitido que las clases históricamente más desposeídas logren un bienestar difícil de cuestionar. Sin embargo, en los últimos años han surgido algunas interrogantes: ¿por qué la prosperidad genera, al mismo tiempo, un creciente rechazo al mercado? ¿De dónde proviene el malestar social que ha exigido un cambio urgente en las relaciones entre la economía y la sociedad? Lo que el dinero sí puede comprar es, también, una contundente réplica a las ideas de Michael Sandel sobre los límites morales del mercado, ofreciendo al lector un controvertido análisis sobre el proceso de modernización capitalista que (afirma Peña en esta reflexión) ha incrementado de manera significativa las condiciones materiales de los chilenos y, a fin de cuentas, sus libertades. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/407115 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/407115]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Great Reversal: How America Gave Up on Free Markets Author: Thomas Philippon Narrator: Walter Dixon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 2 minutes Release date: June 13, 2017 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Why are cellphone plans so much more expensive in the United States than in Europe? It seems a simple question. But the search for an answer took Thomas Philippon on an unexpected journey through some of the most complex and hotly debated issues in modern economics. Ultimately, he reached a surprising conclusion: American markets, once a model for the world, are giving up on healthy competition. Sector after economic sector is more concentrated than it was twenty years ago, dominated by fewer and bigger players who lobby politicians aggressively to protect and expand their profit margins. Across the country, this drives up prices while driving down investment, productivity, growth, and wages, resulting in more inequality. Meanwhile, Europe—long dismissed for competitive sclerosis and weak antitrust—is beating America at its own game. Philippon, one of the world’s leading financial economists, did not expect these conclusions in the age of Silicon Valley start-ups and millennial millionaires. But the data from his cutting-edge research proved undeniable. In this compelling tale of economic detective work, we follow him as he works out the basic facts and consequences of industry concentration in the U.S. and Europe, shows how lobbying and campaign contributions have defanged antitrust regulators, and considers what all this means for free trade, technology, and innovation. For the sake of ordinary Americans, he concludes, government needs to return to what it once did best: keeping the playing field level for competition. Thomas Philippon Tue, 13 Jun 2017 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/407115 thebookvoice.com 10:2:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/407115]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Great Reversal: How America Gave Up on Free Markets Author: Thomas Philippon Narrator: Walter Dixon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 2 minutes Release date: June 13, 2017 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Why are cellphone plans so much more expensive in the United States than in Europe? It seems a simple question. But the search for an answer took Thomas Philippon on an unexpected journey through some of the most complex and hotly debated issues in modern economics. Ultimately, he reached a surprising conclusion: American markets, once a model for the world, are giving up on healthy competition. Sector after economic sector is more concentrated than it was twenty years ago, dominated by fewer and bigger players who lobby politicians aggressively to protect and expand their profit margins. Across the country, this drives up prices while driving down investment, productivity, growth, and wages, resulting in more inequality. Meanwhile, Europe—long dismissed for competitive sclerosis and weak antitrust—is beating America at its own game. Philippon, one of the world’s leading financial economists, did not expect these conclusions in the age of Silicon Valley start-ups and millennial millionaires. But the data from his cutting-edge research proved undeniable. In this compelling tale of economic detective work, we follow him as he works out the basic facts and consequences of industry concentration in the U.S. and Europe, shows how lobbying and campaign contributions have defanged antitrust regulators, and considers what all this means for free trade, technology, and innovation. For the sake of ordinary Americans, he concludes, government needs to return to what it once did best: keeping the playing field level for competition. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/407115]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Great Reversal: How America Gave Up on Free Markets Author: Thomas Philippon Narrator: Walter Dixon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 2 minutes Release date: June 13, 2017 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Why are cellphone plans so much more expensive in the United States than in Europe? It seems a simple question. But the search for an answer took Thomas Philippon on an unexpected journey through some of the most complex and hotly debated issues in modern economics. Ultimately, he reached a surprising conclusion: American markets, once a model for the world, are giving up on healthy competition. Sector after economic sector is more concentrated than it was twenty years ago, dominated by fewer and bigger players who lobby politicians aggressively to protect and expand their profit margins. Across the country, this drives up prices while driving down investment, productivity, growth, and wages, resulting in more inequality. Meanwhile, Europe—long dismissed for competitive sclerosis and weak antitrust—is beating America at its own game. Philippon, one of the world’s leading financial economists, did not expect these conclusions in the age of Silicon Valley start-ups and millennial millionaires. But the data from his cutting-edge research proved undeniable. In this compelling tale of economic detective work, we follow him as he works out the basic facts and consequences of industry concentration in the U.S. and Europe, shows how lobbying and campaign contributions have defanged antitrust regulators, and considers what all this means for free trade, technology, and innovation. For the sake of ordinary Americans, he concludes, government needs to return to what it once did best: keeping the playing field level for competition. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/406341 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/406341]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: First Responders: Inside the U.S. Strategy for Fighting the 2007-2009 Global Financial Crisis Author: J. Nellie Liang, Henry M. Paulson Jr., Timothy F. Geithner, Ben S. Bernanke Narrator: Christopher Grove Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 9 minutes Release date: February 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2008, the world's financial system stood on the brink of disaster. The United States faced an unprecedented crisis when the investment bank Lehman Brothers collapsed, setting off a global panic. Faced with the prospect of a new Great Depression, the Treasury Department, the Federal Reserve, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, and other agencies took extraordinary measures to contain the damage and steady the financial system and the economy. Edited by three of the policymakers who led the government's response to the crisis, with chapters written by the teams tasked with finding policy solutions, this book provides a comprehensive accounting of the internal debates and controversies surrounding the measures that were taken to stabilize the financial system and the economy. Offering previously untold insight into the key choices (including rejected options) and a frank evaluation of successes and failures, this volume is both an important historical document and an indispensable guide for confronting future financial calamities. J. Nellie Liang, Henry M. Paulson Jr., Timothy F. Geithner, Ben S. Bernanke Tue, 04 Feb 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/406341 thebookvoice.com 21:9:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/406341]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: First Responders: Inside the U.S. Strategy for Fighting the 2007-2009 Global Financial Crisis Author: J. Nellie Liang, Henry M. Paulson Jr., Timothy F. Geithner, Ben S. Bernanke Narrator: Christopher Grove Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 9 minutes Release date: February 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2008, the world's financial system stood on the brink of disaster. The United States faced an unprecedented crisis when the investment bank Lehman Brothers collapsed, setting off a global panic. Faced with the prospect of a new Great Depression, the Treasury Department, the Federal Reserve, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, and other agencies took extraordinary measures to contain the damage and steady the financial system and the economy. Edited by three of the policymakers who led the government's response to the crisis, with chapters written by the teams tasked with finding policy solutions, this book provides a comprehensive accounting of the internal debates and controversies surrounding the measures that were taken to stabilize the financial system and the economy. Offering previously untold insight into the key choices (including rejected options) and a frank evaluation of successes and failures, this volume is both an important historical document and an indispensable guide for confronting future financial calamities. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/406341]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: First Responders: Inside the U.S. Strategy for Fighting the 2007-2009 Global Financial Crisis Author: J. Nellie Liang, Henry M. Paulson Jr., Timothy F. Geithner, Ben S. Bernanke Narrator: Christopher Grove Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 9 minutes Release date: February 4, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In 2008, the world's financial system stood on the brink of disaster. The United States faced an unprecedented crisis when the investment bank Lehman Brothers collapsed, setting off a global panic. Faced with the prospect of a new Great Depression, the Treasury Department, the Federal Reserve, the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation, and other agencies took extraordinary measures to contain the damage and steady the financial system and the economy. Edited by three of the policymakers who led the government's response to the crisis, with chapters written by the teams tasked with finding policy solutions, this book provides a comprehensive accounting of the internal debates and controversies surrounding the measures that were taken to stabilize the financial system and the economy. Offering previously untold insight into the key choices (including rejected options) and a frank evaluation of successes and failures, this volume is both an important historical document and an indispensable guide for confronting future financial calamities. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405575 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405575]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - 8 lecciones de liderazgo militar para emprendedores Author: Robert T. Kiyosaki Narrator: Rubén Hernández Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 26 minutes Release date: October 31, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Robert T. Kiyosaki contrasta las diferencias entre el éxito en el mundo civil y el mundo militar para mejorar las probabilidades de tener éxito en el mundo empresarial. El entrenamiento militar desarrolla grandes emprendedores. En este libro Robert T. Kiyosaki, autor de Padre Rico Padre Pobre, el libro de finanzas personales #1 de todos los tiempos y bestseller de The New York Times, te dice cómo y por qué. Descubre cómo aplicar el entrenamiento militar para mejorar las probabilidades de tener éxito en el mundo empresarial. Las estadísticas muestran que nueve de cada 10 emprendedores fracasan en los primeros cinco años de su negocio. Por cada 10 que sobreviven, nueve fracasan en los siguientes cinco años. La pregunta es: ¿Cuál es la diferencia entre el emprendedor exitoso y los nueve que fracasan? ¿La respuesta? El éxito como emprendedor requiere las mismas habilidades, valores y fortaleza de liderazgo inculcadas en el ejército. En este libro, Robert T. Kiyosaki contrasta las diferencias entre el éxito en el mundo civil y el mundo militar. Algunas de las secciones más importantes de 8 lecciones de liderazgo militar. - Misión. - Respeto. - Velocidad. - Líderes como maestros. - Disciplina. - Autoridad. - El poder de la conectividad. - Ventas y liderazgo. Robert T. Kiyosaki Thu, 31 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405575 thebookvoice.com 6:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405575]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - 8 lecciones de liderazgo militar para emprendedores Author: Robert T. Kiyosaki Narrator: Rubén Hernández Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 26 minutes Release date: October 31, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Robert T. Kiyosaki contrasta las diferencias entre el éxito en el mundo civil y el mundo militar para mejorar las probabilidades de tener éxito en el mundo empresarial. El entrenamiento militar desarrolla grandes emprendedores. En este libro Robert T. Kiyosaki, autor de Padre Rico Padre Pobre, el libro de finanzas personales #1 de todos los tiempos y bestseller de The New York Times, te dice cómo y por qué. Descubre cómo aplicar el entrenamiento militar para mejorar las probabilidades de tener éxito en el mundo empresarial. Las estadísticas muestran que nueve de cada 10 emprendedores fracasan en los primeros cinco años de su negocio. Por cada 10 que sobreviven, nueve fracasan en los siguientes cinco años. La pregunta es: ¿Cuál es la diferencia entre el emprendedor exitoso y los nueve que fracasan? ¿La respuesta? El éxito como emprendedor requiere las mismas habilidades, valores y fortaleza de liderazgo inculcadas en el ejército. En este libro, Robert T. Kiyosaki contrasta las diferencias entre el éxito en el mundo civil y el mundo militar. Algunas de las secciones más importantes de 8 lecciones de liderazgo militar. - Misión. - Respeto. - Velocidad. - Líderes como maestros. - Disciplina. - Autoridad. - El poder de la conectividad. - Ventas y liderazgo. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405575]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - 8 lecciones de liderazgo militar para emprendedores Author: Robert T. Kiyosaki Narrator: Rubén Hernández Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 26 minutes Release date: October 31, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Robert T. Kiyosaki contrasta las diferencias entre el éxito en el mundo civil y el mundo militar para mejorar las probabilidades de tener éxito en el mundo empresarial. El entrenamiento militar desarrolla grandes emprendedores. En este libro Robert T. Kiyosaki, autor de Padre Rico Padre Pobre, el libro de finanzas personales #1 de todos los tiempos y bestseller de The New York Times, te dice cómo y por qué. Descubre cómo aplicar el entrenamiento militar para mejorar las probabilidades de tener éxito en el mundo empresarial. Las estadísticas muestran que nueve de cada 10 emprendedores fracasan en los primeros cinco años de su negocio. Por cada 10 que sobreviven, nueve fracasan en los siguientes cinco años. La pregunta es: ¿Cuál es la diferencia entre el emprendedor exitoso y los nueve que fracasan? ¿La respuesta? El éxito como emprendedor requiere las mismas habilidades, valores y fortaleza de liderazgo inculcadas en el ejército. En este libro, Robert T. Kiyosaki contrasta las diferencias entre el éxito en el mundo civil y el mundo militar. Algunas de las secciones más importantes de 8 lecciones de liderazgo militar. - Misión. - Respeto. - Velocidad. - Líderes como maestros. - Disciplina. - Autoridad. - El poder de la conectividad. - Ventas y liderazgo. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405447 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405447]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Deficit Myth: Modern Monetary Theory and the Birth of the People's Economy Author: Stephanie Kelton Narrator: Stephanie Kelton Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 52 minutes Release date: June 9, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.53 of Total 32 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 9 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A New York Times Bestseller The leading thinker and most visible public advocate of modern monetary theory -- the freshest and most important idea about economics in decades -- delivers a radically different, bold, new understanding for how to build a just and prosperous society. Stephanie Kelton's brilliant exploration of modern monetary theory (MMT) dramatically changes our understanding of how we can best deal with crucial issues ranging from poverty and inequality to creating jobs, expanding health care coverage, climate change, and building resilient infrastructure. Any ambitious proposal, however, inevitably runs into the buzz saw of how to find the money to pay for it, rooted in myths about deficits that are hobbling us as a country. Kelton busts through the myths that prevent us from taking action: that the federal government should budget like a household, that deficits will harm the next generation, crowd out private investment, and undermine long-term growth, and that entitlements are propelling us toward a grave fiscal crisis. MMT, as Kelton shows, shifts the terrain from narrow budgetary questions to one of broader economic and social benefits. With its important new ways of understanding money, taxes, and the critical role of deficit spending, MMT redefines how to responsibly use our resources so that we can maximize our potential as a society. MMT gives us the power to imagine a new politics and a new economy and move from a narrative of scarcity to one of opportunity. Stephanie Kelton Tue, 09 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405447 thebookvoice.com 10:52:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405447]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Deficit Myth: Modern Monetary Theory and the Birth of the People's Economy Author: Stephanie Kelton Narrator: Stephanie Kelton Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 52 minutes Release date: June 9, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.53 of Total 32 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 9 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A New York Times Bestseller The leading thinker and most visible public advocate of modern monetary theory -- the freshest and most important idea about economics in decades -- delivers a radically different, bold, new understanding for how to build a just and prosperous society. Stephanie Kelton's brilliant exploration of modern monetary theory (MMT) dramatically changes our understanding of how we can best deal with crucial issues ranging from poverty and inequality to creating jobs, expanding health care coverage, climate change, and building resilient infrastructure. Any ambitious proposal, however, inevitably runs into the buzz saw of how to find the money to pay for it, rooted in myths about deficits that are hobbling us as a country. Kelton busts through the myths that prevent us from taking action: that the federal government should budget like a household, that deficits will harm the next generation, crowd out private investment, and undermine long-term growth, and that entitlements are propelling us toward a grave fiscal crisis. MMT, as Kelton shows, shifts the terrain from narrow budgetary questions to one of broader economic and social benefits. With its important new ways of understanding money, taxes, and the critical role of deficit spending, MMT redefines how to responsibly use our resources so that we can maximize our potential as a society. MMT gives us the power to imagine a new politics and a new economy and move from a narrative of scarcity to one of opportunity. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405447]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Deficit Myth: Modern Monetary Theory and the Birth of the People's Economy Author: Stephanie Kelton Narrator: Stephanie Kelton Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 52 minutes Release date: June 9, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.53 of Total 32 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 9 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A New York Times Bestseller The leading thinker and most visible public advocate of modern monetary theory -- the freshest and most important idea about economics in decades -- delivers a radically different, bold, new understanding for how to build a just and prosperous society. Stephanie Kelton's brilliant exploration of modern monetary theory (MMT) dramatically changes our understanding of how we can best deal with crucial issues ranging from poverty and inequality to creating jobs, expanding health care coverage, climate change, and building resilient infrastructure. Any ambitious proposal, however, inevitably runs into the buzz saw of how to find the money to pay for it, rooted in myths about deficits that are hobbling us as a country. Kelton busts through the myths that prevent us from taking action: that the federal government should budget like a household, that deficits will harm the next generation, crowd out private investment, and undermine long-term growth, and that entitlements are propelling us toward a grave fiscal crisis. MMT, as Kelton shows, shifts the terrain from narrow budgetary questions to one of broader economic and social benefits. With its important new ways of understanding money, taxes, and the critical role of deficit spending, MMT redefines how to responsibly use our resources so that we can maximize our potential as a society. MMT gives us the power to imagine a new politics and a new economy and move from a narrative of scarcity to one of opportunity. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405348 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405348]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Opportunity Knocks: How Hard Work, Community, and Business Can Improve Lives and End Poverty Author: Tim Scott Narrator: Tim Scott Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 57 minutes Release date: April 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.33 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this memoir about overcoming adversity in America, the U. S. Senator responsible for creating "opportunity zones" explains how hard work and community growth can drive businesses and end poverty. Senator Tim Scott knows adversity. As the son of a single mother from North Charleston, South Carolina, he struggled to get through school and had his dreams of a college football career shattered by a car wreck. But thanks to his mother and a few mentors along the way, he learned that "failure isn't failure unless you quit." He also learned that it's hard work and perseverance, not a government handout, that will get you ahead in life. Today, Senator Scott is the only black Republican in the Senate, and he believes that investment and commerce are the best ways to rebuild our most impoverished communities. This is the idea behind his signature piece of legislation, the "opportunity zones" program, which President Trump has strongly endorsed. The program provides tax incentives for businesses that invest in low-income urban areas, seeking to replace things like welfare and government assistance. In Opportunity Knocks, Senator Scott will tell his life story with a focus on adversity and opportunity. He will teach readers about the principles of hard work and hope while addressing the dangers of veering too far toward socialist policies. The book will also not shy away from discussions of racism and racial inequality in the United States and will recount some of Senator Scott's own brushes with racism as well as the many discussions he's had with people who want to help, including President Trump. Tim Scott Tue, 14 Apr 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405348 thebookvoice.com 7:57:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405348]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Opportunity Knocks: How Hard Work, Community, and Business Can Improve Lives and End Poverty Author: Tim Scott Narrator: Tim Scott Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 57 minutes Release date: April 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.33 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this memoir about overcoming adversity in America, the U. S. Senator responsible for creating "opportunity zones" explains how hard work and community growth can drive businesses and end poverty. Senator Tim Scott knows adversity. As the son of a single mother from North Charleston, South Carolina, he struggled to get through school and had his dreams of a college football career shattered by a car wreck. But thanks to his mother and a few mentors along the way, he learned that "failure isn't failure unless you quit." He also learned that it's hard work and perseverance, not a government handout, that will get you ahead in life. Today, Senator Scott is the only black Republican in the Senate, and he believes that investment and commerce are the best ways to rebuild our most impoverished communities. This is the idea behind his signature piece of legislation, the "opportunity zones" program, which President Trump has strongly endorsed. The program provides tax incentives for businesses that invest in low-income urban areas, seeking to replace things like welfare and government assistance. In Opportunity Knocks, Senator Scott will tell his life story with a focus on adversity and opportunity. He will teach readers about the principles of hard work and hope while addressing the dangers of veering too far toward socialist policies. The book will also not shy away from discussions of racism and racial inequality in the United States and will recount some of Senator Scott's own brushes with racism as well as the many discussions he's had with people who want to help, including President Trump. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405348]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Opportunity Knocks: How Hard Work, Community, and Business Can Improve Lives and End Poverty Author: Tim Scott Narrator: Tim Scott Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 57 minutes Release date: April 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.33 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this memoir about overcoming adversity in America, the U. S. Senator responsible for creating "opportunity zones" explains how hard work and community growth can drive businesses and end poverty. Senator Tim Scott knows adversity. As the son of a single mother from North Charleston, South Carolina, he struggled to get through school and had his dreams of a college football career shattered by a car wreck. But thanks to his mother and a few mentors along the way, he learned that "failure isn't failure unless you quit." He also learned that it's hard work and perseverance, not a government handout, that will get you ahead in life. Today, Senator Scott is the only black Republican in the Senate, and he believes that investment and commerce are the best ways to rebuild our most impoverished communities. This is the idea behind his signature piece of legislation, the "opportunity zones" program, which President Trump has strongly endorsed. The program provides tax incentives for businesses that invest in low-income urban areas, seeking to replace things like welfare and government assistance. In Opportunity Knocks, Senator Scott will tell his life story with a focus on adversity and opportunity. He will teach readers about the principles of hard work and hope while addressing the dangers of veering too far toward socialist policies. The book will also not shy away from discussions of racism and racial inequality in the United States and will recount some of Senator Scott's own brushes with racism as well as the many discussions he's had with people who want to help, including President Trump. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405324 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405324]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Reimagining Capitalism in a World on Fire Author: Rebecca Henderson Narrator: Rebecca Henderson, Lucinda Clare Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 40 minutes Release date: April 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A renowned Harvard professor debunks prevailing orthodoxy with a new intellectual foundation and a practical pathway forward for a system that has lost its moral and ethical foundation. Free market capitalism is one of humanity's greatest inventions and the greatest source of prosperity the world has ever seen. But this success has been costly. Capitalism is on the verge of destroying the planet and destabilizing society as wealth rushes to the top. The time for action is running short. Rebecca Henderson's rigorous research in economics, psychology, and organizational behavior, as well as her many years of work with companies around the world, give us a path forward. She debunks the worldview that the only purpose of business is to make money and maximize shareholder value. She shows that we have failed to reimagine capitalism so that it is not only an engine of prosperity but also a system that is in harmony with environmental realities, the striving for social justice, and the demands of truly democratic institutions. Henderson's deep understanding of how change takes place, combined with fascinating in-depth stories of companies that have made the first steps towards reimagining capitalism, provide inspiring insight into what capitalism can be. Together with rich discussions of important role of government and how the worlds of finance, governance, and leadership must also evolve, Henderson provides the pragmatic foundation for navigating a world faced with unprecedented challenge, but also with extraordinary opportunity for those who can get it right. Rebecca Henderson Tue, 28 Apr 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405324 thebookvoice.com 10:40:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405324]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Reimagining Capitalism in a World on Fire Author: Rebecca Henderson Narrator: Rebecca Henderson, Lucinda Clare Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 40 minutes Release date: April 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A renowned Harvard professor debunks prevailing orthodoxy with a new intellectual foundation and a practical pathway forward for a system that has lost its moral and ethical foundation. Free market capitalism is one of humanity's greatest inventions and the greatest source of prosperity the world has ever seen. But this success has been costly. Capitalism is on the verge of destroying the planet and destabilizing society as wealth rushes to the top. The time for action is running short. Rebecca Henderson's rigorous research in economics, psychology, and organizational behavior, as well as her many years of work with companies around the world, give us a path forward. She debunks the worldview that the only purpose of business is to make money and maximize shareholder value. She shows that we have failed to reimagine capitalism so that it is not only an engine of prosperity but also a system that is in harmony with environmental realities, the striving for social justice, and the demands of truly democratic institutions. Henderson's deep understanding of how change takes place, combined with fascinating in-depth stories of companies that have made the first steps towards reimagining capitalism, provide inspiring insight into what capitalism can be. Together with rich discussions of important role of government and how the worlds of finance, governance, and leadership must also evolve, Henderson provides the pragmatic foundation for navigating a world faced with unprecedented challenge, but also with extraordinary opportunity for those who can get it right. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405324]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Reimagining Capitalism in a World on Fire Author: Rebecca Henderson Narrator: Rebecca Henderson, Lucinda Clare Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 40 minutes Release date: April 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A renowned Harvard professor debunks prevailing orthodoxy with a new intellectual foundation and a practical pathway forward for a system that has lost its moral and ethical foundation. Free market capitalism is one of humanity's greatest inventions and the greatest source of prosperity the world has ever seen. But this success has been costly. Capitalism is on the verge of destroying the planet and destabilizing society as wealth rushes to the top. The time for action is running short. Rebecca Henderson's rigorous research in economics, psychology, and organizational behavior, as well as her many years of work with companies around the world, give us a path forward. She debunks the worldview that the only purpose of business is to make money and maximize shareholder value. She shows that we have failed to reimagine capitalism so that it is not only an engine of prosperity but also a system that is in harmony with environmental realities, the striving for social justice, and the demands of truly democratic institutions. Henderson's deep understanding of how change takes place, combined with fascinating in-depth stories of companies that have made the first steps towards reimagining capitalism, provide inspiring insight into what capitalism can be. Together with rich discussions of important role of government and how the worlds of finance, governance, and leadership must also evolve, Henderson provides the pragmatic foundation for navigating a world faced with unprecedented challenge, but also with extraordinary opportunity for those who can get it right. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405295 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405295]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Sum of the People: How the Census Has Shaped Nations, from the Ancient World to the Modern Age Author: Andrew Whitby Narrator: David Piggott Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 10 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This fascinating three-thousand-year history of the census traces the making of the modern survey and explores its political power in the age of big data and surveillance. In April 2020, the United States will embark on what has been called 'the largest peacetime mobilization in American history': the decennial population census. It is part of a tradition of counting people that goes back at least three millennia and now spans the globe. In The Sum of the People, data scientist Andrew Whitby traces the remarkable history of the census, from ancient China and the Roman Empire, through revolutionary America and Nazi-occupied Europe, to the steps of the Supreme Court. Marvels of democracy, instruments of exclusion, and, at worst, tools of tyranny and genocide, censuses have always profoundly shaped the societies we've built. Today, as we struggle to resist the creep of mass surveillance, the traditional census -- direct and transparent -- may offer the seeds of an alternative. Andrew Whitby Tue, 31 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405295 thebookvoice.com 11:10:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405295]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Sum of the People: How the Census Has Shaped Nations, from the Ancient World to the Modern Age Author: Andrew Whitby Narrator: David Piggott Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 10 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This fascinating three-thousand-year history of the census traces the making of the modern survey and explores its political power in the age of big data and surveillance. In April 2020, the United States will embark on what has been called 'the largest peacetime mobilization in American history': the decennial population census. It is part of a tradition of counting people that goes back at least three millennia and now spans the globe. In The Sum of the People, data scientist Andrew Whitby traces the remarkable history of the census, from ancient China and the Roman Empire, through revolutionary America and Nazi-occupied Europe, to the steps of the Supreme Court. Marvels of democracy, instruments of exclusion, and, at worst, tools of tyranny and genocide, censuses have always profoundly shaped the societies we've built. Today, as we struggle to resist the creep of mass surveillance, the traditional census -- direct and transparent -- may offer the seeds of an alternative. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405295]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Sum of the People: How the Census Has Shaped Nations, from the Ancient World to the Modern Age Author: Andrew Whitby Narrator: David Piggott Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 10 minutes Release date: March 31, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This fascinating three-thousand-year history of the census traces the making of the modern survey and explores its political power in the age of big data and surveillance. In April 2020, the United States will embark on what has been called 'the largest peacetime mobilization in American history': the decennial population census. It is part of a tradition of counting people that goes back at least three millennia and now spans the globe. In The Sum of the People, data scientist Andrew Whitby traces the remarkable history of the census, from ancient China and the Roman Empire, through revolutionary America and Nazi-occupied Europe, to the steps of the Supreme Court. Marvels of democracy, instruments of exclusion, and, at worst, tools of tyranny and genocide, censuses have always profoundly shaped the societies we've built. Today, as we struggle to resist the creep of mass surveillance, the traditional census -- direct and transparent -- may offer the seeds of an alternative. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405261 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405261]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Not to Scale: How the Small Becomes Large, the Large Becomes Unthinkable, and the Unthinkable Becomes Possible Author: Jamer Hunt Narrator: Jamie Renell Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 45 minutes Release date: March 3, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From research to practical application, Not To Scale explores an influential theory in an accessible way. The dictionary defines 'scale' as a range of numbers, used as a system to measure or compare things. We use this concept in every aspect of our lives-it is essential to innovation, helps us weigh options, and shapes our understanding of the impact of our actions. In Not to Scale, Jamer Hunt investigates the complications of scale in the digital age, highlighting an interesting paradox: We now have a world of information at our fingertips, yet ironically the more informed we have become, the more overwhelmed we feel. The global effects of our daily choices (Paper or plastic? Own or lease? Shop local or buy online?) remain difficult for us to comprehend, and solutions to large-scale national and international issues feel inconceivable. Hunt explains how these challenges are intimately tied to a new logic of scale and provides readers with survival skills for the twenty-first century. By taking massive problems and shrinking them down to size, we can use scale to effect positive change and adapt to the modern era. Connecting our smallest decisions to the grand scheme of things, Not to Scale is a fascinating and empowering guide to comprehending and navigating the high stakes often obscured from our view. Jamer Hunt Tue, 03 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405261 thebookvoice.com 5:45:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405261]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Not to Scale: How the Small Becomes Large, the Large Becomes Unthinkable, and the Unthinkable Becomes Possible Author: Jamer Hunt Narrator: Jamie Renell Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 45 minutes Release date: March 3, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From research to practical application, Not To Scale explores an influential theory in an accessible way. The dictionary defines 'scale' as a range of numbers, used as a system to measure or compare things. We use this concept in every aspect of our lives-it is essential to innovation, helps us weigh options, and shapes our understanding of the impact of our actions. In Not to Scale, Jamer Hunt investigates the complications of scale in the digital age, highlighting an interesting paradox: We now have a world of information at our fingertips, yet ironically the more informed we have become, the more overwhelmed we feel. The global effects of our daily choices (Paper or plastic? Own or lease? Shop local or buy online?) remain difficult for us to comprehend, and solutions to large-scale national and international issues feel inconceivable. Hunt explains how these challenges are intimately tied to a new logic of scale and provides readers with survival skills for the twenty-first century. By taking massive problems and shrinking them down to size, we can use scale to effect positive change and adapt to the modern era. Connecting our smallest decisions to the grand scheme of things, Not to Scale is a fascinating and empowering guide to comprehending and navigating the high stakes often obscured from our view. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405261]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Not to Scale: How the Small Becomes Large, the Large Becomes Unthinkable, and the Unthinkable Becomes Possible Author: Jamer Hunt Narrator: Jamie Renell Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 45 minutes Release date: March 3, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: From research to practical application, Not To Scale explores an influential theory in an accessible way. The dictionary defines 'scale' as a range of numbers, used as a system to measure or compare things. We use this concept in every aspect of our lives-it is essential to innovation, helps us weigh options, and shapes our understanding of the impact of our actions. In Not to Scale, Jamer Hunt investigates the complications of scale in the digital age, highlighting an interesting paradox: We now have a world of information at our fingertips, yet ironically the more informed we have become, the more overwhelmed we feel. The global effects of our daily choices (Paper or plastic? Own or lease? Shop local or buy online?) remain difficult for us to comprehend, and solutions to large-scale national and international issues feel inconceivable. Hunt explains how these challenges are intimately tied to a new logic of scale and provides readers with survival skills for the twenty-first century. By taking massive problems and shrinking them down to size, we can use scale to effect positive change and adapt to the modern era. Connecting our smallest decisions to the grand scheme of things, Not to Scale is a fascinating and empowering guide to comprehending and navigating the high stakes often obscured from our view. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405210 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405210]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Sabotage: The Hidden Nature of Finance Author: Ronen Palan, Anastasia Nesvetailova Narrator: Jared Zak Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 18 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: I don't like the word 'sabotage','--a former Goldman Sachs trader admitted. 'It's just harsh.... Though, frankly, how else do you make money in this business...I mean, real money.' The fundamental motive for financial innovation is not to make the system work better, but to avoid regulation and oversight. This is not a bug of the financial system, but a built-in feature. The president of the US is not a tax avoider because he is an especially fraudulent financier; he's a tax avoider because he is a wealthy man in a system premised on such deceit. Finance is an industry of sabotage. This book is a brilliant, intellectual detective story that traces the origins of financial sabotage, starting with the work of a prescient American economist who saw the capacity for banks and businesses to dissemble and profit as early as the 1920s. What was accomplished modestly in the first half of the 20th century became a booming global industry in the 1980s. Financialization took over everything, culminating in instruments so complex and confusing their own creators were being destroyed by them in 2008. With each financial bust, people expect to hear who the culprit was, and cynically know to not expect much punishment to ever reach them. But the innovation of this book is to show that each individual gaming the system isn't a crook the whole system is sabotage. Ronen Palan, Anastasia Nesvetailova Tue, 28 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405210 thebookvoice.com 6:18:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405210]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Sabotage: The Hidden Nature of Finance Author: Ronen Palan, Anastasia Nesvetailova Narrator: Jared Zak Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 18 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: I don't like the word 'sabotage','--a former Goldman Sachs trader admitted. 'It's just harsh.... Though, frankly, how else do you make money in this business...I mean, real money.' The fundamental motive for financial innovation is not to make the system work better, but to avoid regulation and oversight. This is not a bug of the financial system, but a built-in feature. The president of the US is not a tax avoider because he is an especially fraudulent financier; he's a tax avoider because he is a wealthy man in a system premised on such deceit. Finance is an industry of sabotage. This book is a brilliant, intellectual detective story that traces the origins of financial sabotage, starting with the work of a prescient American economist who saw the capacity for banks and businesses to dissemble and profit as early as the 1920s. What was accomplished modestly in the first half of the 20th century became a booming global industry in the 1980s. Financialization took over everything, culminating in instruments so complex and confusing their own creators were being destroyed by them in 2008. With each financial bust, people expect to hear who the culprit was, and cynically know to not expect much punishment to ever reach them. But the innovation of this book is to show that each individual gaming the system isn't a crook the whole system is sabotage. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405210]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Sabotage: The Hidden Nature of Finance Author: Ronen Palan, Anastasia Nesvetailova Narrator: Jared Zak Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 18 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: I don't like the word 'sabotage','--a former Goldman Sachs trader admitted. 'It's just harsh.... Though, frankly, how else do you make money in this business...I mean, real money.' The fundamental motive for financial innovation is not to make the system work better, but to avoid regulation and oversight. This is not a bug of the financial system, but a built-in feature. The president of the US is not a tax avoider because he is an especially fraudulent financier; he's a tax avoider because he is a wealthy man in a system premised on such deceit. Finance is an industry of sabotage. This book is a brilliant, intellectual detective story that traces the origins of financial sabotage, starting with the work of a prescient American economist who saw the capacity for banks and businesses to dissemble and profit as early as the 1920s. What was accomplished modestly in the first half of the 20th century became a booming global industry in the 1980s. Financialization took over everything, culminating in instruments so complex and confusing their own creators were being destroyed by them in 2008. With each financial bust, people expect to hear who the culprit was, and cynically know to not expect much punishment to ever reach them. But the innovation of this book is to show that each individual gaming the system isn't a crook the whole system is sabotage. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405082 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405082]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Macroeconomics Author: Felipe B. Larrain Narrator: Gary Tiedemann Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 5 minutes Release date: March 17, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Macroeconomics takes a broad perspective on the economy of a country or region; it studies economic changes in the aggregate, collecting data on production, unemployment, inflation, consumption, investment, trade, and other aspects of national and international economic life. Policymakers depend on macroeconomists' knowledge when making decisions about such issues as taxes and the public budget, monetary and exchange rate policies, and trade policies—all of which, in turn, affect decisions made by individuals and businesses. This volume in the MIT Press Essential Knowledge series offers an introduction to the basics of macroeconomics accessible to the noneconomist. The author, an academic economist and two-time Chilean Finance Minister, devotes a substantial part of his analysis to economic development, explaining why some countries achieve continuing economic growth while others become stagnant. He discusses the links between economic activity and employment; employment and unemployment rates; factors behind economic growth; money, inflation, and exchange rate systems; fiscal deficits; balance of payment crises; consumption and savings; investment decisions; fiscal policy; and the process of globalization and its macroeconomic implications. Felipe B. Larrain Tue, 17 Mar 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405082 thebookvoice.com 6:5:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405082]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Macroeconomics Author: Felipe B. Larrain Narrator: Gary Tiedemann Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 5 minutes Release date: March 17, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Macroeconomics takes a broad perspective on the economy of a country or region; it studies economic changes in the aggregate, collecting data on production, unemployment, inflation, consumption, investment, trade, and other aspects of national and international economic life. Policymakers depend on macroeconomists' knowledge when making decisions about such issues as taxes and the public budget, monetary and exchange rate policies, and trade policies—all of which, in turn, affect decisions made by individuals and businesses. This volume in the MIT Press Essential Knowledge series offers an introduction to the basics of macroeconomics accessible to the noneconomist. The author, an academic economist and two-time Chilean Finance Minister, devotes a substantial part of his analysis to economic development, explaining why some countries achieve continuing economic growth while others become stagnant. He discusses the links between economic activity and employment; employment and unemployment rates; factors behind economic growth; money, inflation, and exchange rate systems; fiscal deficits; balance of payment crises; consumption and savings; investment decisions; fiscal policy; and the process of globalization and its macroeconomic implications. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/405082]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Macroeconomics Author: Felipe B. Larrain Narrator: Gary Tiedemann Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 5 minutes Release date: March 17, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 1 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Macroeconomics takes a broad perspective on the economy of a country or region; it studies economic changes in the aggregate, collecting data on production, unemployment, inflation, consumption, investment, trade, and other aspects of national and international economic life. Policymakers depend on macroeconomists' knowledge when making decisions about such issues as taxes and the public budget, monetary and exchange rate policies, and trade policies—all of which, in turn, affect decisions made by individuals and businesses. This volume in the MIT Press Essential Knowledge series offers an introduction to the basics of macroeconomics accessible to the noneconomist. The author, an academic economist and two-time Chilean Finance Minister, devotes a substantial part of his analysis to economic development, explaining why some countries achieve continuing economic growth while others become stagnant. He discusses the links between economic activity and employment; employment and unemployment rates; factors behind economic growth; money, inflation, and exchange rate systems; fiscal deficits; balance of payment crises; consumption and savings; investment decisions; fiscal policy; and the process of globalization and its macroeconomic implications. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404720 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404720]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How Innovation Works Author: Matt Ridley Narrator: Matt Ridley Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 10 minutes Release date: June 25, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: ‘Ridley is spot-on when it comes to the vital ingredients for success’ Sir James Dyson Building on his bestseller The Rational Optimist, Matt Ridley chronicles the history of innovation, and how we need to change our thinking on the subject. Innovation is the main event of the modern age, the reason we experience both dramatic improvements in our living standards and unsettling changes in our society. It is innovation that will shape the twenty-first century. Yet innovation remains a mysterious process, poorly understood by policy makers and businessmen alike. Matt Ridley argues that we need to see innovation as an incremental, bottom-up, fortuitous process that happens as a direct result of the human habit of exchange, rather than an orderly, top-down process developing according to a plan. Innovation is crucially different from invention, because it is the turning of inventions into things of practical and affordable use to people. It speeds up in some sectors and slows down in others. It is always a collective, collaborative phenomenon, involving trial and error, not a matter of lonely genius. It still cannot be modelled properly by economists, but it can easily be discouraged by politicians. Far from there being too much innovation, we may be on the brink of an innovation famine. Ridley derives these and other lessons from the lively stories of scores of innovations – from steam engines to search engines – how they started and why they succeeded or failed. Matt Ridley Thu, 25 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404720 thebookvoice.com 13:10:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404720]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How Innovation Works Author: Matt Ridley Narrator: Matt Ridley Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 10 minutes Release date: June 25, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: ‘Ridley is spot-on when it comes to the vital ingredients for success’ Sir James Dyson Building on his bestseller The Rational Optimist, Matt Ridley chronicles the history of innovation, and how we need to change our thinking on the subject. Innovation is the main event of the modern age, the reason we experience both dramatic improvements in our living standards and unsettling changes in our society. It is innovation that will shape the twenty-first century. Yet innovation remains a mysterious process, poorly understood by policy makers and businessmen alike. Matt Ridley argues that we need to see innovation as an incremental, bottom-up, fortuitous process that happens as a direct result of the human habit of exchange, rather than an orderly, top-down process developing according to a plan. Innovation is crucially different from invention, because it is the turning of inventions into things of practical and affordable use to people. It speeds up in some sectors and slows down in others. It is always a collective, collaborative phenomenon, involving trial and error, not a matter of lonely genius. It still cannot be modelled properly by economists, but it can easily be discouraged by politicians. Far from there being too much innovation, we may be on the brink of an innovation famine. Ridley derives these and other lessons from the lively stories of scores of innovations – from steam engines to search engines – how they started and why they succeeded or failed. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404720]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How Innovation Works Author: Matt Ridley Narrator: Matt Ridley Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 10 minutes Release date: June 25, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: ‘Ridley is spot-on when it comes to the vital ingredients for success’ Sir James Dyson Building on his bestseller The Rational Optimist, Matt Ridley chronicles the history of innovation, and how we need to change our thinking on the subject. Innovation is the main event of the modern age, the reason we experience both dramatic improvements in our living standards and unsettling changes in our society. It is innovation that will shape the twenty-first century. Yet innovation remains a mysterious process, poorly understood by policy makers and businessmen alike. Matt Ridley argues that we need to see innovation as an incremental, bottom-up, fortuitous process that happens as a direct result of the human habit of exchange, rather than an orderly, top-down process developing according to a plan. Innovation is crucially different from invention, because it is the turning of inventions into things of practical and affordable use to people. It speeds up in some sectors and slows down in others. It is always a collective, collaborative phenomenon, involving trial and error, not a matter of lonely genius. It still cannot be modelled properly by economists, but it can easily be discouraged by politicians. Far from there being too much innovation, we may be on the brink of an innovation famine. Ridley derives these and other lessons from the lively stories of scores of innovations – from steam engines to search engines – how they started and why they succeeded or failed. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404040 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404040]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: American Oligarchs: The Kushners, the Trumps, and the Marriage of Money and Power Author: Andrea Bernstein Narrator: Andrea Bernstein Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 38 minutes Release date: January 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A New York Times Bestseller A multigenerational saga of two families, who rose from immigrant roots to the pinnacle of wealth and power, that tracks the unraveling of American democracy. In American Oligarchs, award-winning investigative journalist Andrea Bernstein tells the story of the Trump and Kushner families like never before. Their journey to the White House is a story of survival and loss, crime and betrayal, that stretches from the Klondike Gold Rush, through Nazi-occupied Poland and across the American Century, to our new gilded age. In building and maintaining their dynastic wealth, these families came to embody the rising nationalism and inequality that has pushed the United States to the brink of oligarchy. Building on her landmark reporting for the acclaimed podcast Trump, Inc. and The New Yorker, Bernstein’s painstaking detective work brings to light new information about the families’ arrival as immigrants to America, their paths to success, and the business and personal lives of the president and his closest family members. Bernstein traces how the two families ruthlessly harnessed New York and New Jersey machine politics to gain valuable tax breaks and grew rich on federal programs that bolstered the middle class. She shows how the Trump Organization, denied credit by American banks, turned to shady international capital. She reveals astonishing new details about Charles Kushner’s attempts to ensnare his brother-in-law with a prostitute and explores how Jared Kushner and his father used a venerable New York newspaper to bolster their business empire. Drawing on more than two hundred interviews and more than one hundred thousand pages of documents, many previously unseen or long forgotten, Bernstein shows how the Trumps and the Kushners repeatedly broke rules and then leveraged secrecy, intimidation, and prosecutorial and judicial power to avoid legal consequences. The result is a compelling narrative that details how the Trump and Kushner dynasties encouraged and profited from a system of corruption, dark money, and influence trading, and that reveals the historical turning points and decisions—on taxation, regulation, white-collar crime, and campaign finance laws—that have brought us to where we are today. Andrea Bernstein Tue, 14 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404040 thebookvoice.com 15:38:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404040]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: American Oligarchs: The Kushners, the Trumps, and the Marriage of Money and Power Author: Andrea Bernstein Narrator: Andrea Bernstein Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 38 minutes Release date: January 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A New York Times Bestseller A multigenerational saga of two families, who rose from immigrant roots to the pinnacle of wealth and power, that tracks the unraveling of American democracy. In American Oligarchs, award-winning investigative journalist Andrea Bernstein tells the story of the Trump and Kushner families like never before. Their journey to the White House is a story of survival and loss, crime and betrayal, that stretches from the Klondike Gold Rush, through Nazi-occupied Poland and across the American Century, to our new gilded age. In building and maintaining their dynastic wealth, these families came to embody the rising nationalism and inequality that has pushed the United States to the brink of oligarchy. Building on her landmark reporting for the acclaimed podcast Trump, Inc. and The New Yorker, Bernstein’s painstaking detective work brings to light new information about the families’ arrival as immigrants to America, their paths to success, and the business and personal lives of the president and his closest family members. Bernstein traces how the two families ruthlessly harnessed New York and New Jersey machine politics to gain valuable tax breaks and grew rich on federal programs that bolstered the middle class. She shows how the Trump Organization, denied credit by American banks, turned to shady international capital. She reveals astonishing new details about Charles Kushner’s attempts to ensnare his brother-in-law with a prostitute and explores how Jared Kushner and his father used a venerable New York newspaper to bolster their business empire. Drawing on more than two hundred interviews and more than one hundred thousand pages of documents, many previously unseen or long forgotten, Bernstein shows how the Trumps and the Kushners repeatedly broke rules and then leveraged secrecy, intimidation, and prosecutorial and judicial power to avoid legal consequences. The result is a compelling narrative that details how the Trump and Kushner dynasties encouraged and profited from a system of corruption, dark money, and influence trading, and that reveals the historical turning points and decisions—on taxation, regulation, white-collar crime, and campaign finance laws—that have brought us to where we are today. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/404040]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: American Oligarchs: The Kushners, the Trumps, and the Marriage of Money and Power Author: Andrea Bernstein Narrator: Andrea Bernstein Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 38 minutes Release date: January 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: A New York Times Bestseller A multigenerational saga of two families, who rose from immigrant roots to the pinnacle of wealth and power, that tracks the unraveling of American democracy. In American Oligarchs, award-winning investigative journalist Andrea Bernstein tells the story of the Trump and Kushner families like never before. Their journey to the White House is a story of survival and loss, crime and betrayal, that stretches from the Klondike Gold Rush, through Nazi-occupied Poland and across the American Century, to our new gilded age. In building and maintaining their dynastic wealth, these families came to embody the rising nationalism and inequality that has pushed the United States to the brink of oligarchy. Building on her landmark reporting for the acclaimed podcast Trump, Inc. and The New Yorker, Bernstein’s painstaking detective work brings to light new information about the families’ arrival as immigrants to America, their paths to success, and the business and personal lives of the president and his closest family members. Bernstein traces how the two families ruthlessly harnessed New York and New Jersey machine politics to gain valuable tax breaks and grew rich on federal programs that bolstered the middle class. She shows how the Trump Organization, denied credit by American banks, turned to shady international capital. She reveals astonishing new details about Charles Kushner’s attempts to ensnare his brother-in-law with a prostitute and explores how Jared Kushner and his father used a venerable New York newspaper to bolster their business empire. Drawing on more than two hundred interviews and more than one hundred thousand pages of documents, many previously unseen or long forgotten, Bernstein shows how the Trumps and the Kushners repeatedly broke rules and then leveraged secrecy, intimidation, and prosecutorial and judicial power to avoid legal consequences. The result is a compelling narrative that details how the Trump and Kushner dynasties encouraged and profited from a system of corruption, dark money, and influence trading, and that reveals the historical turning points and decisions—on taxation, regulation, white-collar crime, and campaign finance laws—that have brought us to where we are today. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/403847 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/403847]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Prophetic City: Houston on the Cusp of a Changing America Author: Stephen L. Klineberg Narrator: Danny Campbell Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 34 minutes Release date: June 2, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Sociologist Stephen Klineberg presents “a trailblazing study” (Kirkus Reviews) that shows how the city of Houston has emerged as a microcosm for America’s future—based on a meticulously researched, thirty-eight-year study of its changing economic, demographic, and cultural landscapes. Houston, Texas, long thought of as a traditionally blue-collar black/white Southern city, has transformed into one of the most ethnically and culturally diverse metro areas in the nation, surpassing even New York by some measures. With a diversifying economy and large numbers of both highly skilled technical jobs in engineering and medicine and low-skilled minimum-wage jobs in construction, restaurant work, and personal services, Houston has become a magnet for the new divergent streams of immigration that are transforming America in the 21st century. And thanks to an annual systematic survey conducted over the past thirty-eight years, the ongoing changes in attitudes, beliefs, and life experiences have been measured and studied, creating a compelling data-driven map of the challenges and opportunities that are facing Houston and the rest of the country. In Prophetic City, we’ll meet some of the new Americans, including a family who moved to Houston from Mexico in the early 1980s and is still trying to find work that pays more than poverty wages. There’s a young man born to highly educated Indian parents in an affluent Houston suburb who grows up to become a doctor in the world’s largest medical complex, as well as a white man who struggles with being prematurely pushed out of the workforce when his company downsizes. “Eye-opening and accessible” (Publishers Weekly), this timely and groundbreaking book tracks the progress of an American city like never before. Houston is at the center of the rapid changes that have redefined the nature of American society itself in the new century, and is where, for better or worse, we can see the American future emerging. Stephen L. Klineberg Tue, 02 Jun 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/403847 thebookvoice.com 9:34:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/403847]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Prophetic City: Houston on the Cusp of a Changing America Author: Stephen L. Klineberg Narrator: Danny Campbell Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 34 minutes Release date: June 2, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Sociologist Stephen Klineberg presents “a trailblazing study” (Kirkus Reviews) that shows how the city of Houston has emerged as a microcosm for America’s future—based on a meticulously researched, thirty-eight-year study of its changing economic, demographic, and cultural landscapes. Houston, Texas, long thought of as a traditionally blue-collar black/white Southern city, has transformed into one of the most ethnically and culturally diverse metro areas in the nation, surpassing even New York by some measures. With a diversifying economy and large numbers of both highly skilled technical jobs in engineering and medicine and low-skilled minimum-wage jobs in construction, restaurant work, and personal services, Houston has become a magnet for the new divergent streams of immigration that are transforming America in the 21st century. And thanks to an annual systematic survey conducted over the past thirty-eight years, the ongoing changes in attitudes, beliefs, and life experiences have been measured and studied, creating a compelling data-driven map of the challenges and opportunities that are facing Houston and the rest of the country. In Prophetic City, we’ll meet some of the new Americans, including a family who moved to Houston from Mexico in the early 1980s and is still trying to find work that pays more than poverty wages. There’s a young man born to highly educated Indian parents in an affluent Houston suburb who grows up to become a doctor in the world’s largest medical complex, as well as a white man who struggles with being prematurely pushed out of the workforce when his company downsizes. “Eye-opening and accessible” (Publishers Weekly), this timely and groundbreaking book tracks the progress of an American city like never before. Houston is at the center of the rapid changes that have redefined the nature of American society itself in the new century, and is where, for better or worse, we can see the American future emerging. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/403847]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Prophetic City: Houston on the Cusp of a Changing America Author: Stephen L. Klineberg Narrator: Danny Campbell Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 34 minutes Release date: June 2, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Sociologist Stephen Klineberg presents “a trailblazing study” (Kirkus Reviews) that shows how the city of Houston has emerged as a microcosm for America’s future—based on a meticulously researched, thirty-eight-year study of its changing economic, demographic, and cultural landscapes. Houston, Texas, long thought of as a traditionally blue-collar black/white Southern city, has transformed into one of the most ethnically and culturally diverse metro areas in the nation, surpassing even New York by some measures. With a diversifying economy and large numbers of both highly skilled technical jobs in engineering and medicine and low-skilled minimum-wage jobs in construction, restaurant work, and personal services, Houston has become a magnet for the new divergent streams of immigration that are transforming America in the 21st century. And thanks to an annual systematic survey conducted over the past thirty-eight years, the ongoing changes in attitudes, beliefs, and life experiences have been measured and studied, creating a compelling data-driven map of the challenges and opportunities that are facing Houston and the rest of the country. In Prophetic City, we’ll meet some of the new Americans, including a family who moved to Houston from Mexico in the early 1980s and is still trying to find work that pays more than poverty wages. There’s a young man born to highly educated Indian parents in an affluent Houston suburb who grows up to become a doctor in the world’s largest medical complex, as well as a white man who struggles with being prematurely pushed out of the workforce when his company downsizes. “Eye-opening and accessible” (Publishers Weekly), this timely and groundbreaking book tracks the progress of an American city like never before. Houston is at the center of the rapid changes that have redefined the nature of American society itself in the new century, and is where, for better or worse, we can see the American future emerging. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401524 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401524]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Good Economics for Hard Times Author: Esther Duflo, Abhijit V. Banerjee Narrator: James Lurie Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 46 minutes Release date: November 12, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.55 of Total 11 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The winners of the Nobel Prize show how economics, when done right, can help us solve the thorniest social and political problems of our day. Figuring out how to deal with today's critical economic problems is perhaps the great challenge of our time. Much greater than space travel or perhaps even the next revolutionary medical breakthrough, what is at stake is the whole idea of the good life as we have known it. Immigration and inequality, globalization and technological disruption, slowing growth and accelerating climate change--these are sources of great anxiety across the world, from New Delhi and Dakar to Paris and Washington, DC. The resources to address these challenges are there--what we lack are ideas that will help us jump the wall of disagreement and distrust that divides us. If we succeed, history will remember our era with gratitude; if we fail, the potential losses are incalculable. In this revolutionary book, renowned MIT economists Abhijit V. Banerjee and Esther Duflo take on this challenge, building on cutting-edge research in economics explained with lucidity and grace. Original, provocative, and urgent, Good Economics for Hard Times makes a persuasive case for an intelligent interventionism and a society built on compassion and respect. It is an extraordinary achievement, one that shines a light to help us appreciate and understand our precariously balanced world. Esther Duflo, Abhijit V. Banerjee Tue, 12 Nov 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401524 thebookvoice.com 14:46:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401524]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Good Economics for Hard Times Author: Esther Duflo, Abhijit V. Banerjee Narrator: James Lurie Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 46 minutes Release date: November 12, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.55 of Total 11 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The winners of the Nobel Prize show how economics, when done right, can help us solve the thorniest social and political problems of our day. Figuring out how to deal with today's critical economic problems is perhaps the great challenge of our time. Much greater than space travel or perhaps even the next revolutionary medical breakthrough, what is at stake is the whole idea of the good life as we have known it. Immigration and inequality, globalization and technological disruption, slowing growth and accelerating climate change--these are sources of great anxiety across the world, from New Delhi and Dakar to Paris and Washington, DC. The resources to address these challenges are there--what we lack are ideas that will help us jump the wall of disagreement and distrust that divides us. If we succeed, history will remember our era with gratitude; if we fail, the potential losses are incalculable. In this revolutionary book, renowned MIT economists Abhijit V. Banerjee and Esther Duflo take on this challenge, building on cutting-edge research in economics explained with lucidity and grace. Original, provocative, and urgent, Good Economics for Hard Times makes a persuasive case for an intelligent interventionism and a society built on compassion and respect. It is an extraordinary achievement, one that shines a light to help us appreciate and understand our precariously balanced world. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401524]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Good Economics for Hard Times Author: Esther Duflo, Abhijit V. Banerjee Narrator: James Lurie Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 46 minutes Release date: November 12, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.55 of Total 11 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The winners of the Nobel Prize show how economics, when done right, can help us solve the thorniest social and political problems of our day. Figuring out how to deal with today's critical economic problems is perhaps the great challenge of our time. Much greater than space travel or perhaps even the next revolutionary medical breakthrough, what is at stake is the whole idea of the good life as we have known it. Immigration and inequality, globalization and technological disruption, slowing growth and accelerating climate change--these are sources of great anxiety across the world, from New Delhi and Dakar to Paris and Washington, DC. The resources to address these challenges are there--what we lack are ideas that will help us jump the wall of disagreement and distrust that divides us. If we succeed, history will remember our era with gratitude; if we fail, the potential losses are incalculable. In this revolutionary book, renowned MIT economists Abhijit V. Banerjee and Esther Duflo take on this challenge, building on cutting-edge research in economics explained with lucidity and grace. Original, provocative, and urgent, Good Economics for Hard Times makes a persuasive case for an intelligent interventionism and a society built on compassion and respect. It is an extraordinary achievement, one that shines a light to help us appreciate and understand our precariously balanced world. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401353 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401353]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Fossil Capital: The Rise of Steam Power and the Roots of Global Warming Author: Andreas Malm Narrator: Liam Gerrard Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: How capitalism first promoted fossil fuels with the rise of steam power The more we know about the catastrophic implications of climate change, the more fossil fuels we burn. How did we end up in this mess? In this masterful new history, Andreas Malm claims it all began in Britain with the rise of steam power. But why did manufacturers turn from traditional sources of power, notably water mills, to an engine fired by coal? Contrary to established views, steam offered neither cheaper nor more abundant energy—but rather superior control of subordinate labor. Animated by fossil fuels, capital could concentrate production at the most profitable sites and during the most convenient hours, as it continues to do today. Sweeping from nineteenth-century Manchester to the emissions explosion in China, from the original triumph of coal to the stalled shift to renewables, this study hones in on the burning heart of capital and demonstrates, in unprecedented depth, that turning down the heat will mean a radical overthrow of the current economic order. Andreas Malm Tue, 18 Feb 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401353 thebookvoice.com 18:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401353]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Fossil Capital: The Rise of Steam Power and the Roots of Global Warming Author: Andreas Malm Narrator: Liam Gerrard Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: How capitalism first promoted fossil fuels with the rise of steam power The more we know about the catastrophic implications of climate change, the more fossil fuels we burn. How did we end up in this mess? In this masterful new history, Andreas Malm claims it all began in Britain with the rise of steam power. But why did manufacturers turn from traditional sources of power, notably water mills, to an engine fired by coal? Contrary to established views, steam offered neither cheaper nor more abundant energy—but rather superior control of subordinate labor. Animated by fossil fuels, capital could concentrate production at the most profitable sites and during the most convenient hours, as it continues to do today. Sweeping from nineteenth-century Manchester to the emissions explosion in China, from the original triumph of coal to the stalled shift to renewables, this study hones in on the burning heart of capital and demonstrates, in unprecedented depth, that turning down the heat will mean a radical overthrow of the current economic order. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/401353]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Fossil Capital: The Rise of Steam Power and the Roots of Global Warming Author: Andreas Malm Narrator: Liam Gerrard Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 18 hours 26 minutes Release date: February 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.5 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: How capitalism first promoted fossil fuels with the rise of steam power The more we know about the catastrophic implications of climate change, the more fossil fuels we burn. How did we end up in this mess? In this masterful new history, Andreas Malm claims it all began in Britain with the rise of steam power. But why did manufacturers turn from traditional sources of power, notably water mills, to an engine fired by coal? Contrary to established views, steam offered neither cheaper nor more abundant energy—but rather superior control of subordinate labor. Animated by fossil fuels, capital could concentrate production at the most profitable sites and during the most convenient hours, as it continues to do today. Sweeping from nineteenth-century Manchester to the emissions explosion in China, from the original triumph of coal to the stalled shift to renewables, this study hones in on the burning heart of capital and demonstrates, in unprecedented depth, that turning down the heat will mean a radical overthrow of the current economic order. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400734 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400734]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How to Avoid a Climate Disaster: The Solutions We Have and the Breakthroughs We Need Author: Bill Gates Narrator: Wil Wheaton, Bill Gates Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 11 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.11 of Total 103 Ratings of Narrator: 4.1 of Total 21 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this urgent, authoritative book, Bill Gates sets out a wide-ranging, practical--and accessible--plan for how the world can get to zero greenhouse gas emissions in time to avoid a climate catastrophe. Bill Gates has spent a decade investigating the causes and effects of climate change. With the help of experts in the fields of physics, chemistry, biology, engineering, political science, and finance, he has focused on what must be done in order to stop the planet's slide to certain environmental disaster. In this book, he not only explains why we need to work toward net-zero emissions of greenhouse gases, but also details what we need to do to achieve this profoundly important goal. He gives us a clear-eyed description of the challenges we face. Drawing on his understanding of innovation and what it takes to get new ideas into the market, he describes the areas in which technology is already helping to reduce emissions, where and how the current technology can be made to function more effectively, where breakthrough technologies are needed, and who is working on these essential innovations. Finally, he lays out a concrete, practical plan for achieving the goal of zero emissions--suggesting not only policies that governments should adopt, but what we as individuals can do to keep our government, our employers, and ourselves accountable in this crucial enterprise. As Bill Gates makes clear, achieving zero emissions will not be simple or easy to do, but if we follow the plan he sets out here, it is a goal firmly within our reach. *This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF of charts, graphs, and pictures from the book. Bill Gates Tue, 16 Feb 2021 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400734 thebookvoice.com 7:11:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400734]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How to Avoid a Climate Disaster: The Solutions We Have and the Breakthroughs We Need Author: Bill Gates Narrator: Wil Wheaton, Bill Gates Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 11 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.11 of Total 103 Ratings of Narrator: 4.1 of Total 21 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this urgent, authoritative book, Bill Gates sets out a wide-ranging, practical--and accessible--plan for how the world can get to zero greenhouse gas emissions in time to avoid a climate catastrophe. Bill Gates has spent a decade investigating the causes and effects of climate change. With the help of experts in the fields of physics, chemistry, biology, engineering, political science, and finance, he has focused on what must be done in order to stop the planet's slide to certain environmental disaster. In this book, he not only explains why we need to work toward net-zero emissions of greenhouse gases, but also details what we need to do to achieve this profoundly important goal. He gives us a clear-eyed description of the challenges we face. Drawing on his understanding of innovation and what it takes to get new ideas into the market, he describes the areas in which technology is already helping to reduce emissions, where and how the current technology can be made to function more effectively, where breakthrough technologies are needed, and who is working on these essential innovations. Finally, he lays out a concrete, practical plan for achieving the goal of zero emissions--suggesting not only policies that governments should adopt, but what we as individuals can do to keep our government, our employers, and ourselves accountable in this crucial enterprise. As Bill Gates makes clear, achieving zero emissions will not be simple or easy to do, but if we follow the plan he sets out here, it is a goal firmly within our reach. *This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF of charts, graphs, and pictures from the book. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400734]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How to Avoid a Climate Disaster: The Solutions We Have and the Breakthroughs We Need Author: Bill Gates Narrator: Wil Wheaton, Bill Gates Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 7 hours 11 minutes Release date: February 16, 2021 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.11 of Total 103 Ratings of Narrator: 4.1 of Total 21 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this urgent, authoritative book, Bill Gates sets out a wide-ranging, practical--and accessible--plan for how the world can get to zero greenhouse gas emissions in time to avoid a climate catastrophe. Bill Gates has spent a decade investigating the causes and effects of climate change. With the help of experts in the fields of physics, chemistry, biology, engineering, political science, and finance, he has focused on what must be done in order to stop the planet's slide to certain environmental disaster. In this book, he not only explains why we need to work toward net-zero emissions of greenhouse gases, but also details what we need to do to achieve this profoundly important goal. He gives us a clear-eyed description of the challenges we face. Drawing on his understanding of innovation and what it takes to get new ideas into the market, he describes the areas in which technology is already helping to reduce emissions, where and how the current technology can be made to function more effectively, where breakthrough technologies are needed, and who is working on these essential innovations. Finally, he lays out a concrete, practical plan for achieving the goal of zero emissions--suggesting not only policies that governments should adopt, but what we as individuals can do to keep our government, our employers, and ourselves accountable in this crucial enterprise. As Bill Gates makes clear, achieving zero emissions will not be simple or easy to do, but if we follow the plan he sets out here, it is a goal firmly within our reach. *This audiobook includes a downloadable PDF of charts, graphs, and pictures from the book. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400506 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400506]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El triunfo del dinero: Una historia financiera del mundo Author: Niall Ferguson Narrator: Horacio Mancilla Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 22 minutes Release date: October 10, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Ya puedes escuchar en audiolibro la fascinante y enrevesada historia del invento más decisivo de la humanidad: el dinero. Pasta, guita, plata, parné, duros. Da igual cómo lo llamemos, pero lo cierto es que el dinero importa ahora más que nunca. En El triunfo del dinero Niall Ferguson demuestra que la historia de las finanzas es el trasfondo de toda la Historia. ¿Cuándo pasó el dinero de metal a papel? ¿Por qué los tipos de interés suben y bajan como un yoyó? ¿Por qué la gente nunca aprende que las burbujas bursátiles siempre acaban estallando? ¿Por qué los seguros ya no son la mejor manera de protegerse contra el riesgo? ¿Por qué sobrevaloramos las ventajas de invertir en el sector inmobiliario? La mejor manera de entender las finanzas es conocer los orígenes de los distintos instrumentos, lo que además nos da una visión distinta de la historia del mundo desde la aparición del dinero en la antigua Babilonia hasta la crisis actual. En el peor momento de las finanzas globales desde la Gran Depresión de los años treinta, nunca ha habido una ocasión más adecuada para entender el triunfo (y los ocasionales fracasos) del dinero. Escucha El triunfo del dinero en formato audiolibro. La crítica ha dicho... «Maravillosamente escrito... Asombrosamente inteligente.» Martin Vander Weyer, Sunday Telegraph «Las historias que cuenta de subidas y bajadas, de triunfos y desastres, de burbujas que se hinchan... son la pura esencia de la historia de las finanzas.» Bill Emmott, Financial Times «Deslumbrante, extraordinariamente oportuno.» The Spectator «Ferguson es el historiador más brillante de su generación. Su escritura es extraordinaria.» Time «Uno de los mejores historiadores económicos de nuestro tiempo.» John Müller, El Mundo Niall Ferguson Thu, 10 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400506 thebookvoice.com 13:22:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400506]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El triunfo del dinero: Una historia financiera del mundo Author: Niall Ferguson Narrator: Horacio Mancilla Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 22 minutes Release date: October 10, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Ya puedes escuchar en audiolibro la fascinante y enrevesada historia del invento más decisivo de la humanidad: el dinero. Pasta, guita, plata, parné, duros. Da igual cómo lo llamemos, pero lo cierto es que el dinero importa ahora más que nunca. En El triunfo del dinero Niall Ferguson demuestra que la historia de las finanzas es el trasfondo de toda la Historia. ¿Cuándo pasó el dinero de metal a papel? ¿Por qué los tipos de interés suben y bajan como un yoyó? ¿Por qué la gente nunca aprende que las burbujas bursátiles siempre acaban estallando? ¿Por qué los seguros ya no son la mejor manera de protegerse contra el riesgo? ¿Por qué sobrevaloramos las ventajas de invertir en el sector inmobiliario? La mejor manera de entender las finanzas es conocer los orígenes de los distintos instrumentos, lo que además nos da una visión distinta de la historia del mundo desde la aparición del dinero en la antigua Babilonia hasta la crisis actual. En el peor momento de las finanzas globales desde la Gran Depresión de los años treinta, nunca ha habido una ocasión más adecuada para entender el triunfo (y los ocasionales fracasos) del dinero. Escucha El triunfo del dinero en formato audiolibro. La crítica ha dicho... «Maravillosamente escrito... Asombrosamente inteligente.» Martin Vander Weyer, Sunday Telegraph «Las historias que cuenta de subidas y bajadas, de triunfos y desastres, de burbujas que se hinchan... son la pura esencia de la historia de las finanzas.» Bill Emmott, Financial Times «Deslumbrante, extraordinariamente oportuno.» The Spectator «Ferguson es el historiador más brillante de su generación. Su escritura es extraordinaria.» Time «Uno de los mejores historiadores económicos de nuestro tiempo.» John Müller, El Mundo Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/400506]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El triunfo del dinero: Una historia financiera del mundo Author: Niall Ferguson Narrator: Horacio Mancilla Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 22 minutes Release date: October 10, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Ya puedes escuchar en audiolibro la fascinante y enrevesada historia del invento más decisivo de la humanidad: el dinero. Pasta, guita, plata, parné, duros. Da igual cómo lo llamemos, pero lo cierto es que el dinero importa ahora más que nunca. En El triunfo del dinero Niall Ferguson demuestra que la historia de las finanzas es el trasfondo de toda la Historia. ¿Cuándo pasó el dinero de metal a papel? ¿Por qué los tipos de interés suben y bajan como un yoyó? ¿Por qué la gente nunca aprende que las burbujas bursátiles siempre acaban estallando? ¿Por qué los seguros ya no son la mejor manera de protegerse contra el riesgo? ¿Por qué sobrevaloramos las ventajas de invertir en el sector inmobiliario? La mejor manera de entender las finanzas es conocer los orígenes de los distintos instrumentos, lo que además nos da una visión distinta de la historia del mundo desde la aparición del dinero en la antigua Babilonia hasta la crisis actual. En el peor momento de las finanzas globales desde la Gran Depresión de los años treinta, nunca ha habido una ocasión más adecuada para entender el triunfo (y los ocasionales fracasos) del dinero. Escucha El triunfo del dinero en formato audiolibro. La crítica ha dicho... «Maravillosamente escrito... Asombrosamente inteligente.» Martin Vander Weyer, Sunday Telegraph «Las historias que cuenta de subidas y bajadas, de triunfos y desastres, de burbujas que se hinchan... son la pura esencia de la historia de las finanzas.» Bill Emmott, Financial Times «Deslumbrante, extraordinariamente oportuno.» The Spectator «Ferguson es el historiador más brillante de su generación. Su escritura es extraordinaria.» Time «Uno de los mejores historiadores económicos de nuestro tiempo.» John Müller, El Mundo https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/399085 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/399085]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Escape from Rome: The Failure of Empire and the Road to Prosperity Author: Walter Scheidel Narrator: Daniel Henning Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 38 minutes Release date: October 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The gripping story of how the end of the Roman Empire was the beginning of the modern world The fall of the Roman Empire has long been considered one of the greatest disasters in history. But in this groundbreaking book, Walter Scheidel argues that Rome's dramatic collapse was actually the best thing that ever happened, clearing the path for Europe's economic rise and the creation of the modern age. Ranging across the entire premodern world, Escape from Rome offers new answers to some of the biggest questions in history: Why did the Roman Empire appear? Why did nothing like it ever return to Europe? And, above all, why did Europeans come to dominate the world? In an absorbing narrative that begins with ancient Rome but stretches far beyond it, from Byzantium to China and from Genghis Khan to Napoleon, Scheidel shows how the demise of Rome and the enduring failure of empire-building on European soil ensured competitive fragmentation between and within states. This rich diversity encouraged political, economic, scientific, and technological breakthroughs that allowed Europe to surge ahead while other parts of the world lagged behind, burdened as they were by traditional empires and predatory regimes that lived by conquest. It wasn't until Europe 'escaped' from Rome that it launched an economic transformation that changed the continent and ultimately the world. What has the Roman Empire ever done for us? Fall and go away. Walter Scheidel Tue, 15 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/399085 thebookvoice.com 21:38:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/399085]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Escape from Rome: The Failure of Empire and the Road to Prosperity Author: Walter Scheidel Narrator: Daniel Henning Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 38 minutes Release date: October 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The gripping story of how the end of the Roman Empire was the beginning of the modern world The fall of the Roman Empire has long been considered one of the greatest disasters in history. But in this groundbreaking book, Walter Scheidel argues that Rome's dramatic collapse was actually the best thing that ever happened, clearing the path for Europe's economic rise and the creation of the modern age. Ranging across the entire premodern world, Escape from Rome offers new answers to some of the biggest questions in history: Why did the Roman Empire appear? Why did nothing like it ever return to Europe? And, above all, why did Europeans come to dominate the world? In an absorbing narrative that begins with ancient Rome but stretches far beyond it, from Byzantium to China and from Genghis Khan to Napoleon, Scheidel shows how the demise of Rome and the enduring failure of empire-building on European soil ensured competitive fragmentation between and within states. This rich diversity encouraged political, economic, scientific, and technological breakthroughs that allowed Europe to surge ahead while other parts of the world lagged behind, burdened as they were by traditional empires and predatory regimes that lived by conquest. It wasn't until Europe 'escaped' from Rome that it launched an economic transformation that changed the continent and ultimately the world. What has the Roman Empire ever done for us? Fall and go away. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/399085]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Escape from Rome: The Failure of Empire and the Road to Prosperity Author: Walter Scheidel Narrator: Daniel Henning Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 21 hours 38 minutes Release date: October 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The gripping story of how the end of the Roman Empire was the beginning of the modern world The fall of the Roman Empire has long been considered one of the greatest disasters in history. But in this groundbreaking book, Walter Scheidel argues that Rome's dramatic collapse was actually the best thing that ever happened, clearing the path for Europe's economic rise and the creation of the modern age. Ranging across the entire premodern world, Escape from Rome offers new answers to some of the biggest questions in history: Why did the Roman Empire appear? Why did nothing like it ever return to Europe? And, above all, why did Europeans come to dominate the world? In an absorbing narrative that begins with ancient Rome but stretches far beyond it, from Byzantium to China and from Genghis Khan to Napoleon, Scheidel shows how the demise of Rome and the enduring failure of empire-building on European soil ensured competitive fragmentation between and within states. This rich diversity encouraged political, economic, scientific, and technological breakthroughs that allowed Europe to surge ahead while other parts of the world lagged behind, burdened as they were by traditional empires and predatory regimes that lived by conquest. It wasn't until Europe 'escaped' from Rome that it launched an economic transformation that changed the continent and ultimately the world. What has the Roman Empire ever done for us? Fall and go away. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398745 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398745]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - EL Kamasutra de la innovación: Guía disrupta para transformar vidas y negocios Author: Jorge Cuevas Dávalos Narrator: Mauricio Pérez Castillo Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 42 minutes Release date: October 24, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: ¡Atrévete a practicar las cuatro posiciones mentales para cambiar el mundo! Haz uso de tu pensamiento creativo y descubre soluciones para tu vida personal y tus negocios, a través de cuatro posiciones mentales. De Jorge Cuevas, autor de los bestsellers El Buscalocos y Liderazgo quántico, así como de la app digital Tu coach para innovar, que guía a personas y equipos a salirse de la caja. En el Kamasutra de la sexualidad se requiere una flexibilidad física fuera de serie, pero yo no alcanzo a hacer ni la mitad de las posiciones. Lo bueno es que en El Kamasutra de la innovación no necesitarás una gran flexibilidad física, sino mental, porque llegarás a soluciones que nunca antes te habías imaginado. Cuando compré por primera vez un volumen del Kamasutra de la sexualidad, no leía tres páginas cuando ya estaba ansioso por encontrar a alguien con quien practicar, y eso mismo me gustaría que te sucediera: que siempre estés con ganas de cerrar este libro para aplicar lo aprendido en las situaciones de tu vida personal y de negocios donde pretendas transformar la realidad. Divertido, irreverente y práctico al mismo tiempo, Jorge Cuevas, el Buscalocos, nos ayuda a aumentar nuestra inteligencia innovadora a través de cuatro posiciones mentales. Un libro sorprendentemente útil en la era más rápida de la historia de la humanidad, donde el pensamiento divergente y creativo se ha convertido en el principal diferenciador. www.inteligenciainnovadora.com Jorge Cuevas Dávalos Thu, 24 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398745 thebookvoice.com 6:42:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398745]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - EL Kamasutra de la innovación: Guía disrupta para transformar vidas y negocios Author: Jorge Cuevas Dávalos Narrator: Mauricio Pérez Castillo Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 42 minutes Release date: October 24, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: ¡Atrévete a practicar las cuatro posiciones mentales para cambiar el mundo! Haz uso de tu pensamiento creativo y descubre soluciones para tu vida personal y tus negocios, a través de cuatro posiciones mentales. De Jorge Cuevas, autor de los bestsellers El Buscalocos y Liderazgo quántico, así como de la app digital Tu coach para innovar, que guía a personas y equipos a salirse de la caja. En el Kamasutra de la sexualidad se requiere una flexibilidad física fuera de serie, pero yo no alcanzo a hacer ni la mitad de las posiciones. Lo bueno es que en El Kamasutra de la innovación no necesitarás una gran flexibilidad física, sino mental, porque llegarás a soluciones que nunca antes te habías imaginado. Cuando compré por primera vez un volumen del Kamasutra de la sexualidad, no leía tres páginas cuando ya estaba ansioso por encontrar a alguien con quien practicar, y eso mismo me gustaría que te sucediera: que siempre estés con ganas de cerrar este libro para aplicar lo aprendido en las situaciones de tu vida personal y de negocios donde pretendas transformar la realidad. Divertido, irreverente y práctico al mismo tiempo, Jorge Cuevas, el Buscalocos, nos ayuda a aumentar nuestra inteligencia innovadora a través de cuatro posiciones mentales. Un libro sorprendentemente útil en la era más rápida de la historia de la humanidad, donde el pensamiento divergente y creativo se ha convertido en el principal diferenciador. www.inteligenciainnovadora.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398745]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - EL Kamasutra de la innovación: Guía disrupta para transformar vidas y negocios Author: Jorge Cuevas Dávalos Narrator: Mauricio Pérez Castillo Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 42 minutes Release date: October 24, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: ¡Atrévete a practicar las cuatro posiciones mentales para cambiar el mundo! Haz uso de tu pensamiento creativo y descubre soluciones para tu vida personal y tus negocios, a través de cuatro posiciones mentales. De Jorge Cuevas, autor de los bestsellers El Buscalocos y Liderazgo quántico, así como de la app digital Tu coach para innovar, que guía a personas y equipos a salirse de la caja. En el Kamasutra de la sexualidad se requiere una flexibilidad física fuera de serie, pero yo no alcanzo a hacer ni la mitad de las posiciones. Lo bueno es que en El Kamasutra de la innovación no necesitarás una gran flexibilidad física, sino mental, porque llegarás a soluciones que nunca antes te habías imaginado. Cuando compré por primera vez un volumen del Kamasutra de la sexualidad, no leía tres páginas cuando ya estaba ansioso por encontrar a alguien con quien practicar, y eso mismo me gustaría que te sucediera: que siempre estés con ganas de cerrar este libro para aplicar lo aprendido en las situaciones de tu vida personal y de negocios donde pretendas transformar la realidad. Divertido, irreverente y práctico al mismo tiempo, Jorge Cuevas, el Buscalocos, nos ayuda a aumentar nuestra inteligencia innovadora a través de cuatro posiciones mentales. Un libro sorprendentemente útil en la era más rápida de la historia de la humanidad, donde el pensamiento divergente y creativo se ha convertido en el principal diferenciador. www.inteligenciainnovadora.com https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398728 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398728]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El método Hacking Growth Author: Sean Ellis, Morgan Brown Narrator: Carlos Torres Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 1 minute Release date: October 24, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Qué hacen compañías explosivas como Facebook, Airbnb y Walmart para ser líderes del mercado El libro de estrategias definitivo de los pioneros de Growth Hacking, una de las metodologías de negocios más impactantes en Silicon Valley. Parece difícil de creer pero hubo un momento en que Airbnb era el secreto mejor guardado de los hackers de viajes y los couch surfers, Pinterest era un sitio web de nicho frecuentado sólo por los panaderos y crafters, Facebook era el medio hermano incómodo de MySpace y Uber fue un alborotador que no tuvo ninguna oportunidad contra el Goliat que era New York City Yellow Cabs. ¿Cómo es que estas empresas crecieron tanto como para convertirse en las potencias que son hoy en día? Tenían una metodología estudiada y cuidadosamente implementada. Se llama Growth Hacking, y las compañías que la implementan incluyen no sólo a las nuevas empresas más populares de hoy, sino también compañías como IBM, Walmart y Microsoft. El método Hacking Growth brinda estrategias accesibles y prácticas que los equipos y empresas de todas las industrias pueden utilizar para aumentar su base de clientes y cuota de mercado. Este libro te guiará a través del proceso de creación y ejecución de tu propia estrategia de hacking. Una lectura imprescindible para cualquier empresario, emprendedor o gerente que busque reemplazar las grandes apuestas inútiles con resultados más consistentes, replicables, rentables y basados en datos. Sean Ellis, Morgan Brown Thu, 24 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398728 thebookvoice.com 11:1:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398728]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El método Hacking Growth Author: Sean Ellis, Morgan Brown Narrator: Carlos Torres Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 1 minute Release date: October 24, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Qué hacen compañías explosivas como Facebook, Airbnb y Walmart para ser líderes del mercado El libro de estrategias definitivo de los pioneros de Growth Hacking, una de las metodologías de negocios más impactantes en Silicon Valley. Parece difícil de creer pero hubo un momento en que Airbnb era el secreto mejor guardado de los hackers de viajes y los couch surfers, Pinterest era un sitio web de nicho frecuentado sólo por los panaderos y crafters, Facebook era el medio hermano incómodo de MySpace y Uber fue un alborotador que no tuvo ninguna oportunidad contra el Goliat que era New York City Yellow Cabs. ¿Cómo es que estas empresas crecieron tanto como para convertirse en las potencias que son hoy en día? Tenían una metodología estudiada y cuidadosamente implementada. Se llama Growth Hacking, y las compañías que la implementan incluyen no sólo a las nuevas empresas más populares de hoy, sino también compañías como IBM, Walmart y Microsoft. El método Hacking Growth brinda estrategias accesibles y prácticas que los equipos y empresas de todas las industrias pueden utilizar para aumentar su base de clientes y cuota de mercado. Este libro te guiará a través del proceso de creación y ejecución de tu propia estrategia de hacking. Una lectura imprescindible para cualquier empresario, emprendedor o gerente que busque reemplazar las grandes apuestas inútiles con resultados más consistentes, replicables, rentables y basados en datos. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398728]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: [Spanish] - El método Hacking Growth Author: Sean Ellis, Morgan Brown Narrator: Carlos Torres Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 1 minute Release date: October 24, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Qué hacen compañías explosivas como Facebook, Airbnb y Walmart para ser líderes del mercado El libro de estrategias definitivo de los pioneros de Growth Hacking, una de las metodologías de negocios más impactantes en Silicon Valley. Parece difícil de creer pero hubo un momento en que Airbnb era el secreto mejor guardado de los hackers de viajes y los couch surfers, Pinterest era un sitio web de nicho frecuentado sólo por los panaderos y crafters, Facebook era el medio hermano incómodo de MySpace y Uber fue un alborotador que no tuvo ninguna oportunidad contra el Goliat que era New York City Yellow Cabs. ¿Cómo es que estas empresas crecieron tanto como para convertirse en las potencias que son hoy en día? Tenían una metodología estudiada y cuidadosamente implementada. Se llama Growth Hacking, y las compañías que la implementan incluyen no sólo a las nuevas empresas más populares de hoy, sino también compañías como IBM, Walmart y Microsoft. El método Hacking Growth brinda estrategias accesibles y prácticas que los equipos y empresas de todas las industrias pueden utilizar para aumentar su base de clientes y cuota de mercado. Este libro te guiará a través del proceso de creación y ejecución de tu propia estrategia de hacking. Una lectura imprescindible para cualquier empresario, emprendedor o gerente que busque reemplazar las grandes apuestas inútiles con resultados más consistentes, replicables, rentables y basados en datos. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398475 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398475]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: In Defense of Open Society Author: George Soros Narrator: Grover Gardner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 43 minutes Release date: October 22, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An impassioned defense of open society, academic and media freedom, and human rights. George Soros -- universally known for his philanthropy, progressive politics, and investment success--has been under sustained attack from the far right, nationalists, and anti-Semites in the United States and around the world because of his commitment to open society and liberal democracy. In this brilliant and spirited book, Soros brings together a vital collection of his writings, some never previously published. They deal with a wide range of important and timely topics: the dangers that the instruments of control produced by artificial intelligence and machine learning pose to open societies; what Soros calls his 'political philanthropy'; his founding of the Central European University, one of the world's foremost defender of academic freedom; his philosophy; his boom/bust theory of financial markets and its policy implications; and what he calls the tragedy of the European Union. Soros's forceful affirmation of freedom, democracy, the rule of law, human rights, social justice, and social responsibility as a universal idea is a clarion call-to-arms for the ideals of open society. George Soros Tue, 22 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398475 thebookvoice.com 5:43:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398475]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: In Defense of Open Society Author: George Soros Narrator: Grover Gardner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 43 minutes Release date: October 22, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An impassioned defense of open society, academic and media freedom, and human rights. George Soros -- universally known for his philanthropy, progressive politics, and investment success--has been under sustained attack from the far right, nationalists, and anti-Semites in the United States and around the world because of his commitment to open society and liberal democracy. In this brilliant and spirited book, Soros brings together a vital collection of his writings, some never previously published. They deal with a wide range of important and timely topics: the dangers that the instruments of control produced by artificial intelligence and machine learning pose to open societies; what Soros calls his 'political philanthropy'; his founding of the Central European University, one of the world's foremost defender of academic freedom; his philosophy; his boom/bust theory of financial markets and its policy implications; and what he calls the tragedy of the European Union. Soros's forceful affirmation of freedom, democracy, the rule of law, human rights, social justice, and social responsibility as a universal idea is a clarion call-to-arms for the ideals of open society. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398475]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: In Defense of Open Society Author: George Soros Narrator: Grover Gardner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 43 minutes Release date: October 22, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An impassioned defense of open society, academic and media freedom, and human rights. George Soros -- universally known for his philanthropy, progressive politics, and investment success--has been under sustained attack from the far right, nationalists, and anti-Semites in the United States and around the world because of his commitment to open society and liberal democracy. In this brilliant and spirited book, Soros brings together a vital collection of his writings, some never previously published. They deal with a wide range of important and timely topics: the dangers that the instruments of control produced by artificial intelligence and machine learning pose to open societies; what Soros calls his 'political philanthropy'; his founding of the Central European University, one of the world's foremost defender of academic freedom; his philosophy; his boom/bust theory of financial markets and its policy implications; and what he calls the tragedy of the European Union. Soros's forceful affirmation of freedom, democracy, the rule of law, human rights, social justice, and social responsibility as a universal idea is a clarion call-to-arms for the ideals of open society. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398361 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398361]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Money for Nothing: The Scientists, Fraudsters, and Corrupt Politicians Who Reinvented Money, Panicked a Nation, and Made the World Rich Author: Thomas Levenson Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 12 minutes Release date: August 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The sweeping story of the world’s first financial crisis: “an astounding episode from the early days of financial markets that to this day continues to intrigue and perplex historians . . . narrative history at its best, lively and fresh with new insights” (Liaquat Ahamed, Pulitzer Prize–winning author of Lords of Finance) A Financial Times Economics Book of the Year ● Longlisted for the Financial Times/McKinsey Business Book of the Year Award   In the heart of the Scientific Revolution, when new theories promised to explain the affairs of the universe, Britain was broke, facing a mountain of debt accumulated in war after war it could not afford. But that same Scientific Revolution—the kind of thinking that helped Isaac Newton solve the mysteries of the cosmos—would soon lead clever, if not always scrupulous, men to try to figure a way out of Britain’s financial troubles.    Enter the upstart leaders of the South Sea Company. In 1719, they laid out a grand plan to swap citizens’ shares of the nation’s debt for company stock, removing the burden from the state and making South Sea’s directors a fortune in the process. Everybody would win. The king’s ministers took the bait—and everybody did win. Far too much, far too fast. The following crash came suddenly in a rush of scandal, jail, suicide, and ruin. But thanks to Britain’s leader, Robert Walpole, the kingdom found its way through to emerge with the first truly modern, reliable, and stable financial exchange. Thomas Levenson’s Money for Nothing tells the unbelievable story of the South Sea Bubble with all the exuberance, folly, and the catastrophe of an event whose impact can still be felt today. Thomas Levenson Tue, 18 Aug 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398361 thebookvoice.com 12:12:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398361]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Money for Nothing: The Scientists, Fraudsters, and Corrupt Politicians Who Reinvented Money, Panicked a Nation, and Made the World Rich Author: Thomas Levenson Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 12 minutes Release date: August 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The sweeping story of the world’s first financial crisis: “an astounding episode from the early days of financial markets that to this day continues to intrigue and perplex historians . . . narrative history at its best, lively and fresh with new insights” (Liaquat Ahamed, Pulitzer Prize–winning author of Lords of Finance) A Financial Times Economics Book of the Year ● Longlisted for the Financial Times/McKinsey Business Book of the Year Award   In the heart of the Scientific Revolution, when new theories promised to explain the affairs of the universe, Britain was broke, facing a mountain of debt accumulated in war after war it could not afford. But that same Scientific Revolution—the kind of thinking that helped Isaac Newton solve the mysteries of the cosmos—would soon lead clever, if not always scrupulous, men to try to figure a way out of Britain’s financial troubles.    Enter the upstart leaders of the South Sea Company. In 1719, they laid out a grand plan to swap citizens’ shares of the nation’s debt for company stock, removing the burden from the state and making South Sea’s directors a fortune in the process. Everybody would win. The king’s ministers took the bait—and everybody did win. Far too much, far too fast. The following crash came suddenly in a rush of scandal, jail, suicide, and ruin. But thanks to Britain’s leader, Robert Walpole, the kingdom found its way through to emerge with the first truly modern, reliable, and stable financial exchange. Thomas Levenson’s Money for Nothing tells the unbelievable story of the South Sea Bubble with all the exuberance, folly, and the catastrophe of an event whose impact can still be felt today. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398361]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Money for Nothing: The Scientists, Fraudsters, and Corrupt Politicians Who Reinvented Money, Panicked a Nation, and Made the World Rich Author: Thomas Levenson Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 12 minutes Release date: August 18, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The sweeping story of the world’s first financial crisis: “an astounding episode from the early days of financial markets that to this day continues to intrigue and perplex historians . . . narrative history at its best, lively and fresh with new insights” (Liaquat Ahamed, Pulitzer Prize–winning author of Lords of Finance) A Financial Times Economics Book of the Year ● Longlisted for the Financial Times/McKinsey Business Book of the Year Award   In the heart of the Scientific Revolution, when new theories promised to explain the affairs of the universe, Britain was broke, facing a mountain of debt accumulated in war after war it could not afford. But that same Scientific Revolution—the kind of thinking that helped Isaac Newton solve the mysteries of the cosmos—would soon lead clever, if not always scrupulous, men to try to figure a way out of Britain’s financial troubles.    Enter the upstart leaders of the South Sea Company. In 1719, they laid out a grand plan to swap citizens’ shares of the nation’s debt for company stock, removing the burden from the state and making South Sea’s directors a fortune in the process. Everybody would win. The king’s ministers took the bait—and everybody did win. Far too much, far too fast. The following crash came suddenly in a rush of scandal, jail, suicide, and ruin. But thanks to Britain’s leader, Robert Walpole, the kingdom found its way through to emerge with the first truly modern, reliable, and stable financial exchange. Thomas Levenson’s Money for Nothing tells the unbelievable story of the South Sea Bubble with all the exuberance, folly, and the catastrophe of an event whose impact can still be felt today. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398021 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398021]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Ethics of Influence: Government in the Age of Behavioral Science Author: Cass R. Sunstein Narrator: William Hope Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 58 minutes Release date: January 30, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In recent years, 'nudge units' or 'behavioral insights teams' have been created in the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, and other nations. All over the world, public officials are using the behavioral sciences to protect the environment, promote employment and economic growth, reduce poverty, and increase national security. In this book, Cass R. Sunstein, the eminent legal scholar and best-selling co-author of Nudge (2008), breaks new ground with a deep yet highly readable investigation into the ethical issues surrounding nudges, choice architecture, and mandates, addressing such issues as welfare, autonomy, self-government, dignity, manipulation, and the constraints and responsibilities of an ethical state. Complementing the ethical discussion, The Ethics of Influence: Government in the Age of Behavioral Science contains a wealth of new data on people's attitudes towards a broad range of nudges, choice architecture, and mandates. Cass R. Sunstein Thu, 30 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398021 thebookvoice.com 9:58:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398021]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Ethics of Influence: Government in the Age of Behavioral Science Author: Cass R. Sunstein Narrator: William Hope Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 58 minutes Release date: January 30, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In recent years, 'nudge units' or 'behavioral insights teams' have been created in the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, and other nations. All over the world, public officials are using the behavioral sciences to protect the environment, promote employment and economic growth, reduce poverty, and increase national security. In this book, Cass R. Sunstein, the eminent legal scholar and best-selling co-author of Nudge (2008), breaks new ground with a deep yet highly readable investigation into the ethical issues surrounding nudges, choice architecture, and mandates, addressing such issues as welfare, autonomy, self-government, dignity, manipulation, and the constraints and responsibilities of an ethical state. Complementing the ethical discussion, The Ethics of Influence: Government in the Age of Behavioral Science contains a wealth of new data on people's attitudes towards a broad range of nudges, choice architecture, and mandates. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/398021]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Ethics of Influence: Government in the Age of Behavioral Science Author: Cass R. Sunstein Narrator: William Hope Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 58 minutes Release date: January 30, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In recent years, 'nudge units' or 'behavioral insights teams' have been created in the United States, the United Kingdom, Germany, and other nations. All over the world, public officials are using the behavioral sciences to protect the environment, promote employment and economic growth, reduce poverty, and increase national security. In this book, Cass R. Sunstein, the eminent legal scholar and best-selling co-author of Nudge (2008), breaks new ground with a deep yet highly readable investigation into the ethical issues surrounding nudges, choice architecture, and mandates, addressing such issues as welfare, autonomy, self-government, dignity, manipulation, and the constraints and responsibilities of an ethical state. Complementing the ethical discussion, The Ethics of Influence: Government in the Age of Behavioral Science contains a wealth of new data on people's attitudes towards a broad range of nudges, choice architecture, and mandates. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397994 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397994]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Kleptopia: How Dirty Money Is Conquering the World Author: Tom Burgis Narrator: Tom Burgis Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 58 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.67 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “A must-read for anyone wanting to better understand what has already happened here in America and what lies ahead if Trump is reelected in November…. A magisterial account of the money and violence behind the world’s most powerful dictatorships.” –Washington Post In this shocking, meticulously reported work of narrative nonfiction, an award-winning investigative journalist exposes “capitalism’s monster”—global kleptocracy—and reveals how it is corrupting the world around us. They are everywhere, the thieves and their people. Masters of secrecy. Until now we have detected their presence only by what they leave behind. A body in a burned-out Audi. Workers riddled with bullets in the Kazakh Desert. A rigged election in Zimbabwe. A British banker silenced and humiliated for trying to expose the truth about the City of London. They have amassed more money than most countries. But what they are really stealing is power. In this real-life thriller packed with jaw-dropping revelations, award-winning investigative journalist Tom Burgis weaves together four stories that reveal a terrifying global web of corruption: the troublemaker from Basingstoke who stumbles on the secrets of a Swiss bank, the ex-Soviet billionaire constructing a private empire, the righteous Canadian lawyer with a mysterious client, and the Brooklyn crook protected by the CIA. Glimpses of this shadowy world have emerged over the years. In Kleptopia, Burgis connects the dots. He follows the dirty money that is flooding the global economy, emboldening dictators, and poisoning democracies. From the Kremlin to Beijing, Harare to Riyadh, Paris to the White House, the trail shows something even more sinister: the thieves are uniting. And the human cost will be great. Supplemental enhancement PDF accompanies the audiobook. Tom Burgis Tue, 08 Sep 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397994 thebookvoice.com 10:58:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397994]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Kleptopia: How Dirty Money Is Conquering the World Author: Tom Burgis Narrator: Tom Burgis Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 58 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.67 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “A must-read for anyone wanting to better understand what has already happened here in America and what lies ahead if Trump is reelected in November…. A magisterial account of the money and violence behind the world’s most powerful dictatorships.” –Washington Post In this shocking, meticulously reported work of narrative nonfiction, an award-winning investigative journalist exposes “capitalism’s monster”—global kleptocracy—and reveals how it is corrupting the world around us. They are everywhere, the thieves and their people. Masters of secrecy. Until now we have detected their presence only by what they leave behind. A body in a burned-out Audi. Workers riddled with bullets in the Kazakh Desert. A rigged election in Zimbabwe. A British banker silenced and humiliated for trying to expose the truth about the City of London. They have amassed more money than most countries. But what they are really stealing is power. In this real-life thriller packed with jaw-dropping revelations, award-winning investigative journalist Tom Burgis weaves together four stories that reveal a terrifying global web of corruption: the troublemaker from Basingstoke who stumbles on the secrets of a Swiss bank, the ex-Soviet billionaire constructing a private empire, the righteous Canadian lawyer with a mysterious client, and the Brooklyn crook protected by the CIA. Glimpses of this shadowy world have emerged over the years. In Kleptopia, Burgis connects the dots. He follows the dirty money that is flooding the global economy, emboldening dictators, and poisoning democracies. From the Kremlin to Beijing, Harare to Riyadh, Paris to the White House, the trail shows something even more sinister: the thieves are uniting. And the human cost will be great. Supplemental enhancement PDF accompanies the audiobook. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397994]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Kleptopia: How Dirty Money Is Conquering the World Author: Tom Burgis Narrator: Tom Burgis Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 58 minutes Release date: September 8, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.67 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: “A must-read for anyone wanting to better understand what has already happened here in America and what lies ahead if Trump is reelected in November…. A magisterial account of the money and violence behind the world’s most powerful dictatorships.” –Washington Post In this shocking, meticulously reported work of narrative nonfiction, an award-winning investigative journalist exposes “capitalism’s monster”—global kleptocracy—and reveals how it is corrupting the world around us. They are everywhere, the thieves and their people. Masters of secrecy. Until now we have detected their presence only by what they leave behind. A body in a burned-out Audi. Workers riddled with bullets in the Kazakh Desert. A rigged election in Zimbabwe. A British banker silenced and humiliated for trying to expose the truth about the City of London. They have amassed more money than most countries. But what they are really stealing is power. In this real-life thriller packed with jaw-dropping revelations, award-winning investigative journalist Tom Burgis weaves together four stories that reveal a terrifying global web of corruption: the troublemaker from Basingstoke who stumbles on the secrets of a Swiss bank, the ex-Soviet billionaire constructing a private empire, the righteous Canadian lawyer with a mysterious client, and the Brooklyn crook protected by the CIA. Glimpses of this shadowy world have emerged over the years. In Kleptopia, Burgis connects the dots. He follows the dirty money that is flooding the global economy, emboldening dictators, and poisoning democracies. From the Kremlin to Beijing, Harare to Riyadh, Paris to the White House, the trail shows something even more sinister: the thieves are uniting. And the human cost will be great. Supplemental enhancement PDF accompanies the audiobook. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397494 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397494]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Ask for More Author: Alexandra Carter Narrator: Alexandra Carter Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 25 minutes Release date: May 5, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 2 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Negotiation is a key skill for your job, your closest relationships, and even your everyday life, but often people shy away from it, feeling like they’re marching into battle or that they’re settling for less. Enter Alexandra Carter, Clinical Professor of Law and Director of the Mediation Program at Columbia University, NYC, who has taught students, business professionals and even the United Nations for more than a decade on this very topic. In Ask for More: Ten Questions to Improve Your Negotiations, Your Relationships and Your Life, Carter brings her breadth of knowledge to help anyone, regardless of their situation, ask for - and get - more. Rather than adhering to the popular narrative that only the loudest and most assertive among us get what they want, Carter invites readers to rethink negotiation entirely. Through asking open-ended questions rather than panicked ones, you’ll be better able to steer a conversation, a negotiation, and ultimately a relationship for long-term success. She teaches a simple, yet powerful, ten-question framework for successful negotiation. The first five questions are the ones you first need to ask yourself (called 'mirror' questions) and the last five are the ones you ask who you’re negotiating with (called 'window' questions). The responses to such questions as "what’s brought me here?", "how do I feel?" and "what do I need?" will pave the way for a productive conversation based on values and needs. Carter’s method helps readers go far beyond one “yes” or handshake to create value that lasts a lifetime. Accessible, powerful, and inspiring, Ask for More gives readers the tools to bring clarity and perspective to any important discussion. Alexandra Carter Tue, 05 May 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397494 thebookvoice.com 8:25:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397494]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Ask for More Author: Alexandra Carter Narrator: Alexandra Carter Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 25 minutes Release date: May 5, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 2 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Negotiation is a key skill for your job, your closest relationships, and even your everyday life, but often people shy away from it, feeling like they’re marching into battle or that they’re settling for less. Enter Alexandra Carter, Clinical Professor of Law and Director of the Mediation Program at Columbia University, NYC, who has taught students, business professionals and even the United Nations for more than a decade on this very topic. In Ask for More: Ten Questions to Improve Your Negotiations, Your Relationships and Your Life, Carter brings her breadth of knowledge to help anyone, regardless of their situation, ask for - and get - more. Rather than adhering to the popular narrative that only the loudest and most assertive among us get what they want, Carter invites readers to rethink negotiation entirely. Through asking open-ended questions rather than panicked ones, you’ll be better able to steer a conversation, a negotiation, and ultimately a relationship for long-term success. She teaches a simple, yet powerful, ten-question framework for successful negotiation. The first five questions are the ones you first need to ask yourself (called 'mirror' questions) and the last five are the ones you ask who you’re negotiating with (called 'window' questions). The responses to such questions as "what’s brought me here?", "how do I feel?" and "what do I need?" will pave the way for a productive conversation based on values and needs. Carter’s method helps readers go far beyond one “yes” or handshake to create value that lasts a lifetime. Accessible, powerful, and inspiring, Ask for More gives readers the tools to bring clarity and perspective to any important discussion. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397494]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Ask for More Author: Alexandra Carter Narrator: Alexandra Carter Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 25 minutes Release date: May 5, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3 of Total 2 Ratings of Narrator: 2 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Negotiation is a key skill for your job, your closest relationships, and even your everyday life, but often people shy away from it, feeling like they’re marching into battle or that they’re settling for less. Enter Alexandra Carter, Clinical Professor of Law and Director of the Mediation Program at Columbia University, NYC, who has taught students, business professionals and even the United Nations for more than a decade on this very topic. In Ask for More: Ten Questions to Improve Your Negotiations, Your Relationships and Your Life, Carter brings her breadth of knowledge to help anyone, regardless of their situation, ask for - and get - more. Rather than adhering to the popular narrative that only the loudest and most assertive among us get what they want, Carter invites readers to rethink negotiation entirely. Through asking open-ended questions rather than panicked ones, you’ll be better able to steer a conversation, a negotiation, and ultimately a relationship for long-term success. She teaches a simple, yet powerful, ten-question framework for successful negotiation. The first five questions are the ones you first need to ask yourself (called 'mirror' questions) and the last five are the ones you ask who you’re negotiating with (called 'window' questions). The responses to such questions as "what’s brought me here?", "how do I feel?" and "what do I need?" will pave the way for a productive conversation based on values and needs. Carter’s method helps readers go far beyond one “yes” or handshake to create value that lasts a lifetime. Accessible, powerful, and inspiring, Ask for More gives readers the tools to bring clarity and perspective to any important discussion. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397286 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397286]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Daylight Robbery: How Tax Shaped Our Past and Will Change Our Future Author: Dominic Frisby Narrator: Dominic Frisby Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 48 minutes Release date: October 17, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Fuel for the post-Christmas lunch argument' Financial Times Death and taxes are our inevitable fate. We've been told this since the beginning of civilisation. But what if we stopped to question our antiquated system? Is it fair? And is it capable of serving the needs of our rapidly-changing, modern society? In Daylight Robbery, Dominic Frisby traces the origins of taxation, from its roots in the ancient world, through to today. He explores the role of tax in the formation of our global religions, the part tax played in wars and revolutions throughout the ages, why, at one stage, we paid tax for daylight or for growing a beard. Ranging from the despotic to the absurd, the tax laws of the past reveal so much about how we got to where we are today and what we can do to build a system fit for the future. 'This entertaining, surprising, contrarian book is a tour de force!' - Matt Ridley, author of The Evolution of Everything 'In this spectacular gallop through history, Frisby shows how taxation has warped, stunted and thwarted human progress' - Mark Littlewood, Director General, Institute of Economic Affairs 'Against all expectations, Dominic's book on tax is a real page-turner. His historical interpretation and utopian ideas will outrage Left and Right. Both should read the book' - Steve Baker, MP for Wycombe and Member of the House of Commons Treasury Committee 'Fascinating book which exposes the political and economic basis of tax. A must read for those of us who believe in simpler, lower taxes' - Rt Hon Liz Truss, MP for South West Norfolk, Secretary of State for International Trade and President of the Board of Trade 'Both amusing and informative, it's a romp' - Bill Bonner, author of Empire of Debt Dominic Frisby Thu, 17 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397286 thebookvoice.com 8:48:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397286]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Daylight Robbery: How Tax Shaped Our Past and Will Change Our Future Author: Dominic Frisby Narrator: Dominic Frisby Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 48 minutes Release date: October 17, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Fuel for the post-Christmas lunch argument' Financial Times Death and taxes are our inevitable fate. We've been told this since the beginning of civilisation. But what if we stopped to question our antiquated system? Is it fair? And is it capable of serving the needs of our rapidly-changing, modern society? In Daylight Robbery, Dominic Frisby traces the origins of taxation, from its roots in the ancient world, through to today. He explores the role of tax in the formation of our global religions, the part tax played in wars and revolutions throughout the ages, why, at one stage, we paid tax for daylight or for growing a beard. Ranging from the despotic to the absurd, the tax laws of the past reveal so much about how we got to where we are today and what we can do to build a system fit for the future. 'This entertaining, surprising, contrarian book is a tour de force!' - Matt Ridley, author of The Evolution of Everything 'In this spectacular gallop through history, Frisby shows how taxation has warped, stunted and thwarted human progress' - Mark Littlewood, Director General, Institute of Economic Affairs 'Against all expectations, Dominic's book on tax is a real page-turner. His historical interpretation and utopian ideas will outrage Left and Right. Both should read the book' - Steve Baker, MP for Wycombe and Member of the House of Commons Treasury Committee 'Fascinating book which exposes the political and economic basis of tax. A must read for those of us who believe in simpler, lower taxes' - Rt Hon Liz Truss, MP for South West Norfolk, Secretary of State for International Trade and President of the Board of Trade 'Both amusing and informative, it's a romp' - Bill Bonner, author of Empire of Debt Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397286]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Daylight Robbery: How Tax Shaped Our Past and Will Change Our Future Author: Dominic Frisby Narrator: Dominic Frisby Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 8 hours 48 minutes Release date: October 17, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 4 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: 'Fuel for the post-Christmas lunch argument' Financial Times Death and taxes are our inevitable fate. We've been told this since the beginning of civilisation. But what if we stopped to question our antiquated system? Is it fair? And is it capable of serving the needs of our rapidly-changing, modern society? In Daylight Robbery, Dominic Frisby traces the origins of taxation, from its roots in the ancient world, through to today. He explores the role of tax in the formation of our global religions, the part tax played in wars and revolutions throughout the ages, why, at one stage, we paid tax for daylight or for growing a beard. Ranging from the despotic to the absurd, the tax laws of the past reveal so much about how we got to where we are today and what we can do to build a system fit for the future. 'This entertaining, surprising, contrarian book is a tour de force!' - Matt Ridley, author of The Evolution of Everything 'In this spectacular gallop through history, Frisby shows how taxation has warped, stunted and thwarted human progress' - Mark Littlewood, Director General, Institute of Economic Affairs 'Against all expectations, Dominic's book on tax is a real page-turner. His historical interpretation and utopian ideas will outrage Left and Right. Both should read the book' - Steve Baker, MP for Wycombe and Member of the House of Commons Treasury Committee 'Fascinating book which exposes the political and economic basis of tax. A must read for those of us who believe in simpler, lower taxes' - Rt Hon Liz Truss, MP for South West Norfolk, Secretary of State for International Trade and President of the Board of Trade 'Both amusing and informative, it's a romp' - Bill Bonner, author of Empire of Debt https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397161 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397161]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes: Collector's Edition Author: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Narrator: Al Kessel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 5 minutes Release date: October 31, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Straight answers to every question you've ever had about how the economy works and how it affects your life In this Collector's Edition of their celebrated How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes, Peter Schiff, economic expert and bestselling author of Crash Proof and The Real Crash, once again teams up with his brother Andrew to spin a lively economic fable that untangles many of the fallacies preventing people from really understanding what drives an economy. The 2010 original has been described as a 'Flintstones' take on economics that entertainingly explains the beauty of free markets. The new edition has been greatly expanded in both quantity and quality. A new introduction and two new chapters bring the story fully up to date. With the help of lively humor and deceptively simple storytelling, the Schiffs bring the complex subjects of inflation, monetary policy, recession, and other important topics in economics down to Earth. The story starts with three guys on an island who barely survive by fishing barehanded. Then one enterprising islander invents a net, catches more fish, and changes the island's economy fundamentally. Using this story the Schiffs apply their signature take-no-prisoners logic to expose the glaring fallacies and gaping holes permeating the global economic conversation. Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Thu, 31 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397161 thebookvoice.com 5:5:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397161]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes: Collector's Edition Author: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Narrator: Al Kessel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 5 minutes Release date: October 31, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Straight answers to every question you've ever had about how the economy works and how it affects your life In this Collector's Edition of their celebrated How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes, Peter Schiff, economic expert and bestselling author of Crash Proof and The Real Crash, once again teams up with his brother Andrew to spin a lively economic fable that untangles many of the fallacies preventing people from really understanding what drives an economy. The 2010 original has been described as a 'Flintstones' take on economics that entertainingly explains the beauty of free markets. The new edition has been greatly expanded in both quantity and quality. A new introduction and two new chapters bring the story fully up to date. With the help of lively humor and deceptively simple storytelling, the Schiffs bring the complex subjects of inflation, monetary policy, recession, and other important topics in economics down to Earth. The story starts with three guys on an island who barely survive by fishing barehanded. Then one enterprising islander invents a net, catches more fish, and changes the island's economy fundamentally. Using this story the Schiffs apply their signature take-no-prisoners logic to expose the glaring fallacies and gaping holes permeating the global economic conversation. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397161]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes: Collector's Edition Author: Andrew J. Schiff, Peter D. Schiff Narrator: Al Kessel Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 5 minutes Release date: October 31, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Straight answers to every question you've ever had about how the economy works and how it affects your life In this Collector's Edition of their celebrated How an Economy Grows and Why It Crashes, Peter Schiff, economic expert and bestselling author of Crash Proof and The Real Crash, once again teams up with his brother Andrew to spin a lively economic fable that untangles many of the fallacies preventing people from really understanding what drives an economy. The 2010 original has been described as a 'Flintstones' take on economics that entertainingly explains the beauty of free markets. The new edition has been greatly expanded in both quantity and quality. A new introduction and two new chapters bring the story fully up to date. With the help of lively humor and deceptively simple storytelling, the Schiffs bring the complex subjects of inflation, monetary policy, recession, and other important topics in economics down to Earth. The story starts with three guys on an island who barely survive by fishing barehanded. Then one enterprising islander invents a net, catches more fish, and changes the island's economy fundamentally. Using this story the Schiffs apply their signature take-no-prisoners logic to expose the glaring fallacies and gaping holes permeating the global economic conversation. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397149 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397149]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How Charts Lie: Getting Smarter about Visual Information Author: Alberto Cairo Narrator: Jonathan Yen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 12 minutes Release date: October 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: We've all heard that a picture is worth a thousand words, but what if we don't understand what we're looking at? Social media has made charts, infographics, and diagrams ubiquitous—and easier to share than ever. We associate charts with science and reason; the flashy visuals are both appealing and persuasive. Pie charts, maps, bar and line graphs, and scatter plots (to name a few) can better inform us, revealing patterns and trends hidden behind the numbers we encounter in our lives. In short, good charts make us smarter—if we know how to read them. However, they can also lead us astray. Charts lie in a variety of ways—displaying incomplete or inaccurate data, suggesting misleading patterns, and concealing uncertainty—or are frequently misunderstood, such as the confusing cone of uncertainty maps shown on TV every hurricane season. To make matters worse, many of us are ill-equipped to interpret the visuals that politicians, journalists, advertisers, and even our employers present each day, enabling bad actors to easily manipulate them to promote their own agendas. In How Charts Lie, data visualization expert Alberto Cairo teaches us to not only spot the lies in deceptive visuals, but also to take advantage of good ones to understand complex stories. Alberto Cairo Tue, 15 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397149 thebookvoice.com 5:12:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397149]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How Charts Lie: Getting Smarter about Visual Information Author: Alberto Cairo Narrator: Jonathan Yen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 12 minutes Release date: October 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: We've all heard that a picture is worth a thousand words, but what if we don't understand what we're looking at? Social media has made charts, infographics, and diagrams ubiquitous—and easier to share than ever. We associate charts with science and reason; the flashy visuals are both appealing and persuasive. Pie charts, maps, bar and line graphs, and scatter plots (to name a few) can better inform us, revealing patterns and trends hidden behind the numbers we encounter in our lives. In short, good charts make us smarter—if we know how to read them. However, they can also lead us astray. Charts lie in a variety of ways—displaying incomplete or inaccurate data, suggesting misleading patterns, and concealing uncertainty—or are frequently misunderstood, such as the confusing cone of uncertainty maps shown on TV every hurricane season. To make matters worse, many of us are ill-equipped to interpret the visuals that politicians, journalists, advertisers, and even our employers present each day, enabling bad actors to easily manipulate them to promote their own agendas. In How Charts Lie, data visualization expert Alberto Cairo teaches us to not only spot the lies in deceptive visuals, but also to take advantage of good ones to understand complex stories. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/397149]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: How Charts Lie: Getting Smarter about Visual Information Author: Alberto Cairo Narrator: Jonathan Yen Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 5 hours 12 minutes Release date: October 15, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: We've all heard that a picture is worth a thousand words, but what if we don't understand what we're looking at? Social media has made charts, infographics, and diagrams ubiquitous—and easier to share than ever. We associate charts with science and reason; the flashy visuals are both appealing and persuasive. Pie charts, maps, bar and line graphs, and scatter plots (to name a few) can better inform us, revealing patterns and trends hidden behind the numbers we encounter in our lives. In short, good charts make us smarter—if we know how to read them. However, they can also lead us astray. Charts lie in a variety of ways—displaying incomplete or inaccurate data, suggesting misleading patterns, and concealing uncertainty—or are frequently misunderstood, such as the confusing cone of uncertainty maps shown on TV every hurricane season. To make matters worse, many of us are ill-equipped to interpret the visuals that politicians, journalists, advertisers, and even our employers present each day, enabling bad actors to easily manipulate them to promote their own agendas. In How Charts Lie, data visualization expert Alberto Cairo teaches us to not only spot the lies in deceptive visuals, but also to take advantage of good ones to understand complex stories. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395897 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395897]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Infinite Machine: How an Army of Crypto-hackers Is Building the Next Internet with Ethereum Author: Camila Russo Narrator: Laura Jennings Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 31 minutes Release date: July 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.83 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Written with the verve of such works as The Big Short, The History of the Future, and The Spider Network, here is the fascinating, true story of the rise of Ethereum, the second-biggest digital asset in the world, the growth of cryptocurrency, and the future of the internet as we know it. Everyone has heard of Bitcoin, but few know about the second largest cryptocurrency, Ethereum, which has been heralded as the ''next internet.'' The story of Ethereum begins with Vitalik Buterin, a supremely gifted nineteen-year-old autodidact who saw the promise of blockchain when the technology was in its earliest stages. He convinced a crack  group of coders to join him in his quest to make a super-charged, global computer. The Infinite Machine introduces Vitalik’s ingenious idea and unfolds Ethereum’s chaotic beginnings. It then explores the brilliant innovation and reckless greed the platform—an infinitely adaptable foundation for experimentation and new applications—has unleashed and the consequences that resulted as the frenzy surrounding it grew: increased regulatory scrutiny, incipient Wall Street interest, and the founding team’s effort to get the Ethereum platform to scale so it can eventually be  accessible to the masses. Financial journalist and cryptocurrency expert Camila Russo details the wild and often hapless adventures of a team of hippy-anarchists, reluctantly led by an ambivalent visionary, and lays out how this new foundation for the internet will spur both transformation and fraud—turning some into millionaires and others into felons—and revolutionize our ideas about money. Camila Russo Tue, 14 Jul 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395897 thebookvoice.com 10:31:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395897]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Infinite Machine: How an Army of Crypto-hackers Is Building the Next Internet with Ethereum Author: Camila Russo Narrator: Laura Jennings Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 31 minutes Release date: July 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.83 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Written with the verve of such works as The Big Short, The History of the Future, and The Spider Network, here is the fascinating, true story of the rise of Ethereum, the second-biggest digital asset in the world, the growth of cryptocurrency, and the future of the internet as we know it. Everyone has heard of Bitcoin, but few know about the second largest cryptocurrency, Ethereum, which has been heralded as the ''next internet.'' The story of Ethereum begins with Vitalik Buterin, a supremely gifted nineteen-year-old autodidact who saw the promise of blockchain when the technology was in its earliest stages. He convinced a crack  group of coders to join him in his quest to make a super-charged, global computer. The Infinite Machine introduces Vitalik’s ingenious idea and unfolds Ethereum’s chaotic beginnings. It then explores the brilliant innovation and reckless greed the platform—an infinitely adaptable foundation for experimentation and new applications—has unleashed and the consequences that resulted as the frenzy surrounding it grew: increased regulatory scrutiny, incipient Wall Street interest, and the founding team’s effort to get the Ethereum platform to scale so it can eventually be  accessible to the masses. Financial journalist and cryptocurrency expert Camila Russo details the wild and often hapless adventures of a team of hippy-anarchists, reluctantly led by an ambivalent visionary, and lays out how this new foundation for the internet will spur both transformation and fraud—turning some into millionaires and others into felons—and revolutionize our ideas about money. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395897]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Infinite Machine: How an Army of Crypto-hackers Is Building the Next Internet with Ethereum Author: Camila Russo Narrator: Laura Jennings Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 10 hours 31 minutes Release date: July 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.83 of Total 6 Ratings of Narrator: 3 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Written with the verve of such works as The Big Short, The History of the Future, and The Spider Network, here is the fascinating, true story of the rise of Ethereum, the second-biggest digital asset in the world, the growth of cryptocurrency, and the future of the internet as we know it. Everyone has heard of Bitcoin, but few know about the second largest cryptocurrency, Ethereum, which has been heralded as the ''next internet.'' The story of Ethereum begins with Vitalik Buterin, a supremely gifted nineteen-year-old autodidact who saw the promise of blockchain when the technology was in its earliest stages. He convinced a crack  group of coders to join him in his quest to make a super-charged, global computer. The Infinite Machine introduces Vitalik’s ingenious idea and unfolds Ethereum’s chaotic beginnings. It then explores the brilliant innovation and reckless greed the platform—an infinitely adaptable foundation for experimentation and new applications—has unleashed and the consequences that resulted as the frenzy surrounding it grew: increased regulatory scrutiny, incipient Wall Street interest, and the founding team’s effort to get the Ethereum platform to scale so it can eventually be  accessible to the masses. Financial journalist and cryptocurrency expert Camila Russo details the wild and often hapless adventures of a team of hippy-anarchists, reluctantly led by an ambivalent visionary, and lays out how this new foundation for the internet will spur both transformation and fraud—turning some into millionaires and others into felons—and revolutionize our ideas about money. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395871 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395871]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A World Without Work: Technology, Automation and How We Should Respond Author: Daniel Susskind Narrator: Daniel Susskind Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 57 minutes Release date: January 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 2.33 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 2.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin 'A path-breaking, thought-provoking and in-depth study of how new technology will transform the world of work' Gordon Brown 'Compelling ... Thought-provoking ... Should be required reading for any presidential candidate thinking about the economy of the future' NEW YORK TIMES New technologies have always provoked panic about workers being replaced by machines. In the past, such fears have been misplaced, and many economists maintain that they remain so today. Yet in A World Without Work, Daniel Susskind shows why this time really is different. Advances in artificial intelligence mean that all kinds of jobs are increasingly at risk. Susskind argues that machines no longer need to reason like us in order to outperform us. Increasingly, tasks that used to be beyond the capability of computers - from diagnosing illnesses to drafting legal contracts - are now within their reach. The threat of technological unemployment is real. So how can we all thrive in a world with less work? Susskind reminds us that technological progress could bring about unprecedented prosperity, solving one of mankind's oldest problems: making sure that everyone has enough to live on. The challenge will be to distribute this prosperity fairly, constrain the burgeoning power of Big Tech, and provide meaning in a world where work is no longer the centre of our lives. In this visionary, pragmatic and ultimately hopeful book, Susskind shows us the way. 'This is the book to read on the future of work in the age of artificial intelligence. It is thoughtful and state-of-the-art on the economics of the issue, but its real strength is the way it goes beyond just the economics. A truly important contribution' Lawrence Summers, former Chief Economist of the World Bank 'A fascinating book about a vitally important topic. Elegant, original and compelling'Tim Harford, author of The Undercover Economist © Daniel Susskind 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Daniel Susskind Tue, 14 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395871 thebookvoice.com 9:57:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395871]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A World Without Work: Technology, Automation and How We Should Respond Author: Daniel Susskind Narrator: Daniel Susskind Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 57 minutes Release date: January 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 2.33 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 2.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin 'A path-breaking, thought-provoking and in-depth study of how new technology will transform the world of work' Gordon Brown 'Compelling ... Thought-provoking ... Should be required reading for any presidential candidate thinking about the economy of the future' NEW YORK TIMES New technologies have always provoked panic about workers being replaced by machines. In the past, such fears have been misplaced, and many economists maintain that they remain so today. Yet in A World Without Work, Daniel Susskind shows why this time really is different. Advances in artificial intelligence mean that all kinds of jobs are increasingly at risk. Susskind argues that machines no longer need to reason like us in order to outperform us. Increasingly, tasks that used to be beyond the capability of computers - from diagnosing illnesses to drafting legal contracts - are now within their reach. The threat of technological unemployment is real. So how can we all thrive in a world with less work? Susskind reminds us that technological progress could bring about unprecedented prosperity, solving one of mankind's oldest problems: making sure that everyone has enough to live on. The challenge will be to distribute this prosperity fairly, constrain the burgeoning power of Big Tech, and provide meaning in a world where work is no longer the centre of our lives. In this visionary, pragmatic and ultimately hopeful book, Susskind shows us the way. 'This is the book to read on the future of work in the age of artificial intelligence. It is thoughtful and state-of-the-art on the economics of the issue, but its real strength is the way it goes beyond just the economics. A truly important contribution' Lawrence Summers, former Chief Economist of the World Bank 'A fascinating book about a vitally important topic. Elegant, original and compelling'Tim Harford, author of The Undercover Economist © Daniel Susskind 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395871]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: A World Without Work: Technology, Automation and How We Should Respond Author: Daniel Susskind Narrator: Daniel Susskind Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 57 minutes Release date: January 14, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 2.33 of Total 3 Ratings of Narrator: 2.5 of Total 2 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Brought to you by Penguin 'A path-breaking, thought-provoking and in-depth study of how new technology will transform the world of work' Gordon Brown 'Compelling ... Thought-provoking ... Should be required reading for any presidential candidate thinking about the economy of the future' NEW YORK TIMES New technologies have always provoked panic about workers being replaced by machines. In the past, such fears have been misplaced, and many economists maintain that they remain so today. Yet in A World Without Work, Daniel Susskind shows why this time really is different. Advances in artificial intelligence mean that all kinds of jobs are increasingly at risk. Susskind argues that machines no longer need to reason like us in order to outperform us. Increasingly, tasks that used to be beyond the capability of computers - from diagnosing illnesses to drafting legal contracts - are now within their reach. The threat of technological unemployment is real. So how can we all thrive in a world with less work? Susskind reminds us that technological progress could bring about unprecedented prosperity, solving one of mankind's oldest problems: making sure that everyone has enough to live on. The challenge will be to distribute this prosperity fairly, constrain the burgeoning power of Big Tech, and provide meaning in a world where work is no longer the centre of our lives. In this visionary, pragmatic and ultimately hopeful book, Susskind shows us the way. 'This is the book to read on the future of work in the age of artificial intelligence. It is thoughtful and state-of-the-art on the economics of the issue, but its real strength is the way it goes beyond just the economics. A truly important contribution' Lawrence Summers, former Chief Economist of the World Bank 'A fascinating book about a vitally important topic. Elegant, original and compelling'Tim Harford, author of The Undercover Economist © Daniel Susskind 2020 (P) Penguin Audio 2020 https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395334 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395334]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Price of Peace: Money, Democracy, and the Life of John Maynard Keynes Author: Zachary D. Carter Narrator: Robert Petkoff Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 22 hours 50 minutes Release date: May 19, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.8 of Total 10 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER • An “outstanding new intellectual biography of John Maynard Keynes [that moves] swiftly along currents of lucidity and wit” (The New York Times), illuminating the world of the influential economist and his transformative ideas “A timely, lucid and compelling portrait of a man whose enduring relevance is always heightened when crisis strikes.”—The Wall Street Journal WINNER: The Arthur Ross Book Award Gold Medal • The Hillman Prize for Book Journalism FINALIST: The National Book Critics Circle Award • The Sabew Best in Business Book Award NAMED ONE OF THE TEN BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY PUBLISHERS WEEKLY AND ONE OF THE BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY Jennifer Szalai, The New York Times • The Economist • Bloomberg • Mother Jones At the dawn of World War I, a young academic named John Maynard Keynes hastily folded his long legs into the sidecar of his brother-in-law’s motorcycle for an odd, frantic journey that would change the course of history. Swept away from his placid home at Cambridge University by the currents of the conflict, Keynes found himself thrust into the halls of European treasuries to arrange emergency loans and packed off to America to negotiate the terms of economic combat. The terror and anxiety unleashed by the war would transform him from a comfortable obscurity into the most influential and controversial intellectual of his day—a man whose ideas still retain the power to shock in our own time. Keynes was not only an economist but the preeminent anti-authoritarian thinker of the twentieth century, one who devoted his life to the belief that art and ideas could conquer war and deprivation. As a moral philosopher, political theorist, and statesman, Keynes led an extraordinary life that took him from intimate turn-of-the-century parties in London’s riotous Bloomsbury art scene to the fevered negotiations in Paris that shaped the Treaty of Versailles, from stock market crashes on two continents to diplomatic breakthroughs in the mountains of New Hampshire to wartime ballet openings at London’s extravagant Covent Garden.  Along the way, Keynes reinvented Enlightenment liberalism to meet the harrowing crises of the twentieth century. In the United States, his ideas became the foundation of a burgeoning economics profession, but they also became a flash point in the broader political struggle of the Cold War, as Keynesian acolytes faced off against conservatives in an intellectual battle for the future of the country—and the world. Though many Keynesian ideas survived the struggle, much of the project to which he devoted his life was lost.  In this riveting biography, veteran journalist Zachary D. Carter unearths the lost legacy of one of history’s most fascinating minds. The Price of Peace revives a forgotten set of ideas about democracy, money, and the good life with transformative implications for today’s debates over inequality and the power politics that shape the global order. LONGLISTED FOR THE CUNDILL HISTORY PRIZE Zachary D. Carter Tue, 19 May 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395334 thebookvoice.com 22:50:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395334]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Price of Peace: Money, Democracy, and the Life of John Maynard Keynes Author: Zachary D. Carter Narrator: Robert Petkoff Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 22 hours 50 minutes Release date: May 19, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.8 of Total 10 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER • An “outstanding new intellectual biography of John Maynard Keynes [that moves] swiftly along currents of lucidity and wit” (The New York Times), illuminating the world of the influential economist and his transformative ideas “A timely, lucid and compelling portrait of a man whose enduring relevance is always heightened when crisis strikes.”—The Wall Street Journal WINNER: The Arthur Ross Book Award Gold Medal • The Hillman Prize for Book Journalism FINALIST: The National Book Critics Circle Award • The Sabew Best in Business Book Award NAMED ONE OF THE TEN BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY PUBLISHERS WEEKLY AND ONE OF THE BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY Jennifer Szalai, The New York Times • The Economist • Bloomberg • Mother Jones At the dawn of World War I, a young academic named John Maynard Keynes hastily folded his long legs into the sidecar of his brother-in-law’s motorcycle for an odd, frantic journey that would change the course of history. Swept away from his placid home at Cambridge University by the currents of the conflict, Keynes found himself thrust into the halls of European treasuries to arrange emergency loans and packed off to America to negotiate the terms of economic combat. The terror and anxiety unleashed by the war would transform him from a comfortable obscurity into the most influential and controversial intellectual of his day—a man whose ideas still retain the power to shock in our own time. Keynes was not only an economist but the preeminent anti-authoritarian thinker of the twentieth century, one who devoted his life to the belief that art and ideas could conquer war and deprivation. As a moral philosopher, political theorist, and statesman, Keynes led an extraordinary life that took him from intimate turn-of-the-century parties in London’s riotous Bloomsbury art scene to the fevered negotiations in Paris that shaped the Treaty of Versailles, from stock market crashes on two continents to diplomatic breakthroughs in the mountains of New Hampshire to wartime ballet openings at London’s extravagant Covent Garden.  Along the way, Keynes reinvented Enlightenment liberalism to meet the harrowing crises of the twentieth century. In the United States, his ideas became the foundation of a burgeoning economics profession, but they also became a flash point in the broader political struggle of the Cold War, as Keynesian acolytes faced off against conservatives in an intellectual battle for the future of the country—and the world. Though many Keynesian ideas survived the struggle, much of the project to which he devoted his life was lost.  In this riveting biography, veteran journalist Zachary D. Carter unearths the lost legacy of one of history’s most fascinating minds. The Price of Peace revives a forgotten set of ideas about democracy, money, and the good life with transformative implications for today’s debates over inequality and the power politics that shape the global order. LONGLISTED FOR THE CUNDILL HISTORY PRIZE Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395334]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Price of Peace: Money, Democracy, and the Life of John Maynard Keynes Author: Zachary D. Carter Narrator: Robert Petkoff Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 22 hours 50 minutes Release date: May 19, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.8 of Total 10 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: NEW YORK TIMES BESTSELLER • An “outstanding new intellectual biography of John Maynard Keynes [that moves] swiftly along currents of lucidity and wit” (The New York Times), illuminating the world of the influential economist and his transformative ideas “A timely, lucid and compelling portrait of a man whose enduring relevance is always heightened when crisis strikes.”—The Wall Street Journal WINNER: The Arthur Ross Book Award Gold Medal • The Hillman Prize for Book Journalism FINALIST: The National Book Critics Circle Award • The Sabew Best in Business Book Award NAMED ONE OF THE TEN BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY PUBLISHERS WEEKLY AND ONE OF THE BEST BOOKS OF THE YEAR BY Jennifer Szalai, The New York Times • The Economist • Bloomberg • Mother Jones At the dawn of World War I, a young academic named John Maynard Keynes hastily folded his long legs into the sidecar of his brother-in-law’s motorcycle for an odd, frantic journey that would change the course of history. Swept away from his placid home at Cambridge University by the currents of the conflict, Keynes found himself thrust into the halls of European treasuries to arrange emergency loans and packed off to America to negotiate the terms of economic combat. The terror and anxiety unleashed by the war would transform him from a comfortable obscurity into the most influential and controversial intellectual of his day—a man whose ideas still retain the power to shock in our own time. Keynes was not only an economist but the preeminent anti-authoritarian thinker of the twentieth century, one who devoted his life to the belief that art and ideas could conquer war and deprivation. As a moral philosopher, political theorist, and statesman, Keynes led an extraordinary life that took him from intimate turn-of-the-century parties in London’s riotous Bloomsbury art scene to the fevered negotiations in Paris that shaped the Treaty of Versailles, from stock market crashes on two continents to diplomatic breakthroughs in the mountains of New Hampshire to wartime ballet openings at London’s extravagant Covent Garden.  Along the way, Keynes reinvented Enlightenment liberalism to meet the harrowing crises of the twentieth century. In the United States, his ideas became the foundation of a burgeoning economics profession, but they also became a flash point in the broader political struggle of the Cold War, as Keynesian acolytes faced off against conservatives in an intellectual battle for the future of the country—and the world. Though many Keynesian ideas survived the struggle, much of the project to which he devoted his life was lost.  In this riveting biography, veteran journalist Zachary D. Carter unearths the lost legacy of one of history’s most fascinating minds. The Price of Peace revives a forgotten set of ideas about democracy, money, and the good life with transformative implications for today’s debates over inequality and the power politics that shape the global order. LONGLISTED FOR THE CUNDILL HISTORY PRIZE https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395309 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395309]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economic Case for LGBT Equality: Why Fair and Equal Treatment Benefits Us All Author: M. V. Lee Badgett Narrator: Samantha Desz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 37 minutes Release date: May 19, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An economist demonstrates how LGBT equality and inclusion within organizations increases their bottom line and allows for countries’ economies to flourish We know that homophobia harms LGBT individuals in many ways, but economist M. V. Lee Badgett argues that in addition to moral and human rights reasons for equality, we can now also make a financial argument. Finding that homophobia and transphobia cost 1% or more of a country’s GDP, Badgett expertly uses recent research and statistics to analyze how these hostile practices and environments affect both the US and global economies. LGBT equality remains a persistent and pertinent issue. The continued passing of discriminatory laws, people being fired from jobs for their sexual orientation and/or gender identity, harassment and bullying in school, violence and hate crimes on the streets, exclusion from intolerant families, and health effects of stigma all make it incredibly difficult to live a good life. Examining the consequences of anti-LGBT practices across multiple countries, including the US, Canada, the UK, Australia, India and the Philippines, Badgett reveals the expensive repercussions of hate and discrimination, and how our economy loses when we miss out on the full benefit of LGBT people’s potential contributions. M. V. Lee Badgett Tue, 19 May 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395309 thebookvoice.com 6:37:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395309]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economic Case for LGBT Equality: Why Fair and Equal Treatment Benefits Us All Author: M. V. Lee Badgett Narrator: Samantha Desz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 37 minutes Release date: May 19, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An economist demonstrates how LGBT equality and inclusion within organizations increases their bottom line and allows for countries’ economies to flourish We know that homophobia harms LGBT individuals in many ways, but economist M. V. Lee Badgett argues that in addition to moral and human rights reasons for equality, we can now also make a financial argument. Finding that homophobia and transphobia cost 1% or more of a country’s GDP, Badgett expertly uses recent research and statistics to analyze how these hostile practices and environments affect both the US and global economies. LGBT equality remains a persistent and pertinent issue. The continued passing of discriminatory laws, people being fired from jobs for their sexual orientation and/or gender identity, harassment and bullying in school, violence and hate crimes on the streets, exclusion from intolerant families, and health effects of stigma all make it incredibly difficult to live a good life. Examining the consequences of anti-LGBT practices across multiple countries, including the US, Canada, the UK, Australia, India and the Philippines, Badgett reveals the expensive repercussions of hate and discrimination, and how our economy loses when we miss out on the full benefit of LGBT people’s potential contributions. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/395309]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economic Case for LGBT Equality: Why Fair and Equal Treatment Benefits Us All Author: M. V. Lee Badgett Narrator: Samantha Desz Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 37 minutes Release date: May 19, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An economist demonstrates how LGBT equality and inclusion within organizations increases their bottom line and allows for countries’ economies to flourish We know that homophobia harms LGBT individuals in many ways, but economist M. V. Lee Badgett argues that in addition to moral and human rights reasons for equality, we can now also make a financial argument. Finding that homophobia and transphobia cost 1% or more of a country’s GDP, Badgett expertly uses recent research and statistics to analyze how these hostile practices and environments affect both the US and global economies. LGBT equality remains a persistent and pertinent issue. The continued passing of discriminatory laws, people being fired from jobs for their sexual orientation and/or gender identity, harassment and bullying in school, violence and hate crimes on the streets, exclusion from intolerant families, and health effects of stigma all make it incredibly difficult to live a good life. Examining the consequences of anti-LGBT practices across multiple countries, including the US, Canada, the UK, Australia, India and the Philippines, Badgett reveals the expensive repercussions of hate and discrimination, and how our economy loses when we miss out on the full benefit of LGBT people’s potential contributions. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393364 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393364]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Why Liberalism Works: How True Liberal Values Produce a Freer, More Equal, Prosperous World for All Author: Deirdre Nansen Mccloskey Narrator: Janet Metzger Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 1 minute Release date: October 15, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An insightful and passionately written book explaining why a return to Enlightenment ideals is good for the world The greatest challenges facing humankind, according to Deirdre Nansen McCloskey, are poverty and tyranny, both of which hold people back. Arguing for a return to true liberal values, this engaging and accessible book develops, defends, and demonstrates how embracing the ideas first espoused by eighteenth-century philosophers like Locke, Smith, Voltaire, and Wollstonecraft is good for everyone. With her trademark wit and deep understanding, McCloskey shows how the adoption of Enlightenment ideals of liberalism has propelled the freedom and prosperity that define the quality of a full life. In her view, liberalism leads to equality, but equality does not necessarily lead to liberalism—and the fixation of the left on inequality is counterproductive. Liberalism is an optimistic philosophy that depends on the power of rhetoric rather than arms and on ethics, free speech, and facts for us to thrive. Deirdre Nansen Mccloskey Tue, 15 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393364 thebookvoice.com 15:1:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393364]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Why Liberalism Works: How True Liberal Values Produce a Freer, More Equal, Prosperous World for All Author: Deirdre Nansen Mccloskey Narrator: Janet Metzger Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 1 minute Release date: October 15, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An insightful and passionately written book explaining why a return to Enlightenment ideals is good for the world The greatest challenges facing humankind, according to Deirdre Nansen McCloskey, are poverty and tyranny, both of which hold people back. Arguing for a return to true liberal values, this engaging and accessible book develops, defends, and demonstrates how embracing the ideas first espoused by eighteenth-century philosophers like Locke, Smith, Voltaire, and Wollstonecraft is good for everyone. With her trademark wit and deep understanding, McCloskey shows how the adoption of Enlightenment ideals of liberalism has propelled the freedom and prosperity that define the quality of a full life. In her view, liberalism leads to equality, but equality does not necessarily lead to liberalism—and the fixation of the left on inequality is counterproductive. Liberalism is an optimistic philosophy that depends on the power of rhetoric rather than arms and on ethics, free speech, and facts for us to thrive. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393364]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Why Liberalism Works: How True Liberal Values Produce a Freer, More Equal, Prosperous World for All Author: Deirdre Nansen Mccloskey Narrator: Janet Metzger Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 15 hours 1 minute Release date: October 15, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Ratings of Narrator: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An insightful and passionately written book explaining why a return to Enlightenment ideals is good for the world The greatest challenges facing humankind, according to Deirdre Nansen McCloskey, are poverty and tyranny, both of which hold people back. Arguing for a return to true liberal values, this engaging and accessible book develops, defends, and demonstrates how embracing the ideas first espoused by eighteenth-century philosophers like Locke, Smith, Voltaire, and Wollstonecraft is good for everyone. With her trademark wit and deep understanding, McCloskey shows how the adoption of Enlightenment ideals of liberalism has propelled the freedom and prosperity that define the quality of a full life. In her view, liberalism leads to equality, but equality does not necessarily lead to liberalism—and the fixation of the left on inequality is counterproductive. Liberalism is an optimistic philosophy that depends on the power of rhetoric rather than arms and on ethics, free speech, and facts for us to thrive. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393086 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393086]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Implementing Six Sigma: Smarter Solutions Using Statistical Methods 2nd Edition Author: Forrest W. Breyfogle Iii Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 32 hours 40 minutes Release date: October 22, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This new and significantly revised edition of Implementing Six Sigma goes well beyond traditional Six Sigma methodologies,introducing an enhanced roadmap—S4/IEE (Smarter Six Sigma Solution ssm/Integrated Enterprise Excellence). This cutting-edge approach offers a solution to the common problem of sustaining Six Sigma activities and downplays the traditional policy stating that Six Sigma projects must have a defined defect. A variety of plans,checklists, metrics, and warnings of potential pitfalls provide thorough preparation for anyone implementing Six Sigma strategies. With new coverage of Six Sigma infrastructure building,benchmarking, and real-world 'lessons learned,' this Second Edition is the best available tool for implementing these powerful,profit-building strategies. Forrest W. Breyfogle Iii Tue, 22 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393086 thebookvoice.com 32:40:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393086]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Implementing Six Sigma: Smarter Solutions Using Statistical Methods 2nd Edition Author: Forrest W. Breyfogle Iii Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 32 hours 40 minutes Release date: October 22, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This new and significantly revised edition of Implementing Six Sigma goes well beyond traditional Six Sigma methodologies,introducing an enhanced roadmap—S4/IEE (Smarter Six Sigma Solution ssm/Integrated Enterprise Excellence). This cutting-edge approach offers a solution to the common problem of sustaining Six Sigma activities and downplays the traditional policy stating that Six Sigma projects must have a defined defect. A variety of plans,checklists, metrics, and warnings of potential pitfalls provide thorough preparation for anyone implementing Six Sigma strategies. With new coverage of Six Sigma infrastructure building,benchmarking, and real-world 'lessons learned,' this Second Edition is the best available tool for implementing these powerful,profit-building strategies. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393086]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Implementing Six Sigma: Smarter Solutions Using Statistical Methods 2nd Edition Author: Forrest W. Breyfogle Iii Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 32 hours 40 minutes Release date: October 22, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: This new and significantly revised edition of Implementing Six Sigma goes well beyond traditional Six Sigma methodologies,introducing an enhanced roadmap—S4/IEE (Smarter Six Sigma Solution ssm/Integrated Enterprise Excellence). This cutting-edge approach offers a solution to the common problem of sustaining Six Sigma activities and downplays the traditional policy stating that Six Sigma projects must have a defined defect. A variety of plans,checklists, metrics, and warnings of potential pitfalls provide thorough preparation for anyone implementing Six Sigma strategies. With new coverage of Six Sigma infrastructure building,benchmarking, and real-world 'lessons learned,' this Second Edition is the best available tool for implementing these powerful,profit-building strategies. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393031 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393031]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Green Growth That Works: Natural Capital Policy and Finance Mechanisms Around the World Author: Tbd Narrator: Teri Schnaubelt Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 9 minutes Release date: October 8, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Rapid economic development has been a boon to human well-being. It has lifted millions out of poverty, raised standards of living, and increased life expectancies. But economic development comes at a significant cost to natural capital—the fertile soils, forests, coastal marshes, farmland—that support all life on earth, including our own. Green Growth That Works is the first practical guide to bring together pragmatic finance and policy tools that can make investment in natural capital both attractive and commonplace. The authors present six mechanisms that demonstrate a range of approaches used around the globe to conserve and restore earth’s myriad ecosystems, including: government subsidies; regulatory-driven mitigation; voluntary conservation; water funds; market-based transactions; and bilateral and multilateral payments. Through a series of real-world case studies, the book addresses questions such as: How can we channel economic incentives to make conservation and restoration desirable? What approaches have worked best? How can governments, businesses, NGOs, and individuals work together successfully? Tbd Tue, 08 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393031 thebookvoice.com 11:9:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393031]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Green Growth That Works: Natural Capital Policy and Finance Mechanisms Around the World Author: Tbd Narrator: Teri Schnaubelt Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 9 minutes Release date: October 8, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Rapid economic development has been a boon to human well-being. It has lifted millions out of poverty, raised standards of living, and increased life expectancies. But economic development comes at a significant cost to natural capital—the fertile soils, forests, coastal marshes, farmland—that support all life on earth, including our own. Green Growth That Works is the first practical guide to bring together pragmatic finance and policy tools that can make investment in natural capital both attractive and commonplace. The authors present six mechanisms that demonstrate a range of approaches used around the globe to conserve and restore earth’s myriad ecosystems, including: government subsidies; regulatory-driven mitigation; voluntary conservation; water funds; market-based transactions; and bilateral and multilateral payments. Through a series of real-world case studies, the book addresses questions such as: How can we channel economic incentives to make conservation and restoration desirable? What approaches have worked best? How can governments, businesses, NGOs, and individuals work together successfully? Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/393031]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Green Growth That Works: Natural Capital Policy and Finance Mechanisms Around the World Author: Tbd Narrator: Teri Schnaubelt Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 9 minutes Release date: October 8, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Rapid economic development has been a boon to human well-being. It has lifted millions out of poverty, raised standards of living, and increased life expectancies. But economic development comes at a significant cost to natural capital—the fertile soils, forests, coastal marshes, farmland—that support all life on earth, including our own. Green Growth That Works is the first practical guide to bring together pragmatic finance and policy tools that can make investment in natural capital both attractive and commonplace. The authors present six mechanisms that demonstrate a range of approaches used around the globe to conserve and restore earth’s myriad ecosystems, including: government subsidies; regulatory-driven mitigation; voluntary conservation; water funds; market-based transactions; and bilateral and multilateral payments. Through a series of real-world case studies, the book addresses questions such as: How can we channel economic incentives to make conservation and restoration desirable? What approaches have worked best? How can governments, businesses, NGOs, and individuals work together successfully? https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392336 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392336]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: EuroTragedy: A Drama in Nine Acts Author: Ashoka Mody Narrator: Liam Gerrard Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 22 hours 15 minutes Release date: August 20, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Blending economic analysis with political drama, EuroTragedy is a groundbreaking account of the euro's history and tragic consequences. In this vivid and compelling chronicle, Ashoka Mody describes how the euro improbably emerged through a narrow historical window as a flawed compromise wrapped in a false pro-European rhetoric of peace and unity. Drawing on his frontline experience as an official with the IMF, Mody situates the tragedy in a fast-paced global context and guides the listener through the forced—and unforced—errors Eurozone authorities committed during their long financial crisis. The decision to switch from national currencies to the euro unfolded as both economic and political tragedy. It weakened the growth potential of member states, which made financially vulnerable Europeans more anxious. It deepened perceptions of unfairness and widened the division between nations. Now, the burden falls on younger Europeans, a generation with a discouragingly bleak future. A compassionate view of European possibilities, EuroTragedy makes clear that the euro's structural flaws will continue to haunt the continent. Instead of centralizing authority to prop up an ossified pro-Europeanist model, it is time to loosen ties that bind too tightly so that a liberal order can once more flourish. Ashoka Mody Tue, 20 Aug 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392336 thebookvoice.com 22:15:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392336]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: EuroTragedy: A Drama in Nine Acts Author: Ashoka Mody Narrator: Liam Gerrard Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 22 hours 15 minutes Release date: August 20, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Blending economic analysis with political drama, EuroTragedy is a groundbreaking account of the euro's history and tragic consequences. In this vivid and compelling chronicle, Ashoka Mody describes how the euro improbably emerged through a narrow historical window as a flawed compromise wrapped in a false pro-European rhetoric of peace and unity. Drawing on his frontline experience as an official with the IMF, Mody situates the tragedy in a fast-paced global context and guides the listener through the forced—and unforced—errors Eurozone authorities committed during their long financial crisis. The decision to switch from national currencies to the euro unfolded as both economic and political tragedy. It weakened the growth potential of member states, which made financially vulnerable Europeans more anxious. It deepened perceptions of unfairness and widened the division between nations. Now, the burden falls on younger Europeans, a generation with a discouragingly bleak future. A compassionate view of European possibilities, EuroTragedy makes clear that the euro's structural flaws will continue to haunt the continent. Instead of centralizing authority to prop up an ossified pro-Europeanist model, it is time to loosen ties that bind too tightly so that a liberal order can once more flourish. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392336]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: EuroTragedy: A Drama in Nine Acts Author: Ashoka Mody Narrator: Liam Gerrard Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 22 hours 15 minutes Release date: August 20, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Blending economic analysis with political drama, EuroTragedy is a groundbreaking account of the euro's history and tragic consequences. In this vivid and compelling chronicle, Ashoka Mody describes how the euro improbably emerged through a narrow historical window as a flawed compromise wrapped in a false pro-European rhetoric of peace and unity. Drawing on his frontline experience as an official with the IMF, Mody situates the tragedy in a fast-paced global context and guides the listener through the forced—and unforced—errors Eurozone authorities committed during their long financial crisis. The decision to switch from national currencies to the euro unfolded as both economic and political tragedy. It weakened the growth potential of member states, which made financially vulnerable Europeans more anxious. It deepened perceptions of unfairness and widened the division between nations. Now, the burden falls on younger Europeans, a generation with a discouragingly bleak future. A compassionate view of European possibilities, EuroTragedy makes clear that the euro's structural flaws will continue to haunt the continent. Instead of centralizing authority to prop up an ossified pro-Europeanist model, it is time to loosen ties that bind too tightly so that a liberal order can once more flourish. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392055 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392055]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New World Economy: A Beginner's Guide Author: Randy Charles Epping Narrator: George Newbern Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 50 minutes Release date: January 21, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What is blockchain? What is Bitcoin? How can central banks be instrumental in guiding a nation's economy? What are the underlying causes of trade deficits? Do trade wars actually help the domestic economy? How has the behavior of millennials and Generation Z affected the global economy? Find out all this and more in this definitive guide to the world economy. As the global economic landscape shifts at an increasing rate, it's more important than ever that citizens understand the building blocks of the new world economy. In this lively guide, Randy Charles Epping cuts through the jargon to explain the fundamentals. In thirty-six engaging chapters, Epping lays bare everything from NGOs and nonprofits to AI and data mining. With a comprehensive glossary and absolutely no graphs, The New World Economy: A Beginner's Guide is essential reading for anyone who wants to understand what is going on in the world around them. This timely book is a vital resource for today's chaotic world. Includes a Bonus PDF of Tables and Glossary of Terms Randy Charles Epping Tue, 21 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392055 thebookvoice.com 6:50:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392055]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New World Economy: A Beginner's Guide Author: Randy Charles Epping Narrator: George Newbern Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 50 minutes Release date: January 21, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What is blockchain? What is Bitcoin? How can central banks be instrumental in guiding a nation's economy? What are the underlying causes of trade deficits? Do trade wars actually help the domestic economy? How has the behavior of millennials and Generation Z affected the global economy? Find out all this and more in this definitive guide to the world economy. As the global economic landscape shifts at an increasing rate, it's more important than ever that citizens understand the building blocks of the new world economy. In this lively guide, Randy Charles Epping cuts through the jargon to explain the fundamentals. In thirty-six engaging chapters, Epping lays bare everything from NGOs and nonprofits to AI and data mining. With a comprehensive glossary and absolutely no graphs, The New World Economy: A Beginner's Guide is essential reading for anyone who wants to understand what is going on in the world around them. This timely book is a vital resource for today's chaotic world. Includes a Bonus PDF of Tables and Glossary of Terms Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/392055]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The New World Economy: A Beginner's Guide Author: Randy Charles Epping Narrator: George Newbern Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 6 hours 50 minutes Release date: January 21, 2020 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: What is blockchain? What is Bitcoin? How can central banks be instrumental in guiding a nation's economy? What are the underlying causes of trade deficits? Do trade wars actually help the domestic economy? How has the behavior of millennials and Generation Z affected the global economy? Find out all this and more in this definitive guide to the world economy. As the global economic landscape shifts at an increasing rate, it's more important than ever that citizens understand the building blocks of the new world economy. In this lively guide, Randy Charles Epping cuts through the jargon to explain the fundamentals. In thirty-six engaging chapters, Epping lays bare everything from NGOs and nonprofits to AI and data mining. With a comprehensive glossary and absolutely no graphs, The New World Economy: A Beginner's Guide is essential reading for anyone who wants to understand what is going on in the world around them. This timely book is a vital resource for today's chaotic world. Includes a Bonus PDF of Tables and Glossary of Terms https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391873 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391873]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Boombustology: Spotting Financial Bubbles Before They Burst 2nd Edition Author: Vikram Mansharamani Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 35 minutes Release date: August 13, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Now in its second edition, Boombustology is an authoritative, up-to-date guide on the history of booms, busts, and financial cycles. Engaging and accessible, this popular book helps investors, policymakers, and analysts navigate the radical uncertainty that plagues today's uncertain investing and economic environment. Author Vikram Mansharamani, an experienced global equity investor and prominent Harvard University lecturer, presents his multi-disciplinary framework for identifying financial bubbles before they burst. Moving beyond the typical view of booms and busts as primarily economic occurrences, this innovative book offers a multidisciplinary approach that utilizes microeconomic, macroeconomic, psychological, political, and biological lenses to spot unsustainable dynamics. It gives the listener insights into the dynamics that cause soaring financial markets to crash. Cases studies range from the seventeenth-century Dutch tulip mania to the more recent U.S. housing collapse. The numerous cross-currents driving today's markets—trade wars, inverted yield curves, currency wars, economic slowdowns, dangerous debt dynamics, populism, nationalism, as well as the general uncertainties in the global economy—demand that investors, policymakers, and analysts be on the lookout for a forthcoming recession, market correction, or worse. Vikram Mansharamani Tue, 13 Aug 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391873 thebookvoice.com 12:35:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391873]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Boombustology: Spotting Financial Bubbles Before They Burst 2nd Edition Author: Vikram Mansharamani Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 35 minutes Release date: August 13, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Now in its second edition, Boombustology is an authoritative, up-to-date guide on the history of booms, busts, and financial cycles. Engaging and accessible, this popular book helps investors, policymakers, and analysts navigate the radical uncertainty that plagues today's uncertain investing and economic environment. Author Vikram Mansharamani, an experienced global equity investor and prominent Harvard University lecturer, presents his multi-disciplinary framework for identifying financial bubbles before they burst. Moving beyond the typical view of booms and busts as primarily economic occurrences, this innovative book offers a multidisciplinary approach that utilizes microeconomic, macroeconomic, psychological, political, and biological lenses to spot unsustainable dynamics. It gives the listener insights into the dynamics that cause soaring financial markets to crash. Cases studies range from the seventeenth-century Dutch tulip mania to the more recent U.S. housing collapse. The numerous cross-currents driving today's markets—trade wars, inverted yield curves, currency wars, economic slowdowns, dangerous debt dynamics, populism, nationalism, as well as the general uncertainties in the global economy—demand that investors, policymakers, and analysts be on the lookout for a forthcoming recession, market correction, or worse. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391873]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Boombustology: Spotting Financial Bubbles Before They Burst 2nd Edition Author: Vikram Mansharamani Narrator: Timothy Andrés Pabon Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 35 minutes Release date: August 13, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 5 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Now in its second edition, Boombustology is an authoritative, up-to-date guide on the history of booms, busts, and financial cycles. Engaging and accessible, this popular book helps investors, policymakers, and analysts navigate the radical uncertainty that plagues today's uncertain investing and economic environment. Author Vikram Mansharamani, an experienced global equity investor and prominent Harvard University lecturer, presents his multi-disciplinary framework for identifying financial bubbles before they burst. Moving beyond the typical view of booms and busts as primarily economic occurrences, this innovative book offers a multidisciplinary approach that utilizes microeconomic, macroeconomic, psychological, political, and biological lenses to spot unsustainable dynamics. It gives the listener insights into the dynamics that cause soaring financial markets to crash. Cases studies range from the seventeenth-century Dutch tulip mania to the more recent U.S. housing collapse. The numerous cross-currents driving today's markets—trade wars, inverted yield curves, currency wars, economic slowdowns, dangerous debt dynamics, populism, nationalism, as well as the general uncertainties in the global economy—demand that investors, policymakers, and analysts be on the lookout for a forthcoming recession, market correction, or worse. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391607 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391607]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: IIMA: Day To Day Economics Author: Satish Deodhar Narrator: Mayur Suvarna Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 54 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The economy isn’t just for the economists to debate on. All of us are affected by its ups and downs—global recession, rise in interest rates, or hike in food prices. But do we understand the principles at work and how and why they really affect us? Day to Day Economics is an enjoyable, accessible, and extremely user-friendly book that explains the modern day Indian economy to the layperson. In this relevant book, Professor Deodhar explains the role of the government and its involvement in different aspects of the economy; the need for the RBI and its functions; and how taxes, stock markets, and recessions work. Day to Day Economics will help you go beyond the facts and figures in the budget and connect the trends to your daily life. As with all IIMA Business Books, it comes illustrated with numerous Indian examples and case studies making this the ultimate rookie’s guide to the Indian economy. Satish Deodhar Tue, 19 Nov 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391607 thebookvoice.com 4:54:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391607]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: IIMA: Day To Day Economics Author: Satish Deodhar Narrator: Mayur Suvarna Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 54 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The economy isn’t just for the economists to debate on. All of us are affected by its ups and downs—global recession, rise in interest rates, or hike in food prices. But do we understand the principles at work and how and why they really affect us? Day to Day Economics is an enjoyable, accessible, and extremely user-friendly book that explains the modern day Indian economy to the layperson. In this relevant book, Professor Deodhar explains the role of the government and its involvement in different aspects of the economy; the need for the RBI and its functions; and how taxes, stock markets, and recessions work. Day to Day Economics will help you go beyond the facts and figures in the budget and connect the trends to your daily life. As with all IIMA Business Books, it comes illustrated with numerous Indian examples and case studies making this the ultimate rookie’s guide to the Indian economy. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391607]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: IIMA: Day To Day Economics Author: Satish Deodhar Narrator: Mayur Suvarna Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 4 hours 54 minutes Release date: November 19, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: The economy isn’t just for the economists to debate on. All of us are affected by its ups and downs—global recession, rise in interest rates, or hike in food prices. But do we understand the principles at work and how and why they really affect us? Day to Day Economics is an enjoyable, accessible, and extremely user-friendly book that explains the modern day Indian economy to the layperson. In this relevant book, Professor Deodhar explains the role of the government and its involvement in different aspects of the economy; the need for the RBI and its functions; and how taxes, stock markets, and recessions work. Day to Day Economics will help you go beyond the facts and figures in the budget and connect the trends to your daily life. As with all IIMA Business Books, it comes illustrated with numerous Indian examples and case studies making this the ultimate rookie’s guide to the Indian economy. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391381 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391381]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Bezonomics: How Amazon Is Changing Our Lives, and What the World's Best Companies Are Learning from It Author: Brian Dumaine Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 0 minutes Release date: May 12, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Amazon is the business story of the decade. Jeff Bezos, the richest man on the planet, has built one of the most efficient wealth-creation machines in history. Like a giant squid, Amazon’s tentacles are squeezing industry after industry and, in the process, upsetting the state of technology, the economy, job creation and society at large. So pervasive is Amazon’s impact that business leaders in almost every sector need to understand how this force of nature operates and how they can respond to it. Saying you can ignore Jeff Bezos is equivalent to saying you could ignore Henry Ford or Steve Jobs in the early years of Ford and Apple. These titans monumentally changed how we do business, redefining the rules on a global scale. Amazon founder Jeff Bezos is the new disruptor on the block. He has created a 21st century algorithm for business and societal disruption. He has turned the retail industry inside out, is swiftly dominating cloud computing, media and advertising, and now has his sights trained on every other domain where money changes hands and business is transacted. But the principles by which Bezos has achieved his dominance - customer obsession, extreme innovation and long-term management, all supported by artificial intelligence turning a virtuous-cycle 'flywheel' - are now being borrowed and replicated. 'Bezonomics' is for some a goldmine, for others a threat, for still others a life-shaping force, whether they’re in business or not. Brian Dumaine’s Bezonomics answers the fundamental question: how are Amazon and its imitators affecting the way we live, and what can we learn from them? Brian Dumaine Tue, 12 May 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391381 thebookvoice.com 9:0:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391381]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Bezonomics: How Amazon Is Changing Our Lives, and What the World's Best Companies Are Learning from It Author: Brian Dumaine Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 0 minutes Release date: May 12, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Amazon is the business story of the decade. Jeff Bezos, the richest man on the planet, has built one of the most efficient wealth-creation machines in history. Like a giant squid, Amazon’s tentacles are squeezing industry after industry and, in the process, upsetting the state of technology, the economy, job creation and society at large. So pervasive is Amazon’s impact that business leaders in almost every sector need to understand how this force of nature operates and how they can respond to it. Saying you can ignore Jeff Bezos is equivalent to saying you could ignore Henry Ford or Steve Jobs in the early years of Ford and Apple. These titans monumentally changed how we do business, redefining the rules on a global scale. Amazon founder Jeff Bezos is the new disruptor on the block. He has created a 21st century algorithm for business and societal disruption. He has turned the retail industry inside out, is swiftly dominating cloud computing, media and advertising, and now has his sights trained on every other domain where money changes hands and business is transacted. But the principles by which Bezos has achieved his dominance - customer obsession, extreme innovation and long-term management, all supported by artificial intelligence turning a virtuous-cycle 'flywheel' - are now being borrowed and replicated. 'Bezonomics' is for some a goldmine, for others a threat, for still others a life-shaping force, whether they’re in business or not. Brian Dumaine’s Bezonomics answers the fundamental question: how are Amazon and its imitators affecting the way we live, and what can we learn from them? Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391381]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Bezonomics: How Amazon Is Changing Our Lives, and What the World's Best Companies Are Learning from It Author: Brian Dumaine Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 9 hours 0 minutes Release date: May 12, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4 of Total 1 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Amazon is the business story of the decade. Jeff Bezos, the richest man on the planet, has built one of the most efficient wealth-creation machines in history. Like a giant squid, Amazon’s tentacles are squeezing industry after industry and, in the process, upsetting the state of technology, the economy, job creation and society at large. So pervasive is Amazon’s impact that business leaders in almost every sector need to understand how this force of nature operates and how they can respond to it. Saying you can ignore Jeff Bezos is equivalent to saying you could ignore Henry Ford or Steve Jobs in the early years of Ford and Apple. These titans monumentally changed how we do business, redefining the rules on a global scale. Amazon founder Jeff Bezos is the new disruptor on the block. He has created a 21st century algorithm for business and societal disruption. He has turned the retail industry inside out, is swiftly dominating cloud computing, media and advertising, and now has his sights trained on every other domain where money changes hands and business is transacted. But the principles by which Bezos has achieved his dominance - customer obsession, extreme innovation and long-term management, all supported by artificial intelligence turning a virtuous-cycle 'flywheel' - are now being borrowed and replicated. 'Bezonomics' is for some a goldmine, for others a threat, for still others a life-shaping force, whether they’re in business or not. Brian Dumaine’s Bezonomics answers the fundamental question: how are Amazon and its imitators affecting the way we live, and what can we learn from them? https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391227 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391227]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Narrative Economics: How Stories Go Viral and Drive Major Economic Events Author: Robert J. Shiller Narrator: Susan Osman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 7 minutes Release date: October 1, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 6 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An audiobook narrated by esteemed BBC television journalist and anchor Susan Orman, with an introduction read by the author himself—Nobel Prize-winning economist and bestselling writer Robert Shiller In a world in which internet troll farms attempt to influence foreign elections, can we afford to ignore the power of viral stories to affect economies? In this groundbreaking book, Nobel Prize–winning economist and New York Times bestselling author Robert Shiller offers a new way to think about the economy and economic change. Using a rich array of historical examples and data, Shiller argues that studying popular stories that affect individual and collective economic behavior—what he calls 'narrative economics'—has the potential to vastly improve our ability to predict, prepare for, and lessen the damage of financial crises, recessions, depressions, and other major economic events. Spread through the public in the form of popular stories, ideas can go viral and move markets—whether it's the belief that tech stocks can only go up, that housing prices never fall, or that some firms are too big to fail. Whether true or false, stories like these—transmitted by word of mouth, by the news media, and increasingly by social media—drive the economy by driving our decisions about how and where to invest, how much to spend and save, and more. But despite the obvious importance of such stories, most economists have paid little attention to them. Narrative Economics sets out to change that by laying the foundation for a way of understanding how stories help propel economic events that have had led to war, mass unemployment, and increased inequality. The stories people tell—about economic confidence or panic, housing booms, the American dream, or Bitcoin—affect economic outcomes. Narrative Economics explains how we can begin to take these stories seriously. It may be Robert Shiller's most important book to date. Robert J. Shiller Tue, 01 Oct 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391227 thebookvoice.com 11:7:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391227]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Narrative Economics: How Stories Go Viral and Drive Major Economic Events Author: Robert J. Shiller Narrator: Susan Osman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 7 minutes Release date: October 1, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 6 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An audiobook narrated by esteemed BBC television journalist and anchor Susan Orman, with an introduction read by the author himself—Nobel Prize-winning economist and bestselling writer Robert Shiller In a world in which internet troll farms attempt to influence foreign elections, can we afford to ignore the power of viral stories to affect economies? In this groundbreaking book, Nobel Prize–winning economist and New York Times bestselling author Robert Shiller offers a new way to think about the economy and economic change. Using a rich array of historical examples and data, Shiller argues that studying popular stories that affect individual and collective economic behavior—what he calls 'narrative economics'—has the potential to vastly improve our ability to predict, prepare for, and lessen the damage of financial crises, recessions, depressions, and other major economic events. Spread through the public in the form of popular stories, ideas can go viral and move markets—whether it's the belief that tech stocks can only go up, that housing prices never fall, or that some firms are too big to fail. Whether true or false, stories like these—transmitted by word of mouth, by the news media, and increasingly by social media—drive the economy by driving our decisions about how and where to invest, how much to spend and save, and more. But despite the obvious importance of such stories, most economists have paid little attention to them. Narrative Economics sets out to change that by laying the foundation for a way of understanding how stories help propel economic events that have had led to war, mass unemployment, and increased inequality. The stories people tell—about economic confidence or panic, housing booms, the American dream, or Bitcoin—affect economic outcomes. Narrative Economics explains how we can begin to take these stories seriously. It may be Robert Shiller's most important book to date. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/391227]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Narrative Economics: How Stories Go Viral and Drive Major Economic Events Author: Robert J. Shiller Narrator: Susan Osman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 11 hours 7 minutes Release date: October 1, 2019 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 4.33 of Total 6 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An audiobook narrated by esteemed BBC television journalist and anchor Susan Orman, with an introduction read by the author himself—Nobel Prize-winning economist and bestselling writer Robert Shiller In a world in which internet troll farms attempt to influence foreign elections, can we afford to ignore the power of viral stories to affect economies? In this groundbreaking book, Nobel Prize–winning economist and New York Times bestselling author Robert Shiller offers a new way to think about the economy and economic change. Using a rich array of historical examples and data, Shiller argues that studying popular stories that affect individual and collective economic behavior—what he calls 'narrative economics'—has the potential to vastly improve our ability to predict, prepare for, and lessen the damage of financial crises, recessions, depressions, and other major economic events. Spread through the public in the form of popular stories, ideas can go viral and move markets—whether it's the belief that tech stocks can only go up, that housing prices never fall, or that some firms are too big to fail. Whether true or false, stories like these—transmitted by word of mouth, by the news media, and increasingly by social media—drive the economy by driving our decisions about how and where to invest, how much to spend and save, and more. But despite the obvious importance of such stories, most economists have paid little attention to them. Narrative Economics sets out to change that by laying the foundation for a way of understanding how stories help propel economic events that have had led to war, mass unemployment, and increased inequality. The stories people tell—about economic confidence or panic, housing booms, the American dream, or Bitcoin—affect economic outcomes. Narrative Economics explains how we can begin to take these stories seriously. It may be Robert Shiller's most important book to date. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390999 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390999]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: An Empire of Wealth: The Epic History of American Economic Power Author: John Steele Gordon Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 26 minutes Release date: July 30, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Throughout time, from ancient Rome to modern Britain, the great empires built and maintained their domination through force of arms and political power. But not the United States. America has dominated the world in a new, peaceful, and pervasive way—through the continued creation of staggering wealth. In this authoritative, engrossing history, John Steele Gordon captures as never before the true source of our nation's global influence: wealth and the capacity to create more of it. John Steele Gordon Tue, 30 Jul 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390999 thebookvoice.com 14:26:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390999]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: An Empire of Wealth: The Epic History of American Economic Power Author: John Steele Gordon Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 26 minutes Release date: July 30, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Throughout time, from ancient Rome to modern Britain, the great empires built and maintained their domination through force of arms and political power. But not the United States. America has dominated the world in a new, peaceful, and pervasive way—through the continued creation of staggering wealth. In this authoritative, engrossing history, John Steele Gordon captures as never before the true source of our nation's global influence: wealth and the capacity to create more of it. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390999]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: An Empire of Wealth: The Epic History of American Economic Power Author: John Steele Gordon Narrator: Bob Souer Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 14 hours 26 minutes Release date: July 30, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: Throughout time, from ancient Rome to modern Britain, the great empires built and maintained their domination through force of arms and political power. But not the United States. America has dominated the world in a new, peaceful, and pervasive way—through the continued creation of staggering wealth. In this authoritative, engrossing history, John Steele Gordon captures as never before the true source of our nation's global influence: wealth and the capacity to create more of it. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390678 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390678]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Arguing with Zombies: Economics, Politics, and the Fight for a Better Future Author: Paul Krugman Narrator: Rob Shapiro, Paul Krugman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 16 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.82 of Total 17 Ratings of Narrator: 4.33 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An accessible, compelling introduction to today’s major policy issues from the New York Times columnist, best-selling author, and Nobel prize–winning economist Paul Krugman. There is no better guide than Paul Krugman to basic economics, the ideas that animate much of our public policy. Likewise, there is no stronger foe of zombie economics, the misunderstandings that just won’t die. In Arguing with Zombies, Krugman tackles many of these misunderstandings, taking stock of where the United States has come from and where it’s headed in a series of concise, digestible chapters. Drawn mainly from his popular New York Times column, they cover a wide range of issues, organized thematically and framed in the context of a wider debate. Explaining the complexities of health care, housing bubbles, tax reform, Social Security, and so much more with unrivaled clarity and precision, Arguing with Zombies is Krugman at the height of his powers. Arguing with Zombies puts Krugman at the front of the debate in the 2020 election year and is an indispensable guide to two decades’ worth of political and economic discourse in the United States and around the globe. With quick, vivid sketches, Krugman turns his readers into intelligent consumers of the daily news and hands them the keys to unlock the concepts behind the greatest economic policy issues of our time. In doing so, he delivers an instant classic that can serve as a reference point for this and future generations. This audiobook includes a bonus PDF of diagrams from the book. Paul Krugman Tue, 28 Jan 2020 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390678 thebookvoice.com 12:16:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390678]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Arguing with Zombies: Economics, Politics, and the Fight for a Better Future Author: Paul Krugman Narrator: Rob Shapiro, Paul Krugman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 16 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.82 of Total 17 Ratings of Narrator: 4.33 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An accessible, compelling introduction to today’s major policy issues from the New York Times columnist, best-selling author, and Nobel prize–winning economist Paul Krugman. There is no better guide than Paul Krugman to basic economics, the ideas that animate much of our public policy. Likewise, there is no stronger foe of zombie economics, the misunderstandings that just won’t die. In Arguing with Zombies, Krugman tackles many of these misunderstandings, taking stock of where the United States has come from and where it’s headed in a series of concise, digestible chapters. Drawn mainly from his popular New York Times column, they cover a wide range of issues, organized thematically and framed in the context of a wider debate. Explaining the complexities of health care, housing bubbles, tax reform, Social Security, and so much more with unrivaled clarity and precision, Arguing with Zombies is Krugman at the height of his powers. Arguing with Zombies puts Krugman at the front of the debate in the 2020 election year and is an indispensable guide to two decades’ worth of political and economic discourse in the United States and around the globe. With quick, vivid sketches, Krugman turns his readers into intelligent consumers of the daily news and hands them the keys to unlock the concepts behind the greatest economic policy issues of our time. In doing so, he delivers an instant classic that can serve as a reference point for this and future generations. This audiobook includes a bonus PDF of diagrams from the book. Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390678]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: Arguing with Zombies: Economics, Politics, and the Fight for a Better Future Author: Paul Krugman Narrator: Rob Shapiro, Paul Krugman Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 12 hours 16 minutes Release date: January 28, 2020 Ratings: Ratings of Book: 3.82 of Total 17 Ratings of Narrator: 4.33 of Total 3 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: An accessible, compelling introduction to today’s major policy issues from the New York Times columnist, best-selling author, and Nobel prize–winning economist Paul Krugman. There is no better guide than Paul Krugman to basic economics, the ideas that animate much of our public policy. Likewise, there is no stronger foe of zombie economics, the misunderstandings that just won’t die. In Arguing with Zombies, Krugman tackles many of these misunderstandings, taking stock of where the United States has come from and where it’s headed in a series of concise, digestible chapters. Drawn mainly from his popular New York Times column, they cover a wide range of issues, organized thematically and framed in the context of a wider debate. Explaining the complexities of health care, housing bubbles, tax reform, Social Security, and so much more with unrivaled clarity and precision, Arguing with Zombies is Krugman at the height of his powers. Arguing with Zombies puts Krugman at the front of the debate in the 2020 election year and is an indispensable guide to two decades’ worth of political and economic discourse in the United States and around the globe. With quick, vivid sketches, Krugman turns his readers into intelligent consumers of the daily news and hands them the keys to unlock the concepts behind the greatest economic policy issues of our time. In doing so, he delivers an instant classic that can serve as a reference point for this and future generations. This audiobook includes a bonus PDF of diagrams from the book. https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390596 Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390596]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economists' Hour: False Prophets, Free Markets, and the Fracture of Society Author: Binyamin Appelbaum Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 20 minutes Release date: September 3, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this 'lively and entertaining' history of ideas (Liaquat Ahamed, The New Yorker), New York Times editorial writer Binyamin Appelbaum tells the story of the people who sparked four decades of economic revolution. Before the 1960s, American politicians had never paid much attention to economists. But as the post-World War II boom began to sputter, economists gained influence and power. In The Economists' Hour, Binyamin Appelbaum traces the rise of the economists, first in the United States and then around the globe, as their ideas reshaped the modern world, curbing government, unleashing corporations and hastening globalization. Some leading figures are relatively well-known, such as Milton Friedman, the elfin libertarian who had a greater influence on American life than any other economist of his generation, and Arthur Laffer, who sketched a curve on a cocktail napkin that helped to make tax cuts a staple of conservative economic policy. Others stayed out of the limelight, but left a lasting impact on modern life: Walter Oi, a blind economist who dictated to his wife and assistants some of the calculations that persuaded President Nixon to end military conscription; Alfred Kahn, who deregulated air travel and rejoiced in the crowded cabins on commercial flights as the proof of his success; and Thomas Schelling, who put a dollar value on human life. Their fundamental belief? That government should stop trying to manage the economy.Their guiding principle? That markets would deliver steady growth, and ensure that all Americans shared in the benefits. But the Economists' Hour failed to deliver on its promise of broad prosperity. And the single-minded embrace of markets has come at the expense of economic equality, the health of liberal democracy, and future generations. Timely, engaging and expertly researched, The Economists' Hour is a reckoning -- and a call for people to rewrite the rules of the market. A Wall Street Journal Business BestsellerWinner of the Porchlight Business Book Award in Narrative & Biography Binyamin Appelbaum Tue, 03 Sep 2019 02:11:41 GMT https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390596 thebookvoice.com 13:20:00 no Listen to full audiobooks for free on thebookvoice.com Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390596]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economists' Hour: False Prophets, Free Markets, and the Fracture of Society Author: Binyamin Appelbaum Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 20 minutes Release date: September 3, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this 'lively and entertaining' history of ideas (Liaquat Ahamed, The New Yorker), New York Times editorial writer Binyamin Appelbaum tells the story of the people who sparked four decades of economic revolution. Before the 1960s, American politicians had never paid much attention to economists. But as the post-World War II boom began to sputter, economists gained influence and power. In The Economists' Hour, Binyamin Appelbaum traces the rise of the economists, first in the United States and then around the globe, as their ideas reshaped the modern world, curbing government, unleashing corporations and hastening globalization. Some leading figures are relatively well-known, such as Milton Friedman, the elfin libertarian who had a greater influence on American life than any other economist of his generation, and Arthur Laffer, who sketched a curve on a cocktail napkin that helped to make tax cuts a staple of conservative economic policy. Others stayed out of the limelight, but left a lasting impact on modern life: Walter Oi, a blind economist who dictated to his wife and assistants some of the calculations that persuaded President Nixon to end military conscription; Alfred Kahn, who deregulated air travel and rejoiced in the crowded cabins on commercial flights as the proof of his success; and Thomas Schelling, who put a dollar value on human life. Their fundamental belief? That government should stop trying to manage the economy.Their guiding principle? That markets would deliver steady growth, and ensure that all Americans shared in the benefits. But the Economists' Hour failed to deliver on its promise of broad prosperity. And the single-minded embrace of markets has come at the expense of economic equality, the health of liberal democracy, and future generations. Timely, engaging and expertly researched, The Economists' Hour is a reckoning -- and a call for people to rewrite the rules of the market. A Wall Street Journal Business BestsellerWinner of the Porchlight Business Book Award in Narrative & Biography Please visit https://thebookvoice.com/podcasts/1/audiobook/390596]]> to listen full audiobooks. Title: The Economists' Hour: False Prophets, Free Markets, and the Fracture of Society Author: Binyamin Appelbaum Narrator: Dan Bittner Format: Unabridged Audiobook Length: 13 hours 20 minutes Release date: September 3, 2019 Genres: Economics Publisher's Summary: In this 'lively and entertaining' history of ideas (Liaquat Ahamed, The New Yorker), New York Times editorial writer Binyamin Appelbaum tells the story of the people who sparked four decades of economic revolution. Before the 1960s, American politicians had never paid much attention to economists. But as the post-World War II boom began to sputter, economists gained influence and power. In The Economists' Hour, Binyamin Appelbaum traces the rise of the economists, first in the United States and then around the globe, as their ideas reshaped the modern world, curbing government, unleashing corporations and hastening globalization. Some leading figures are relatively well-known, such as Milton Friedman, the elfin libertarian who had a greater influence on American life than any other economist of his generation, and Arthur Laffer, who sketched a curve on a cocktail napkin that helped to make tax cuts a staple of conservative economic policy. Others stayed out of the limelight, but left a lasting impact on modern life: Walter Oi, a blind economist who dictated to his wife and assistants some of the calculations that persuaded President Nixon to end military conscription; Alfred Kahn, who deregulated air travel and rejoiced in the crowded cabins on commercial flights as the proof of his success; and Thomas Schelling, who put a dollar value on human life. Their fundamental belief? That government should stop trying to manage the economy.Their guiding principle? That markets would deliver steady growth, and ensure that all Americans shared in the benefits. But the Economists' Hour failed to deliver on its promise of broad prosperity. And the single-minded embrace of markets has come at the expense of economic equality, the health of liberal democracy, and future generations. Timely, engaging and expertly researched, The Economists' Hour is a reckoning -- and a call for people to rewrite the rules of the market. A Wall Street Journal Business BestsellerWinner of the Porchlight Business Book Award in Narrative & Biography